Invitation for Bid IFB # 13-013B Pinellas Park Transit Center

Transcription

Invitation for Bid
IFB # 13-013B
Pinellas Park Transit Center
Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority
Purchasing Division
3201 Scherer Drive
St. Petersburg, FL 33716
Telephone (727) 540-1800
Facsimile (727) 540-0681
www.psta.net
Date Issued:
Monday, 6/17/2013
Date Due:
Tuesday, 7/16/2013
at 2:00 p.m. Local Time
IFB # 13-013B
LEGAL NOTICE
INVITATION FOR BID
BID # 13-013B
PINELLAS PARK TRANSIT CENTER
Sealed bids are hereby requested by the PINELLAS SUNCOAST TRANSIT AUTHORITY, 3201 Scherer Drive, St.
Petersburg, Florida 33716 to be received until 2:00 p.m., on Tuesday, July 16, 2013.
Requests for clarification and/or questions concerning the issued document shall be directed to John Samarkas,
Purchasing Buyer at (727) 540-1862 or Fax (727) 540-0681 and [email protected]. A Non-Mandatory Pre-Bid
Meeting will be held on Tuesday, June 25, 2013 at 10:00 a.m. located at the PSTA s Administrative Building, 3201
Scherer Drive, St. Petersburg, Florida, 33716. All submittal questions concerning this IFB are due on Tuesday, July
2, 2013 until 2:00 pm local time and must be in writing. Bid documents will be available on Monday, June
17, 2013. This will be the only notice rendered for this procurement. Bid Documents can be obtained at the PSTA
Administrative Building, above address, during the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday or
PSTA s web-site http://www.psta.net/procurement.php.
In accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, PSTA notifies all proposed vendors that it will
affirmatively ensure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, Disadvantaged Business
Enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit a bid in response to this request and will not be
discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration of an award.
PINELLAS SUNCOAST TRANSIT AUTHORITY
-ii-
IFB # 13-013B
SUBMIT BID
TO:
Purchasing Division
3201 Scherer Drive
INVITATION FOR BID
PSTA
BID TITLE: IFB 13-013B Pinellas Park Transit Center
Bid No: 13-013B
NON-MANDATORY PRE-BID MEETING: Tuesday, 6/25/2013.
www.psta.net
BID IS DUE: TUESDAY, 7/16/2013
AND MAY NOT BE WITHDRAWN FOR 90 DAYS AFTER SUCH DATE AND TIME.
ISSUE DATE: 6/17/2013
DEADLINE FOR WRITTEN QUESTIONS: 7/2/2013, 2 p.m. EST. MUST BE
SUBMITTED TO John Samarkas, Purchasing Buyer at [email protected].
PSTA s Mission
PSTA provides safe, affordable public transit to our community. We help guide land use decisions and support
economic vitality to enhance our quality of life.
Non-Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting: All interested Bidders should attend the pre-bid conference on-site inspection.
The meeting will begin at 10:00 a.m. 6/25/2013 in the Auditorium A245 located at the above address. Immediately
afterwards a site visitation will occur. Questions, suggestions or modifications may be discussed with Pinellas
Suncoast Transit Authority at this meeting.
Submittal Instructions: Place label from front page of this document on sealed envelope. Label should contain bid
number, bid title, opening date and time, and the name of the company submitting the bid.
Number of copies required: ONE (1) ORIGINAL AND FOUR (4) COPIES AND ONE (1) COMPACT DISC (CD)
SIGNED AND DATED, ORIGINAL MUST BE MARKED ORIGINAL .
Addenda: From time to time, addenda may be issued to the Invitation for Bid. Any such addenda will be posted on
Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority s (PSTA) web site, www.psta.net. Before submitting your bid you should check the
website to download any addenda that may have been issued. Please remember to sign and return addenda
acknowledgement form Attachment 1 with completed bid package.
-iii-
IFB # 13-013B
Contents
SECTION 1: BID SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 6
1.1 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) INFORMATION ................................................................................... 8
1.2 FORMS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8
SECTION 2: BID SELECTION ............................................................................................................................. 10
2.1 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................................................................... 10
SECTION 3: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ......................................................................................................... 11
3.1 PLANNED PROCUREMENT SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 PRE-BID MEETING ...................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.3 INTERPRETATION OF IFB DOCUMENTS ....................................................................................................................... 11
3.4 ADDENDUM TO IFB .................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.5 TYPE OF CONTRACT .................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.6 USE OF "PINELLAS SUNCOAST TRANSIT AUTHORITY" NAME IN CONTRACTOR ADVERTISING OR PUBLIC RELATIONS .. 11
3.7 RIGHTS OF PSTA IN INVITATION FOR BID PROCESS ..................................................................................................... 12
3.8 BID PROTEST PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................................................ 12
3.9 PRICES, TERMS AND PAYMENT .................................................................................................................................. 13
3.10 DURATION OF OFFER ............................................................................................................................................... 14
3.11 TAX EXEMPTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.12 LATE BIDS OR WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS ....................................................................................................................... 14
3.13 QUALIFICATIONS FOR AWARD ................................................................................................................................. 14
3.14 WITHHOLDING AWARD............................................................................................................................................ 14
3.15 BID ACCEPTANCE, REJECTION, AND POSTPONEMENT............................................................................................... 15
3.16 WORK COMPLETION SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................................... 15
3.17 DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION ............................................................................................................................... 15
3.18 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (DBE) PARTICIPATION ............................................................................ 16
3.19 LOBBYING ................................................................................................................................................................ 17
3.20 COLLUSION .............................................................................................................................................................. 17
3.21 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................................. 17
3.22 EXCEPTIONS ............................................................................................................................................................. 18
3.23 BONDING REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................................................... 18
3.24 PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES............................................................................................................................................. 19
3.25 OR EQUAL DETERMINATION ................................................................................................................................. 20
3.26 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS .............................................................................................................................. 20
3.27 AUDIT & INSPECTION OF RECORDS........................................................................................................................... 20
3.28 CONTRACT ............................................................................................................................................................... 20
SECTION 4: STATEMENT OF WORK ................................................................................................................. 21
-iv-
IFB # 13-013B
SECTION 5: CONTRACT................................................................................................................................. 363
ATTACHMENTS ............................................................................................................................................ 374
ATTACHMENT 1 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA .................................................................................................... 375
ATTACHMENT 2 CONTRACTOR S REFERENCES ............................................................................................................... 376
ATTACHMENT 3 BIDDER INFORMATION FORM .............................................................................................................. 378
ATTACHMENT 4 BID FORM ............................................................................................................................................ 379
ATTACHMENT 5 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ................................................................................................................ 380
ATTACHMENT 6 CERTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION AND OTHER RESPONSIBILITY
MATTERS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 381
ATTACHMENT 7 CERTIFICATION OF LOWER-TIER PARTICIPANTS (SUBCONTRACTORS) REGARDING DEBARMENT,
SUSPENSION, AND OTHER INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION ......................................................................... 382
ATTACHMENT 8 DBE PARTICIPATION FORM .................................................................................................................. 383
ATTACHMENT 9 DBE GOOD FAITH EFFORTS DOCUMENTATION FORM ........................................................................... 384
ATTACHMENT 10 VENDOR DBE PAYMENT REPORT ........................................................................................................ 385
ATTACHMENT 11 E-VERIFY AFFIDAVIT ........................................................................................................................... 386
ATTACHMENT 12 CONTRACTOR S STATEMENT ON SUB-CONTRACTORS ........................................................................ 387
ATTACHMENT 13 SUB-CONTRACTOR S REFERENCES ...................................................................................................... 388
ATTACHMENT 14 DRUG FREE WORKPLACE PROGRAM .................................................................................................. 390
ATTACHMENT 15 OFFER & AWARD ................................................................................................................................ 391
ATTACHMENT 16 REQUEST FOR WAIVER OF INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... 392
ATTACHMENT 17 STATEMENT OF NO BID ...................................................................................................................... 393
-v-
IFB # 13-013B
SECTION 1: BID SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
SEALED BIDS: All Bid sheets and the original forms must be executed and submitted in a sealed envelope. (DO
NOT INCLUDE MORE THAN ONE BID PER ENVELOPE). All bids are subject to the conditions specified herein.
Bids that do not comply with these conditions are subject to rejection.
GENERAL FORMAT: In preparing the bid, please duplex print all sections to reduce paper consumption and
use recycled products, where feasible. Bids shall be prepared on 8.5 x 11" paper with 1" margins on all sides.
Typing shall be single spaced and no smaller than font size 11. Use of 11 x 17" fold out sheets for large
tables, charts or diagrams is permissible, but should be limited. Each part of the bid should be clearly labeled
and tabbed for easy reference. Promotional or advertising information will not be accepted.
One (1) unbound original bid and four (4) copies and one (1) CD shall be enclosed and sealed in envelope(s)
marked: Pinellas Park Transit Center and the Bidder s official name. The original bid must be clearly marked
as Original . If a Bidder s submittal does not fit in one box, please mark the boxes accordingly (for example,
Box 1 of 2, Box 2 of 2).
The Bid shall be addressed to:
c/o John Samarkas, Purchasing Buyer
ATTN: BID #13-013B
3201 Scherer Drive
St. Petersburg, Florida 33716
727-540-1800
A) PREPARATION OF BIDS: Bids must be received by Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority PSTA before the
specified time and date and will be prepared in accordance with the following:










Our enclosed Bid Form is to be used in submitting your bid.
All information required by the Bid Form shall be furnished. The bidder shall print or type his/her
name and manually sign the schedule and each continuation sheet on which an entry is made.
Unit prices shall be shown and where there is an error in extension of price, the unit price shall
govern.
Alternate bids will not be considered unless authorized by the Invitation for Bid.
Proposed delivery time must be shown and shall include Sundays and holidays.
PSTA does not pay Federal, Sales or State Tax. See Tax exemption number above. A Tax Exempt
Certificate is available upon request.
Bidders shall thoroughly examine the drawings, specifications, schedule, instructions and all other
contract documents.
Bidders shall make all investigations necessary to thoroughly inform themselves regarding plant
and facilities for delivery of material and equipment as required by the bid conditions. No plea of
ignorance by the bidder of conditions that exist or that may hereafter exist as a result of failure or
omission on the part of the bidder to make the necessary examinations and investigations, or
failure to fulfill in every detail the requirements of the contract documents, will be accepted as a
basis for varying the requirements of PSTA or the compensation to the vendor.
Bidders are advised that all PSTA Agreement/Purchase Orders are subject to all legal requirements
provided for in the PSTA Purchasing Policy and State and Federal Statutes.
If no request for clarification is submitted by bidder, all conditions and requirements contained
within are accepted and understood by bidder.
-6-
IFB # 13-013B
B) DESCRIPTION OF SUPPLIES:




Any manufacturer s names, trade names, brand name, or catalog numbers used in specifications
are for the purpose of describing and establishing general quality levels. SUCH REFERENCES ARE
NOT INTENDED TO BE RESTRICTIVE. Bids will be considered for any brand which meets the quality
of the specifications listed for any items.
Bidders are required to state exactly what they intend to furnish; otherwise, they shall be required
to furnish the items as specified.
Bidders will submit, with their Bid Form, data necessary to evaluate and determine the quality of
the Item(s) they are bidding.
Quantities are only estimates. PSTA has the right to change or modify the number required. PSTA
has the right to award any quantities.
C) SUBMISSION OF BIDS:



Bids and modifications thereto shall be enclosed in sealed envelopes and addressed to the
Purchasing Division, PSTA the name and address of the bidder, the date and hour of the bid
opening, bid number, bid title, and the material or service to which the bid applies shall be placed
on the outside of the envelope.
Bids must be submitted on the forms furnished. Electronic/facsimile bids will not be considered.
Bids, however, may be modified by telegraphic notice provided such notice is received prior to the
time and date set for the bid opening.
PSTA is not responsible for the United States mail or private couriers or messengers in regard to
bids being delivered by the specified time so that they can be considered.
D) DISCUSSIONS: Any and all discussions concerning this IFB with any PSTA employee other than
indicated above may be cause for disqualification. Oral discussions may not be relied upon by the
Contractor as changes to the IFB.
E) REJECTION OF BIDS:




PSTA may reject a bid if:
o The bidder misstates or conceals any material fact in the bid; or if,
o The bid does not strictly conform to the law or requirements of the bid; or if,
o The bid is conditional, except that the bidder may qualify his/her bid for acceptance by
PSTA on an all or none basis, or a low item basis. An all or none basis bid must
include all items upon which bids are invited.
PSTA may, however, reject all bids, with or without cause, whenever it is deemed in the best
interest of PSTA to do so, and may reject any part of a bid unless the bid has been qualified as
provided. PSTA may also waive any minor informalities or irregularities in any bid. PSTA, in its sole
discretion, will determine whether or not a bidder is a responsible bidder. In the event PSTA
rejects all bids and concurrently provides notice of its intent to reissue, all bids will be exempt from
public record production until PSTA issues a notice of intended decision on the reissued invitation
for bids.
Any and all discussions concerning this bid with any PSTA employee or Board of Directors Member
other than the contact mentioned herein will result in bid rejection.
In the event of default by the successful bidder, PSTA reserves the right to go to the next low
bidder as the new awardee. The next low bidder shall provide the bid items at the prices as
contained on their bid form.
-7-
IFB # 13-013B
G) WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS:


Bids may not be withdrawn after the time set for the bid opening for a period of time as specified.
Bids may be withdrawn prior to the time set for the bid opening. Such request must be in writing
and be signed by the individual submitting the bid.
H) LATE BIDS OR MODIFICATIONS:


Bids and modifications received after the time set for the bid opening will not be considered.
Modifications in writing received prior to the time set for the bid opening will be accepted.
I) DISCOUNTS:


Bidders may offer a cash discount for prompt payment; however, such discounts shall NOT be
considered in determining the lowest net cost for bid evaluation purposes. Bidders are encouraged
to reflect cash discounts in the unit prices quoted.
In connection with any discount offered, time will be computed from the date of receipt of
supplies or services or from the date a correct invoice is received, whichever is the later date.
Payment is deemed to be made on the date of mailing of the check.
1.1 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) INFORMATION
PSTA has established a DBE Participation Policy Statement for this project. Specific information regarding the
policy and goals is provided in Section 3. At a minimum, DBE information shall include:



A description of any DBE firm(s) and the work it (they) will perform.
Evidence of the firm s DBE certification.
Estimated value of services to be performed and/or materials to be provided by DBE firm(s) under the
proposal.
1.2 FORMS
Compliance with these requirements is mandatory for contract award. All attachments must be completed,
signed, and submitted with the Bid.














ATTACHMENT 1 Acknowledgement of Addenda
ATTACHMENT 2 Contractor s References
ATTACHMENT 3 Bidder Information Form
ATTACHMENT 4 Bid Form
ATTACHMENT 5 Non-Collusion Affidavit
ATTACHMENT 6 Certification of Contractor Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other
Responsibility Matters
ATTACHMENT 7 Certification of Lower-Tier Participants (Subcontractors) Regarding Debarment,
Suspension, and Other Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion
ATTACHMENT 8 DBE Participation Form
ATTACHMENT 9 DBE Good Faith Efforts Documentation Form
ATTACHMENT 10 Vendor DBE Payment Report
ATTACHMENT 11 E-verify Affidavit
ATTACHMENT 12 Contractor s Statement on Sub-Contractors
ATTACHMENT 13 Sub-Contractor s References
ATTACHMENT 14 Drug Free Workplace Program
-8-
IFB # 13-013B




ATTACHMENT 15 Offer and Award
ATTACHMENT 16 Request for Waiver of Insurance Requirements
ATTACHMENT 17 Statement of No Bid
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Enclose Certificate of Insurance as specified in Section 5.
-9-
IFB # 13-013B
SECTION 2: BID SELECTION
PSTA reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and may select, and negotiate with one or more
Bidders concurrently should they both be deemed equal, and enter into a Contract with such Bidder who is
determined, by the PSTA, to provide the services which are in the best interest of PSTA. PSTA may agree to
such terms and conditions as it may determine to be in its interest.
Bids will be opened immediately after the bid submittal date and time by Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority,
Purchasing Division, 3201 Scherer Drive, St. Petersburg, FL 33716. The public may attend the bid opening, but
may not immediately review any bids submitted until PSTA provides a notice of intended decision or 30 days
after the opening of the bids, whichever occurs first. The names of respondents and their bid amounts will be
read aloud at the time of opening.
No PSTA employee, officer, or agent, including any member of an evaluation committee for a PSTA project,
may participate in the selection, award, or administration of a PSTA contract if a real or apparent conflict of
interest would exist. Such a conflict would exist when any of the following parties has a material financial or
other interest in a firm selected for award: any employee, officer, or agent of PSTA; any member of his/her
immediate family; his/her partner; or an organization employing or about to employ any of the preceding. Any
interest as owner or stockholder of one percent (1%) or less in such a firm shall not be deemed to be a
material financial interest, but serving as Director, officer, consultant, or employee of such an organization
would be deemed a material interest.
2.1 AWARD OF CONTRACT:
A. The contract will be awarded to the bidder whose bid, conforming to the IFB, is most advantageous to
PSTA, price and other factors considered. PSTA shall have the sole discretion to determine which
bidders are responsive and which bidder shall be awarded the contract. Nothing contained in the bid
documents is intended or does create an entitlement or property interest in the award of contract to
the low bidder. The low bidder is not entitled to the award of the contract.
B. PSTA reserves the right to accept and award item by item, and/or by group, or in the aggregate, unless
the bidder qualifies his bid by specified limitations.
C. In the event two (2) or more vendors have submitted the responsible and responsive bids with an
equal price, award preference will first be given to bidders submitting a certification (attached) with
their bid certifying they have implemented a Drug-Free Workplace Program (Section 284.087, Florida
Statutes); second to the bidder that is a DBE; third, the bidder who has the highest percentage of DBE
participation. Otherwise, the bids shall be awarded by the Chief Executive Officer, if within his
purchasing authority, or by Board of Directors.
D. PSTA reserves the right to utilize any applicable state or county contracts in lieu of or in addition to this
bid.
E. A written award of acceptance (Purchase Order), will be mailed, faxed, e-mailed or otherwise
furnished to the successful bidder by PSTA. At which time PSTA and the successful bidder must execute
the agreement in the form set forth in Section 5.
-10-
IFB # 13-013B
SECTION 3: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3.1 PLANNED PROCUREMENT SCHEDULE
The following procurement schedule is planned for the IFB #13-013B Pinellas Park Transit Center:

Invitation for Bid Release:
6/17/2013

Pre-bid Meeting:
6/25/2013

Questions Due:
7/2/2013

Responses to Questions Issued:
7/9/2013

Bids Due:
7/16/2013

Board Approval Decision (Award): 7/24/2013
3.2 PRE-BID MEETING
PSTA will conduct a pre-bid meeting on Tuesday, June 25, 2013 at 10:00 a.m. (Local Time). Each and every
potential Bidder is invited to participate in the pre-bid meeting. PSTA reserves the right to postpone answers
to any questions raised at this meeting until a later date. Any oral explanations provided by PSTA during this
meeting will not be binding upon PSTA until they are reduced to a written form by PSTA and given to all
interested Bidders. Bidders seeking a written response by PSTA to their questions at the pre-bid meeting are
requested to submit their questions in writing to PSTA in advance. PSTA will make every effort available to
respond these questions at the meeting. Attendance at this meeting is not mandatory, but is encouraged by
PSTA.
3.3 INTERPRETATION OF IFB DOCUMENTS
No oral interpretations will be made to any firms as to the meaning of specifications or any other contracts
documents. All questions pertaining to the terms and conditions or scope of work of this IFB must be sent in
writing (mail, e-mail, or fax) to the PSTA Purchasing Manager and received by the date specified. Responses to
questions may be handled as an addendum if the response would provide clarification to requirements of the
bid. All such addenda shall become part of the contract documents. PSTA will not be responsible for any other
explanation or interpretation of the proposed bid made or given prior to the award of the contract. The PSTA
Purchasing Manager will be unable to respond to questions received after the specified time frame. If no
request for clarification is submitted by the Bidder all conditions and requirements contained within are
accepted and understood by the Bidder.
3.4 ADDENDUM TO IFB
If it becomes necessary to revise this IFB, an addendum will be provided to all participants having signed in at
the pre-bid meeting or those having expressed an interest in providing a bid.
3.5 TYPE OF CONTRACT
PSTA intends to award a firm, fixed price contract. The services of the Bidder will be based on the Statement of
Work outlined in Section 4 of this IFB.
3.6 USE OF "PINELLAS SUNCOAST TRANSIT AUTHORITY" NAME IN CONTRACTOR ADVERTISING OR PUBLIC
RELATIONS
PSTA reserves the right to review and approve any advertising copy related to this Project in any way prior to
publication. The successful Bidder will not allow such copy to be published in their advertisements or public
relations programs until submitting such copy and receiving prior written approval from PSTA. The successful
Bidder agrees that published information relating to this Project will be factual and in no way imply that PSTA
-11-
IFB # 13-013B
endorses the successful Bidders firm, service or product. In submitting a bid, the Bidder agrees not to use the
results there from as a part of any commercial advertising.
3.7 RIGHTS OF PSTA IN INVITATION FOR BID PROCESS
PSTA may investigate the qualifications of any Bidder under consideration. PSTA may require confirmation of
information furnished by a Bidder, and require additional evidence of qualifications to perform the Services
described in this IFB. In addition to any rights conveyed by Florida law, PSTA specifically reserves the right to:

Disqualify any Bidder in accordance with Instruction to Bidders

Reject any or all of the Bids, at its discretion

Remedy errors in the IFB

Cancel the entire IFB

Issue subsequent IFB

Rank firms and negotiate with the highest ranking firm

PSTA reserves the right to select the bid that it believes will serve the best interest of PSTA

Appoint evaluation committees to review Bids

Seek the assistance of outside technical experts to review Bids

Approve or disapprove the use of particular Subcontractors and Suppliers

Establish a short list of Bidders eligible for discussions after review of written Bids

Solicit best and final offers (BAFO) from all or some of the Bidders

Determine whether or not a Bidder is a responsible Bidder

Reject any part of a bid unless the bid has been qualified as provided

Negotiate with any, all or none of the Bidders

Award a contract to one Bidder

Accept other than the lowest priced Bid

Request any necessary clarifications or bid data without changing the terms

Disqualify the Bid(s) upon evidence of collusion with intent to defraud or other illegal practices on the
part of the Bidder(s)

Waive any informalities or irregularities in any Bid, to the extent permitted by law

Make selection of the Bidder to perform the services required on the basis of the original bids without
negotiation
This IFB does not bind or commit PSTA to enter into a Contract with any of the Bidders. In the event PSTA
rejects all bids and concurrently provides notice of its intent to reissue, all bids will be exempt from public
record production until PSTA issues a notice of intended decision on the reissued invitation for bids.
3.8 BID PROTEST PROCEDURES
A) Right to Protest: Any interested party, who wishes to protest a PSTA decision or intended decision
concerning a bid or a contract award, shall file a written Notice of Protest with the Chief Executive
-12-
IFB # 13-013B
Officer of PSTA within seventy-two hours after the posting of the bid tabulation or after the issuance of
the notice of PSTA s decision or intended decision and shall file a formal written protest within ten
days after the date of the Notice of Protest. The formal written protest shall state with particularity the
basis of the protest, including the facts and law upon which the protest is based, and providing any
supporting documentation. Failure to file a Notice of Protest of failure to file a formal written protest
within the time periods set forth above shall constitute a waiver of protest.
B) Providing a Bond: Any firm or person who files a protest shall file with PSTA, at the time of filing the
formal written protest, a bond payable to PSTA in an amount equal to one percent of the estimate of
the total value of the contract or $5,000, whichever is less. Such bond shall be conditioned upon
payment of all costs which may be adjusted against the protestor upon the conclusion of the protest
proceedings. If the protest determination is not in favor of the protester, PSTA shall recover all costs,
damages and charges incurred by it during the protest, excluding attorneys fees. Upon payment of
such costs and charges by the person or firm protesting the decision or intended decision, the bond
shall be returned.
C) Consideration of Protest: PSTA s Chief Executive Officer will consider all protests of a PSTA decision or
intended decision concerning a bid solicitation or a contract award where the protestor has complied
with the requirements of subsections A and B of this Article. The Chief Executive Officer shall not
consider any protest presented orally or not presented within the time limits set forth in subsection A.
The Chief Executive Officer shall provide the protestor and all other bidders with a written
determination of the protest within fifteen (15) days of receiving the formal written protest. The Chief
Executive Officer s decision is final. The Chief Executive Officer may provide an opportunity to resolve
the protest by mutual agreement between the parties within seven days, excluding Saturdays, Sundays
and legal holidays, of PSTA s receipt of the formal written protest.
D) Stay of Procurement during Protests: There shall be no stay of the bid process or the procurement
during protests.
E) Notice to Bidders: Bid tabulations with recommendations will be posted on a bulletin board
maintained at PSTA s principal place of business for purposes of posting bid tabulations. Upon receipt
of a formal written protest, PSTA will give notice of the protest to all bidders or if the bid already was
awarded at the time the protest was filed with PSTA, only to the successful bidder. When a protest
results in a delay of an award of the contract pending the disposition of the protest, the bidder or
bidders whose bids might become eligible for award will be requested, before expiration of the time
for acceptance of their bids (with consent of sureties, if any) to extend the time for acceptance so as to
avoid the need for re-advertisement and re-bidding.
3.9 PRICES, TERMS AND PAYMENT
Firm prices shall be proposed and must include all ancillary costs as well as the following:
A) Taxes: PSTA does not pay federal excise and sales taxes or state excise and use taxes on direct
purchases.
B) Discounts: Cash discounts for prompt payment shall not be considered in determining the lowest net
cost for bid evaluation purposes.
C) Mistakes: Bidders are expected to examine the conditions, scope of work, bid prices, extensions,
specifications and all instructions pertaining to the invitation for bid. Failure to do so will be at the
Bidders risk.
D) Invoicing and Payment: Charges rendered by Bidder to PSTA shall be due and payable on terms set
forth in the Florida Prompt Payment Act after proper and complete billing is received by PSTA.
-13-
IFB # 13-013B
3.10 DURATION OF OFFER
All bids shall remain in effect for a minimum of one-hundred eighty (180) days from the bid opening date or
scheduled date for receipt of bids. Offers that allow less than one-hundred eighty (180) days for acceptance by
PSTA will be considered non-responsive and will be rejected.
3.11 TAX EXEMPTION
PSTA is exempt from payment of all Federal, State, and local taxes in connection with this Project. Said taxes
shall not be included in the bid or bid prices. PSTA will provide necessary tax exemption certificates. PSTA s
Tax Identification number is: #85-8012617996C-4. This provision does not relieve the Bidder from the
responsibility to pay all applicable taxes for goods, services, and labor acquired in the performance of this
Project.
3.12 LATE BIDS OR WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
A) Any bid received at the PSTA offices designated in the solicitation after the time specified for receipt of
bids will not be considered and will be returned to the Bidder unopened.
B) A bid may be withdrawn in person by the Bidder or their authorized representative, provided their
identity is made known and a receipt is signed for the bid, and only if the withdrawal is made prior to
the time specified for receipt of bids.
3.13 QUALIFICATIONS FOR AWARD
Award of this contract shall be made to the bid which is responsive in all respects to these procurement
requirements, and where the Bidder is determined to be a responsible Bidder, a determination that shall be
made solely at the discretion of PSTA. The Bidder affirms and declares:
A) The Bidder has the capacity to do business within the State of Florida.
B) The Bidder has the capability to assure completion of the required services within the time specified
under this contract.
C) The Bidder presently has the necessary facilities, financial resources and licenses to complete the
contract in a satisfactory manner and within the required time.
D) The Bidder is of lawful age and that no other person, firm or corporation has any interest in this bid or
the contract proposed to be entered into.
E) The Bidder is not in arrears to the Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority upon debt or contract and is not
defaulting as surety or otherwise, upon any obligation to the Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority.
F) No member, officer, or employee of PSTA during his tenure or for two years thereafter shall have any
interest, direct or indirect, in this contract or the proceeds thereof.
G) To be qualified by PSTA, the Bidder must have all State and Local licenses as legally required that are
necessary to perform and complete the work as called for herein.
H) The Bidder is not on the Comptroller General s list of ineligible consultants.
3.14 WITHHOLDING AWARD
This solicitation for bids does not bind or commit PSTA to award a contract, pay any costs incurred in
preparation of bid or bids in response to this solicitation, or to procure or contract for goods or services.
Bidder shall be responsible for all costs incurred as part of their participation in the pre-award process.
-14-
IFB # 13-013B
3.15 BID ACCEPTANCE, REJECTION, AND POSTPONEMENT
PSTA reserves the right to postpone, accept, or reject any and all bids in whole or in part, on such basis as PSTA
deems to be in its best interest to do so.
Consultants, Subcontractors or Suppliers which do not comply with all requirements associated with the PreQualification Application process may be found non-responsive to these IFB Documents.
Any person, firm, corporation, joint venture/partnership, or other interested party that has been compensated
by PSTA or a consultant engaged by PSTA for assistance in preparing the IFB Documents and/or estimate shall
be considered to have gained an unfair competitive advantage in proposing and shall be precluded from
submitting a Bid in response to the IFB.
Any person, firm, corporation, joint venture/partnership, or other interested party that has continued
discussions regarding this IFB with PSTA or consultant staff other than the Contract Administrator (with the
exception of the Contract Compliance Office regarding DBE informational requests or informational requests
on the Lobbying Program) after the IFB is issued may be considered to have gained an unfair competitive
advantage in proposing and may be precluded from submitting a Bid in response to the IFB.
3.16 WORK COMPLETION SCHEDULE
3.16.1 Project Schedule
PSTA anticipates that the project should be completed within 180 Days after Notice to Proceed.
The Contractor shall submit a Project Schedule for PSTA approval within 30 days of Notice to Proceed. The
Project Schedule shall be updated and submitted to PSTA monthly thereafter until the project is complete.
Sufficient information shall be shown on the Project Schedule to enable proper control and monitoring of the
Contractor s work. The Project Schedule shall show the intended time for starting and completing each
activity; the duration of each activity; submittal and approval times, and other significant items related to the
progress of the work. The Project Schedule shall include sufficient detail to show how Milestones are intended
to be met. If a monthly schedule submitted by the Contractor includes changes affecting the achievement of
Milestones based on circumstances the Contractor believes to be a PSTA-Caused Delay, the Contractor should
clearly identify and justify those changes.
3.16.2 Order of Work
If Section 4 provides a sequence or order of the work to be completed, the Bidder shall follow the sequence of
operations set forth therein. Full compensation for conforming to such requirements will be considered as
included in the prices paid for the various items of the work and no additional compensation will be allowed
therefore.
3.17 DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION
Bidders shall complete and submit as part of their bid, the Certification of Primary Contractor Regarding
Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters for all projects when the total aggregate value of
the contract exceeds $100,000. The Bidder shall also submit a list of subcontracts and subcontractors that will
have a financial interest in this Project that exceeds $25,000 or will have a critical influence on or a substantive
control over the Project. A Certification of Lower-Tier Participants Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and
Other Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusions shall be submitted by the Bidder to PSTA for each listed
subcontractor prior to contract award.
-15-
IFB # 13-013B
During the term of the Contract the successful Bidder will be required to immediately notify PSTA of 1) any
potential subcontractor that is subject to this provision and to submit the appropriate certification prior to
award of a subcontract; 2) any information that its certification or certification of its subcontractors was
erroneous when submitted; and 3) any information that certifications have become erroneous by reason of
changed circumstances.
3.18 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (DBE) PARTICIPATION
In connection with the performance of this Contract, the successful Bidder agrees to cooperate with PSTA in
meeting its commitments and goals with regard to maximum utilization of DBE.
Requirements and goals for DBE participation in this Project are as follows:
While there is no minimum percentage goal established, firms are encouraged to utilize certified DBEs and
compliance with the goal may be fulfilled by DBE's performing as either:
A) A member of a joint venture as a prime consultant;
B) An approved subcontractor;
C) An owner-operator of equipment;
D) A renter of equipment to a prime consultant;
E) A firm manufacturing and supplying goods used in the project;
F) A firm supplying goods used in the project (when supplying goods, only 60 percent will be counted).
If no DBE utilization is proposed, the Bidder must demonstrate that sufficient good faith efforts were made to
meet the DBE contract goals and shall document the steps he has taken to obtain DBE participation.
Bidder s good faith efforts will include the following actions.
A) Soliciting through all reasonable and available means the interest of all certified DBE s who have the
capability to perform work under the contract. This shall include attendance at pre-bid meetings,
advertising and/or written notices. The Bidder shall allow sufficient time to allow the DBE s to respond
to the solicitation.
B) Selecting portions of the work to be performed by DBE s.
C) Providing interested DBE s with adequate information about the plans, specifications, and
requirements of the contract in a timely manner to assist them in responding to a solicitation.
D) Negotiations in good faith with interested DBE s. It will be the responsibility of the Bidder to make a
portion of the work available to DBE subcontractors and suppliers and to select those portions of the
work or materials consistent with the available DBE s. Evidence of negotiations shall include the
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of DBE s that were considered and a description of the
information provided regarding the plans and specifications for the work selected for subcontractors,
and evidence as to why additional agreements could not be reached for DBE s to perform the work.
E) Not rejecting DBE s as being unqualified without sound reasons based on a thorough investigation of
their capabilities.
F) Efforts to assist interested DBE s in obtaining bonding, lines of credit, or insurance as required.
G) Efforts to assist interested DBE s in obtaining necessary equipment, supplies, materials, or related
assistance or services.
-16-
IFB # 13-013B
H) Use of services of available minority/women community organizations; minority/women contractors
groups; local, state, and federal minority/women business assistance offices; and other organizations
that provide assistance in the recruitment and placement of DBE s.
The Bidder agrees not to terminate for convenience a DBE subcontractor, and then perform the work of the
terminated subcontract with its own forces or those of an affiliate, without PSTA s prior written consent.
When a DBE subcontractor is terminated, or fails to complete its work on the contract for any reason, the
Bidder agrees to find another DBE subcontractor to substitute for the original DBE. These good faith efforts
shall be directed at finding another DBE to perform at least the same amount of work under the contract as
the DBE that was terminated.
3.19 LOBBYING
Lobbying of any PSTA board member, officer, evaluation/selection committee member, employee, agent or
attorney by a bidder, any member of the bidder s staff, any agent or representative of the bidder, whether
compensated or not, or any person employed by any legal entity affiliated with or representing the bidder
shall be prohibited on all competitive selection processes and contract awards, including but not limited to
requests for bids, requests for quotations, requests for qualification, invitation for bids, bids or the award of
purchasing contracts of any type. Lobbying is strictly prohibited from the date of the advertisement or on a
date otherwise established by the Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority Board of Directors, until either an award
is final, any protest is finally resolved, or the competitive selection process is otherwise concluded.
The purposes of this prohibition is to protect the integrity of the procurement process by shielding it from
undue influences prior to the contract award, a protest is resolved, or the competitive selection process is
otherwise concluded. Nothing herein shall prohibit a bidder from contacting the purchasing division or PSTA s
general counsel to address situations such as clarification and/or questions related to the procurement process
or protest.
For the purposes of this Paragraph, lobbying shall mean influencing or attempting to influence action or nonaction, and/or attempting to obtain the goodwill of persons specified herein relating to the selection, ranking,
or contract award in connection with the bidding process through direct or indirect oral or written
communication. Lobbying includes such actions whether performed by the bidder itself, any employee of the
bidder, the bidder s attorney, agent or other paid or non-paid representative, or any person who performs
such actions of behalf or at the behest of the bidder. Further, lobbying includes the attempt to influence Board
members while they are performing their functions for other governmental entities (e.g.) a city or Pinellas
County). The final award of the contract shall be the effective date of the contract.
Any board member, officer, evaluation/selection committee member, employee, agent or attorney who has
been lobbied shall immediately report the lobbying activity to the Chief Executive Officer.
3.20 COLLUSION
Each Bidder must submit the Non-Collusion Affidavit form. Bidder certifies that its bid is made without
previous understanding, agreement, or connections with any person, firm, or corporation making a bid for the
same items and is in all respects fair, without outside control, collusion, fraud, or otherwise illegal action.
3.21 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
Federal, state, county and local laws and ordinances, rules and regulations shall govern submittal and
evaluation of bids received and shall govern claims and disputes between Bidder(s) and PSTA by and through
its officers, employees, authorized representatives, or any person, natural or otherwise. Lack of knowledge by
Bidder is not a cognizable defense against legal effects.
-17-
IFB # 13-013B
3.22 EXCEPTIONS
Bidder is advised that if it wishes to take exception to any of the terms contained in this IFB, it must identify
the term and the exception in its response to the procurement. Failure to do so may lead PSTA to declare any
such term non-negotiable. Bidder s desire to take exception to a non-negotiable term will not disqualify it from
consideration for award.
3.23 BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A) Bond Requirements
Bid Security
A bid bond must be issued by a fully qualified surety company acceptable to PSTA. In submitting this
Bid, it is understood and agreed by Bidder that the right is reserved by PSTA to reject any and all bids,
or part of any, and it is agreed that the Bid may not be withdrawn for a period of [one hundred eighty
(180)] days subsequent to the opening of bids, without the written consent of the PSTA. It is also
understood and agreed that if the undersigned bidder should withdraw any part or all of his bid with
[one hundred eighty (180)] days after the bid opening without the written consent of PSTA, shall
refuse or be unable to enter into this Contract, as provided above, or refuse or be unable to furnish
adequate and acceptable Performance Bonds and Labor and Material Payments Bonds, as provided
above, or refuse or be unable to furnish adequate and acceptable insurance, as provided above, he
shall enter into an agreement, or provide adequate security therefore.
It is further understood and agreed that if the bid bond, Certified Check, Cashier s Check, Treasurer s
Check and/or Official Bank Check (excluding any income generated thereby which has been retained
by the PSTA as provided in [Item x Bid Security of the Instructions to Bidders]) shall prove inadequate
to fully recompense PSTA for the damages occasioned by default, then the undersigned bidder agrees
to indemnify PSTA and pay over to PSTA the difference between the bid security and PSTA s total
damages, so as to make PSTA whole.
The undersigned understands that any material alteration of any of the above or any of the material
contained on this form, other than that requested will render the bid unresponsive.
B) Performance and Payment Bonding Requirements
The Contractor shall be required to obtain performance and payment bonds as follows:
Performance bonds: The penal amount of performance bonds shall be 100 percent of the original
contract price, unless the PSTA determines that a lesser amount would be adequate for the protection
of PSTA.
PSTA may require additional performance bond protection when a contract price is increased. The
increase in protection shall generally equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price. PSTA may
secure additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount of the existing
bond or to obtain an additional bond.
Payment bonds:
1) The Penal amount of the payment bonds shall equal:
a) Fifty percent of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million.
b) Forty percent of the contract price if the contract price is more than $1 million but not more
than $5 million; or
-18-
IFB # 13-013B
c) Two and one half million dollars if the contract price is more that $5 million.
2) If the original contract price is $5 million or less, PSTA may require additional
required by subparagraph 1 if the contract is increased.
protection as
C) Advanced Payment Bonding Requirements
The Contractor may be required to obtain an advance payment bond if the contract
contains an
advance payment provision and a performance bond is not furnished. PSTA shall determine the
amount of the advance payment bond necessary to protect the PSTA.
1) Patent Infringement Bonding Requirements (Patent Indemnity):
The Contractor may be required to obtain a patent indemnity bond if a performance bond is not
furnished and the financial responsibility of the Contractor is unknown or doubtful. PSTA shall
determine the amount of the patent indemnity to protect PSTA.
2) Warranty of the Work and Maintenance Bonds:
a)
The Contractor warrants to PSTA, the Architect and/or Engineer that all materials and
equipment furnished under this Contract will be of highest quality and new unless otherwise
specified by PSTA, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract
Documents. All work not so conforming to these standards shall be considered defective. If
required by the [Project Manager], the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the
kind and quality of materials and equipment.
b) The work furnished must of first quality and the workmanship must be the best obtainable in
the various trades. The Work must be of safe, substantial and durable construction in all
respects. The Contractor hereby guarantees the Work against defective materials or faulty
workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year after Final Payment by PSTA and shall
replace or repair any defective materials or equipment or faulty workmanship during the
period of the guarantee at no cost to PSTA. As additional security for these guarantees, the
Contractor shall, prior to the release of Final Payment [as provided in Item X below], furnish
separate Maintenance (or Guarantee) Bonds in form acceptable to PSTA written by the same
corporate surety that provides the Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond
for this Contract. These bonds shall secure the Contractor s obligation to replace or repair
defective materials and faulty workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year after Final
Payment and shall be written in an amount equal to ONE HUNDRED PERCENT (100%) of the
CONTRACT SUM, as adjusted (if at all).
3.24 PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES
A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for public entity
crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a
bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not
submit bids of a public building or public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to public entity,
may not be awarded or perform work as a Contractor, Supplier, Subcontractor, or Consultant under a contract
with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount
provided in Section 287.133, Florida Statutes, for Category two for a period of thirty-six (36) months from the
date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. PSTA may make inquiries regarding alleged convictions of
public entity crimes. The unreasonable failure of a Bidder to promptly supply information in connection with
an inquiry may be grounds for rejection of a bid. Additionally, a conviction of a public entity crime may cause
the rejection of a bid.
-19-
IFB # 13-013B
3.25 OR EQUAL DETERMINATION
Where proposing other than specified, the determination of equivalency will be at the sole discretion of PSTA.
Bidder shall, as to each item, propose upon the specified products or upon an alternate product which is
equal as defined herein. The offer of an alternate product for any item shall, for the purpose of evaluation of
bids, be construed as a refusal to propose upon the product specified. Only one alternate product for each
item shall be submitted. In the event an alternate product is submitted for any item, the Bidder shall cross out
the product specified and type or print the work ALTERNATE (failure to do so shall be construed as a bid
upon the product specified) and insert the unit price and the extension or total (unit price multiplied by the
number of units) in the columns provided therefore in the same manner as if proposing upon the specified
product. In the event any alternate product is submitted the Bidder shall state on additional attached sheets,
the precise specifications of the alternate and all of the differences in specifications between the specified
product and the alternate products and sketches or blueprints to scale sufficiently accurate, complete, and
detailed as to enable PSTA to make a complete determination of the quality of the alternate. Failure to submit
this information in full will constitute basis for determination by PSTA that the alternate submitted is not equal
to the product specified as a standard.
3.26 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS
In complying with Florida s Right to Know Law, PSTA requires the Bidder submit Material Safety Data Sheets
on any hazardous chemical or substances supplied. Failure to supply MSDS s sheets may result in bid
disqualification.
3.27 AUDIT & INSPECTION OF RECORDS
The Contractor shall permit the authorized representatives of PSTA, the State of Florida, the U.S. Department
of Transportation, FTA, and the Comptroller of the United States to inspect and audit all data and records
relating to its performance under the Contract. These rights of audit shall extend for a period of three (3)
years following final payment under this Contract. Any such right of inspection and audit shall only be
exercisable upon prior notice and during normal business hours. Furthermore, PSTA agrees that it shall bear
all of its own costs and expenses with respect to such audit. In the event funds paid to the Contractor under
this Contract are later properly disallowed by PSTA, or a State or Federal agency because of accounting errors
or charges not in conformity with this Contract, the Contractor shall refund such disallowed amounts to PSTA
promptly.
NOTE: ANY AND ALL SPECIAL CONDITIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS ATTACHED HERETO WHICH VARY FROM
THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS SHALL HAVE PRECEDENCE.
3.28 CONTRACT
Upon award, Bidder agrees to be bound by and execute the contract set forth in Section 5.
-20-
IFB # 13-013B
SECTION 4: STATEMENT OF WORK
-21-
SPECIFICATIONS
Division 1 - Division 32
Bid No. 13-013B
Pinellas Park, Florida
Bacon Group, Inc. (Architect)
Anston-Greenlees, Inc. (Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Security, Data)
Master Consulting Engineers (Structural)
Tindale-Oliver & Associates, Inc. (Civil)
May 2013
PINELLAS PARK, FLORIDA
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 10 00 – Summary
Section 01 20 00 – Price and Payment Procedures
Section 01 26 00 – Contract Modification Procedures
Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements
Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements
Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements
Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal
DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION
Section 02 14 00 – Selective Site Demolition and Removal
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section 03 00 00 – Concrete
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry
Section 04 20 30 – Reinforced Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing
Section 05 20 00 – Metal Joists
Section 05 30 00 – Metal Decking
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
Section 06 40 23 – Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation
Section 07 26 16 – Under Slab Vapor Barrier
Section 07 52 00 – Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Section 08 31 13 – Access Doors and Frames
SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Section 08 56 53 – Security Aluminum Storefronts, Windows and Entrances
Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section 09 22 16 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
Section 09 24 00 – Portland Cement Plastering
Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board
Section 09 30 00 – Tiling
Section 09 51 13 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Section 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories
Section 09 66 00 – Terrazzo Flooring
Section 09 91 00 – Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 10 14 00 – Signage
Section 10 26 00 – Wall and Door Protection
Section 10 28 00 – Toilet, Bath, Laundry, and Miscellaneous Accessories
Section 10 44 13 – Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
Section 10 73 16 – Exterior Canopies
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
Section 11 18 13 – Teller Transaction and Deal Drawer Security Equipment
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
Section 12 24 13 – Roller Window Shades
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Applicable
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Applicable
DIVISION 21 – SPRINKLER
Not Applicable
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
Section 22 00 10 – Plumbing Requirements
Section 22 04 50 – Plumbing Materials and Methods
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
Section 23 00 10 – HVAC Requirements
Section 23 00 50 – HVAC Materials and Methods
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Section 23 01 83 – Refrigerant Piping
Section 23 06 71 – Condensing Units
Section 23 07 63 – Air Handling Units
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00 – Basic Methods and Requirements (Electrical)
Section 26 05 19 – Wires and Cables
Section 26 05 26 – Grounding
Section 26 05 29 – Supporting Devices
Section 26 05 30 – Electrical Connections for Equipment
Section 26 05 33 – Raceways
Section 26 05 35 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings
Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification
Section 26 22 00 – Dry Type Transformers
Section 26 24 16 – Panelboards
Section 26 26 16 – Circuit and Motor Disconnects
Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
Section 26 41 13 – Lightning Protection Systems
Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protection Devices
Section 26 51 00 – Interior Building Lighting
Section 26 56 00 – Exterior Building Lighting
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
Not Applicable
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Not Applicable
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
Section 31 31 16 – Termite Control
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 32 11 00 – Pavement Subgrade
Section 32 13 13 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
Section 32 13 14 – Concrete Walks
Section 32 31 13 – Chain Link Fencing, Gates and Accessories
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
Not Applicable
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROPOSAL AND BID FORM
FOR
PINELLAS SUNCOAST TRANIST AUTHORITY
Bid No. 13-013B Pinellas Park Transit Center
The undersigned offers to furnish the equipment and the services as listed below in accordance with the specifications dated
May, 2013.
DESCRIPTION
EXTENDED PRICE
PRICE
YEAR ONE
PINELLAS PARK TRANSIT CENTER, BID NUMBER
IFB NO. 13-013B
Provide a LUMP SUM price to furnish all equipment
labor and materials for all site/civil work as
indicated on the drawings and specifications. The
site/civil work shall include all utilities up to 5’0”
from the facility.
$
PINELLAS PARK TRANSIT CENTER, BID NUMBER
IFB NO. 13-013B
labor and materials for the facility construction as
site/civil work shall include all utilities from the
5’0” end point as described above serving the
building systems.
$
ALLOWANCE
Add to your bid a $25,000.00 allowance.
$
TOTAL NOT-TO-EXCEED LUMP SUM BID
25,000.00
$
OVERHEAD AND PROFIT AS APPLIED TO CHANGE ORDERS AND ALLOWANCES
Overhead and profit rate combined to be used in increases and decreases in the contract amount as provided by Change
Order, and included in allowances, shall be
% of direct cost.
PINELLAS SUNCOAST TRANSIT AUTHORITY – PINELLAS PARK TRANSIT CENTER BID FORM
PAGE 1 OF 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 01 10 00
SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Project Information
2.
Work covered by Contract Documents
3.
Work under separate contracts
4.
Access to site
5.
Work restrictions
6.
Specification and drawing conventions
PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Identification: Pinellas Park Transit Center, Bid Number IFB No. 13-013B
1.
Project Address: 7200 U.S. Highway 19 North, Pinellas Park, Florida 33781
th
B.
a.
The CSR Facility is located off of 70 Avenue North
Owner: Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority
C.
Architect: Bacon Group, Inc.; 2641 Sunset Point Road, Clearwater, Florida 33759
D.
Contractor: To be determined
1.3
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.4
THE WORK OF THE PROJECT IS DEFINED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND
CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING:
1.5
A.
1.
The Work consists of new paving and CSR Facility construction including site/civil,
architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical work as shown in the
Contract Documents.
2.
The total size of the work is approximately 958 square feet.
3.
All applicable work shall conform to the 2010 Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition of the
Florida fire Prevention Code, Florida Energy Code and the Americans with Disabilities
Act and all applicable codes and ordinances.
WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried
out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts.
Coordinate the work of this contract with work performed under separate contracts.
SUMMARY
SECTION 01 10 00- 1
B.
Owner-Furnished Items: The following products will be furnished by Owner and shall be
installed by Contractor as part of the Work:
1.
1.6
A.
1.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
The ATM machine will be Owner Furnished and Owner Installed equipment.
Construction for the ATM shall be coordinated by PSTA. The ATM will be delivered to
the site by PSTA or other the designated entity
ACCESS TO SITE
General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site, where the building shall be located, for
construction operations during construction period. Contractor’s use of Project site is limited only
by the Owner’s right to perform work and the ability to operate the transfer station and the
shopping center.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
Site work and building construction shall be performed 5 days a week, Monday through Friday.
Hours of construction shall be determined at the Pre-construction Conference.
B.
Noise, vibration, and odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise,
vibration and odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with owner.
1.
Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.
C.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is NOT permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
D.
Controlled substances: Use of controlled substances other than tobacco on the Project site is not
permitted.
1.8
A.
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
Specification Content: The specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, work and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words “shall”, “shall be”, or “shall comply with”, depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Section in Division 01 apply to the Work of
all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings
to identify materials and products:
1.
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
2.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of
the U.S. National CAD standard and scheduled on the Drawings.
3.
Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this project manual.
SUMMARY
SECTION 01 10 00- 2
D.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the
Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY
SECTION 01 10 00- 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 01 20 00
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
ALLOWANCES
Allowances shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner
under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. Include the
following allowances in the Contract Sum:
1.
A $10,000.00 Allowance has been added to the total Bid Form. The Allowance shall be
utilized by PSTA for the permit costs and any other PSTA requested costs. The un-used
portion of the Allowance shall be indicated on the Application for Payment via approved
Deductive Change Order.
B.
Other than the permit fees, obtain three proposals for each allowance and submit to Architect
with recommendations. Purchase products and/or systems as selected by Architect.
C.
Advise Architect of the date when selection and purchase of each product or system described
by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
D.
Submit bids or invoices to show cost of products furnished under each allowance. Reconciliation
of Allowance amounts with actual costs will be by Change Order.
E.
All Change Orders will be included as separate line items in each subsequent Pay Application
and drawn from based on percentage of the Work completed related to that specific Change
Order.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
ALTERNATES
There are no Alternates for this project.
UNIT PRICES
There are no Unit Prices for this project.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
A.
On Owner's approval of a proposal from Contractor on AIA Document G709, Architect will issue
a Change Order on AIA Document G701, for all changes to the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time.
B.
When Owner and Contractor disagree on the terms of a proposal, Architect may issue a
Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714, instructing Contractor to proceed with
the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Construction Change Directive will
contain a description of the change and designate the method to be followed to determine
changes to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
1.5
A.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 business days before the initial Application for Payment.
Break down the Contract Sum into at least one line item for each Specification Section in the
Project Manual table of contents. Coordinate the Schedule of Values with Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
1.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
2.
Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials and for
total installed value of that part of the Work.
SECTION 01 20 00 - 1
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Submit three (3) copies of each application for payment on AIA Document G702/703, according
to the schedule established in Owner/Contractor Agreement.
1.
With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from
subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the
previous application.
2.
Submit final Application for Payment after completion of Project closeout procedures with
release of liens and supporting documentation.
a.
b.
Include consent of surety to final payment on AIA Document G707 and insurance
certificates.
Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as
of the date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 20 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 01 26 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the work, not involving an adjustment to
the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the PSTA Project Manager.
CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS
Owner-initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the work that will require adjustments
to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the PSTA Project Manager, with a
detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and
Specifications, if necessary.
1.
Proposal requests issued by the PSTA Project Manager are for informational purposes
only. Do not consider them instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the
proposed changes.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 7 days of receipt of the
proposal request, submit to the PSTA Project Manager for the Owner’s review, an
estimate of cost necessary to execute the proposed change.
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with
the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the work will have
on the work schedule.
Contractor and subcontractors will provide a complete detailed labor and material
breakdown to justify change order request amounts.
Contract-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When latent or other unforeseen
conditions in mutual accord with the Owner Representative’s finding require modifications to the
Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the
PSTA Project Manager. All Change Orders require prior written approval by the PSTA Project
Manager.
1.
Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on
the work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of
the proposed change on the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
2.
Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with the total
amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate
quantities.
3.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
SECTION 01 26 00 - 1
4.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Comply with requirements regarding product substations if the proposed change in the
work required that the substitution of one product or system for a product or system not
specified.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 26 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the work.
B.
Schedule and conduct progress meetings at Project site at every two week intervals. Notify
Owner and Architect of meeting dates and times. Require attendance of each subcontractor or
other entity concerned with current progress or involved with planning or coordination of future
activities.
1.
C.
1.2
A.
B.
Architect will record minutes and distribute to everyone concerned, including Owner and
Architect.
Provide a daily log showing progress of all Work.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
1.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the work to permit processing, including re-submittals.
2.
Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than
Contractor.
Digital submittals: A digital submittal for review will be acceptable and must be presented and
include each of the following:
1.
Each submittal must be in PDF form and allow for digital commenting.
2.
Each digital submittal must be individually identified and submitted as an
individual file unless submitted as a complete system; i.e., all mechanical items;
all electrical and lighting items; all window, security/transaction assemblies, bullet
resistant glazing, etc.
3.
Each submittal will have a digital cover/transmittal page as part of the file that will
include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Project name
Date of transmission
Name and address of General Contractor
Name and address of subcontractor or supplier
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section
List each included item and what paragraph / sub-paragraph it satisfies
A verification stamp acknowledging that the General Contractor has reviewed the
submittal for its completeness as required by the contract documents
Provide a large obvious check box to acknowledge if samples are being sent to
append the digital submittal
A blank area 3”x5” for review stamps by the design team
A blank table; 5 columns wide by 20 rows high to allow all recipients to
acknowledge receipt and transmission of submittal. Each column will be labeled as
follows from left to right:
1)
IN - Can provide check box for each row in lieu of column
SECTION 01 30 00 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
k.
4.
OUT - Can provide check box for each row in lieu of column
Signature of Recipient or Transmitter
Date of Receipt or Transmission
Time of Receipt or Transmission
The General Contractor would fill out the first row when the submittal is first
sent.
Each separate item with in a submittal package shall have a cover page stating e.
and f. above.
All re-submittals shall have a new cover/transmittal page added to the beginning of
the file. The submittal number will then have an R (for revision) and a number
(based on the number of re-submittals) placed after the submittal number.
a.
Example: a revision to submittal 4 would be number 4R1 and the second resubmittal of the submittal 4 would be 4R2.
5.
Contractor will be responsible for producing a complete set of digital submittals
showing all signatures of each reviewer’s receipt and transmission.
6.
Contractor will be responsible for providing access to all digital submittals and
selected samples on site.
C.
Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
D.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Submittal Procedure: Submit PDF of project schedule within
10 days after date established for Commencement of the Work.
E.
Daily Log: General Contractor is to submit to The Architect a daily recording of the following
items in PDF form.
1.
Record start of work, close of work, temperature, and weather conditions.
2.
Record which sub-contractors and numbers of labors from each are on site.
3.
Record all inspections.
4.
Provide photographic documentation of Work that was accomplished that day.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable products and options. Include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written recommendations, product specifications, and installation
instructions.
2.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
3.
Printed performance curves and operational range diagrams.
4.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
5.
Compliance with specified standards and requirements.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Submit
on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. Include the following:
1.
Dimensions and identification of products.
2.
Fabrication and installation drawings and roughing-in and setting diagrams.
3.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
4.
Notation of coordination requirements.
SECTION 01 30 00 - 2
5.
C.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture and for a comparison of
these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
Include name of manufacturer and product name on label.
1.
2.2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
If variation is inherent in material or product, submit at least 3 sets of paired units that
show variations.
INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
B.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
2.3
DELEGATED DESIGN
<Delete this Article if authorities having jurisdiction do not allow Contractor to perform these
services.>
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
B.
2.4
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit three (3) copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
2.
Include in the submittal, any requirements such as anchors, flashing etc. required for the
completed assembly.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type
schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SUBMITTAL REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions prior to
submission. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Architect will review each action submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications
required, stamp and mark as appropriate to indicate action taken, and return copies less those
retained.
SECTION 01 30 00 - 3
3.2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Distribute copies of approved schedule to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, testing and
inspecting agencies, and parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule
responsibility. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties.
B.
Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and
activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 30 00 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
Testing and inspecting services are specified in other Sections of these Specifications or
are required by authorities having jurisdiction and shall be performed by independent
testing agencies.
2.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a
qualified testing agency to perform these services.
3.
Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for tests, inspections, and obtaining
samples and notifying testing agency.
4.
Retesting and Reinspecting: Contractor shall pay for additional testing and inspecting
required as a result of tests and inspections indicating noncompliance with requirements.
5.
Testing shall be contracted directly with the contractor and the cost included in the Base
Bid.
Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each test and inspection to
Contractor, Architect, and to authorities having jurisdiction when they so direct. Reports of each
inspection, test, or similar service shall include the following:
1.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
2.
Project title and number.
3.
Date of issue.
4.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
6.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
7.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
8.
Complete test or inspection data, test and inspection results, an interpretation of test
results, and comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work
complies with the Contract Document requirements.
9.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
10.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with the experience and capability to
conduct testing and inspecting indicated; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction,
that is acceptable to authorities.
D.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor
in performing its duties and shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests.
1.
Agency shall promptly notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies in
the Work observed during performance of its services.
SECTION 01 40 00 - 1
E.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2.
Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract
Documents nor approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3.
Agency shall not perform any duties of Contractor.
Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with testing agencies and provide auxiliary services as requested,
including the following:
1.
Access to the Work.
2.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3.
Adequate quantities of materials for testing, and assistance in obtaining samples.
4.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment.
F.
Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by
authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections.
G.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum
quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 40 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
B.
Coordinate water and electric power with the Owner's existing system without metering and
without payment of use charges.
C.
Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
1.2
A.
SUBMITTALS
Erosion–Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction
General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
EQUIPMENT
Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide
vented, self-contained heaters with thermostatic control.
1.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A.
General: Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets. Comply with regulations and health codes for
type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
C.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required for curing or drying of
completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed.
D.
Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
3.2
TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES
A.
Provide field office(s), storage sheds, and other support facilities as necessary for construction
operations.
B.
Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction
operations. Collect waste daily and, when containers are full, legally dispose of waste off-site.
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
SECTION 01 50 00 - 1
C.
3.3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Install project identification and other signs in locations indicated to inform the public and
persons seeking entrance to Project.
TEMPORARY SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES
A.
Provide temporary environmental protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
B.
Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne
dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction and workers from inclement weather
and for containment of heat.
D.
Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas
occupied by other tenants from fumes and noise – if applicable.
E.
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate
barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
F.
Furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from
easily entering site except by entrance gates.
G.
Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities. Comply with NFPA 241.
3.4
TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A.
Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use
of temporary service to use of permanent service.
B.
Remove temporary facilities and controls no later than Substantial Completion. Personnel
remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under
conditions acceptable to Owner.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 50 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar
intent.
B.
Product Substitutions: Substitutions include changes in products, materials, equipment, and
methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by
Contractor after award of the Contract.
C.
D.
1.
Submit digital PDF of each request for product substitution. Follow standard submittal
package requirement as described in Section 013000.
2.
Submit requests within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed.
3.
Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.
4.
Identify product to be replaced and show compliance with requirements for substitutions.
Include a detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those
of the Work specified, a list of changes needed to other parts of the Work required to
accommodate proposed substitution, and any proposed changes in the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time should the substitution be accepted.
5.
Architect will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor of its acceptance or
rejection and provide direction on how to proceed.
Comparable Product Requests:
1.
Submit digital PDF of each request for comparable product. Follow standard submittal
package requirement as described in Section 013000.
2.
Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.
3.
Identify product to be replaced and show compliance with requirements for comparable
product requests. Include a detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed
substitution with those of the Work specified.
4.
Architect will review the proposed product and notify Contractor of its acceptance or
rejection.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2.
Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original sealed container or packaging,
complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and
installing.
3.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
4.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
5.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather
tight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
SECTION 01 60 00 - 1
E.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the
time of installation.
1.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and
components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
2.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
Where Specifications name a single product or manufacturer, provide the item indicated
that complies with requirements.
2.
Where Specifications include a list of names of products or manufacturers, provide one of
the items indicated that complies with requirements.
3.
Where Specifications include a list of names of products or manufacturers, accompanied
by the term "available products" or "available manufacturers," provide one of the named
items that comply with requirements. Comply with provisions for "comparable product
requests" for consideration of an unnamed product.
4.
Where Specifications name a product as the "basis-of-design" and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the named product. Comply with provisions for "comparable
product requests" for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named
manufacturers.
5.
Where Specifications name a single product as the "basis-of-design" and no other
manufacturers are named, provide the named product. Comply with provisions for
"comparable product requests" for consideration of an unnamed product by another
manufacturer.
Unless otherwise indicated, Architect will select color, pattern, and texture of each product from
manufacturer's full range of options that includes both standard and premium items.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 60 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 01 70 00
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Record Drawings: Maintain a set of prints of the Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. Mark
to show actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally.
1.
B.
Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit 3 copies of manual. Organize data into three-ring
binders with identification on front and spine of each binder, and envelopes for folded drawings.
Include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's operation and maintenance documentation.
2.
Maintenance and service schedules.
3.
Maintenance service contracts.
4.
Emergency instructions.
5.
Spare parts list.
6.
Wiring diagrams.
7.
Copies of warranties.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with manufacturer's written requirements
including, but not limited to, surfaces that are sound, level, plumb, smooth, clean, and free of
deleterious substances; substrates within installation tolerances; and application conditions
within environmental limits. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
B.
Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation
to property survey and existing benchmarks.
C.
Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Where fabricated products are
to be fitted to other construction, verify dimensions by field measurement before
fabrication and, when possible, allow for fitting and trimming during installation.
3.2
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Do not cut structural members or operational elements without prior written approval of Architect.
B.
Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass
such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas – if applicable.
C.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with
installation requirements specified in other Sections.
SECTION 01 70 00 - 1
3.3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely in
place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Clean exposed surfaces
and protect from damage.
B.
Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
FINAL CLEANING
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion:
1.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
2.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors.
Replace chipped or broken glass.
3.
Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign
substances. Sweep concrete floors broom clean.
4.
Vacuum carpeted surfaces and wax resilient flooring.
5.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication.
Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors.
6.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities.
Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a
smooth, even-textured surface.
Remove excess glazing compounds.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Substantial Completion:
following:
Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection, complete the
1.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3.
Submit specific warranties, maintenance service agreements, and similar documents.
4.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5.
Submit Record Drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, property surveys, and
similar final record information.
6.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items.
7.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
8.
Complete startup testing of systems.
9.
Remove temporary facilities and controls.
10.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
11.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
12.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
SECTION 01 70 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request,
Architect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect
will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will advise Contractor of
items that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
C.
Request inspection for Final Completion, once the following are complete:
1.
Submit a copy of Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
2.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
D.
Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is
completed or corrected.
E.
Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will
proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare
final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will advise Contractor of items that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
3.6
A.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. Include a detailed review of the
following:
1.
Include instruction for basis of system design and operational requirements, review of
documentation, emergency procedures, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting,
maintenance, and repairs.
2.
Provide certified training for all installed or fabricated items and systems as required by
the item’s or system’s manufacturer. Provide statement from the manufacturer stating the
training has been completed to their satisfaction.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 70 00 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
This section includes the following:
1.
Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste
2.
Recycling nonhazardous construction waste
3.
Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from demolition and construction. Construction waste includes packaging.
B.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,
reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation
for reuse.
D.
Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
E.
Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation
into the Work.
1.3
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total nonhazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use
of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and
demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials,
including the following:
1.
Construction Waste:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Concrete
Masonry and CMU
Lumber
Wood sheet materials
Wood trim
Metals
Roofing
Insulation
Gypsum Board and other gypsum related products
Piping
Electrical Conduit
Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in paragraph above,
salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging
materials.
1)
Paper
SECTION 01 74 19 - 1
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Cardboard
Boxes
Plastic sheet and film
Polystyrene packaging
Wood crates
Plastic pails
SUBMITTALS
A.
Construction Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for
commencement of the Work.
B.
Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
report. Include the following information:
1.
Material category/description
2.
Location and name of receiving agent company
3.
Generation point of waste
4.
Total quantity of waste in tons
5.
Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons
6.
Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons
7.
Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons
8.
Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste
C.
Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated
end-of-project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste
generated by the Work.
D.
Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E.
Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
F.
Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices.
G.
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
H.
Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods
and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste
management coordinator.
2.
Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
SECTION 01 74 19 - 2
1.6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
3.
Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4.
Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
5.
Review waste management requirements for each trade.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A.
General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements of
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, identification of
construction haulers and recyclers, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or
volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.
B.
Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of construction waste generated
by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.
C.
Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each
type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.
D.
1.
Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this
Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the
Work.
2.
Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
3.
Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
4.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
5.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name,
address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
6.
Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated
location on Project site where materials separation will be located.
Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste
management plan. Include the following:
1.
Total quantity of waste.
2.
Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of
collection containers for each type of waste.
3.
Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).
4.
Revenue from salvaged materials.
5.
Revenue from recycled materials.
6.
Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.
7.
Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.
8.
Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of
waste.
9.
Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
SECTION 01 74 19 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
1.
Comply with Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for operation,
termination and removal requirements.
B.
Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible
for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.
C.
Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project Site.
D.
1.
Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2.
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling and disposal.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1.
3.2
Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall accrue to Owner.
C.
Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or
reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
D.
Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1.
Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they
are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at
each container and bin.
a.
Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials
if found.
2.
Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3.
Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
4.
Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5.
Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
SECTION 01 74 19 - 4
3.3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A.
Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
B.
Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other
metals.
C.
Metals: Separate metals by type.
1.
Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
D.
Roofing: Separate materials. Comply with requirements for recycling roofing materials.
E.
Insulation: Comply with requirements for recycling insulation materials.
F.
Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports,
hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.
G.
Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
H.
Packaging:
I.
J.
1.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4.
Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
5.
Paper: Bundle and store in a dry location.
6.
Plastic sheet and film: Separate and bag materials.
7.
Plastic pails: Comply with requirements for recycling plastics.
Wood Materials:
1.
Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2.
Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location.
1.
3.4
A.
Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or
hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
SECTION 01 74 19 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 74 19 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 02 41 00
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A. This section covers the labor and materials necessary for the work associated with the
following items as shown on the Drawings and specified herein:
Removal of paving, storm trench drain and pipe and existing curbing for the cross-walk and
unsuitable subgrade as indicated on the drawings.
1.02
SUBMITTALS DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer/Architect a schedule of demolition and methods
of demolition to be used on each item prior to executing the work covered by this section.
PART 2
2.01
MATERIALS
GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall provide all materials and equipment in suitable and adequate quantity as
required to accomplish the work shown, specified herein, and as required to complete the
project.
PART 3
3.01
WORKMANSHIP
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. All work shall be done in conformance with the rules and regulations pertaining to safety
established by the State of Florida and as specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
3.02
REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVING AND TRENCH DRAIN
A. Removal of existing paving, trench drain and curbing shall be scheduled and coordinated with
the Owner’s Project Representative and the Architect. Removal shall be in accordance with
the plans or as directed by the Architect in the field.
3.03
REMOVAL OF ALL OTHER EXISTING FEATURES
A. Removal of all other existing features as shown on the demolition plan shall be coordinated
with the proposed construction as shown.
3.04
SAFETY
A. The Contractor shall assure all parties that proper safety precautions, i.e. temporary fences,
barricades, etc. are installed during construction to separate construction activities from
facility users and the general public.
SECTION 02 41 00 - 1
3.05
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
DEMOLITION
A. The Drawings are based on the best available information, but the structures may differ. The
Contractor shall be responsible for determining the work required by inspecting the site as
specified in INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.
3.06
BACKFILLING
A. The Contractor shall backfill all demolition areas approximately to existing ground level.
B. Backfill material shall meet the requirements for EARTHFILL or GRANULAR FILL, as
applicable, and backfill compaction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
Section EARTHWORK. Debris shall not be used as backfill material. In all areas not
backfilled to ground level, the Contractor shall erect safety barriers around the excavation until
backfilling is complete.
3.07
SALVAGE
A. All removed or demolished equipment and materials, except as noted otherwise in this
section, will become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the removal and offsite disposal of all equipment and materials not designated to be returned
to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02 41 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
SECTION 03 00 00
CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.03
Work Included: The extent of the concrete work is indicated on drawings and specified
herein. Concrete Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1.
Cast-in-place stone concrete.
2.
Reinforcing steel.
3.
Concrete admixtures.
4.
Formwork.
5.
Curing of concrete.
6.
Finishing of concrete.
7.
Protection of concrete.
8.
Expansion Joint Fillers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.04
Work of this section shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,
including the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special
Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements.
Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications
and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1.
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
2.
ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
3.
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice".
For any item not specifically covered in these specifications, ACI 301-81 "Structural
Concrete for Buildings" will govern.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data with applications and installation
instruction for materials and items, including but not limited to, reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures and others as requested.
B.
Shop Drawings: Reinforcement - Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard
Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" and as shown on the drawings,
CONCRETE
SECTION 03 00 00 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete
reinforcement. Include special reinforcement if required.
1.
1.05
All reinforcing steel is to be precut off-site in an approved fabricating shop by an
approved Subcontractor for reinforcing steel fabrication.
C.
Laboratory Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for mix designs as specified.
D.
Mix Design: This Contractor shall submit a mix design for each type of concrete required
for approval by the Engineer. Refer to Part 4 of this Section for additional requirements.
E.
Material Certificates: Submit certificates for reinforcing steel as hereinafter specified.
F.
Admixture(s) Certification(s): Submit certifications(s) as hereinafter specified.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Time of Completion and Procedure of Construction: Time of Completion is a matter of
utmost importance in connection with this Contract. By the submission of a bid, this
Contractor agrees to diligently perform his work so as to assure completion within the
time limits and Pre-Bid CPM Schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
FORM MATERIALS
A.
Forms for Concrete: Construct all formwork for concrete surfaces with plywood, lumber,
or metal. Provide lumber dressed on at least two (2) edges and one (1) side for tight fit.
Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed
concrete without objectionable bow or deflection.
B.
Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not
bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: Reinforcing steel must be correctly rolled to section and free from all
surface defects and shall be in accordance with ASTM A-615, Grade 60, as evidenced by
manufacturer's certificates. The grade of steel shall be intermediate, new billet stock. All
bars shall be deformed and rolled with raised symbols to identify the manufacturer and
the size of the bar.
B.
Tie wire shall be No. 18 U.S. Steel wire gauge black annealed wire.
C.
Supports for Reinforcement: Spacerbars, slab bolsters, chairs, wiring, nails, and other
accessories shall be standard commercial metal supports and plastic where exposed to
weather or where rust will impair architectural finish.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type 1.
B.
Fine Aggregate: Clean, natural siliceous sand, consisting of hard, strong, durable,
uncoated particles, and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-33.
CONCRETE
SECTION 03 00 00 - 2
2.04
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
C.
Coarse Aggregate: Clean, hard, uncoated, strong, durable gravel, or crushed stone, and
shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-33. The maximum size of coarse
aggregate shall be 1 inch.
D.
Water: Potable for mixing and curing concrete and shall not contain amounts of impurities
injurious to the concrete.
E.
Light Weight Aggregate: Conform to ASTM C-330.
ADMIXTURES
A.
B.
C.
General: No admixtures shall be used in concrete unless otherwise specified herein and
except with the permission of the Structural Engineer and after laboratory design mix
approval. This Contractor shall provide the services of the admixture manufacturer's
representative to assure proper use of admixtures if required.
1.
Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thicoyanates containing more than
0.05% chloride ions are not permitted. Admixtures containing more than 0.05%
chloride ions are not permitted.
2.
Certification: Written conformance to the above mentioned requirements and the
chloride ion content of the admixture will be required from the admixture
manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Engineer.
Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C-494, Type A.
following products:
1.
W.R. Grace & Co. - "WRDA with Hycol"
2.
Master Builders - "Pozzolith 322N"
3.
The Euclid Chemical Company - "Eucon WR-75"
4.
Sika Chemical Corp - "Plastocrete 161"
Provide one of the
Accelerating Admixture: Non-chloride, non-corrosive and conform to ASTM C-494, Type
C & E.
1.
The Euclid Chemical Co. - "Accelguard 80"
2.
W.R. Grace & Co. - "Daraset"
3.
Master Builders - "Pozzolith 500A"
D.
Air Entraining Admixture: The air-entraining admixture shall conform to ASTM C-260 and
shall be used where necessary to achieve the specified air content.
E.
Water Reducing Retarder Admixture: Conform to ASTM C-494, Type D.
CONCRETE
1.
The Euclid Chemical Co. - "Eucon Retarder-75"
2.
W.R. Grace & Co. - "Daratard-17"
3.
Sika Chemical Corp - "Plastocrete 161-R"
4.
Master Builders - "Pozzolith 100-XR"
SECTION 03 00 00 - 3
F.
2.05
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
High Range Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C-494, Type F. These
admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide one of the following products:
1.
W.R. Grace & Co. - "Daracem - 100"
2.
Sika Chemical Corp - "Sikament"
3.
The Euclid Chemical Co - "Eucon-37"
4.
Master Builders - "Rheobuild 716"
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Anchor Bolts: Anchor bolts shall be ASTM A-307. For size and length of anchor bolts
refer to the Structural drawings.
B.
Joint Fillers: Expansion joint fillers shall be asphalt impregnated fiberboard conforming to
ASTM D-1751. Joint fillers shall extend full depth of joint and be of thickness indicated
on drawings.
C.
Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed non-shrink grout as called for on drawings shall be as
manufactured by:
D.
1.
The Euclid Chemical Co. - "Euco N-S Grout" (All exposed grout).
2.
The Euclid Chemical Co. - "Firmix"
3.
Master Builders - "Masterflow 713 Grout"
4.
U.S. Grout Corporation - "Five Star Grout"
5.
Lambert Corp. - "Vibropruf #11"
Curing Compounds: Curing compounds shall be manufactured by:
1.
"Super Floor Coat" or "Super Rez Seal" by the Euclid Chemical Company,
"Masterseal" by Master Builders, or approved equal, for curing and sealing all
garage, exterior exposed, and mechanical room floors. The compound shall be a
clear styrene acrylate type, 30% solids content minimum moisture loss of 0.030
grams per sq. cm. when applied at a coverage rate of 300 sq. ft. per gallon.
Manufacturer's certifications required.
2.
Other interior slabs shall be cured with the dissipating resin type compound,
"Kurez DR" by The Euclid Chemical Company or approved equal. The
compound shall conform to ASTM 309 and chemically break down in a two to
four-week period. The curing compounds must be applied immediately after
finishing and on formed surfaces following form removal.
E.
Plastic Reglets: Provide "Type A" prefilled P.V.C. reglets where indicated, made by
Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's
details and directions.
F.
Bonding Compound: The compound shall be polyvinyl acetate, rewetable type, "Euco
Weld" by The Euclid Chemical Company or "Weldcrete" by The Larsen Company.
CONCRETE
SECTION 03 00 00 - 4
G.
2.06
Epoxy Adhesive: The compound shall be a two (2) component, 100% solids, 100%
reactive compound suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces, "Euco Epoxy #463 or #615
" by The Euclid Chemical Company or "Sikadur Hi-Mod by Sika Chemical Corporation.
CONCRETE PROPORTIONS
A.
All mix designs shall be proportioned in accordance with Section 4.3, "Proportioning on
the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" of ACI 318-83. Submit mix designs
on each class of concrete for review. If trial batches are used, the mix design shall be
prepared by an independent testing laboratory and shall achieve a compressive strength
1200 psi higher than the specified strength. This over-design shall be increased to 1400
psi when concrete strengths over 5000 psi are used. All proposed mixes shall be
submitted for approval prior to the start of concrete operations.
B.
Cement, aggregate and other materials required for design or verification mixes by the
laboratory shall be supplied by this Contractor.
C.
Measurements of fine and coarse aggregate shall be made separately by weight. The
proportioning of aggregate for fractional sacks of cement will not be permitted unless the
cement is weighed for each batch. Weighing equipment shall be arranged to permit
making compensation for changes in the weight of moisture contained in the aggregate.
D.
Batching equipment shall be subject to inspection and approval.
E.
Design Mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as
indicated on drawings and schedules.
F.
Admixtures
1.
Use water-reducing admixture or high range water-reducing admixture (super
plasticizer) in all concrete.
2.
Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures
below 50 deg. F. (10 deg. C.).
3.
Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise
indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to
result in concrete at point if placement having air content within following limits:
4.
G.
2.07
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
a.
Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing or
subjected to hydraulic pressure:
b.
3% to 5% for maximum 1" aggregate.
Use admixtures for water-reducing and set-control in strict compliance with
manufacturer's directions.
Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of
placement of 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch. Concrete containing HRWR admixture
(superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches.
MIXING
A.
CONCRETE
Job Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum type batch machine
mixer. For mixers of one cu. yd., or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of
SECTION 03 00 00 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu. yd., increase minimum 11/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd., or fraction thereof.
1.
B.
Provide batch ticket for each discharged and used in work, indicating project
identifications name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount
of water introduced.
Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C- 94, and as herein specified.
1.
During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete,
a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C-94 shall be required. When air
temperature is between 85°F (30°C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2
hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90°F (32°C), reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FORMS
A.
Forms shall be so constructed that the finished concrete will conform to the shapes, lines,
and dimensions shown on the Contract drawings. They shall be substantially built and
sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of water or paste and securely braced in order to
maintain their true position and shape. If any form loses its proper shape or position, it
shall immediately be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect or removed and replaced
with a new form. Provide cleanout openings.
B.
Earthcuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces.
C.
The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the sole
responsibility of this Contractor.
1.
D.
Formwork design, tolerances of finished lines, and camber to compensate for
deflections due to weight of concrete shall conform to "Recommended Practice
for Concrete Formwork (ACI-347)", or as otherwise noted.
Form Ties
1.
Factory-fabricated, adjustable length, removable, or snap off metal form ties
designed to prevent deflection and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon
removal.
a.
3.02
Provide ties so that portion remaining within concrete after removal of
exterior parts is at least 1-1/2 inches from the outer concrete surfaces.
E.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate
work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases
from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into
forms.
F.
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive
concrete. Remove chips, woods, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is
placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement is required to eliminate
mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
CONCRETE
SECTION 03 00 00 - 6
3.03
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
A.
Reinforcement fabricated to the shapes and dimensions shown or required shall be
placed where indicated on the Contract Documents.
B.
Before any reinforcement is placed, any loose rust of mill scale or coatings, including ice
or oil, which would reduce or destroy the bond, shall be removed. Reinforcement
materially reduced in section shall not be used.
C.
Concrete cover over steel reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings.
D.
Bar reinforcement shall be carefully formed to the shapes shown and required to resist
most effectively the stresses involved. Bars with kinks or bends not required shall not be
used. The reinforcing shall not be bent or straightened in a manner which would injure
the material. The heating or reinforcement for bending or straightening will not be
permitted.
E.
Bends or hooks, unless otherwise shown or required, shall be cold formed around pins.
Hooks shall be ACI Standard.
F.
Reinforcement shall be wired securely at intersections and shall be held in place with
approved bars, spacers, chairs, high chairs, bolsters, or other supports so that it will not
be dislocated or otherwise disturbed during the depositing of concrete.
G.
Steel reinforcement shall not be spliced at points of maximum stress. Laps in adjacent
bars shall be staggered. Laps shall be tied and seized tight at both ends.
H.
All dowels shall be secured and tied in place before pouring concrete.
I.
Reinforcing steel shall be stored under cover and protected from rusting, oil, grease, or
distortion.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A.
Where indicated, construction joints shall be of the types and at the locations indicated on
the drawings and specified hereinafter. All other construction joints shall be submitted to
the Structural Engineer for approval.
B.
Construction joints shall be provided with adequate shear keys for succeeding
placements and reinforcement shall be continuous through such joints. No bars shall be
continuous through two construction joints.
C.
The Contractor shall have means at hand to bring any grade beam placement to an
emergency construction joint provided with the proper shear key and/or dowels if an
interruption in the supply of concrete or inclement weather makes such a procedure
necessary.
D.
Waterstops as specified shall be provided at all construction joints in concrete work in
elevator pit walls, piping pits, and where indicated on drawings.
E.
No horizontal joints will be permitted in walls and grade beams except as shown in the
drawings.
F.
Unless otherwise noted, the maximum spacing of construction joints should be as
follows:
1.
CONCRETE
Foundation walls and grade beams - forty (40) feet.
SECTION 03 00 00 - 7
3.04
3.05
3.06
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Provide anchor bolts for steel column template at correct elevations as shown on the
drawings.
B.
Anchor bolts shall be set in location in plan and shall not exceed tolerances specified in
AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings", including the "Commentary" and Supplements thereto as issued.
CONVEYING AND PLACING
A.
Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the forms as quickly as possible by a
method which will prevent segregation and loss of materials.
B.
Delivery carts and/or buggies where used shall be kept on temporary runways built over
the construction, and runway supports shall not bear upon reinforcing steel or fresh
concrete.
C.
Belt conveyors, chutes or similar equipment will be permitted.
D.
Concrete shall not be placed on loose fill, mud or standing water.
E.
Concrete shall be deposited continuously. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to
its final location to avoid segregation.
F.
Concrete shall not be incorporated in the work after it has attained its initial set not in any
event more than one hour after water has been added to the aggregate.
This period may be reduced at the option of the Joint Venture if it develops that presetting
is taking place, particularly in hot weather.
G.
Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as nearly as practicable in its final position to
avoid rehandling. Special care shall be exercised to prevent splashing of forms or
reinforcement with concrete in advance of pouring.
H.
Pumped Concrete - All concrete placed by pumping method shall be proportioned in
accordance with the provisions of ACI 211.1 to meet the requirements of strength, slump,
and air content in these specifications. Test cylinders for strength and tests for slump air
content shall be taken at the point of discharge from the pumping line.
I.
Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely more than 6 feet. Provide pour holes in
formwork for placement of concrete where the drop exceeds 6 feet.
J.
Chute shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after each run. All waste materials and
flushing water shall be discharged outside of the forms.
K.
After form removal, all tie holes and other repairable defective areas shall be immediately
patched.
COMPACTION AND VIBRATION
A.
3.07
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
Concrete shall be compacted with the aid of mechanical internal vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand spading, rodding and tamping to force out air pockets, to work the
materials into the corners and around reinforcement and embedded items, and to
eliminate honeycomb.
COLD WEATHER PLACEMENT
CONCRETE
SECTION 03 00 00 - 8
3.08
A.
In temperatures of 40 deg. F. and above, when it is not anticipated that temperatures will
drop below 40 deg. F, comply with the requirements of ACI.
B.
For temperatures below 40 deg. F, concrete must be delivered to the project site between
55 deg. F. and 70 deg. F, comply with the requirements of ACI. Water shall not be
heated over 180 deg. F.
C.
Use only the specified non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator. Calcium Chloride,
thiocoyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions are not permitted.
D.
All methods proposed for heating materials and protecting the concrete shall be subject
to approval by the Structural Engineer. Concrete shall never be heated over 90 deg. F,
nor will any other overheating which would produce a flash set be permitted.
E.
Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or subgrade containing frozen materials, snow
or ice.
WARM AND INCLEMENT WEATHER PLACEMENT
A.
3.09
During hot weather, the concrete shall be delivered to the forms at the coolest practicable
temperature. In no case shall concrete above 90 deg. F. be placed. When high
temperatures and/or placing conditions dictate, the Contractor shall use the waterreducing, retarding formulation (Type D) in lieu of the specified water-reducing admixture
(Type A) as specified. Concrete shall not be placed when the sun, heat, wind, rain, sleet,
or humidity would prevent proper placement.
CONCRETE FINISHES
A.
Troweled Finish: All concrete slabs, except as noted below, but including those that shall
receive resilient flooring, tile with a thin set application, or carpet shall be screeded level
to the established elevations, thoroughly consolidated and bullfloated. When slabs have
set sufficiently, machine float and then trowel with a steel trowel. Concrete shall be in
condition acceptable to trades that will furnish and install the finish materials.
1.
B.
3.10
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
During the floating and troweling operations, care shall be taken that no holes or
depressions are left from the removal of coarse aggregate and that no excess
moisture or bleed water is present on the surface. The trowel finished surface
shall be level so that the surface conforms to an F25 number as measured by the
"Dipstick" or an optical device approved by the Architect.
Scratched Finish: For slab surfaces intended to receive bonded applied "mud set"
cementitious applications, ceramic tile or quarry tile, etc., after concrete has been placed,
struck-off consolidated and leveled, the surface shall be roughened with stiff brushes or
rakes before final set.
FINISHES OTHER THAN FLOORS
A.
CONCRETE
Smooth Finish: All vertical concrete surfaces that will be exposed as finished work shall
receive a smooth finish. This shall be achieved by the use of steel forms or new smooth
plywood. Sheets shall be as large as possible with smooth even edges and installed with
close joints. Joint marks and fins shall be ground off and surfaces left smooth, dense,
and free from honeycombing, prominent grain marking, and bulges or depressions more
than 1/8" in 4 feet. Surfaces shall then be patched, leaving the surface finish uniformly
smooth and washed clean.
SECTION 03 00 00 - 9
B.
3.11
3.14
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
1.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface
after placing and finishing. Immediately after placing and finishing, concrete
surfaces not covered by forms, or when forms are removed within three days of
placement, shall be protected from the loss of surface moisture for a period of not
less than seven days by covering with the curing compound specified.
2.
Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before
concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with
ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period.
REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE AREAS
A.
3.13
Rough Finish: Rough concrete finish shall be used for all other concrete for which no
other finish is indicated or specified. Obtain by using clean, straight lumber, plywood, or
metal forms. Concrete having a rough finish shall have honeycombing and minor defects
patched.
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
3.12
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
All Structural repairs shall be made with prior approval of the Structural Engineer, as to
method and procedure.
REDESIGN
A.
Changes or departures from the construction details shown on the drawings shall be
made only with the approval of the Structural Engineer.
B.
Changes will not be allowed to be made on shop drawings that have been previously
submitted for approval except for items that have been noted for corrections or
coordination.
BONDING
A.
Before new concrete is deposited on or against concrete that has hardened, the form
shall be retightened, the surfaces of the hardened concrete shall be roughened as
required, thoroughly cleansed of foreign matter and laitance, and slushed with cement
grout.
PART 4 - QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
4.01
TESTING AND INSPECTION
A.
General: The Owner shall pay for the services of a test laboratory for selected by the
Owner for concrete quality control as enumerated in this specification. The test
laboratory shall submit proof that any concrete inspectors used on the project shall have
taken and passed the ACI course in Concrete Inspection within the past five years. The
test laboratory services shall include the following:
1.
CONCRETE
The testing laboratory shall provide continuous inspection and testing of
ingredients used in concrete.
SECTION 03 00 00 - 10
4.02
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
2.
The test laboratory shall keep a man on the job site for the full length of all
concrete placements and if requested, shall check the batching plant quantities
and measurements at the beginning of each day's placement.
3.
The test laboratory shall make tests during the progress of the work and shall
check for adequate mixing of all concrete placed.
B.
Codes: The testing laboratory, will test the concrete for compliance with contract
documents and all applicable ACI and ASTM codes and standards.
C.
Understrength Concrete: If test cylinders fail to meet the strength requirements and/or if,
in the opinion of the Structural Engineer, the cylinders are not truly representative of the
inplace concrete the Architect has right to request that cores be cut from the work
affected. Such cores shall be not less than 3 in number and shall comply as to size and
shape and shall be secured and tested in conformance with the requirements of ASTM
C42. The cores shall be taken at points mutually agreeable to the Contractor and the
Architect, and shall be tested at points mutually agreeable to the Contractor and the
Architect, and shall be tested in the presence of the Architect by a laboratory approved by
the Architect. If test results are not satisfactory to the Architect, this Contractor shall
remove from the work all affected concrete and replace such defective work in a
satisfactory manner, all without further compensation or time extension including the
costs of coring, testing and all related architectural and engineering work.
D.
Contractor's Responsibility: The sole responsibility for producing concrete in the field
having the strength required without causing excessive shrinkage cracks shall rest on the
Contractor, regardless of the laboratory determination. If, in his opinion, the field
conditions are such that a lower water-cement ratio is necessary to produce the required
strength, he shall submit the mix he proposes to use to the Architect in writing. In no
case will the Contractor be permitted to use a higher water-cement or lower cement
factor than those used in the approved mix.
E.
Redosage with the high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) may be
permitted with the approval of the Engineer as to methods and procedures.
TESTING DURING PROGRESS OF WORK
A.
CONCRETE
If requested, batch plant inspection by the testing laboratory will include:
1.
Attendance at the batching plant during all batching.
2.
Determination that all weighing and measuring equipment is in proper working
order and that calibration certificates of scales are current.
3.
Determination that the truck mixers are regularly cleaned and maintained and
that the drums revolve at the proper speeds. Provide the Joint Venture with a list
of trucks certified in accordance with ASTM C-94. No mixers with accumulations
of hardened concrete on the blades or with worn or defective blades shall be
permitted on this project.
4.
Ascertain that only correct weights of cement and aggregate are used.
5.
Ascertain that only those admixtures as specified and in proper qualities are used
in the mix.
6.
Insure that only the correct amount of mixing water is loaded into the tank of the
truck.
SECTION 03 00 00 - 11
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
7.
Insure that only approved materials are used.
8.
Ascertain that aggregates and water are of the proper temperature.
9.
Make necessary tests of the aggregates to determine the moisture content so
that the total water in the batch may be properly adjusted.
10.
Test of aggregates received at the batching plant for gradation and cleanliness.
11.
Check and sign delivery tickets issued by supplier that will identify each load of
concrete dispatched to the project as having been inspected.
Field Inspection by the Testing Laboratory will include:
1.
Attendance at the project site during all concrete placing operations.
2.
Ascertain that concrete delivered to the site has been inspected by the batch
plant inspector.
3.
Control the addition of mixing water in order to maintain the required
water/cement ratio.
4.
Ascertain that the concrete is mixed in accordance with the specification
requirements.
5.
Insure that the concrete is conveyed from the mixer to the point of pour in
accordance with specifications and good practice.
6.
Insure that the concrete is of the proper temperature when placed.
7.
Air Content Tests - At least two tests shall be made for each day's placing or
from each batch of concrete from which cylinders are cast. Tests shall be
representative of each type of concrete.
8.
Slump Tests - At frequent intervals to properly control the consistency and at
least one at time of casting each group of cylinders and at least one test for every
25 cubic yards.
C.
Concrete Compression Cylinders: Unless otherwise specified, there shall be taken from
the concrete of each strength placed on any one day at least one set of five
representative 6" x 12" test cylinders. For large placements on any one day there shall
be taken not less than one set of five representative type cylinders for each 100 cubic
yard of concrete of each strength placed. Two cylinders to be tested at 7 days, two at the
age of 28 days and the fifth cylinder in reserve for further testing. Ascertain that the test
specimens are properly protected until shipped to the testing laboratory. Record and
identify each cylinder with the location of the concrete from which the specimen was
taken. Keep marking in sequence.
D.
Additional Test Lab Responsibilities: Report any material or work performed that fails to
meet the job specifications immediately with the Contractor, and then to the Architect.
Work will be checked as it progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or materials
shall not in any way prevent later rejections or obligate the Owner for final acceptance.
E.
Reports on Inspection: Submit reports on testing and inspection. Reports shall include
detailed data with respect to all requirements of the specifications referenced. Materials
CONCRETE
SECTION 03 00 00 - 12
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
or workmanship not meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents, either at the
plant or project site, will be rejected by the Testing Laboratory and immediately reported
to the Contractor and then to the Architect. In no case shall the laboratory recommend
any method of adjustment or correction without obtaining prior approval of the Architect.
Include in all reports and project title and number, location, Contractor's name, and date
work was performed.
F.
G.
H.
CONCRETE
Report Copies and Timing: Immediately after tests or inspections have been made and in
no case late than seven (7) days after tests of inspection have been made, the laboratory
shall furnish copies of all test and inspection reports.
1.
One (1) copy to Architect.
2.
One (1) copy to the Contractor.
3.
One (1) copy to Master Consulting Engineers, Inc.
4.
One (1) copy to Concrete Contractor.
5.
One (1) copy to the Owner.
Batch Plant Inspection Daily Report: The batch plant inspectors shall submit a daily
report which shall contain the following data:
1.
Concrete supplier.
2.
Weather conditions and air temperature (ranges).
3.
Type of concrete.
4.
Required strength of concrete.
5.
Total number of batches, batch weight, and identifying number of each batch and
truck load.
6.
Basic control data concrete mix, indicating mix number source, and type of
cement, source of aggregates, type of admixtures, basic quantities of cement,
aggregates (dry), water and admixtures of concrete per cubic year, required
slump, required air entrainment and water/cement ratio.
7.
Actual data and quantities of concrete batch, indicating time of batching, actual
quantities of cement, aggregates (moist) and admixtures, gallons of water added
to plant; percent of total moisture in aggregates; temperature of aggregates and
water, gallons of water to be added in transit or at site; time truck dispatched
from plant.
8.
Name of inspector, with time of arrival and departure from batch plant and total
hours for day.
Site Inspection Daily Report: The site inspectors shall submit a daily report which shall
contain the following data:
1.
Concrete supplier.
2.
Weather conditions and air temperature (ranges).
SECTION 03 00 00 - 13
4.03
4.04
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
3.
Class and type of concrete placed.
4.
Location of placed concrete and time of starting and stopping of placement.
5.
Identification of truck loads.
6.
Time of dispatching truck from batching plant and receipt of delivery tickets.
Indicate delivery ticket number.
7.
Amount of water added in transit or at site.
8.
Time of discharging concrete from truck.
9.
Temperature of concrete during discharging from truck and during placing.
10.
Slump test results, identifying truck load and cylinders made.
11.
Air entrainment test results, identifying truck load.
12.
Test cylinders cast, identifying cylinder number, design strength, time taken,
slump, truck numbers from which taken and location of pours with yardage of
concrete placed at each location.
13.
Weight per cubic foot of plastic concrete.
14.
Other pertinent data which may have bearing on quality or strength of concrete,
placing of concrete, and also report if any concrete was rejected.
15.
Name of inspector, with time of arrival and departure from site and total hours for
day.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES AND OBLIGATIONS RELATIVE TO CONCRETE MIX
DESIGNS
A.
This Contractor shall submit preliminary mix designs for the concrete proposed on this
project for review.
B.
The preliminary mix design shall be prepared by a concrete test lab and shall be based
on the actual materials used as submitted by this Contractor.
C.
Furnish an insulated weatherproof box for storing field test.
D.
The test lab cost for the above shall be borne by this Contractor.
THE TESTING LABORATORY SHALL FURNISH ALL REQUIRED CYLINDER MOLDS AND
TAGS TO BE USED FOR MIX DESIGNS AND FIELD TESTS.
END OF SECTION 03 00 00
CONCRETE
SECTION 03 00 00 - 14
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 04 20 00
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
SUMMARY
1.
Concrete masonry units (CMUs)
2.
Architectural block / decorative masonry
3.
Mortar and grout
4.
Embedded flashing
5.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories
Products installed but not included under this section include the following:
1.
Reinforced masonry
2.
Pre-cast products
3.
Lintels
4.
Steel lintels and shelf angles
5.
Vertical and Horizontal reinforcing steel
6.
Masonry joint reinforcement
7.
Ties and anchors
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory and
other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified
requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings:
C.
D.
1.
Masonry Units: show sizes, profiles, coursing and location of special shapes.
2.
Reinforced Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforced bars. Comply
with ACI 315, “details and detailing of Concrete Reinforcement”
3.
Fabricated flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units and other special applications
Samples for verification: For each type and color of the following:
1.
Exposed concrete masonry units
2.
Architectural block / decorative masonry, provide 3 samples to show color range
3.
Mortar, make samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project
4.
Weep holes/vents
5.
Accessories embedded in masonry
Mock Wall:
1.
Place a 4'-0" wide by 4’-0" high (min) wall panel composed of a section of the standard
block masonry as specified in this section, a section of ground face masonry, and a
section of the split-face masonry as specified showing workmanship, coursing, bond,
thickness and tooling of joints, range of color and texture of masonry, and mortar color.
UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 20 00 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Submittals shall be approved prior to construction. Contractor shall conduct a meeting of
the Owner, Owner's representative and the architect at the time of panel installation for
approval. Approved sample panel may be incorporated into the work. Finished work shall
match the approved sample panel. If panel is unsatisfactory, it shall be removed and
replaced with new panel for approval.
E.
2.
Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner as indicated in
specifications or by manufacturer
3.
Protect approved sample panel from the elements with weather-resistant membrane
4.
Submittal is for information only. Approval of mock does not constitute approval of
deviations from contract documents unless such deviates are specifically brought to the
attention of the Architect and approved in writing
Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with
requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.
Provide for each type of the following:
1.
Masonry units
a.
b.
c.
d.
F.
Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements
For exposed block, include material test report for efflorescence according to
ASTM C 67
For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculation
establishing average net-area compressive strength of units
Fire Resistance: If indicated on Drawings, provide information verifying product
meets required fire rating requirements
2.
Cementitious materials: include brand, type and name of manufacture
3.
Pre-blended, dry mortar mixes: include description of type and proportions of ingredients
4.
Grout mixes: Include description of type and proportions of ingredients
5.
Reinforcing bars
6.
Joint reinforcement
7.
Anchors, ties, and metal accessories
Mix Designs: for each type of mortar and grout, include description of type and proportions of
ingredients
1.
Include test report per ASTM C 780 for mortar mixes
2.
Include test report per ASTM C 1019 for grout mixes
G.
Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit types
and mortar type, provide statement for average net-area compressive strength of masonry unit,
mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to
Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
H.
Cold-Hot Weather Procedures: Provide detailed description of methods, materials and
equipment to be used to comply with cold and hot weather requirements
1.3
A.
1.
Provide cold-weather procedures to comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
2.
Provide hot-weather procedures to comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes and Standards: Comply with governing codes and applicable provisions of the following:
1.
National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA), including “TEK Bulletins”
UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 20 00 - 2
B.
1.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2.
American Concrete Institute (ACI), including ACI 531R and ACI 531.1
3.
Portland Cement Association (PCA), “Concrete Masonry Handbook”
Fire Performance Characteristics: Where fire-resistance ratings are indicated for unit masonry
work, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire
endurance has been determined by testing in compliance with ASTM E 119 by a recognized
testing and inspecting organization or by another means, as acceptable to authority having
jurisdiction
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not store in an enclosed
location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become
wet, do not install until they are thoroughly dry
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in dry location. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained to avoid
contamination
D.
Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store mix in delivery
containers on raised platforms, under cover, and in dry locations
E.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil
1.5
A.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
Protection of Work:
1.
During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each days work.
Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress.
2.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
3.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry
walls or columns.
4.
Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls.
5.
Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
a.
B.
Protect base of walls from rain, splashed mud, and mortar splatter by means of
coverings spread on ground and over all surfaces.
b.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from droppings of mortar.
c.
Protect all exposed corners of completed work. Wrap/barricade to reduce the risk
of chipping or other damage.
d.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as well as similar products
with painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings.
e.
Turn scaffold boards near wall faces on edge at end of each day to prevent rain
from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry
Cold Weather Protection
1.
Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen.
2.
Remove all masonry determined to be damaged by freezing conditions.
3.
No masonry work shall be performed when the air temperature is 38 degrees F and
falling.
UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 20 00 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MASONRY UNITS – GENERAL
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Obtain masonry units from available manufacturer, of uniform texture
and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas.
B.
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90; Weight Classification: Normal Weight.
1.
Integral Water Repellent: Sika Corporation, Sikamix W-10 - or equal as recommended
by manufacturer of units
2.
Special Shapes: Provide special shapes such as closures, header units, and jamb units
as necessary to complete the work. Units shall meet the requirements for the units with
which used
3.
Edge/face condition units:
a.
b.
c.
4.
2.2
Provide square-edged units for all exposed corners at door frames or archways,
unless otherwise indicated
Provide square-edged units for all exposed corners at window openings, unless
otherwise indicated
Provide square-edged units for all un-exposed corners, unless otherwise indicated
Masonry faces to receive Stucco Finish: Provide standard weight, rough surface for
increased mechanical bond strength of applied stucco systems.
ARCHITECTURAL BLOCK AND DECORATIVE MASONRY
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Obtain masonry units from available manufacturer, of uniform texture
and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas.
B.
Architectural Block and Decorative Masonry Units:
1.
Integral Water Repellent: Sika Corporation, Sikamix W-10- or equal as recommended by
manufacturer of units
2.
Special Shapes: Provide special shapes such as closures, header units, and jamb units
as necessary to complete the work. Units shall meet the requirements for the units with
which used.
3.
Edge/face condition units:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
C.
Provide split-face and ground face finish as indicated on Drawings.
Provide finished surface on all exposed faces.
Provide solid sill block as indicated on Drawings.
Where face is to receive door or window frame, provide smooth finish.
Masonry Cleaners: Use masonry cleaners such as EaCo Chem NMD-80 Masonry
Cleaner for all finishes. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for proper mixing and
application. Do not apply cleaner with pressure spray above 50 psi. Never use Muriatic
Acid solution on units
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product of one of
the following:
1.
Basis of design: New Holland Concrete, Inc.
a.
b.
2.
Split Face - EcoBlox
Split Face - Standard Color
Substitutions allowed only if approved by the architect prior to bid, in accordance with
Division 01-General Requirements Product Substitution Procedures
UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 20 00 - 4
2.3
MORTAR AND GROUT
A.
Mortar: ASTM C 270, proportion specification
B.
Masonry Cement:
C.
D.
E.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S
2.
For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions, and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S
3.
Colored Mortar: For architectural block or decorative concrete masonry units use colored
cement or cement-lime mix of color selected
4.
Water-Repellent Additive: Sika Corporation, Sikamix W-10 -M or equal as recommended
by manufacturer of units
Grout:
1.
For Non-Structural Masonry: 3000 psi strength at 28 days; 7-8 inches slump, missed in
accordance with ASTM C 476 coarse grout
2.
For Structural Masonry: 3000 psi strength at 28 days; 7-8 inches slump, missed in
accordance with ASTM C 476 coarse grout
Components:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1
2.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type
3.
Hydrate Lime: ASTM C207, Type S
4.
Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404, fine and coarse
5.
Water: Clean and potable
6.
Epoxy Grout ASTM C270, Type N
7.
Mortar and grout color: provide both standard and custom options from approved
manufacturer for selection by architect
Mixes:
1.
Mortar mixing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities
needed for immediate use
Achieve uniformly damp sand immediately before mixing process
Add mortar color to achieve uniformity of mix and coloration
Re-temper only within two hours of mixing
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar
Grout Mixing:
a.
F.
2.4
A.
Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in
accordance with ASTM C476
Water–Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
Sheet Metal Flashing: Stainless steel, 0.0156 inch thick
UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 20 00 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Laminated Flashing: Copper sheet 5 oz. /sq. ft. bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glassfiber cloth
C.
Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: Pliable and highly adhesive rubberized asphalt compound,
26 mils thick, bonded to a polyethylene film, 4 mils thick, to produce an overall thickness of 30
mils
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler: Pre-molded strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1
B.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral
stability in masonry wall; made from styrene-butadiene rubber or PVC
C.
Weep Holes:
D.
2.6
A.
1.
Cellular-plastic extrusion, full height and width of head joint or
2.
Round polyethylene tubing, 3/8-inch OD.
Proprietary Acidic Masonry Cleaner: Product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner
manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units
COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE
Architectural Block and Decorative Masonry:
1.
B.
EcoBlox R-3063 (Charcoal/Dark Grey)
Grout
1.
To be selected from manufacturer’s standard color choices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Use dry cutting, motor driven saw to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Install
with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed
B.
Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce
uniform blend of colors and textures
C.
Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered
on units in courses above and below except as otherwise noted
D.
Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of any existing masonry
E.
Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths
and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of
less-than-half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations
F.
Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work
G.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth.
Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required to be wetted), and remove
loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry
H.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height and install compressible filler in joint between
top of partition and underside of structure above unless otherwise indicated
I.
Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar
J.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer metal
lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core
UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 20 00 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
K.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, unless otherwise indicated
L.
Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction
M.
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound
corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are
required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.
3.2
FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES
A.
Flashing: Install flashing at locations shown in the plans and in strict accordance with the details
and the best masonry flashing practices.
B.
Install embedded flashing in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the
downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated
C.
Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in
flashing before covering with mortar
D.
Extend flashing 4 inches into masonry at each end and turn up 2 inches to form a pan
E.
Install weep holes and vents at proper intervals (32" O.C. above bed joints, typical) at courses
above grade, above flashing and at any water stops over windows, doors and beams.
F.
Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set
3.3
REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a
neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds.
C.
Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D.
Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final
pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Comply with recommendations in NCMA TEK
Bulletin No. 28.
E.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly cured, clean exposed masonry.
F.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying acidic cleaner, then remove cleaner promptly by
rinsing thoroughly with clear water or as directed by manufacturer
G.
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY
END OF SECTION - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
SECTION 04 20 30
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Provide each type of reinforced unit masonry work as indicated on drawings and in schedules
and specified herein.
B.
Requirements of Section 04 20 00, "Unit Masonry" apply to work of this section.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcement
bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other
arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit
masonry work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
General: Refer to Section 04 20 00 for masonry materials and accessories not included in this
section.
B.
Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars of Grade 60 complying with ASTM A 615.
C.
Shop-fabricate reinforcement bars which are shown to be bent or hooked.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will
reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on
drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or
other causes.
B.
Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical bars
against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses.
Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not
less
than
the
nominal
bar
diameter
or
1"
(whichever
is
greater).
SECTION 04 20 30 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
C.
Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the
Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical bars or
attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie.
D.
Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a minimum
cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at
ends. Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. Cut
and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column
fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
3.02
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Refer to Section 04 20 00 for general installation requirements of unit masonry.
3.03
INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
A.
General
B.
C.
1.
Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU).
2.
Lay CMU units with full-face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints
between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not
less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross-webs of starting
courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide
3/8" joints.
Walls
1.
Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in each course
centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and
interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use special-shaped units where
shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and
other special conditions.
2.
Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted,
to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and
grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed
webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells.
3.
Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify
regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place
small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam
courses over cores or cells on non-reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid
bottoms.
Grouting
1.
Use "Fine Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling spaces less than 4" in one or both horizontal
directions.
2.
Use "Course Grout" per ASTM C476 for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal
directions.
SECTION 04 20 30 - 2
D.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
Low-Lift Grouting
1.
Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be
grouted.
2.
Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum
pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding
192 bar diameters nor 10 ft.
3.
Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5' height, or if bond beam occurs
below 5' height stop pour at course below bond beam.
4.
Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing.
Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour.
Terminate grout pours 1-1/2" below top course of pour.
5.
Bond Beams - Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2" below bond beam course. Place
horizontal reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown.
Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam.
SECTION 04 20 30 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work on this Section.
1.02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Provide structural steel work as shown on drawings and specified herein. Hoisting of the metal
deck shall be the responsibility of Contractor. Structural steel is that work defined in AISC "Code
of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes and Standards
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with provisions of following, except where more stringent requirements are
shown or specified
AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings," including the "Commentary" and Supplements thereto as issued.
AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by
the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering
Foundation.
AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code," latest editions.
ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet
Piling and Bars for Structural Use.
Qualifications for Welding Work
1.
2.
3.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the WS "Standard
Qualification Procedure."
Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed
AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months.
If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility and
at his expense.
1.04
COORDINATION
A.
Contractor shall fully coordinate the structural steel work. Coordinate with Metal Deck Installer for
hoisting of the metal deck.
B.
Contractor shall fully verify all dimensions and details. Any discrepancies shall be immediately
reported to the Architect.
C.
Contractor shall locate dimensionally on setting plans all anchor bolts, inserts, base plates, etc.
and shall prepare and deliver all required templates and fully dimensioned setting plans, all in
time for the proper execution of the work.
D.
Contractor shall set the anchor bolts and inserts. Contractor shall field survey all such settings for
correctness after they have been cast in place, and before proceeding with steel erection.
SECTION 05 12 00 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
Checking shall be performed within ten days of notification by concrete installer that his work is
complete.
E.
Contractor shall within 10 days report to the Architect and certify that he has complied with the
above checking requirements and shall indicate any inaccuracies found and corrections which
must be made. Any inaccuracies not included in this report and found during or after steel
erection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and the cost of corrective measures shall be
borne by him.
F.
Use base lines, bench marks, or other standards for survey work. If permanent building
bench marks have been established, they will be used for the aforementioned field checking.
G.
Contractor shall coordinate erection areas and sequence and temporary bracing
locations.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
1.
Submit 4 copies of producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation
instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show
compliance with specifications (including specified standards).
a.
b.
c.
B.
Structural Steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering the
chemical and physical properties.
High strength bolts.
Structural steel primer paint.
Shop Drawings
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shop drawings shall give all necessary information for the fabrication and erection of the
structure and shall be based on AISC Specifications. Minimum connections used shall
be as indicated on the drawings and shall support the total uniform load capacity of
members. Provisions for the connection of other work required shall be indicated and
provided by Steel Installer. Index sheets shall be furnished with all beam and column
details at the same time the details are submitted for the review of the Architect.
Standard connection details conforming to those shown on the drawings shall be
submitted with first erection plan. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to
similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated.
The review of shop drawings shall be for size and arrangement of principal members and
strength of connections only.
Provide anchor bolt and setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of
anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others.
Promptly notify the Engineer whenever design of members and connections for any
portion of the structure are not clearly indicated.
Shop drawings shall bear the initials of the detailer's checker prior to submission.
Shop drawings shall indicate the sequence and extent of areas to be erected by using
division or derrick numbers.
1.06
A.
Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work.
SECTION 05 12 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
B.
Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete
or masonry, in ample time so as not to delay that work.
C.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged
materials from corrosion and deterioration. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
demurrage charges due to failure to unload or store materials properly. Structural steel shall be
kept properly drained. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause
distortion or damage to the members of the supporting structures.
D.
Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and
after installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
E.
Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary
to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
F.
Shop Fabrication and Assembly
1.
2.
G.
Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible.
Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as
indicated on approved shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where
indicated.
Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery
sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
Connections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Shop connections shall be welded or high strength bolted. Field Connections shall be
bolted with high strength bolts in friction-type connections conforming to ASTM
Designation A325, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.
Combinations of bolts and welds in the same connections are not permitted, unless
otherwise shown on the drawings.
Where structural joints are made using high strength bolts, hardened washers and nuts
tightened to a high tension; the materials, methods of installation and tension control,
type of wrenches to be used, and inspection methods shall conform to ASTM Designation
A325 as approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of
the Engineering Foundation. Each bolt shall have a hardened washer under the nut.
The high strength bolts used shall have a suitable identifying mark placed on top of the
head before leaving the factory.
Tightening of nuts shall be done with properly calibrated pneumatic wrenches. The
minimum bolt tension for the size of the bolt used shall be in accordance with tables listed
in the above referenced Standards. Each wrench shall be checked for accuracy at least
once daily for actual conditions of application.
Bolts that have been completely tightened shall be marked with identifying symbols.
The Contractor shall have a properly calibrated torque gauge on hand, and when
requested by the Architect, shall provide a check on any bolt at any time until final
acceptance of the work by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials
which are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam markers, roller marks,
SECTION 05 12 00 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and
grinding prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes.
B.
Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A992 Grade 50.
C.
Steel Pipe (HSS): ASTM A500, (42 ksi).
D.
Steel Tubes (HSS): ASTM A500, (46 ksi).
E.
Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 with size and shape as indicated on the drawings.
F.
Column Base Plates, channels and angles: ASTM A36
G.
Arc Welding Electrodes shall conform to the AWS Code as Revised. All electric current require
shall be furnished by Contractor.
H.
Paint for Shop Painting Structural Steel and Field Touch-up shall be manufacturer's standard
primer.
I.
All items exposed to weather, such as shelf angles and items as noted on the drawings, shall be
zinc coated in accordance with the provisions of ASTM Designation A123 as revised to date.
2.02
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as
indicated on the approved shop drawings.
B.
Bearing surfaces shall be planed to true beds, and abutting surfaces shall be closely fitted. All
columns and bearing stiffeners shall be milled to give full bearings.
C.
Bolt holes shall be drilled or punched in accordance with AISC Specifications, subject to the
provisions specified herein. Holes shall be accurately centered and shall register true upon
erection. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for a rejection. Small errors may be repaired by
drilling or reaming.
D.
Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembly. Assembled parts shall be
brought into close contact. Drift pins shall be used only for aligning members and shall not be
used in a manner which will damage metal or enlarge or distort holes. Members requiring
accurate alignment shall be provided with slotted holes and/or washers for truing up the steel as
required. All finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends, and open joints.
E.
Welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with the American Welding
Society "Standard Qualification Procedure" to perform the type of work required. Such
qualification test shall have been passed within the preceding 12-month period. Shop drawings
shall indicate the size, length, spacing, and type of all welds. Comply with AWS Code for
procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and for methods used in correcting welding work.
F.
Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing,
and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on approved shop
drawings.
G.
Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other
work.
SECTION 05 12 00 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
H.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes
by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2.03
SHOP PAINTING
A.
Provide one shop coat of paint as specified under Article "Materials" to all steel except for
members receiving galvanizing or as specified hereafter.
B.
Paint shall be delivered to the shop in original sealed containers which shall be clearly marked
with the manufacturer's name and the identifying brand number or name. The paint shall be used
as prepared by the manufacturer without thinning or other admixtures.
C.
Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted
complying with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC
SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
D.
Do not paint contact surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted. No paint shall be
applied within 3" of any high strength bolt holes.
E.
Do not paint any zinc-coated items.
F.
Paint shall be applied under dry and dust-free conditions and unless otherwise allowed by the
Architect, shall not be applied when the temperature is below 45 deg. F. Painting shall be done in
workmanlike manner so as to produce an even dry film of uniform thickness of 2 mil. Edges,
corners, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention so that they are thoroughly cleaned
and they receive an adequate thickness of paint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
ERECTION
A.
General: Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to
be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
B.
Codes: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein
specified. Maintain work in a safe and stable condition during erection.
C.
Anchor Bolts: Steel installer shall furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing
structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. Steel installer shall furnish templates and
other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations.
Contractor shall set anchor bolts and other insert anchors required.
D.
Field Assembly: Set structural members to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust
the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before
assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
alignment.
E.
Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide as required, with connections of sufficient strength to
bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members
are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy line to achieve proper
SECTION 05 12 00 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. Coordinate locations of temporary bracing with
the Contractor.
F.
Splice members only where indicated.
G.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins. Ream or drill holes
that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
H.
Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural
framing.
I.
Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraided areas of the shop paint, and paint all exposed areas with the same materials as used for
shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry file thickness of 2.0 mils.
3.02
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing five days in advance of the starting of
fabrication and of erection of the structural steel.
B.
The Owner and his agents shall have free access and the Contractor shall provide same, to all
points where materials for this project are being fabricated and/or erected, and all materials,
equipment and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, tests and approval by the Owner's
agents or laboratories. They shall have full authority to reject all material and work that fails to
conform in every respect to these specifications.
C.
Owner will engage in independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted
connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.
D.
Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens
comply with requirements and specifically state any deviations therefrom.
E.
Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Architect reserves
right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with specific
requirement.
F.
Shop inspection will include periodic inspection at the place of fabrication and identification of
tested material, checking of fabrication for compliance with approved shop drawing and these
Specifications, and inspection of shop painting, as well as the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Examination of all steel for straightness and alignment.
Examination of all fabricated pieces and checking of same with erection plans and detail
drawings.
Shop-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC Specifications. See
paragraph entitled "High Strength Bolt Inspection" below.
Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
Check that welders are certified. Record type and locations of defects found in
work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies or defects
found.
Perform periodic visual inspections of random welds.
Perform the following:
SECTION 05 12 00 - 6
1.
2.
5.
G.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
Ultrasonic Inspections: ASTM E164. 100% of first 400 butt welds or
more until rejection rate is less than 5% and then 25% as long as
rejection rate remains below 5%.
Magnetic Particle Testing: ASTM E109. 25% of fillet welds with size
larger than 3/8".
Examination of surface preparation, painting/priming and galvanizing.
Field inspection will include periodic inspection after delivery at site of material, fabrication, and
shop painting, and work connected with erection and field painting of steel structure, as well as
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Proper erection of all pieces.
Proper installation of bolts.
Plumbness of structure.
Condition of shop painting after erection and field touch-up painting.
Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. See
paragraph below titled "High-Strength Bolt Inspection."
Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows:
a.
b.
c.
Check that welders are certified. Record types and locations of defects found in
work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies or defects
found.
Perform periodic visual inspections of random welds.
Perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ultrasonic Inspection: All penetrating welds performed in the field shall
be tested by ultrasonic testing.
Magnetic Particle Testing: Perform as described above.
High Strength Bolt Inspection: Perform inspection of installation of highstrength bolts to determine that selected installation procedures as
prescribed in the Specification for structural joints using ASTM A325 or
A490 bolts are properly used and that bolts are properly tightened and as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
All bolted connections shall be visually inspected.
At least two bolts of every connection between girders and
columns and trusses and columns shall be checked.
All bolted connections that fail shall be corrected and all bolts in
that connection shall be retested.
H.
Contractor shall correct deficiencies in structural steel work, which inspections and laboratory test
reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements, perform additional tests, at
Contractor's expense, as may be necessary to re-confirm any non-compliance of the original
work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work.
I.
When required by Architect or Contractor's engaged Inspection Organization, Contractor shall
make available to Inspector a calibrated torque wrench and calibrating device, as well as the
manpower required to operate same, for the purpose of checking high-strength bolts. Adequate
platforms and scaffolding shall be provided to ensure safe performance of this operation.
J.
Report Copies and Timing: Immediately after tests or inspection have been made, and in no case
later than seven (7) days after tests of inspection have been made, the laboratory shall furnish
copies of all test and inspection reports as follows:
SECTION 05 12 00 - 7
1.
2.
3.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
One (1) copy to Contractor.
One (1) copy to Owner.
SECTION 05 12 00 - 8
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
SECTION 05 20 00
METAL JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
1.03
Work of this section shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,
including the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special
Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements.
DESCRIPTION
A.
Work Included: The extent of steel joists is shown on the drawings, (including basic
layout, size and type of joists required) and specified herein.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere
1.
Structural Steel Framing: Section 05 12 00
2.
Metal Decking: Section 05 30 00
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the following, and as herein specified.
1.
Steel Joist Institute (SJI) Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight
Tables for:
a.
B.
1.04
1.05
K - Series Open Web Steel Joists
Qualification of Field Welding
1.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the (AWS)
standard qualifications procedure.
2.
Joists welded in place are subject to inspection and testing by a Testing Agency
engaged by the Owner. Remove and replace work found to be defective and
provide new acceptable work.
GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Differential deflection or camber in adjacent joists in their erected position shall not
exceed 1/2" in order to allow for metal deck erection.
B.
All joists shall be delivered in one piece. Splices will not be allowed.
SUBMITTALS
A.
METAL JOISTS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications catalog and installation instructions
for each type of joist and accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that joist
comply with SJI "Specifications".
05 20 00 - 1
B.
1.06
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special
connections, jointing, and accessories. Include mark, number, type, location and spacing
of joists and bridging.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.07
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
Deliver, store, and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Specifications". Handle
and store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive
stresses. Special care shall be taken to store joists to prevent defacing with mud or other
foreign matter or damage to shop paint. Joists which become damaged shall be replaced
or repaired at the expense of the Contractor.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Time of Completion and Procedure of Construction: Time of Completion is a matter of
utmost importance in connection with this Contract. By the submission of a bid, this
Contractor agrees to diligently perform his work so as to assure completion within the
time limits and Pre-Bid CPM Schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
Steel: Comply with SJI "Specifications".
B.
High Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A325.
C.
Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI "Specifications".
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications".
B.
Holes in Chord Members: Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing
other work to steel joists; however, deduct area of holes from the area of chord when
calculating strength of members.
C.
Extended Ends: Provide extended ends on joists where shown, complying with
manufacturer's standards and requirements of applicable SJI "Specifications" and load
tables.
D.
Ceiling Extensions: Provide ceiling extensions where ceiling occur for all joists to permit
ceiling to be attached directly to joist bottom chord. Provide an extended bottom chord
element to suit manufacturer's standards, of sufficient strength. Extend ends of bottom
chord to within 5" of column grid line unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Bridging: Provide diagonal type or top and bottom horizontal bridging. Refer to structural
drawings for number of rows and type of bridging.
1.
METAL JOISTS
Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or beams.
05 20 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
F.
End Anchorage: Provide anchorages to secure joist to adjacent construction, complying
with SJI "Specifications" unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Header Units: Provide header units at panel points to support tail joists at openings in
roof system not framed with steel shapes.
H.
Shop Painting
1.
Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated
joists, braiding, anchors, and accessories before application of shop paint.
2.
Apply one coat of primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping,
or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than
0.50 mil. Bituminous type primers will not be allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
3.02
ERECTION
A.
3.03
3.04
Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Specifications", final shop drawings,
and as herein specified.
PLACING JOISTS
A.
Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place
joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before
permanently fastening.
B.
Provide temporary bridging, connection, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during
construction.
C.
Where "open web" joist lengths are 40 feet and longer, install a center row of bolted
bridging to provide lateral stability before slackening of hoisting lines.
BRIDGING
A.
3.05
Erector must examine areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be installed
and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of
work.
Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are applied.
Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or
beams.
FASTENING JOISTS
A.
METAL JOISTS
Set joists level or true to line at spacing indicated. Provide minimum bearings shown.
Install accessories, including headers, anchors, trimmers, and ceiling extensions, and
other items as indicated. Provide bridging as shown, and in accordance with AISC
requirements.
05 20 00 - 3
B.
Joists resting on steel supports shall be field welded to each support in accordance with
SJI "Specifications" for type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure
with placing of joists.
1.
3.06
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
Bolted connections, if any, shall conform to the AISC "Specifications for
Structural Joints using ASTM A325 Bolts".
TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A.
After joist installation, paint field bolt heads and nuts, welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces
on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before
painting. Use same type of paint as used for shop painting.
PART 4 - QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
4.01
TESTING AND INSPECTION
A.
General: The Owner shall provide and pay for the services of test laboratory under a separate
contract, for Steel Joist quality control, as enumerated in this specification. The Owner shall
select the test laboratory.
B.
Codes: The testing laboratory will inspect for compliance with contract documents and all
applicable ASTM, SJI Codes and Standards. Five (5) typical joists. Visual inspection of field
welds for joists to steel frame etc.
C.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard
Qualification Procedure".
D.
Reports on Inspection: Submit reports on this inspection. Reports shall include detailed data
with respect to all requirements of the specifications referenced. Materials or workmanship
not meeting the requirements of the contract documents, either at the plant or project site, will
be rejected by the testing laboratory and immediately reported to the Contractor and the
Architect. In no case shall the laboratory recommend any method of adjustment or correction.
Include in all reports the project title and number, location, Contractor's name, and date work
was performed.
E.
Report Copies and Timing: Immediately after tests or inspection have been made, and in no
case later than seven (7) days after tests of inspection have been made, the laboratory shall
furnish copies of all test and inspection reports as follows:
1.
One (1) copy to the Architect.
2.
One (1) copy to Contractor.
3.
METAL JOISTS
SECTION 05 20 00 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
SECTION 05 30 00
METAL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Provide metal decking as shown on the drawings, including basic layout and type of deck
units required, and specified herein.
B.
Related Work Described Elsewhere
1.
2.
1.03
Structural Steel Framing - Section 05 12 00.
Metal Joists – Section 05 20 00
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Codes and Standards
1.
Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise
shown or specified.
2.
AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
3.
AWS "Structural Welding Code."
4.
SDI "Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks."
5.
MRDTI "Specifications for Steel Roof Deck Construction" as adopted by the Metal
Roof Deck Technical Institute.
Qualifications of Field Welding
1.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard
Qualification Procedure." Welding decking in place is subject to inspection and
testing by a Testing Laboratory engaged by the Owner.
Remove and replace work found to be defective and not complying with
requirements.
1.04
A.
Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 91.5 psf at
high roof overhang, 76.5 psf at low roof overhang, 52.0 psf at Zone 1 roof area and 62.8 psf
at Zones 2 and 3 roof areas.
METAL DECKING
SECTION 05 30 00 - 1
B.
1.05
1.06
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
Underwriter's Label: Provide metal deck units manufactured by a firm listed in the
Underwriter's laboratories "Fire Resistance Director - Index of Manufacturers." Each required
type deck unit shall bear the UL label and marking.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit four copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions
for each type of decking and accessories. Include manufacturer's certification as may be
required to show compliance with these specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing size and location of floor and roof framing
supports, layout and types of deck panels, deck finish and method, lengths and piece marks
of deck units, fastening and anchorage details, and any openings to be cut in field. Deck
units shall be marked to show sequence or erection. Detailed drawings shall also indicate
closure pieces, fittings, sump pans, any special jointing, and other accessories necessary to
provide a complete decking installation. Indicate welds by standard welding symbols adopted
by The American Welding Society. Weld washers shall be used for all roof deck.
COORDINATION
A.
Contractor shall coordinate loading of deck units on the steel frame and erection sequence
with Structural Steel Installer. Contractor shall coordinate the actual size and depth of sump
pans.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Metal Deck
B.
Roof Deck Units: Roof deck shall be 1-1/2"-20 gage and galvanized metal deck.
C.
Metal Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates for end-abutting deck units of not less than
18 gage sheet steel. Form to match contour of deck units and approximately 6 inches wide.
D.
Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for openings between decking and other
construction, of not less than 18-gage sheet steel. Form to provide tight-fitting closure at
open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which metal decking is to be installed and
notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.
Do not proceed with work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to installer.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
METAL DECKING
SECTION 05 30 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
APRIL, 2013
recommendations and approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.
B.
Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends
accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened.
Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
C.
Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run.
D.
Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive
deflection.
E.
Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel installer in loading decking bundles to prevent
overloading of structural members.
F.
Do not use floor deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured.
G.
End Closures: Tack weld or use machine screws at 3'-0" o.c. for fastening end closures.
H.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, the
appearance and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work.
I.
Side Laps: Steel roof deck and floor deck shall have nesting side laps of adjacent units
attached by 3/4-inch diameter #12 screws or button punching at the center of each span or
30 inches o.c., whichever is a least dimension, unless noted otherwise on plans.
J.
Cutting and Fitting: Saw cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work
projecting through or adjacent to the decking as shown on the drawings.
K.
Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of floor
deck units.
L.
Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at all open perimeter ends, interior openings,
uncovered ends and edges of roof and floor decking, and in the voids between decking and
other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation.
M.
Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas,
welds and rust spots on the top surface of roof deck units.
N.
Touch-up painted surfaces with the above specified paint applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
METAL DECKING
SECTION 05 30 00 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
1.
Nailers and blocking
2.
Wood grounds
3.
Plywood backing panels
SUBMITTALS
Product Data” for each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacture and
certification by treating plan that treated material complies with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained
2.
Include date for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacture and
certification by treating plan that treated material complies with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency
3.
For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature type include physical
propertied of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures,
based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5664
4.
For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site
5.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment
Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect
for Project:
1.
Preservative-treated wood
2.
Fire-retardant-treated wood
3.
Power-driven fasteners
4.
Powder-actuated fasteners
5.
Expansion anchors
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Forest Certification: for the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
“Principles and Criteria”;
1.
1.4
A.
Miscellaneous lumber
Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp
or wet surfaces. Stack lumbar flat as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation
ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 10 00 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar
materials.
B.
For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place framing or spacers
between each course to provide air circulation.
C.
Deliver interior wood material that are exposed to view only after the building is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy level
1.5
A.
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
Correlate location of nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other
work
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
A.
B.
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Lumber: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency.
1.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark stamp on end or
back of each piece.
2.
Where nominal sizes are indication, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indication, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber
Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current
model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in
effect for Project
TREATED MATERIALS
Preservative-Treated Materials: AWPA C2, except that lumber not in ground contact and not
exposed to the weather may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1.
Use treatment containing no arsenic or chromium.
2.
For exposed items indicated to receive stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes
3.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated materials
4.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
Board of Review.
5.
Provide preservative-treated materials for all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials:
(lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood)
Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20
1.
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners
2.
Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
3.
Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic
spaces, and where indicated.
4.
Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 10 00 - 2
5.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
Identify with appropriate classification marking of a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
LUMBER
For items of dimensional lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15
percent maximum moisture content of any species
1.
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and
freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish
appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and
wane.
Miscellaneous Lumber: Construction, or No. 2 grade with 15 percent maximum moisture content
of any species. Provide for nailers, blocking, and similar members.
ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
Engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that
meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be demonstrated by
comprehensive testing.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fireretardant treated, not less than 3/4 inch nominal thick. Painted with two coats of paint, color to
match wall color
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
Fasteners: Size and type as indicated
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M
2.
Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272
3.
Wood Screw: ASME B18.6.1
4.
Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wins, length as recommended by screw manufacture for material
being fastened
5.
Lag bolts: ASME B18.2.1
6.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers
7.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capacity to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when
installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing and inspection agency
a.
B.
Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 5
Metal Framing Anchors: Structural capacity, type, and size indicated
1.
Use anchors made from hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 coating designation for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated
ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 10 00 - 3
2.
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Use anchors made from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304 for
exterior locations and where indicated
Sill-Sealer: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B.
Framing standard: Comply with AF&PA’s “Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,’
unless otherwise indicated
C.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty item, and trim
1.
Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board of lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edge of panels; space clips
not more than 16 inches o.c.
D.
Sort and select lumber so natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber.
E.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
F.
3.2
1.
Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water
2.
Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water
Securely attach rough carpentry to substrates, complying with the following:
1.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as
required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work
and fill holes.
2.
CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners
3.
Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work.
Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required
4.
Drill lead holes for lag bolts and large lag screws. Do not split lumber with fasteners.
5.
If applicable: Rough carpentry exposed to wind loading shall be provided with hurricane
clips, anchors, etc. to conform to the Florida Building Code and as indicated on the
drawings. Stapling shall not be allowed
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING
A.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work.
Where possible, anchor to form work before concrete placement.
B.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less than
1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material
involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 10 00 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 06 40 23
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
SUMMARY
1.
Plastic laminate cabinets
2.
Standard plastic laminate
3.
Solid surfacing-materials countertops
DEFINITIONS:
Interior Architectural Woodwork: includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hinging strips
required for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
QUALITY STANDARDS
Quality Standard:
1.
Architectural Woodwork Institute's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."
2.
Woodwork Institute's "Manual of Millwork."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated, including cabinet
hardware, accessories, finishing materials, adhesives, processes, installation instructions, and
safety data sheets.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each item, dimensioned plans and elevation, large scale
details and sections, attachment devices and other associate component.
C.
D.
1.
Show location and sizes of furring, blocking and hanging strips, included concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other sections.
2.
Show locations and sizes of all cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap
dispensers and other items integrated into the woodwork.
3.
Provide verification of all opening dimensions required for all installed equipment
specified in other sections.
Samples for initial selection: Submit full range of colors offered by manufacturer for the following:
1.
All available laminates, if applicable.
2.
PVC edge materials, if applicable.
3.
Quartz surface material, if applicable.
Samples for Verification: If product is identified in the contract documents, submit the following:
1.
All laminates, 8” by 10” for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample
applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge, if applicable.
2.
Quartz surface materials, 6 inches square, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, if
applicable.
3.
Cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish
SECTION 06 40 23 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
E.
Product Certificates: for each type of product, signed by product manufacturer
F.
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificate: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates
G.
Qualification Data: For installer
H.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty
I.
Mockups: build mockups to verify selection made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution
1.
1.5
Approved mockups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of
substantial completion
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products or Certified participant in Architectural Woodwork
Institute's certificate program "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"
B.
Forest Certification: Provide woodwork produced from wood obtained from forests certified by
an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and
Criteria for Forest Stewardship"
C.
Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for
production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and wood
doors with face veneers that are sequenced match with woodwork
D.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI’s standards for grades of interior
architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation and other requirements
E.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer’s regularly engaged, for preceding 5 years, in the
manufacture of sustainable architectural woodwork materials of similar type to that specified.
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with Division 01
Section “Project Management and Coordination”
1.6
A.
B.
Delivery:
1.
Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging,
with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
2.
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage
woodwork have been completed in installation areas.
Storage:
1.
Store materials in a clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
2.
Store materials on a flat, level surface with adequate support to prevent sagging.
C.
Conditioning: Condition materials to final environment for 48 to 72 hours before installation and
finishing
D.
Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage
1.7
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period
SECTION 06 40 23 - 2
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit other construction, verify dimensions of
constructions by field measurements prior to fabrication, and indicate measurements on shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
1.
1.8
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be obtained with delay of
work, establish dimensions and allow for trimming at site, coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to establish dimensions.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements and other related
units of work specified in other sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI’s quality standard for each type
of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Species and cut:
1.
C.
For transparent finish: Birch, sequenced
Core materials:
1.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
3.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2
4.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
5.
Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no
urea formaldehyde.
6.
Marine Grade Plywood or Substrate:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Where cabinets, shelving or other items are to be constructed of plywood are
specifically scheduled or in a wet environment, such shall be constructed of marine
grade plywood conforming to U.S. Product Standards
Conformance: U.S. Product Standards
Panel Thickness: 3/4 inch
Sustainable Design Fiberboard (SDF) Panels
a.
b.
c.
d.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
1)
MEDEX by Sierra Pine; 3010 Lava Ridge Court, Roseville, CA 95661; (800)
676-3339, www.sierrapine.com
2)
Substitutions allowed only if approved by the architect prior to bid, in
accordance with Division 01-General Requirements Product Substitution
Procedures
Material: Wood Fiber of 100 percent post-industrial recycled wood residuals and
Formaldehyde-free adhesive system binder
Conformance: ANSI A208.2; industrial grade MDF
Certifications:
1)
SCS Certified: Post-industrial recycled wood residuals
2)
CHPS Compliant
SECTION 06 40 23 - 3
D.
3)
CPA Certified: Environmentally Preferable Product.
4)
FSC Certified
e.
Panel Thickness: 3/4 inch
f.
Moisture Resistant: ASTM D 1037, 6-cycle accelerated aging test
g.
Physical Properties, ASTM D 1037, Part A
Thermoset Decorative Panels:
1.
E.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Product Description: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally
fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT - 1
Decorative laminates:
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product of
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Standard Decorative Laminates:
a.
b.
c.
3.
c.
Acceptable Product: Wilsonart Laminate
Decorative surface papers, impregnated with melamine resins, bonded under heat
and pressure to kraft papers impregnated with phenolic resins.
Wilsonart Type 335, having the following physical characteristics:
1)
Sheet thickness: 0.028 inch nominal
2)
Exceeding performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 current revision Grade
VGS and VGP
3)
Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E 84; unbounded
High Definition Laminates:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Acceptable Product: Wilsonart Laminate
Wilsonart Type 107, having the following physical characteristics:
1)
2)
HGS
3)
Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E 84; unbonded
Standard Decorative Laminates - Vertical Surface Type:
a.
b.
4.
Basis of design: Wilsonart International; Temple, TX 76503; (800) 433-3222
Formica Corporation; (800) 367-6422
Nevamar Decorative Finishes; Shelton, CT 06484; (800) 638-4380
Substitutions allowed only if approved by the architect prior to bid, in accordance
with Division 01-General Requirements Product Substitution Procedures
Acceptable Product: Wilsonart HD High Definition Laminates.
High Definition Wilsonart Type 376, having the following physical characteristics:
1)
2)
HGP
3)
Chemical Resistant Decorative Laminates:
a.
Acceptable Products: Wilsonart Chemsurf Chemical-Resistant Laminate.
SECTION 06 40 23 - 4
b.
c.
6.
c.
c.
Acceptable Product: Wilsonart High Wear Laminate.
Abrasion resistant overlay and decorative surface papers, impregnated with
melamine resins, bonded under heat and pressure to kraft papers impregnated
with phenolic resins.
General Purpose Type: Wilsonart Type 335HW.
1)
2)
Exceeding performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 current revision, Grade
VGS, High Wear.
Edge Moldings:
a.
b.
9.
Acceptable Product: Wilsonart High Wear Laminate.
Abrasion resistant overlay and decorative surface papers, impregnated with
melamine resins, bonded under heat and pressure to kraft papers impregnated
with phenolic resins.
General Purpose Type: Wilsonart Type 107HW.
1)
2)
Exceeding performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 current revision, Grade
HGS, High Wear.
High Wear Decorative Laminates - Vertical Surface Type:
a.
b.
8.
Chemical resistant overlay and decorative alpha cellulose surface papers,
impregnated with melamine resins, bonded under heat and pressure to kraft
papers impregnated with phenolic resins.
Chemical Resistant Decorative Laminate: Wilsonart Type 390, having the following
physical characteristics:
1)
2)
Meeting bacterial resistance and susceptibility requirements of ASTM G 22.
High Wear Decorative Laminates:
a.
b.
7.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Acceptable Product: Wilsonart Decorative Edges and Wilsonart Edgeband.
Characteristics to match selected laminates and as indicated:
1)
Edge Profile:
a)
Standard Vertical for edges other than countertops.
b)
Cascade Profile Edge Molding Style for countertops.
Accessory Materials:
a.
b.
c.
Contact Adhesive:
1)
Non-postforming:
a)
Wilsonart 1730/1731 Low VOC Contact Adhesive.
b)
Wilsonart® 730/731 Contact Adhesive, Low VOC canister.
2)
Postforming:
a)
Wilsonart® H2O Contact Adhesive, water-based.
b)
Water-resistant, non-staining bond for common high pressure
laminate (HPL) applications.
Cold Press PVA Adhesives
1)
Wilsonart® 3100 PVA Adhesive: For bonding decorative laminate to wood
products.
2)
Wilsonart® 3105 PVA Adhesive: High solids, for bonding decorative
laminate to wood products.
3)
Wilsonart® 3116 PVA Adhesive: For bonding decorative laminate to wood
products and bonding paper-backed products.
Hot Press PVA Adhesives
SECTION 06 40 23 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1)
F.
Wilsonart® 3131 PVA Adhesive: High solids for bonding decorative
laminates to wood products.
2)
Wilsonart® 3132 PVA Adhesive: High solids for bonding decorative
laminates to wood products.
d.
Postforming and Pinch Rolling PVA Adhesives
1)
Wilsonart® 3000/3001 PVA Adhesive: High solids for bonding decorative
laminate to wood products and postforming applications.
Metal laminates:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Metal - "Mirror" Type for Interior Use: Type 401 Mirror Quality
a.
b.
c.
3.
b.
c.
b.
c.
G.
Laminated composite panel having the following components:
1)
Transparent fluoride resin face coating
2)
Electroplated mirror surface
3)
Aluminum electroplating base sheet
4)
Thermoplastic core
5)
Aluminum balance sheet
6)
Acrylic resin backing
Overall sheet thickness: 0.118 inch
Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Metal - "Aluminum" Type: Type 418
a.
5.
1)
Electroplated mirror surface
2)
Aluminum electroplating base sheet
3)
Thermoplastic core
4)
Aluminum balance sheet
5)
Acrylic resin backing
Overall sheet thickness: 0.079 inch
Metal - "Mirror" Type for Exterior Use: Type 401 Mirror Quality
a.
4.
Basis of design: Wilsonart International; Temple, TX 76503; (800) 433-3222
1)
Metals
Advanced Technology Inc.; Greensboro, NC 27409; (877) 252-6443
1)
Anodized aluminum face sheet
2)
Phenolic backing
Overall sheet thickness: 0.040 inch nominal
Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E 84
Metal - "Aluminum" Type: Type 419; anodized aluminum sheet material
a.
Overall sheet thickness: 0.025 inch nominal
Solid-Surfacing Material:
1.
SECTION 06 40 23 - 6
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Basis of design: Corian surfaces for the DuPont company; (800) 906-7765
Wilsonart International; Temple, TX 76503; (800) 433-3222
Product Description: Solid surface is defined as nonporous, homogeneous material
maintaining the same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic
polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment.
a.
3.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Solid polymer components
1)
Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite
construction with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6,
having minimum physical and performance properties specified.
2)
Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (.25 mm) shall be repairable by
sanding and/or polishing.
Solid Surfacing Sheet for horizontal applications to have the following characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
H.
Nominal sheet thickness: 0.5 inches
Nominal sheet thickness for vertical surfaces: 0.25 inches
Edge thickness: As indicated on drawings
Edge type: Half Bullnose
Backsplashes: Applied
Sidesplashes: Applied
Accessories:
1)
Joint adhesive:
a)
Manufacturer’s standard one- or two-part adhesive kit to create
inconspicuous, nonporous joints.
2)
Sealant:
a)
Manufacturer’s standard mildew-resistant, FDA-compliant, NSF 51compliant (food zone — any type), UL-listed silicone sealant in colors
matching components.
3)
Conductive tape:
a)
Manufacturer’s standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness,
for use with cutouts near heat sources.
4)
Insulating felt tape:
a)
Manufacturer’s standard for use with conductive tape in insulating
solid surface material from adjacent heat source.
Quartz Sheets:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Basis of design: Silestone/Cosentino USA, Inc: (866) 268-6837
Cambria; (866) 226-2742
Dupont Zodiaq; (800) 906-7765
2.
Product Description: Quartz aggregate, resin, and color pigments formed into flat slabs.
3.
Anti-microbial protection: Microban by Microban International, Inc., integral to sheet.
4.
Quartz sheet to have the following applications:
a.
Nominal sheet thickness: 3cm
SECTION 06 40 23 - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
b.
c.
d.
I.
Edge thickness: 3cm
Edge Type: Eased
Physical characteristics:
1)
Moisture Absorption: typical results 0.02%; ASTM C97
2)
Modulus of Rupture: typical results 6,800 psi; ASTM C99
3)
Compressive Strength: typical results 24,750 psi; ASTM C170
4)
Moisture Expansion: typical results <0.01; ASTM C370
5)
Abrasion Resistance: typical results 223; ASTM C501
6)
Bond Strength: typical results 205 psi; ASTM C482
7)
Thermal Shock: passes 5 cycles: ASTM 484
8)
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: typical results 1.2x10-5 inch/ F; ASTM
C531
9)
Breaking Strength of Tile: typical results 3,661 lbf; ASTM C648
10) Resistance to Freeze Thaw Cycling: unaffected 15 cycles; ASTM C1026
11) Coefficient of Friction Pull Method: .75 avg. dry / .55 avg. wet; ASTM C1028
12) Surface Burning Characteristics: typical results 17; ASTM E84
13) Smoke Density: flaming 196, non-flaming 69; ASTM E662
e.
Accessories:
1)
Mounting Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer.
2)
Quartz Surface Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer.
3)
Joint Sealer:
a)
Type recommended by manufacturer.
b)
Color: To be selected, to match.
SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1.
Finishes: Same grades as items to be finished.
2.
Finish architectural woodwork at the fabrication shop; defer only final touch up until after
installation.
a.
b.
c.
3.
J.
Apply one coat of sealer or primer to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two
coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces.
Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining
and finishing.
After staining, if any, apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off
excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
Transparent Finish: AWI finish system Acrylic lacquer.
Cabinet Hardware
1.
Face Frame Concealed Hinges:
BHMA A156.9, B01602, European or Compact
European hinges, 105-110 degrees of opening, soft and self-closing, zero door
protrusion.
2.
Door/Drawer Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, matte/satin stainless steel, 138 mm
a.
3.
Catches: magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131
a.
4.
Sugatsune America, Inc.; MC-110NF (GR)
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports:
B04081
a.
5.
Sugatsune America, Inc. 40 Series.
BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests.
Sugatsune America, Inc.; AP-DH, Aluminum, Mortise Mount, 80% cabinet ht. min.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091
SECTION 06 40 23 - 8
a.
b.
c.
d.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121
7.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041
8.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black, molded-plastic
grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage
9.
10.
Comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number
Finish: Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630
Concealed Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA a156.9.
Miscellaneous Materials
1.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated lumber, kiln dried to
15 percent moisture content
2.
Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside
face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide
toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
3.
Adhesives: Provide types as specified in manufacturer's printed installation instructions
a.
b.
A.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “SG series” by Doug
Mockett & Company, Inc.
Exposed Hardware Finishes:
indicated
a.
2.2
Heavy duty: Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200; Side mounted, full overtravelextensions type; sinc plated steel ball-bearing slides
Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6” high or 24” wide
Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100
Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100
6.
a.
K.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
For bonding plastic laminate: Un-pigmented contact cement
For bonding edges: Hot-melt adhesives specified above for faces
FABRICATION - GENERAL
Interior woodwork
1.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom grade interior
woodwork complying with referenced quality standards.
2.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in
installation areas.
3.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles and detail indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following:
a.
b.
c.
Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood members 3/4” thick or less: 1/16”
Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4” thick: 1/8”
Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood mebers and rails: 1/16”
4.
Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
5.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screw, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
SECTION 06 40 23 - 9
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as indicated and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.
6.
Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances,
plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use
templates or rough-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand
edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
a.
Seal edge of cutout with coat of varnish.
7.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
8.
Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: Premium grade
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
9.
Plastic-Laminate Countertops: Premium grade
a.
b.
10.
Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces
Solid Surface Countertops:
a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame
WIC Construction Style: Style B, Face Frame
WIC Door and Drawer Front Style: Reveal overlay
Semi-exposed surfaces other than drawer bodies:
1)
Edges of plastic laminate shelves: PVC tape .12 inches thick to match
surface laminate color on all 4 edges
2)
For backs of panels with exposed surfaces: Match surface laminate
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood
Provide dust panels of 1/4” plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers unless located directly under tops.
Fabricate tops in one piece whenever possible. Comply with solid-surfacingmaterial manufacturer’s written recommendations for adhesives, sealers,
fabrication and finishing.
1)
Fabricate tops with shop applied edge materials and configuration indicated.
2)
Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application.
Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard joint adhesive
without conspicuous joints.
1)
Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 2" wide.
Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on
the drawings.
Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.
1)
Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template.
2)
Smooth edges.
3)
Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work.
Quartz Countertops:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Cut quartz panels accurately to required shapes and dimensions.
Radius exposed edges.
Fabricate with hairline joints.
Cut holes for sinks, faucets, toilet accessories.
SECTION 06 40 23 - 10
2.3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
A.
Upper and lower cabinets: Nevamar ARP Surface Wrought Iron, Textured, S-6-54T
B.
Countertops: SSC-1: Cambria, Jewel Collection, Whitney 0115
C.
All window sills: SSC-2: Dupont Corian, Terra Collection, White Jasmine
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPERATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion as
required, including removal of packing and back-priming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install woodwork to comply with referenced quality standard for grade specified.
B.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
C.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Fasten with
countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
F.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers are accurately aligned. Adjust
hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.
1.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8” in 96” sag, bow or other variation from a straight
line.
2.
Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood
framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
G.
Laminate Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or
other supports into underside of countertop
H.
Solid Surface Countertops:
1.
Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with
approved shop drawings and product data.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints
inconspicuous in finished work.
Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed.
Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1 inch on
either side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top.
Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.
SECTION 06 40 23 - 11
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Rout radii and contours to template.
Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports.
Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written
recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch (3 mm) sag, bow or other variation
from a straight line.
Backsplashes and sidesplashes:
a.
I.
3.3
Install applied splashes using manufacturer’s standard color-matched silicone
sealant.
Quartz Surface Countertops
1.
Install countertops in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop
Drawings.
2.
Adhere countertops to supports with continuous beads of adhesive.
3.
Set plumb and level. Align adjacent pieces in same plane.
4.
Install with hairline joints.
5.
Fill joints between countertops and adjacent construction with joint sealer; finish smooth
and flush.
6.
Maximum variation from level and plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative.
7.
Maximum variation in plane between adjacent pieces at joint: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Protect installed countertops with non-staining sheet coverings.
C.
Clean, lubricate and adjust all hardware.
D.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 06 40 23 - 12
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
B.
1.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
Foam-plastic board insulation
Roof insulation
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product installed provide the following
1.
Manufacturer's product literature, including specified physical properties
2.
Installation instructions and diagramming locations each product is to be installed
3.
Certification that product complies with specification requirements and is suitable for the
use indicated
4.
Manufacturer's general and thermal performance warranty
Samples: Submit 6” square sample of each type of product installed
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage a licensed installer who has been trained and certified for each
type of product
B.
Toxicity/Hazardous Materials
1.
Provide products that contain no urea-formaldehyde
2.
Products and equipment requiring or using CFCs, HCFCs, or HFCs during the
manufacturing or installation process will not be permitted
3.
Provide products that contain no PBDE’s
4.
Provide products that are “Low-emitting”
C.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ATM E
84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
D.
Cavity Wall Insulation shall not be produced with, or contain, any of the United States EPA
regulated CFC compounds listed in the Montreal Protocol of the United Nations Environmental
Program.
1.4
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a clean, dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.
THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 07 21 00 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Material Properties:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Basis of design: The Dow Chemical Company
1)
STYROFOAM™ Brand CLADMATE™ Extruded Polystyrene Foam
Insulation or STYROFOAM™ Brand CLADMATE™ XL Extruded
Polystyrene Foam Insulation
2)
Critical Performance properties:
a)
R-Value: R15 min.
b)
Based on thickness, water permeance: Less than 10 perms, greater
than 1 perm, classified as vapor semi-permeable.
DiversiForam Products
Owens Corning
Pactiv Building Products
Rigid closed-cell extruded polystyrene thermal board insulation
Comply with ASTM C 578-95, Type X, density 1.35 lb/cu. ft. min.,
compressive strength 15 psi (ASTM D 1621-94)
Thermal resistance: 5-year aged R-values of 5.4 and 5.0 min. °F-ft2-h/Btu2/inch at
40°F and 75°F respectively (ASTM C 518-91)
Water absorption: Max. 0.1% by volume (ASTM C 272-91(96)).
Surface Burning Characteristics:
1)
Flame Spread: 5.
2)
Smoke Developed: 165.
Adhesive:
1.
Adhesive: type recommended by insulation manufacturer
2.
Acceptable manufacturer's products:
a.
b.
c.
ChemRex, Inc. "Contech Brands PL300 Foam Board Adhesive"
ChemRex, Inc. "Contech Brands Premium Foam Board Adhesive"
Dacar Products, Inc. "Foamgrab PS"
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION / INSTALLATION
General:
1.
Comply with insulation manufacturer’s written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
2.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed
to ice, rain or snow at any time.
3.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 07 21 00 - 2
4.
B.
Provide sizes to fit application indicated and selected from manufacturer’s standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to product
thickness indicated whenever possible, unless otherwise indicated.
Foam-Plastic Board Insulation:
1.
Apply 2" diameter daubs of adhesive spaced approximately 12" o.c. both ways on inside
face of insulation board and as recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Butter all edges of insulation board with adhesive to provide continuous vapor barrier.
3.
Fit insulation between wall ties and other obstructions with joints staggered and edges
butted tightly.
a.
b.
c.
3.2
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction.
Wedge insulation from outside wythe of construction with small fragments of
masonry materials spaced 24" o.c. both ways.
Make insulation continuous. Fill all voids.
INSTALLATION
CLEAN-UP
1.
Remove and dispose of excess insulation, wrappings and other waste materials.
END OF SECTION
THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 07 21 00 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 07 26 16
UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
1.
Vapor barrier
2.
Seam tape and mastic
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product installed provide the following
1.
Manufacturer's product literature, including specified physical properties
2.
Installation instructions
3.
Manufacturer's general performance warranty
Samples: Submit 6” square sample of each type of product installed
Protect vapor barrier from physical damage and punctures
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
MATERIALS - GENERAL
Vapor barrier must have all of the following qualities:
1.
Permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 · hr · inHg)] as tested in accordance with
ASTM E 1745 Section 7.
2.
Other performance criteria:
a.
Strength: ASTM E 1745 Class A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product of one of the following:
1.
Basis of design: Stego Industries LLC; (877) 464-7834
a.
2.2
Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15 mil)
2.
Tex-Trude X-treme Vapor Barrier; (281) 452-5961
3.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Seam Tape: As recommended by manufacturer
B.
Vapor-Proofing Masric: As recommended by manufacturer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Ensure that base material is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer.
SECTION 07 26 16 - 1
1.
3.2
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Level and compact base material
INSTALLATION
Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643.
1.
Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete
placement.
2.
Lap vapor barrier over footings and/or seal to foundation walls.
3.
Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape.
4.
Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions.
5.
No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent
utilities.
6.
Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6
inches and taping all sides with tape.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 26 16 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 07 52 00
MODIFIED BITUMEN MEBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
Modified Bitumen Materials
2.
Roofing insulation and cover boards
3.
Metal Accessories
4.
Accessory Materials
B.
Disposal of construction waste is the responsibility of Contractor. Perform disposal in manner
complying with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations.
C.
Comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane
manufacturer, at http://manual.fsbp.com.
D.
Commencement of work by the Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by the Contractor
that this specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all
necessary prerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No
modification of the Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract
Documents or the project conditions.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
Referenced Standards: These standards form part of this specification only to the extent they
are referenced as specification requirements.
B.
ASTM C 728 - Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board; 1997.
C.
ASTM C 1177/C 1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
Sheathing; 2004.
D.
ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board; 2004.
E.
ASTM D 1079 - Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous
Materials; 2005a.
F.
ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000.
G.
ASTM D 6164 - Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements; 2000.
H.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2005.
I.
ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
Degrees C; 2004.
J.
CAN-ULC-S770 - Standard Test Method Determination of L-Term Thermal Resistance Of
Closed-Cell Thermal Insulating Foams; 2003.
K.
PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; 1995.
L.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2005.
SECTION 07 52 00 - 1
M.
1.3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems;
2003. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1).
DEFINITIONS
A.
Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definition of terms related to roofing work not
otherwise defined in the section.
B.
LTTR: Long Term Thermal Resistance, as defined by CAN-ULC S770.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data:
1.
Provide membrane manufacturer's printed data sufficient to show that all components of
roofing system, including insulation and fasteners, comply with the specified
requirements and with the membrane manufacturer's requirements and
recommendations for the system type specified; include data for each product used in
conjunction with roofing membrane.
B.
Samples: Submit samples of each product to be used.
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide:
1.
The roof membrane manufacturer's standard details customized for this project for all
relevant conditions, including flashings, base tie-ins, roof edges, terminations, expansion
joints, penetrations, and drains.
2.
For insulation, provide project-specific layout and dimensions for each board.
3.
Specimen Warranty: Submit prior to starting work.
D.
Installer Qualifications: Letter from manufacturer attesting that the roofing installer meets the
specified qualifications.
E.
Pre-Installation Notice: Copy to show that manufacturer's required Pre Installation Notice (PIN)
has been accepted and approved by the manufacturer.
F.
Executed Warranty.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Applicator Qualifications: Roofing installer shall have the following:
1.
Current Firestone Red Shield Licensed Contractor status.
2.
At least five years’ experience in installing specified system.
Pre-Installation Conference: Before start of roofing work, Contractor shall hold a meeting to
discuss the proper installation of materials and requirements to achieve the warranty.
1.
Require attendance with all parties directly influencing the quality of roofing work or
affected by the performance of roofing work.
2.
Notify Bacon Group well in advance of meeting.
A.
Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels
intact and legible.
B.
Store materials clear of ground and moisture with weather protective covering.
C.
Keep combustible materials away from ignition sources.
SECTION 07 52 00 - 2
1.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
WARRANTY
A.
Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications,
scheduling, and inspections.
B.
Warranty: Firestone 20 year Red Shield Limited Warranty covering membrane, roof insulation,
and membrane accessories.
1.
Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation.
2.
Scope of Coverage: Repair leaks in the roofing system caused by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Ordinary wear and tear of the elements.
Manufacturing defect in Firestone brand materials.
Defective workmanship used to install these materials.
Damage due to winds up to 55 mph.
Not Covered:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Damage due to winds in excess of 150 mph.
Damage due to hurricanes or tornadoes.
Hail.
Intentional damage.
Unintentional damage due to normal rooftop inspections, maintenance, or service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
the following:
1.
Basis of Design: Firestone Building Products Co., Indianapolis, IN 46260; (800) 428-4442
2.
B.
Manufacturer of Insulation and Cover Boards: Same manufacturer as metal roof panels.
C.
Manufacturer of Metal Roof Edging: Same manufacturer as roof membrane.
D.
1.
Metal roof edging products by other manufacturers are not acceptable.
2.
Field- or shop-fabricated metal roof edgings are not acceptable.
3.
Factory fabricated products by other manufacturers are acceptable provided they are
completely equivalent in materials and performance.
4.
Factory fabricated products manufactured by the companies listed below are acceptable
provided they are completely equivalent in materials and performance:
a.
Metal Era
b.
Firestone Building Products Co.
Substitution Procedures: See Instructions to Bidders.
1.
2.2
A.
Submit evidence that the proposed substitution complies with the specified requirements.
ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Roofing System:
1.
Thickness: As specified on Architectural drawings.
SECTION 07 52 00 - 3
2.
B.
Comply with applicable local building code requirements. Firestone’s SBS system is
approved for HVHZ and must meet current Florida Building Code wind load
requirements.
Insulation:
1.
Total R Value: R-30, minimum.
2.
Maximum Board Thickness: Per manufacturer’s recommendation; use as many layers as
necessary; stagger joints in adjacent layers.
3.
Base Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite.
a.
C.
D.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
2.4
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Attachment: Loose laid, no attachment.
4.
Intermediate Layer(s): Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite.
5.
Attachment: Loose laid, no attachment.
Insulation Cover Board:
1.
Type: Gypsum-based board, 1/2 inch thick.
2.
Attachment: Mechanical fastening.
Crickets: Tapered insulation of same type as specified for top layer; slope as indicated.
MODIFIED BITUMEN MATERIALS
Cap Sheet: Granule surfaced SBS polymer-modified bitumen sheet, reinforced with non-woven
polyester fabric, complying with ASTM D 6164, Type I, Grade G, formulated for torch application
with the following additional characteristics:
1.
Formulated for torch application.
2.
Reinforcing Fabric: 5.3 oz per sq yd, with continuous fiberglass strands in machine
direction.
3.
Nominal Thickness: 0.150 inch.
4.
Post Consumer Recycled Content: 3 percent, nominal.
5.
Sheet Width: 3.3 feet, nominal.
6.
Granule Color: Ultra-White.
7.
Acceptable Product: SBS FR Torch Ultra-White by Firestone.
Interply Base Sheet: Torch grade SBS polymer-modified bitumen sheet, reinforced with nonwoven fabric, complying with ASTM D 6164, Type I, Grade S, formulated for torch application to
substrate and cap sheet, and with the following additional characteristics:
1.
Reinforcing Fabric: 5.3 oz per sq yd polyester.
2.
Nominal Thickness: 0.12 inch.
3.
Post Consumer Recycled Content: 4 percent, nominal.
4.
Sheet Width: 3.3 feet, nominal.
5.
Acceptable Product: SBS Poly Torch Base by Firestone.
Flashings: Same materials and configuration as roofing membrane.
ROOF INSULATION AND COVER BOARDS
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Closed cell Polyisocyanurate foam with black glass
reinforced mat laminated to faces, complying with ASTM C 1289 Type II Class 1, with the
following additional characteristics:
SECTION 07 52 00 - 4
1.
Thickness: As indicated elsewhere.
2.
Size: 48 inches by 96 inches, nominal.
a.
3.
2.5
A.
1.5 inch Thickness: 9.0, minimum.
4.
Compressive Strength: 20 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1289.
5.
UL-Classified and FM-approved for direct to steel deck applications.
6.
Ozone Depletion Potential: Zero; made without CFC or HCFC blowing agents.
7.
Recycled Content: 19 percent post-consumer and 15 percent post-industrial, average.
8.
Acceptable Product: ISO 95+ GL Polyisocyanurate Insulation by Firestone.
Gypsum-Based Cover Board: Non-combustible, water resistant gypsum core with embedded
glass mat facers, complying with ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, and with the following additional
characteristics:
1.
Size: 48 inches by 96 inches, nominal.
2.
Thickness: As indicated elsewhere.
3.
Surface Water Absorption: 2.5 g, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C
473.
4.
Spanning Capability: Recommended by manufacturer for following minimum flute spans:
a.
C.
Exception: Insulation to be attached using adhesive or asphalt may be no larger
than 48 inches by 48 inches, nominal.
R-Value (LTTR):
a.
b.
c.
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1/2 inch Thickness: 5 inches, minimum.
5.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of 0, smoke developed of 0, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E 84.
6.
Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
7.
Factory Mutual approved for use with FM 1-60 and 1-90 rated roofing assemblies.
8.
Mold Growth Resistance: Zero growth, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 for
minimum of 4 weeks.
9.
Acceptable Product: Georgia-Pacific Dens Deck Prime Roof Guard.
Insulation Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing
system and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membrane
manufacturer.
METAL ACCESSORIES
Parapet Copings: Formed metal coping with galvanized steel anchor/support cleats for capping
any parapet wall; watertight, maintenance free, without exposed fasteners; butt type joints with
concealed splice plates; mechanically fastened as indicated; Firestone PTCF or Metal-Era
Perma-Tite.
1.
Wind Performance:
a.
b.
At least the minimum required when tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1
Test Method RE-3, current edition.
Provide product listed in current Factory Mutual Research Corporation Approval
Guide with at least FM 1-90 rating.
SECTION 07 52 00 - 5
2.
Description: Coping sections allowed to expand and contract freely while locked in place
on anchor cleats by mechanical pressure from hardened stainless steel springs factory
attached to anchor cleats; 8 inch wide splice plates with factory applied dual non-curing
sealant strips capable of providing watertight seal.
3.
Material and Finish: 24 gage, 0.024 inch thick galvanized steel with Kynar 500 finish in
manufacturer's standard color; matching concealed joint splice plates; factory-installed
protective plastic film.
4.
Dimensions:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Wall Width: As indicated on the drawings.
Piece Length: Minimum 144 inches.
Curved Application: Factory fabricated in true radius.
5.
Anchor/Support Cleats: 20 gage, 0.036 inch thick prepunched galvanized cleat with 12
inch wide stainless steel spring mechanically locked to cleat at 72 inches on center.
6.
Special Shaped Components: Provide factory-fabricated pieces necessary for complete
installation, including miters, corners, intersections, curves, minimum 14 inch long legs
on corner, intersection, and end pieces.
7.
Fasteners: Factory-furnished; electrolytically compatible; minimum pull out resistance of
240 pounds for actual substrate used; no exposed fasteners.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
Wood Nailers: PS 20 dimension lumber, Structural Grade No. 2 or better Southern Pine,
Douglas Fir; or PS 1, APA Exterior Grade plywood; pressure preservative treated.
1.
Width: 3-1/2 inches, nominal minimum, or as wide as the nailing flange of the roof
accessory to be attached to it.
2.
Thickness: Same as thickness of roof insulation.
Cant Strips and Tapered Edge Strips: 45 degree face slope and minimum 5 inch (127 mm) face
dimension; provide at all angle changes between vertical and horizontal planes that exceed 45
degrees.
1.
Type: Non-flammable perlite, complying with ASTM C 728.
2.
Install using hot asphalt (Type IV), roofing mastic, or mechanically fastened using
fasteners and plates approved by roofing manufacturer.
Lead Flashing: Soft lead sheet, minimum 3 pounds per square foot.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofing manufacturer's
published instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system.
Where
manufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, follow good roofing practices and
industry standards. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
B.
Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installation
period.
C.
Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer as notification
that this project requires a manufacturer's warranty.
D.
Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel.
SECTION 07 52 00 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
E.
Temporary closures, which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the
new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Completion of flashings,
terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertight
condition.
F.
Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snow or ice; do
not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allow
proper application; consult manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Do
not work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to 80
degrees F.
G.
Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofing
work; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work.
1.
Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives, sealants and coatings.
2.
Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from bitumen, adhesives,
and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray.
3.
Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by
other trades.
H.
Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer.
I.
Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants, primers and
cleaning materials away from all sources of ignition.
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their
mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deform
deck.
B.
Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
substrate before commencing with roofing work.
C.
Examine roof substrate to verify that it is properly sloped to drains.
D.
Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions; start of work constitutes acceptable of project
conditions and requirements.
3.3
Correct defects in the
PREPARATION
A.
Take appropriate measures to ensure that fumes from adhesive solvents are not drawn into the
building through air intakes.
B.
Prior to proceeding, prepare roof surface so that it is clean, dry, and smooth, and free of sharp
edges, fins, roughened surfaces, loose or foreign materials, oil, grease and other materials that
may damage the membrane.
C.
Fill all surface voids in the immediate substrate that are greater than 1/4 inch wide with fill
material acceptable insulation to membrane manufacturer.
D.
Seal, grout, or tape deck joints, where needed, to prevent bitumen seepage into building.
E.
Wood Nailers: Provide wood nailers at all perimeters and other locations where indicated on the
drawings, of total height matching the total thickness of insulation being used.
1.
Install with 1/8 inch gap between each length and at each change of direction.
2.
Mechanically fasten to deck to resist force of 200 lbf per linear foot.
SECTION 07 52 00 - 7
3.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
INSULATION AND COVER BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation in configuration and with attachment method(s) specified in PART 2, under
Roofing System.
B.
Install only as much insulation as can be covered with the completed roofing system before the
end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather.
C.
Lay roof insulation in courses parallel to roof edges.
D.
Neatly and tightly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers, with gaps not greater
than 1/4 inch. Fill gaps greater than 1/4 inch with acceptable insulation. Do not leave the roofing
membrane unsupported over a space greater than 1/4 inch.
E.
Mechanical Fastening: Using specified fasteners and insulation plates engage fasteners through
insulation into deck to depth and in pattern required by membrane manufacturer.
3.5
MODIFIED BITUMEN INSTALLATION BY HEAT WELDING
A.
Start at the low point with a full width sheet, fully unrolled and aligned; align and unroll remaining
sheets during heat fusing operation.
B.
Fully heat-weld sheets to substrate using methods recommended by roof membrane
manufacturer.
C.
Maintain 3 inch side laps and 6 inch end laps.
D.
Granule Surfaced Sheets: In areas that form the substrate for heat fusing, such as laps,
flashings, and patches, embed the granules prior to fusing subsequent sheet. Apply additional
granules to all exposed surfaces that have none or cover with additional piece of granule
surfaced material.
E.
Complete the entire membrane installation without undue delay.
1.
Exception: The cap sheet may be installed not more than 14 days after installation of the
interply base sheet.
a.
b.
c.
3.6
Before resuming installation, be sure the surface of the last sheet is clean and dry;
broomed and cleaned sufficiently using the necessary equipment.
Remove materials that show evidence of water intrusion and replace with like
material.
Cover materials that have been damaged with additional layers of ply sheets
installed over them equal in quantity to those originally installed.
FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install flashings, including laps, splices, joints, bonding, adhesion, and attachment, as required
by membrane manufacturer's recommendations and details.
B.
Metal Accessories: Install metal edgings, gravel stops, and copings in locations indicated on the
drawings, with horizontal leg of edge member over membrane and flashing over metal onto
membrane.
1.
Follow roofing manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Remove protective plastic surface film immediately before installation.
3.
Install water block sealant under the membrane anchorage leg.
4.
Flash with manufacturer's recommended flashing sheet unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Where single application of flashing will not completely cover the metal flange, install
additional piece of flashing to cover the metal edge.
SECTION 07 52 00 - 8
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
6.
If the roof edge includes a gravel stop and sealant is not applied between the laps in the
metal edging, install an additional piece of self-adhesive flashing membrane over the
metal lap to the top of the gravel stop; apply seam edge treatment at the intersections of
the two flashing sections.
7.
When the roof slope is greater than 1:12, apply seam edge treatment along the back
edge of the flashing.
C.
Scuppers: Set in sealant and secure to structure; flash as recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Flashing at Walls, Curbs, and Other Vertical and Sloped Surfaces: Install weathertight flashing
at all walls, curbs, parapets, curbs, and other vertical and sloped surfaces that the roofing
membrane abuts to; extend flashing at least 8 inches high above membrane surface.
E.
3.7
A.
3.8
1.
Use the longest practical flashing pieces.
2.
Evaluate the substrate and overlay and adjust installation procedure in accordance with
membrane manufacturer's recommendations.
3.
Complete the splice between flashing and the main roof sheet with specified splice
adhesive before adhering flashing to the vertical surface.
4.
Provide termination directly to the vertical substrate as shown on roof drawings.
Flashing at Penetrations: Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane; make flashing
seals directly to the penetration.
1.
Pipes, Round Supports, and Similar Items: Flash with specified pre-molded pipe
flashings wherever practical; otherwise use specified self-curing elastomeric flashing.
2.
Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shaped Penetrations: Provide penetration pocket at least 2
inches (50 mm) deep, with at least 1 inch clearance from penetration, sloped to shed
water.
3.
High Temperature Surfaces: Where the in-service temperature is, or is expected to be, in
excess of 180 degrees F, protect the elastomeric components from direct contact with
the hot surfaces using an intermediate insulated sleeve as flashing substrate as
recommended by membrane manufacturer.
FINISHING AND WALKWAY INSTALLATION
Install walkways at access points to the roof, around rooftop equipment that may require
maintenance, and where indicated on the drawings.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical
Representative employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation for
warranty purposes (i.e. not a sales person).
B.
Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty.
3.9
CLEANING
A.
Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas, including
bitumen, adhesives, sealants, and coatings.
B.
Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to the
work of this section; comply with recommendations of manufacturers of components and
surfaces.
C.
Remove leftover materials, trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas.
SECTION 07 52 00 - 9
3.10
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PROTECTION
Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, provide durable
protection and replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 52 00 - 10
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
B.
a.
Formed wall panel sheet metal flashing
b.
Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications
c.
Formed equipment support flashing
d.
Formed overhead-piping safety pans
1.
1.2
Formed Products:
All metal flashing and trim associated with specified roof system, by roofing
manufacturer.
A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements
from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1.
1.3
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
manufactured product and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,
including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between
shop- and field-assembled works. Include the following:
1.
Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
2.
Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim , including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
3.
Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
4.
Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
5.
Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of
expansion and contraction.
6.
Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings as applicable.
7.
Details of special conditions.
8.
Details of connections to adjoining work.
SECTION 07 62 00 - 1
9.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory indicated
with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1.
Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and
in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips , closures, and other attachments.
2.
Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
3.
Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
E.
Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.
F.
Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications : Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
D.
1.
Build mockup of typical roof eave. Including built-in gutter, fascia, fascia trim , downspout,
approximately 10 feet long, Including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments
and accessories.
2.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer If applicable, Installer, and installers whose
work Interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including Installers of roofing
materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment.
2.
Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.
3.
Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and
attachment to structural members.
4.
Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and
condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing.
5.
Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
SECTION 07 62 00 - 2
1.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
A.
Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal ftashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B.
Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight
and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METALS
A.
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A240Mor ASTM A 666,Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed.
C.
1.
Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled).
2.
Surface: Smooth, flat.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and pre-painted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTMA792/A 792M, ClassAZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40; structural quality.
2.
Surface Smooth, flat.
3.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a.
2.2
Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
4.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5.
Concealed Finish: Pre-treat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or
manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a.
b.
c.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory applied coating.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal
being fastened.
Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
SECTION 07 62 00 - 3
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2.
Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
3.
Fasteners for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
4.
Fasteners for Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel
according to ASTMA 153/A 153M orASTMF2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
Solder:
1.
For Stainless Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by
stainless steel sheet manufacturer.
D.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanentlyelastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining
tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTMC920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
remain watertight.
F.
Butyl Sealant: ASTMC 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized ; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G.
Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
H.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187.
I.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.3
A.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness , and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to
greatest extent possible.
1.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and
metal.
2.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3.
Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
4.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces exposed to view.
B.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 inch offset
of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
D.
Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.
E.
Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant
concealed within joints.
SECTION 07 62 00 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
F.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
G.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
H.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,
and solder.
I.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
J.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96 inch long, but not
exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide, joint cover plates.
1.
Joint Style: Lap, 4 inches wide.
2.
Fabricate with scuppers spaced 10 feet apart, of dimensions required with 4 inch wide
flanges and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.
Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.
3.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96 inch long, but not exceeding 10 foot long, sections. Fabricate
joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of
external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder
or weld watertight.
1.
Coping Profile: SMACNA figure designation [3-4A] [3-4B] [3-4C] [3-4DJ[3-4E] [34FJ[3·4G].
2.
Joint Style: Butt with 12 inch wide, concealed backup plate.
3.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Roof and Roof to Wall Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
D.
Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
E.
A.
Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.5
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
G.
Stainless Steel : 0.019 inch thick.
Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
F.
Soft Lead: 4 LB.
MISCELLANEOUSSHEETMETALFABRICATIONS
Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
SECTION 07 62 00 - 5
B.
Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.6
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Exposed metal flashing and trim:
1.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
B.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
B.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods,
protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete
sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
3.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
4.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
5.
Install sealant tape where indicated.
6.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
7.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
1.
C.
Coat back side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing
and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction .
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1inch deep, filled
with sealant concealed within joints.
SECTION 07 62 00 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
D.
Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than
recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E.
Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
F.
3.3
1.
Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F , set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below40 deg F.
2.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned
surface would show in completed Work.
1.
Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet.
2.
Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
3.
Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for
stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning
and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturers recommended methods for cleaning
and neutralization.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet
metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as
indicated. Install work with laps joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weather resistant.
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof
edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.
C.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install
stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
D.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches
and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of anchor and wafer at 36-inch
centers.
E.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of
roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that
penetrate roof.
3.4
A.
MISCELLANEOUS FLASHINGINSTALLATION
Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans independent from structure above as indicated on
Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system.
SECTION 07 62 00 - 7
B.
3.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with
installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to
equipment support member.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of
1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining
faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances
specified in SMCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C.
Clean off excess sealants.
D.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. On
completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
E.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 62 00 - 8
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
1.2
Sealing of joints indicated in the schedule at the end of this section and in other locations
required by the Contract Documents.
DEFINITIONS
A.
M-type substrates: Concrete, concrete masonry units, mortar. The term "masonry" means brick,
stone, and concrete masonry work.
B.
G-type substrates: Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets.
C.
A-type substrates: Metals, tile, and smooth plastics.
D.
O-type substrates: Wood, unglazed tile; substrates not included under other categories.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data on each joint sealer, with instructions for substrate
preparation and installation.
B.
Samples for Color Selection: Cured samples of actual products showing manufacturer's full
range of colors. (Products exposed to view only.)
C.
Substrate Test Report for Each Sealer.
D.
Field Installation Test Reports.
E.
Installer's Preconstruction Inspection Report: List all conditions detrimental to performance of
joint sealer work.
F.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4
A.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Substrate Tests: Have samples of actual substrate materials tested by manufacturer(s) of sealer
products.
1.
Test to determine what preparation procedures (if any) are necessary to make sealers
adhere properly under environmental conditions that may occur during installation.
2.
Test to determine compatibility with substrates, backers, and secondary seals, if any.
3.
Use manufacturer's standard test methods.
4.
Report the sealer manufacturer's recommendations for substrate preparation and sealer
installation and identify specific primer(s) required.
5.
The requirement for testing for this project will be waived if test reports based on previous
testing of the products and substrates to be used are acceptable to the Designer.
Field Installation Tests: Before installation, test the adhesion of all sealers to actual substrates.
1.
Seal at least 5-foot lengths of joints and cure properly. Try to pull sealer out of joint by
hand, by method recommended by sealer manufacturer.
2.
Select test joints representative of joints to be sealed by the product to be tested.
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 92 00 - 1
C.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
B.
1.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
3.
Perform tests for each type of sealer used on exterior.
4.
Do tests in the presence of the technical representative of sealer manufacturer.
5.
Report results.
Mock-ups: Before beginning installation, install sealers in joints in actual construction as directed
by the Designer, to show color, materials, and installation. Keep mock-ups intact as the standard
for evaluating the completed work.
Deliver materials in original containers or bundles with labels showing manufacturer, product
name or designation, color, shelf life, and installation instructions.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install sealers if any of the following conditions exist:
1.
Air or substrate temperature exceeds the range recommended by sealer manufacturer or
is below 40 degrees F or is above 100 degrees F.
2.
Substrate is wet, damp, or covered with snow, ice, or frost.
Dimensional Limitations: Do not install sealers if joint dimensions are less than or greater than
that recommended by sealer manufacturer; notify the Designer and get sealer manufacturer's
recommendations for alternative procedures.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified
in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 5years from date of Final Acceptance.
2.
Warranty shall be signed jointly by the Applicator and the Contractor. Repairs shall be
made promptly or materials replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS - GENERAL
A.
Provide only products that are recommended and approved by their manufacturer for the specific
use to which they are put and that comply with all requirements of the contract documents.
B.
To the greatest extent practicable, provide all sealants from a single manufacturer.
C.
Provide only materials that are compatible with each other and with joint substrates.
D.
Colors of exposed sealers: To match Designer's samples.
2.2
A.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS FOR NON-TRAFFIC JOINTS
Elastomeric Sealants - General: Chemically curing elastomeric sealants of types indicated,
complying with ASTM C 920, including specific Type, Grade, Class, and Uses indicated, as well
as all other requirements specified.
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 92 00 - 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.3
A.
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
Where movement capability exceeding that measured by ASTM C920 is specified,
sealant shall withstand the total movement indicated while remaining in compliance with
the other requirements specified, when tested in accord with ASTM C719, with base joint
width measured at the time of application.
2.
For M-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M.
3.
For G-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use G.
4.
For A-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use A.
5.
For O-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M (minimum) and Use 0 for the
particular substrate.
High Movement Silicone Sealant: One- or two-part, non-acid-curing, Grade NS, Class 25, Use
NT, plus movement capability of50 percent in extension, 50 percent in compression.
1.
GE Silicones; UltraPruf IISCS2900.
2.
"Dow Corning 795"; Dow Corning Corporation.
3.
Pecora Corporation; 895.
Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: One-part, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, formulated
with fungicide, for interior use on nonporous substrates.
1.
"Dow Corning 786"; Dow Corning Corporation.
2.
GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.
3.
Tremco; Tremsil200.
One-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1.
"Chem-Calk 900"; Bostik Inc.
2.
"Dynatroll"; Pecora Corporation.
3.
"Sikaflex 1a"; Sika Corporation.
4.
"Sonolastic NP 1"; Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
Urethane Sealant for Water Immersion: One- or two-part urethane, Grade NS, Class 25, Use
NT, specifically recommended by the manufacturer for sealing joints immersed continuously in
water.
1.
"Permapol RC 270 Reservoir Sealant"; Products Research &Chemical Corporation.
2.
"Sikaflex-2c NS" or"Sikaflex-1a"; Sika Corporation.
3.
"GC-2 Synthacalk"; Pecora.
TRAFFIC-BEARING JOINT SEALANTS
Exterior Silicone Sealant for Use T: One-part, non-acid curing, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use
T, Use M, plus movement capability of50 percent in both extension and compression.
1.
Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.
2.
Pecora Corporation; 300 Pavement Sealant (Self Leveling).
3.
Tremco; Specterm 900SL.
Interior One-Part Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Use T.
1.
"Chern-Calk 950"; Bostik Inc.
2.
"Urexpan NR-201"; Pecora Corporation.
3.
"Sonolastic SL-1"; Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 92 00 - 3
C.
2.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Interior Multipart Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use 1.
1.
"Urexpan NR-200"; Pecora Corporation.
2.
"Sikaflex 2c SL"; Sika Corporation.
3.
"Sonolastic SL 2"; Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
SEALANT BACKERS
A.
Backers - General: Non-staining; recommended or approved by sealant manufacturer for
specific use.
B.
Backer Rods: Flexible, nonabsorbent, compressible polyurethane foam, either open-cell or nongassing closed-cell, unless otherwise restricted by sealant manufacturer; preformed to
appropriate size and shape.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Self-adhesive, polyethylene or other plastic tape, unless otherwise
restricted by sealant manufacturer; suitable for preventing sealant adhesion.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primers: Use primers determined to be required by substrate tests.
B.
Cleaners: As recommended by sealer manufacturer and not damaging to substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonabsorbent, non-staining.
D.
Tooling Agents: Approved by sealant manufacturer; non-staining to sealant and substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints for characteristics that may affect sealer performance, including configuration and
dimensions.
B.
Do not begin joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Cleaning: Just before starting sealer installation, clean
recommendations of sealer manufacturers and as follows:
out
joints
in
accord
with
1.
Remove all material that could impair adhesion, including dust, dirt, coatings, paint, oil,
and grease. Exception: Materials tested to show acceptable adhesion and compatibility.
2.
Dry out damp and wet substrates thoroughly.
3.
Clean M-type and O-type substrates by suitable mechanical orc hemical methods.
4.
Remove loose particles by vacuuming or by blowing with oil-free compressed air.
5.
Concrete: Remove laitance and form-release coatings.
6.
Clean A-type and G-type substrates by chemical or other methods which will not damage
the substrate.
7.
Use methods which will not leave residues that will impair adhesion.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates as recommended by sealer manufacturer.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to keep primers and sealers off of adjacent surfaces which
would be damaged by contact or by cleanup. Remove tape as soon as practicable.
D.
Install fillers where needed to provide proper joint depth or support for sealant backers.
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 92 00 - 4
3.3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with sealer manufacturers' installation instructions and recommendations, except where
more restrictive requirements are specified.
B.
Gunnable and Pourable Sealants: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193.
C.
Backers:
D.
3.4
1.
Install backers at depth required to result in shape and depth of installed sealant that
allows the most joint movement without failure.
2.
Make backers continuous, without gaps, tears, or punctures.
3.
Do not stretch or twist backers.
4.
Use bond-breaker tape wherever it is necessary to keep sealant from adhering to back or
third side of joint.
5.
If backers become wet or damp before installation of sealant, dry out thoroughly before
proceeding.
Shape and Depth: Use methods recommended by manufacturer; completely fill the joint; make
full contact with bond surfaces; tool non-sag sealants to smooth surface eliminating air pockets.
1.
Use concave joint shape shown in Figure SA in ASTM C1193, where not otherwise
indicated.
2.
Use recessed joint shape shown in Figure SC in ASTM C1193, of depth and at locations
indicated. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
3.
Depth of sealant at center of joint, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents
or recommended by manufacturer:
4.
For joints up to 1/4-inch wide: Depth equal to width.
5.
For joints 1/4-inch to 1I2-inch wide: Depth equal to 1/4 inch.
6.
For joints over 1I2-inch wide: Depth equal to 1/2 the width.
7.
Contact depth: Twice the depth of sealant at center of joint, unless otherwise required.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces adjacent to joints as work progresses and before sealants set using methods and
materials approved by manufacturer’s of sealers and of surfaces to be cleaned.
B.
Protect joint sealers from contamination and damage.
C.
Remove and replace damaged sealers.
3.5
A.
B.
SCHEDULE OF JOINT SEALERS
General:
1.
Seal joints in exterior envelope to prevent the entry or escape of water or air.
2.
Seal joints on the interior of the building to prevent the passage of water or air from space
to space or between adjacent building materials and assemblies.
3.
Joints of a nature similar to that of joints indicated shall be sealed with same sealer,
whether specifically indicated on the drawings and schedules to be sealed or not.
Typical Exterior Joints:
1.
Including, but not limited to:
a.
Wall joints.
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 92 00 - 5
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
C.
Use one of the following sealants:
a.
b.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Between walls or partitions and adjacent casework, laboratory furniture, fixed
shelving, fixed equipment, lighting fixtures, laboratory piped utility fittings.
Between concrete or masonry or other material and the perimeters of frames of
doors, windows, access panels, etc.
Between hollow metal jambs and resilient flooring.
Between concrete or masonry walls or partitions and adjacent columns, pilasters,
walls, partitions, floors, ceilings, or other construction.
In control or expansion joints in concrete or masonry walls or partitions.
Around penetrations such as electrical boxes, plumbing, cabinets, ducts, and other
openings in concrete or masonry walls or partitions. Comply with
recommendations and details in USG Corporation's "Gypsum Construction
Handbook"
Interior joints for which no other sealer is indicated.
a.
One part, non-sag urethane sealant.
Joints between countertops and adjacent surfaces:
1.
F.
Joints in flashing, gravel stops, fascia, and coping and between them and adjacent
Where flashing is inserted into reglet in wall, and top edge of surface mounted
reglets.
a.
High movement silicone sealant.
Typical Interior Joints:
1.
E.
Joints around perimeter of frames.
Seats of exterior door thresholds.
Joints around pipes, ducts, and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
Joints in wash surfaces of precast concrete, cast stone cut stone, or concrete or
brick masonry.
Masonry joints with shelf angles.
Joints between new and existing walls.
Exterior joints for which no other sealer is indicated.
a.
High movement silicone sealant.
Metal Flashings:
1.
D.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
a.
One part, non-sag urethane sealant.
Joints in Interior Wet Areas:
1.
a.
b.
Toilet rooms.
Between walls or other surfaces and adjacent plumbing fixtures, fittings, and
casework.
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 92 00 - 6
2.
G.
a.
Mildew-resistant silicone sealant.
Joints in Floor or Wall Tile:
1.
Including locations specified in Section 09300.
2.
a.
H.
Backer.
4.
Joint shape: Flush joint configuration.
5.
Color: Match grout color, unless otherwise indicated.
Pedestrian Paving Joints and Interior Floor Joints, Less than 1-1/2 Percent Slope:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Two-part pourable polysulfide sealant.
Silicone sealant for Use T.
Two-part pourable urethane sealant.
Two-part non-sag urethane sealant for Use T.
One-part pourable urethane sealant.
2.
Use bond-breaker tape.
3.
Backer.
4.
Joint shape: Flush joint configuration.
Vehicular Paving Joints, Not Over 1-1/2 Percent Slope:
1.
Use the following sealants:
a.
b.
J.
Urethane sealant specifically recommended by manufacturer for use in floor and
wall tile joints.
3.
1.
I.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Interior traffic-bearing joint sealant.
Exterior traffic-bearing joint sealant.
2.
3.
Backer.
Joints Subject to Water Immersion:
1.
Use the following sealants:
a.
Urethane Sealant for Water Immersion.
2.
3.
Backer.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07 92 00 - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
SUMMARY
1.
Interior steel doors and frames
2.
Exterior hurricane resistant doors and frames
1.
Glazing
2.
Fire rated glazing
3.
Hardware
REFERENCES
A.
As indicated by manufacturer.
B.
Building Code references:
1.3
1.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
2.
NFPA 105 - Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening
Protectives
3.
NFPA 252 – Standard Method of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
4.
ANSI/UL 10C - Standard for Safety for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
5.
Miami - Dade County test protocols PA 201, PA 202 and PA 203.
6.
Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 and TAS 203submittals
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of product specified
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing each door and frame type, include quantities,
designation, dimensions, type, level and model, material description, core description,
construction details, label compliance, sound and fire resistance rating and finish. Use same
designation as shown in documents and schedules
1.
Indicate frames configuration, anchor types and spacing, location of cutouts for hardware,
reinforcement, to ensure doors and frames are properly prepared and coordinated to
receive hardware.
2.
Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cutouts for glass
lights and louvers.
C.
Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions
D.
Warranty: Provide product warranty for each type of product
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Supplier: A direct account of the manufacturer who has on permanent staff, an Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC), a Certified Door Consultant (CDC) or an Architectural Openings
SECTION 08 11 13 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Consultant (AOC), who will be available to consult with the Architect and Contractor regarding
matters affecting the door and frame openings.
B.
Hurricane Doors: Provide door systems complying with the Miami-Dade County Product Control
Approval System or the Florida Building Code Approval System requirements of Miami-Dade
County test protocols PA 201, PA 202, PA 203 and Florida Building Code test protocols TAS
201, TAS 202 and TAS 203. Provide NOA or FBC numbers validating compliance.
C.
Bullet resistant door and frame assemblies to be certified by an independent laboratory to
applicable UL standards.
1.
Provide bullet resistant assemblies with minimum UL752, Level 2 rating.
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of the Steel Door Institute.
E.
Installer: Minimum five years documented experience installing products specified this Section
1.5
A.
Storage of Doors
1.
B.
1.6
Store doors vertically in a dry area, under proper cover. Place the units on at least 4" high
wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid storage in nonvented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and promote rusting.
If the door becomes wet, or moisture appears, remove protective wrapping immediately.
Provide a 4" space between the doors to permit air circulation. Proper storage is required
to meet the requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.11 and HMMA 840.
Storage of Frames
1.
Store frames in an upright position with heads uppermost under cover on 4" wood sills on
floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Do not use non-vented plastic or
canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and promote rusting. Store assembled
frames in a vertical position, five units maximum in a stack. Provide a 2" space between
frames to permit air circulation.
2.
Provide proper storage for doors and frames, to maintain the quality and integrity of the
factory applied paint, and maintain the requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.10 and HMMA
840.
3.
Sand, touch up and clean prime painted surfaces prior to finish painting in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of
internal cutouts and reinforcement for door hardware, electric devices and recessed items.
B.
Coordinate work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation.
C.
Sequence installation to accommodate required door hardware.
D.
Verify field dimensions for factory assembled frames prior to fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
1.
Steelcraft, Div. of Ingersoll Rand, 11819 N. Pennsylvania St., Carmel, IN 46032, Toll Free
Tel: 877-671-7011
SECTION 08 11 13 - 2
2.2
A.
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2.
Security Metal Products Corp., 5700 Hannum Ave., Suite 250, Culver City, CA 90230, ph:
310-641-6601
3.
Ceco Door, 9159 Telecom Drive, Milan, TN 38358, ph: 731-686-8345
4.
Curries, 1502 12 Street NW, Mason City, IA 50401, ph: 641-423-1334
5.
6.
Provide steel doors and frames from a single manufacturer.
th
DOORS:
General: Construct exterior/interior doors to the following designs and gages:
1.
Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements.
2.
Prime Finish Doors: Clean, phosphatize and factory prime painted doors indicated on
Door Schedule as HM.
3.
Hardware Reinforcements:
a.
Hinge reinforcements for full mortise hinges: minimum 7 gage (4.7 mm).
b.
Lock reinforcements: minimum 16 gage (1.3 mm).
c.
Closer reinforcements: minimum 14 gage (1.7 mm) steel, 20-inch (508 mm) long.
d.
Galvannealed doors: include galvannealed hardware reinforcements.
e.
Projection welded hinge and lock reinforcements to the edge of the door.
f.
Provided adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required.
Full Flush Doors:
1.
Acceptable Product: Steelcraft L Series.
a.
C.
Performance:
1)
Physical performance: 5 million cycles per ANSI A250.4.
2)
Sound attenuation (gasketed): Honeycomb core, 35 STC.
3)
Thermal performance (gasketed), ASTM C1363: Honeycomb core, 0.653 Ufactor.
4)
Thermal performance (gasketed), ASTM C236. Honeycomb core, 0.363 Ufactor.
b.
Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (45 mm).
c.
Door faces reinforced and sound deadened as follows:
1)
Honeycomb Core: Reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with
impregnated Kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors
and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied
to both panels and honeycomb core.
d.
Vertical edge seams: Provide doors with continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at lock and hinge edges. Finish edges as follows:
e.
Visible Interlocked Edge: Continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints with
visible edge seams and continuous bead of structural epoxy in internal vertical
connection
f.
Bevel hinge and lock door edges 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 2 inches (50 mm). Square
edges on hinge and/or lock stiles are not acceptable.
g.
Reinforce top and bottom of doors with galvannealed 14 gage (1.7 mm), welded to
both panels.
Hurricane Doors: Design to resist the cyclic pressures, static pressures and missile impact loads
as detailed in the Miami-Dade County Product Control Approval System of the Florida Building
SECTION 08 11 13 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Code Approval System and meets the requirements of Miami -Dade County test protocols PA
201, PA 202, PA 203 and Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 and TAS 203.
1.
Face sheets, 14 gage (1.7 mm) galvannealed steel having an A60 zinc-iron alloy coating
conforming to ASTM designations A653 and A924.
2.
Bevel hinge and lock door edges, 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 2 inches (50 mm). Square edges on
hinge and/or lock stiles are not acceptable.
3.
Reinforce top and bottom of doors with galvannealed 14 gage (1.7 mm), welded to both
panels.
4.
Vertical edge seams: Provide doors with continuous vertical mechanical inter-locking
joints at lock and hinge edges. Finish edges as follows:
a.
5.
Door faces reinforced and sound deadened as follows:
a.
b.
2.3
A.
A.
Polystyrene Core: Full 1-3/4 inches (45 mm) thick rigid polystyrene, adhered to
inside of door faces and polystyrene core with waterproof adhesive for bond
strength and rust prevention.
Steel Stiffened Core: Vertical stiffeners, hat-shaped, minimum 20 gage (0.8 mm)
steel, type same as face sheet material, spaced 6 inches (150 mm) apart and
welded to inside of face sheets 5 inches (127 mm) on center; full-thick glass fiber
insulation between stiffeners.
BULLET RESISTANT HOLLOW METAL DOORS
General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of type and design indicated, not less than thickness
indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.
Design: Flush panel.
2.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard bullet resistant door core construction
designed and tested for the specified UL752 standard Level rating.
a.
2.4
Visible Interlocked Edge: Continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints with
visible edge seams and continuous bead of structural epoxy in internal vertical
connection
Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection level specified.
3.
Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Minimum
14 gage (0.067-inch -1.7-mm) thick steel, Model 2 (Fully welded, seamless face and
edges).
4.
Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld
extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth.
Beveled Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
5.
Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 12 gage (0.105-inch -2.7 mm), extending the full width of the door
and welded to the face sheet. Finish top and bottom to provide a smooth flush condition.
6.
Surface Applied Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with
reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets
DOOR FRAMES:
General: Construct exterior/interior metal door frames to the following designs and gages;
1.
Interior Frames in stud wall construction: cold rolled steel, ÅSTM A 1008/A 1008M.
a.
Thickness: 16 gage (1.3 mm).
SECTION 08 11 13 - 4
2.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Interior KD Drywall Frames (Slip-On construction): cold rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A
1008M.
a.
Thickness: 16 gage (1.3 mm).
3.
Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements with galvannealed frames.
4.
Electrical Requirements: Coordinate all electrical requirements for doors and frames.
Make provisions for installation of electrical items so that wiring can be readily removed
and replaced.
a.
B.
Provide cutouts and reinforcements required for metal door frame to accept
electric components.
b.
Frame with Electrical Hinges: Weld UL listed grout guard cover box welded over
center hinge reinforcing. Top or bottom hinge locations are not permitted.
c.
Provide cutouts and reinforcements required to accept security system
components.
d.
Coordinate with Section 08710 for electrified hardware items.
Flush Steel Frames:
1.
Acceptable Product: Steelcraft F-Series.
a.
2.
Construction: Factory-welded three sided frames.
a.
Face welded: Weld miter joints between head and jamb faces completely along
their length either internally or externally. The remaining elements of the frame
profile (soffit, stop and rabbets) are not welded. Grind and finish face joints
smooth.
3.
Profile: 2 inches (51 mm) face dimension with 5/8 inch (16 mm) high stop, and types and
throat dimensions indicated on the Door Schedule.
4.
Provide following reinforcement and accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
C.
Performance:
1)
Physical performance: 5 million cycles per ANSI A250.4
Hinge Preparation for 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high, standard weight, or heavy
weight, full mortise hinges; with plaster guard.
Hinge Preparation for 5 inch (127 mm) high, universal standard weight, or heavy
weight, full mortise hinges; with plaster guard.
Strike preparation (single doors) for 4-7/8 inch (123 mm) universal strike; with
plaster guard.
Silencers. Prepare frames to receive inserted type door silencers, 3 per strike jamb
on single doors, and 2 per head for pair of doors. Stick-on silencers are not
permitted.
Finish: Factory prime finish in accordance with ANSI A 250.10.
Steel Frames for Drywall:
1.
Acceptable Product: Steelcraft K-Series.
2.
Construction: Three-piece knock-down frames; mitered joints, with locking tab at each
head and jamb intersection.
3.
Profile: 2 inches (51 mm) face dimension, 1/2 inch (13 mm) backbend with 5/16 inch (8
mm) return, 5/8 inch (16 mm) high stop, types and throat dimensions indicated.
4.
Provide following reinforcement and accessories:
SECTION 08 11 13 - 5
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
5.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Hinge preparation for 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high, full mortise hinges, 0.134 inch
(3.4 mm) or 0.180 inch (4.6 mm) leaf thickness.
Hinge preparation for 5 inches (127 mm) high full mortise hinges, 0.134 inch (3.4
mm) or 0.180 inch (4.6 mm) leaf thickness.
Strike preparation (single doors) for 4-7/8 inch (125 mm) universal strike; with
plaster guard.
Closer reinforcement: minimum 14 gage (1.7 mm) steel.
Projection weld hinge and strike reinforcements to the door frame.
Provide metal plaster guards for all mortised cutouts.
Include galvannealed hardware reinforcements in all galvannealed frames.
Silencers. Prepare frames to receive inserted type door silencers, 3 per strike jamb
on single doors, and 2 per head for pair of doors. Stick-on silencers are not
permitted.
Anchors: Locate adjustable anchors in each jamb 4 inches (102 mm) from the top of the
door opening to hold frame in rigid alignment.
a.
D.
Provide security anchor at strike jambs on all frames 7 foot 6 inches (2286 mm)
high and over.
b.
Base Anchors for K Series: Exposed fastener type; recessed hole at base of jamb
for countersunk fastener installation.
c.
Finish: Factory prime finish.
Bullet Resistant Hollow Metal Frames:
1.
General: Provide frames of the type and profile indicated, not less than thickness
indicated; to comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
3.
Surface Applied Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6
Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.
4.
Frame Anchors:
a.
b.
c.
2.5
Fabricate frames with mitered corners.
Fabricate frames with "closed and tight" mitered, full depth continuously welded
seams, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated. Knock
down type frames are not permitted.
Minimum 14 gage (0.067-inch -1.7-mm) thick steel sheet.
Jamb Anchors:
1)
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 16 gage (0.8 mm) thickness, with corrugated or perforated straps
not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long.
Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb. Formed from same
material as frames, not less than 14 gage (0.067-inch -1.7-mm) thick.
Mortar Guards: Provide minimum 26 gage mortar guards welded to the back of
each hardware cutout.
ACCESSORLES
A.
Anchors:
Manufacturer's standard framing anchors, specified in manufacturer's printed
installation instructions for project conditions.
B.
Astragals for pairs of doors: Manufacturer's standard for labeled and non-labeled openings.
SECTION 08 11 13 - 6
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Door Bottom:
1.
Acceptable Product: Steelcraft Fas-Seal Door Bottom.
2.
Characteristics: Electrometric, continuous strip, screw-attached to recessed bottom door
channel for concealed installation; double-sealing; acceptable for fire-rated doors up to 3
hour rating.
D.
Plaster Guards: Same material as door frame, minimum 24 gage (0.5 mm) minimum; provide for
all strike boxes.
E.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, Inserted type, three per strike jamb for single openings and two per
head for paired openings. Stick-on silencers shall not be permitted except on hollow metal
framing systems.
F.
Glazing: Specified in Section 08800.
2.6
A.
FABRICATION:
Steel Frames:
1.
Factory-welded frames: Head and jamb intersecting corners mitered at 45 degrees, with
back welded joints ground smooth.
a.
B.
C.
Continuous face weld the joint between the head and jamb faces along their length
either internally or externally. Grind, prime paint, and finish smooth face joints with
no visible face seams.
b.
Externally weld, grind, prime paint, and finish smooth face joints at meeting
mullions or between mullions and other frame members per a current copy of
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
c.
Provide temporary steel spreaders (welded to the jambs at each rabbet of door
openings) on welded frames during shipment. Remove temporary steel spreaders
prior to installation of the frame.
Bullet Resistant Hollow Metal Doors:
1.
Provide cutouts and reinforcements required for electrical and security components
specified elsewhere in this specification.
2.
Fabricate bullet resistant hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or
buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for
thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in
sections for splicing or splining in the field by others.
3.
Tolerances: Fabricate bullet resistant hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
4.
Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gage strap for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section, "Door Hardware".
Bullet Resistant Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping
or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same
thickness metal as frames.
1.
Welded Frames: Full depth continuously weld frame seams; grind, fill, dress, and make
smooth and flush.
a.
Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to
the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame
opening.
SECTION 08 11 13 - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2.
High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide 12 gage angle reinforcements for butt
type hinges on every door and frame assembly.
3.
Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gage straps for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section, "Door Hardware".
4.
Electrical Knock Out Boxes: Factory weld 18 gage electrical knock out boxes to frame for
electrical hardware preps; this includes but not limited to electric through wire transfer
hardware, electrical raceways and wiring harnesses, door position switches, electric
strikes, magnetic locks, and jamb mounted card readers as noted in door hardware sets
in Division 08 Section, "Door Hardware".
a.
b.
c.
d.
Provide electrical knock out boxes as required for Project.
Conduit to be coordinated and installed in the field (Division 26) from middle hinge
box and strike box to door position box.
Electrical knock out boxes to comply with NFPA requirements and fit electrical
door hardware as specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section, "Door
Hardware".
Electrical knock out boxes for continuous hinges should be located in the center of
the vertical dimension on the hinge jamb.
5.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
6.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
D.
2.7
Masonry Types: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 84 inches (2137 mm) high.
Surface Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare bullet resistant hollow metal work to receive
template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08
Section, "Door Hardware."
1.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of bullet resistant hollow metal work for hardware.
4.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division
26 Sections.
COLOR AND FINISH SCHEDULE:
A.
Doors, frames and frame components are required to be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished
with one coat of baked-on rust inhibiting prime paint in accordance with the ANSI/SDI A250.10
“Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and
Frames.”
B.
Provide factory applied backed on primer and baking epoxy of custom colors as shown on
drawings. Field coordinate each color with each frame location. Conduct a site conference to
verify color locations with Architect.
SECTION 08 11 13 - 8
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Verify that project conditions are acceptable before beginning installation of frames.
1.
Verify that completed openings to receive knock-down wrap-around frames are of correct
size and thickness.
2.
Verify that completed concrete or masonry openings to receive butt type frames are of
correct size.
B.
Do not begin installation until conditions have been properly prepared.
C.
Correct unacceptable conditions before proceeding with installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and
with Steel Door Institute's recommended erection instructions for steel frames ANSI A250.11 and
NAAMM/HMMA 840.
B.
Remove temporary steel spreaders prior to installation of frames.
C.
Set frames accurately in position; plumb, align and brace until permanent anchors are set. After
wall construction is complete, remove temporary wood spreaders.
1.
Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings.
2.
Weld, grind, and finish as required to conceal evidence of splicing on exposed faces.
D.
Provide full height 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) to 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) thick strip of polystyrene foam
blocking at frames requiring grouting where continuous hinges are specified. Apply the strip to
the back of the frame, where the hinge is to be installed, to facilitate field drilling or tapping.
E.
Glaze and seal exterior transom, sidelight and window frames in accordance with HMMA-820
TN03.
F.
Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturers' instructions and Section 08710 of
these Specifications. Install hardware with only factory-provided fasteners. Install silencers.
Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, to achieve maximum
operational effectiveness and appearance.
3.3
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects.
B.
Clean and restore soiled surfaces.
condition.
C.
Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat, and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
3.4
A.
Remove scraps and debris and leave site in a clean
PROTECTION
Protect installed products and finished surfaces from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 11 13 - 9
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 08 31 13
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
1.
Non-fire rated and fire rated wall access panels and accessory boxes
2.
Non-fire rated and fire rated ceiling access panels and accessory boxes
3.
Related hardware and attachments
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of access door and panel
assembly, including setting drawings, templates, fire-resistive characteristics, finish
requirements, and details of anchorage devices.
1.
B.
1.3
Include complete schedule, types, locations, construction details, finishes, latching or
locking provisions, required rough-in dimensions and other pertinent data
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for each type of product installed
1.
Door and panel units: Show types, elevations, thickness of metals, full size profiles of
door members.
2.
Hardware: Show materials, finishes, locations of fasteners, types of fasteners, locations
and types of operating hardware, and details of installation.
3.
General: Show connections of units and hardware to other Work. Include schedules
showing location of each type and size of door and panel units.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
Source Limitations: Obtain access door and panel units, and frames for entire Project
from 1 source and 1 manufacturer.
2.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide
access door and panel assemblies with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from
manufacturer listed in Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL), “Building Materials Directory” for
rating shown.
a.
b.
c.
1.4
A.
Provide 90 minute UL label at 2-hour rated partitions.
Provide 3 hour Warnock Hersey label at horizontal applications, up to 24 inch wide
x 36 inch high.
Provide 2 hour Warnock Hersey label at horizontal applications greater than 24
inch wide x 36 inch high.
3.
Size Variations: Obtain Architect’s acceptance and approval of manufacturer’s standard
size units that may vary slightly from sizes indicated on Drawings.
4.
Coordination: Provide inserts and anchoring devices that will be built into other Work for
installation of access door assemblies. Coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid
delay.
Package and ship per manufacturer’s recommendations
SECTION 08 31 13 - 1
B.
1.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Protect materials from physical damage and moisture. Store inside and in a clean, dry location.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during
installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer's written warranty.
B.
Warrant all access panels to be free from manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. Should a product fail to function in
normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURE
the following:
1.
Basis of design: Acudor Products, Inc; 80 Little Falls Road, Fairfield, NJ 07004
2.
Bar-co Access Doors, A division of Alfab Inc, Enterprise
3.
Karp Associates, Inc.
4.
MATERIALS
A.
Commercial quality, cold steel sheet with baked on rust inhibitive gray primer.
B.
Galvanized, bonderized steel with baked on rust inhibitive gray primer.
C.
Type: No. 304 stainless steel with No. 4 satin polish finish.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
ACCESS PANELS
Non rated flush access doors, Acudor UF-5000
1.
Door: Fabricate from 14-gauge cold rolled sheet steel
2.
Frame: Fabricate from 16-gauge cold rolled sheet steel. Provide 1/4 inch mounting holes
with 1” trim flange
3.
Hinge: continuous concealed
4.
Latching/Locking Devices: Key operated cylinder cam lock with 2 keys per lock
5.
Finish: Phosphate dipped with factory applied white baked enamel
Non rated flush access door for drywall , Acudor DW-5040
1.
Door: Fabricate from 20 gage galvanized steel with reinforced edges
2.
Frame: Fabricate from 26 gage galvanized steel, with multiple bends for added strength
3.
Hinge:Concealed
4.
Latching/Locking Devices: Key operated cylinder cam lock with 2 keys per lock,
5.
Finish: Phosphate dipped with factory applied white baked enamel
Recessed Valve Box, Acudor ARVB
1.
Door: Fabricate from16 gage stainless steel, rounded safety corners
2.
Frame: One piece outer flange welded to box
SECTION 08 31 13 - 2
2.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
3.
Box: Fully enclosed, attached to frame
4.
Hinge: Continuous Concealed
5.
Latching/Locking Devices: Cylinder lock & Key
6.
Finish: #4 Satin Polish
FABRICATION
A.
Manufacture each access panel assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.
B.
Welded construction: Furnish with a sufficient quantity of 1/4 inch mounting holes to secure
access panels to types of supports indicated.
C.
Furnish number of latches required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.
B.
Verify mechanical and electrical requirements for ceiling or wall access panels.
3.2
A.
3.3
PREPARATION
Advise installers of work relating to access panel installation including rough opening
dimensions, locations of supports, and anchoring methods. Coordinate delivery with other work
to avoid delay.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install access door and frame units per manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install access doors and panels accurately in position. Adjust hardware and door and panels for
proper operation.
C.
Install fire-rated access doors and panels according to NFPA 80.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 31 13 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 08 56 53
SECURITY ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS, WINDOWS AND ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
B.
1.
1.2
A.
A.
B.
Glazing
DISCRIPTION OF WORK
Contractor shall provide a security rated aluminum storefront, window and entrance system as
identified in the contract documents. The systems shall also be wind and impact resistant as
required by the latest addition of the Florida Building Code.
1.
1.3
Security and Bullet Resistant Aluminum Storefront Framing System
Provide security rating of bullet resistant materials as identified by UL 752: Level 3
REFERENCES
AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1.
AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 “Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and
Wood Windows and Glass Doors”
2.
AAMA 502-02 "Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass
Doors"
3.
AAMA 611-98 "Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum"
4.
AAMA 800-92 "Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants"
5.
AAMA 2603-02 “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and
Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels”
6.
AAMA 2604-02 “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
Panels”
7.
AAMA 2605-02 “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
Panels”
8.
AAMA CW-10-97 "Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site"
9.
AAMA 101.1 Performance Class AW
Test
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1.
ASTM E 283-99 "Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors" 07-021 08520-2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS (361)
2.
ASTM E 330-97 "Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference"
3.
ASTM E 331-00 "Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference"
4.
ASTM C1036-06 Standard Specification for Flat Glass
SECTION 08 56 53 - 1
5.
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
ASTM C1349-04 Standard Specification for Architectural Flat Glass Clad Polycarbonate
FBC TAS – Miami-Dade County
1.
Air Infiltration Test, per FBC, TAS 202-94
2.
Uniform Static Air Pressure Test, Loading per FBC TAS 202-94
3.
Water Resistance Test, per FBC, TAS 202-94
4.
Large Missile Impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94
5.
Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC, TAS 203-94
6.
Forced Entry Test, per FBC 2411 3.2.1, TAS 202-94
D.
Underwriters Laboratories UL 752- Testing for ballistic resistance.
E.
GSA PBS-P100 Facilities Standards
F.
UFC 4-010-01 Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) DOD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for
Buildings
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare, review, approve, and submit specified submittals in accordance with
"Conditions of the Contract" and Division 1 Submittals Sections. Product data, shop drawings,
samples, and similar submittals are defined in "Conditions of the Contract."
B.
Product Data: Submit product data for each type storefront series specified.
C.
Substitutions: Whenever substitute products are to be considered, supporting technical data,
samples, and test reports must be submitted ten (10) working days prior to bid date in order to
make a valid comparison.
D.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components,
including anchorage, accessories, finish colors and textures.
E.
Samples for Verification:
F.
1.5
A.
B.
1.
Architectural Framing System: Submit samples for colors on actual aluminum substrates
indicating full color range expected in installed system.
2.
Glazing: Submit approximately 4x4 samples of available colors, tint and film from full
color range available.
Quality Assurance / Control Submittals:
1.
Test Reports:
Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified
performance characteristics and physical properties.
2.
Installer Qualification Data: Submit installer qualification data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications:
1.
Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced (as determined by contractor) to perform
work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required
for this project. If requested by Owner, submit reference list of completed projects.
2.
Manufacturer Qualifications:
Manufacturer
representation during construction process.
capable
of
providing
field
service
Mock-Ups (Field Constructed): Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products
and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Owner's and Architect's acceptance of
finish color, and workmanship standard.
SECTION 08 56 53 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison;
remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required.
2.
Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner's
approval.
C.
Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements,
substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty
requirements.
D.
Performance Requirements
1.
Conformance to
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
Underwriters Laboratories UL 752- Testing for ballistic resistance
1)
The complete system, framing, glazing and panels is designed to comply
with Underwriters Laboratories UL 752 specification to provide complete
ballistic protection up to a level 3 rating (.44 magnum lead semi-wad-cutter
gas checked)
2)
Proof of certification will be made available upon request.
FBC TAS – Miami-Dade County
1)
Air Infiltration Test, per FBC, TAS 202-94
2)
Uniform Static Air Pressure Test, Loading per FBC TAS 202- 94
3)
Water Resistance Test, per FBC, TAS 202-94
4)
Large Missile Impact Test per FBC, TAS 201-94
5)
Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading per FBC, TAS 203-94
6)
Forced Entry Test, per FBC 2411 3.2.1, TAS 202-94
GSA PBS-P100 Facilities Standards: GSA Building Classifications C & D Blast
Resistant
UFC 4-010-01 Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) DOD Minimum Antiterrorism
Standards for Buildings : Low Level Blast Resistant
Handle and protect windows and accessories in accordance with AAMA CW-10-97 until project
completion.
Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before
fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements,
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
WARRANTY
A.
Project Warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provisions.
B.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty
document executed by an authorized company official.
1.
Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s one (1) year standard warranty commencing on the
substantial date of completion for the project provided that the warranty, in no event,
shall start later than six (6) months from the date of shipment.
2.
Organic finish conforming to AAMA 2605-02: warrant for ten years against chipping,
peeling, cracking, chalking, or fading.
SECTION 08 56 53 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM
the following:
1.
Basis of Design: Insulgard Security Products, Brighton, MI 48116, 800.624.6315
a.
2.
B.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.
All components shall conform to the tested assembly requirements described in the
tested assembly per FPA or NOA Documentation.
2.
3” Framing System: Head, Jamb, Sill Members: 2” x 3”, Mullion 4 1/4” X 3”
3.
Finish: Factory-applied
4.
Frames: All framing shall be totally factory fabricated (field fabrication is not acceptable).
All joints and connections shall be tight, providing hairline joints and true alignment of
adjacent members. The system shall incorporate a weep design allowing any water
penetration or internal condensation to flow through the system and exit to the exterior at
the horizontal members.
5.
Material: All components will be constructed from extruded aluminum in 6061-T6 alloy /
temper, or equal.
6.
Glazing Material: Glass Clad Polycarbonate or Laminated IGU
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Storefront System: 44/300 Architectural Aluminum Framing System; Bullet, Blast,
Wind and Impact Resistant with Armor-gard BALULN25 Ballistics Security Glass
Clad Polycarbonate glazing
Performance: Level 3
Description: Armor-Gard BALULN25 Ballistics Security Glass Clad Polycarbonate
Nominal Thickness: .0980”
Weight: 11.3 LBS per SF
7.
Anchors: All anchorage will be a fully concealed
8.
All internal framing fasteners shall be type 18-8 stainless steel. Framing to building
structure will be grade 5, cadmium or nickel plated. The interior glazing gaskets shall be
closed cell neoprene (40-50 Shore “A” Durometer). All neoprene shall be in strict
compliance with ASTM C-509- 89 Type II option 1 and C-864.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum extrusions: Produced from commercial quality 6061-T6 alloy; free from defects
impairing strength and durability.
B.
Glazing: Bullet Resistant Security Glazing
2.3
ACCESSORIES
1.
Fasteners: Zinc plated steel concealed fasteners; Hardened aluminum alloys or AISI 300
series stainless steel exposed fasteners, or as recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Glazing: Setting blocks, edge blocks, and spacers in accordance with ASTM C 864,
shore durometer hardness as recommended by manufacturer; Glazing gaskets in
accordance with ASTM C 864.
SECTION 08 56 53 - 4
3.
2.4
A.
2.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
0.050 Aluminum Sill Flashing End Dams must have 3 point attachment.
FABRICATION
Shop Assembly: Fabricate and assemble units with joints only at intersection of aluminum
members with uniform hairline joints; rigidly secure, and sealed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
1.
Hardware: Drill and cut to template for hardware. Reinforce frames and door stiles to
receive hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.
Welding: Conceal welds on aluminum members in accordance with AWS
recommendations or methods recommended by manufacturer. Members showing
welding bloom or discoloration on finish or material distortion will be rejected.
FINISHES AND COLORS
A.
Application: On clean extrusions free from serious surface blemishes; on exposed surfaces
visible when installed.
B.
Paint Coating:
C.
D.
1.
PPG Duranar with resin containing 70% fluoropolymer; thermosetting; alternative finishes
will not be acceptable.
2.
Quality standard: conforming to AAMA 2605-02
3.
Pretreatment: five-stage; zinc chromate conversion coating.
4.
Application: electrostatic spray and oven bake by approved applicator.
5.
Coating quantity: minimum one primer coat and one color coat.
6.
Dry film thickness: minimum 1.2 mils on exposed surfaces, except inside corners and
channels.
Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M10C22A31 Mechanical Finish: as fabricated; Chemical
Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.40 mils
minimum complying with AAMA 611-98, and the following:
1.
AAMA 607.1
2.
Applicator must be fully compliant with all applicable environmental regulations and
permits, including wastewater and heavy metal discharge.
Color and Finish Schedule:
1.
Architectural Framing System:
a.
2.
Clear Anodized
Glazing
a.
Color/Tint shall be selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard available
options.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Site Verification of Conditions: Verify conditions (which have been previously installed under
other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
SECTION 08 56 53 - 5
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage
during product installation.
1.
B.
3.3
A.
3.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Aluminum Surface Protection: Protect aluminum surfaces from contact with lime, mortar,
cement, acids, and other harmful contaminants.
Prepare openings to be in tolerance, plumb, level, provide for secure anchoring, and in
accordance with approved shop drawings.
INSTALLATION
General: Install manufacturer's system in accordance with shop drawings, and within specified
tolerances.
1.
Protect aluminum members in contact with masonry, steel, concrete, or dissimilar
materials using nylon pads or bituminous coating.
2.
Shim and brace aluminum system before anchoring to structure.
3.
Provide sill flashing at exterior storefront systems. Extend extruded flashing continuous
with splice joints; set in continuous beads of sealant.
4.
Verify storefront system allows water entering system to be collected in gutters and wept
to exterior. Verify metal joints are sealed in accordance with manufacturers installation
instructions.
5.
Locate expansion mullions where indicated on reviewed shop drawings.
6.
Seal metal to metal storefront system joints using sealant recommended by system
manufacturer.
7.
Glazing contractor must be approved by the manufacturer
8.
Manufacturer to provide detailed installation instructions.
9.
Provide required support and securely fasten and set windows plumb, square, and level
without twist or bow.
10.
Apply sealant per window and sealant manufacturer's recommendations at all specified
areas as shown on shop drawings and detailed in installation instructions. Wipe off
excess, and leave exposed sealant surfaces clean and smooth.
A.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon request, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of
site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Field Test: Conduct field test to determine water tightness of storefront system. Conduct test in
accordance with AAMA 501.2.
3.5
A.
Adjust windows as necessary for weather tightness, and leave windows clean and free of
construction debris.
B.
Cleaning:
The General Contractor shall clean installed products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance, and remove construction debris from
project site. Legally dispose of debris.
C.
Protection: The General Contractor shall protect the installed product's finish surfaces from
damage during construction.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 56 53 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for
swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same
sections as the doors and frames on which they are to be installed.
B.
C.
1.
Hinges.
2.
Spring hinges.
3.
Key control systems.
4.
Locks cylinders and keys.
5.
Locks and latch sets.
6.
Bolts.
7.
Exit devices.
8.
Push/pull units.
9.
Closers.
10.
Overhead holders.
11.
Miscellaneous door control devices.
12.
Door trim units.
13.
Protection plates.
14.
Weatherstripping for exterior doors.
15.
Sound stripping for doors.
16.
Thresholds.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this section include:
1.
1.2
Cylinders for locks on entrance doors.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/BHMA (Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association) - A156 series.
B.
NFPA 80 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Doors and Windows.
C.
NFPA 252 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D.
UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Building Materials Directory.
1.3
A.
Fire Rated Openings: Provide door hardware listed by UL or Warnock Hersey or other testing
laboratory approved by applicable authorities.
1.
Hardware: Tested in accordance with NFPA 252.
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 1
1.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications sections.
B.
Product data including manufacturer’s technical product data for each item of door hardware,
installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information
necessary to show compliance with requirements
C.
Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1.
Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into
“hardware sets” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
D.
2.
Submittal sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where
acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in
the Project construction schedule. Include with the schedule the product data, samples,
shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential
to the coordinated review of the schedule.
3.
Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner’s
final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
Submit samples of each type of exposed hardware unit as required in finish indicated and
tagged with a full description for coordination with the schedule. Submit samples prior to
submission of final hardware schedule.
1.
E.
1.5
Type, style function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
Name and manufacturer of each item.
Fastening and other pertinent information.
Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on the drawings,
both on the floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in the schedule.
Mounting locations for hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
Keying information.
Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final
check of operation, be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination
requirements.
Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation
of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key
code.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements,
and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
C.
Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 2
1.6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers,
etc.) from a single manufacturer.
B.
Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing
capabilities in the projects vicinity, that has a record of successful in-services performance for
supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project and
that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to the
Owner, architect, and contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for
consultation.
1.
C.
1.7
Require supplier to meet with the Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain
final instructions in writing.
Fire-Rated openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA
Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or
other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on
types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door
frame labels.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.
B.
Include persons involved with installation of doors, frames, and hardware.
1.8
A.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and
include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B.
Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As material is received by
hardware supplier from various manufacturer’s, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked
with appropriate hardware sets number to match set numbers approved hardware schedule.
Two or more identical sets may be packed in the same container.
C.
Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer
until each is satisfied that the count is correct.
D.
Package hardware items individually with necessary fasteners, instructions, and installation
templates, when necessary; label and identify each package with door opening code to match
hardware schedule.
E.
Delivery individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or
project site).
F.
Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control
handling and installation of hardware items that are not yet immediately replaceable so that
completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
1.9
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of
internal reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items.
1.
Provide templates or actual hardware as required to insure proper preparation of doors
and frames.
B.
Sequence installation to accommodate required utility connections.
C.
Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during course of Work.
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 3
1.10
A.
1.11
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
WARRANTY
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for locksets and door closers.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as need for the Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
B.
Furnish maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
1.12
A.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish ten extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
MANUFACTURER
the following:
1.
Basis of Design: Refer to sub-paragraphs below.
2.
Materials
1.
Butts and hinges:
a.
2.
Cylinders and Locks:
a.
3.
Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware.
LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
Norton Door Controls
Sargent Manufacturing Company.
Door Trim Units:
a.
b.
6.
Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware.*
Sargent Manufacturing Company.
Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
Yale Commercial Hardware
Overhead Closers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
Exit/Panic Devices:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Hager Hinge Co.
Rockwood Manufacturing.
Trimco Mfg. Co
Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates:
a.
b.
c.
Rockwood Manufacturing.
Ives, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco)
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 4
7.
Door Stripping and Seals:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
8.
A.
A.
National Guard Products, Inc.
Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Reese Enterprises, Inc.
Zero International, Inc.
McKinney Products Co.
SCHEDULE HARDWARE
Requirements for design\, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type
of finish hardware are indicated in the “” Hardware Schedule” at the end of this section.
Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:
1.
Manufacturer’s Product Designations: The product designation and name of one
manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one
manufacturer is specified under the Article “Manufacturers” in Part 2 for each hardware
type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with
requirements.
2.
ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this section or in schedules to describe
hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards
and requirements specified elsewhere in this section.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
2.3
National Guard Products, Inc.
Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.*
Reese Enterprises, Inc.
Zero International, Inc.
McKinney Products Co.
Thresholds:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1.
Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2.
Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.3.
Door Controls - Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4.
Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5.
Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6.
Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7.
Door Controls – Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8.
Interconnected Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.12.
Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13.
Sliding and Folding Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14.
Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15.
Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16.
Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI/BHMA A156.17.
Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18.
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
Manufacturer’s Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer’s name products that have manufacturer’s
name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit) removable name plates) except in
conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to the architect.
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 5
1.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Manufacturer’s identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B.
Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using
manufacturer’s standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of
lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish
designations indicated.
C.
Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for
self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
D.
Furnish screw for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except
as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match
hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as
closely as possible including “prepared for paint” surfaces to receive painted finish.
E.
Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to
the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use
thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless
their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely.
Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt
or use sex crew fasteners.
2.4
HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS
A.
Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors
and frames, provide only template-produced units.
B.
Screws:
C.
2.5
1.
For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
2.
For wood doors and frames, install wood screws.
3.
For fire-rated wood doors, install #12 x 1-1/4 inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood
screws.
4.
Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivot.
5.
Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
Hinges for special doors are listed in hardware sets.
LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
Provide keying to match existing masterkey system for the project.
B.
Equip locks with manufacturer’s special 6-pin tumbler cylinder with construction masterkey
feature that permits voiding or construction keys without cylinder removal.
C.
Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
D.
Comply with Owner’s instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide
individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of
related locks.
1.
Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer’s
key symbol, and location, “DO NOT DUPLICATE.”
E.
Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F.
Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system and 5
grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system
1.
Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 6
2.6
A.
2.
Furnish 50 key blanks per keyway
3.
Furnish ten construction master keys.
4.
Deliver all permanent keys to the Owner.
KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt
forms , 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers and standard metal
cabinet, all as recommended by the system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of the number
of locks required for the project.
1.
2.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Provide hinged-panels type cabinet for wall mounting.
LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS
A.
Locksets shall be one of the manufacturers listed in Para. 2.1 l and shall be furnished in the
function as specified in the hardware sets.
B.
All knobs or levers, escutcheons, locksets and cylinders shall be products of one manufacturer.
C.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
1.
Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, anti-friction latchbolts as recommended by
the manufacturer.
2.
Provide extra long strike lips for locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3.
Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into frame heads, unless otherwise
indicated.
4.
Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction
provides non-recessed strike for bolt.
5.
Provide roller type strikes where recommended by the manufacturer of the latch and lock
units.
Lock Throw: Provide 5/8” minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors.
requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
1.
Comply with UL
Provide 1/2 minimum throw of latch for other bored and pre-assembled types of locks and
3/4” minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1” minimum throw for all dead
bolts.
E.
Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2” diameter rods of brass, bronze or stainless steel with
minimum 12” long rod for doors up to 7’0” in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors
exceeding 7’0” in height.
F.
Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped
with exit devices, equip the units with keyed dogging devices to keep the latch bolt retracted,
when engaged.
G.
Rabbeted Doors: Where rabbeted door stiles are indicated, provide special rabbeted front on
lock and latch units and bolts.
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
PUSH/PULL UNITS
Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard exposed fasteners for installation, thrubolted for matched pairs but not for single units.
CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, furnish units that are adjustable.
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 7
1.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated.
B.
Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be
accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1
provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing.
C.
Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers.
D.
All closers shall be fully adjustable type with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 through
6; field adjustable according to door size and frequency of use.
E.
Adjust all reduced spring power closers on doors to meet disabled accessibility requirements
including but not limited to the following:
1.
The sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 70
degrees, the door will take at least five seconds to move to a point three inches from the
latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
2.
Maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be 5 lbf. for interior hinged doors
and 8.5 lb for exterior hinged doors.
F.
Where closers are indicated to be closer/stop, provide units with a rigid arm assembly and a
heavy duty bracket with built-in lug to provide a means of positive stop. For closer/holders,
provide units with an additional built-in holder designed to hold open against normal wind and
traffic conditions. Holder shall be activated manually.
G.
Where closers are indicated to be delayed action (DA and DEL), provide units designed with an
adjustable delay that holds the door open before the closing cycle begins.
H.
All closers shall be of one manufacturer, matching design. All closers shall have adjustable back
check to provide a cushioning effect toward the end of the opening cycle.
I.
Furnish parallel arm brackets for all closers opening out. Where overhead stops and holders are
listed, provide proper bracket for clearance. Furnish flush mount transom bracket where no
transom bar exists. Furnish top jamb closer and bracket where required by job conditions.
Indicate in hardware schedule all doors requiring parallel arm, flush mount or top jamb brackets.
2.10
DOOR TRIM UNITS
A.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard exposed fasteners for door trim consisting of either
machine screws or self-tapping screws.
B.
Fabricate metal protection plates not more than 2 inches less than door width on hinge side and
not more than 2 inches less than the door width on the pull side by height indicated.
1.
2.11
Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage).
WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A.
General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light or sound doors
on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior
applications and elsewhere as indicated.
B.
Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by the manufacturer.
2.12
A.
THRESHOLDS
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and
profile as shown or scheduled.
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 8
2.13
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
HARDWARE FINISHES
A.
Match items to the manufacturer’s standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or
push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B.
Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the
architect’s sample.
C.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness
and other qualities complying with the manufacturer’s standards, but in case less than specified
by reference standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D.
Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze and
aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix A-NL @ is used with standard finish
designations to indicate “no lacquer”.
E.
The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the
industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as other wise noted.
1.
Rust-Resistant Finish: For iron and steel base metal required for exterior work and in
areas show as “High Humidity” areas (and also when designed with the suffix-RR),
provide 0.2-mil-thick copper coating on base metal before applying brass, bronze, nickel
or chrome plate finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware and dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings.
B.
Verify electric power is available to power operated devices and is of correct characteristics.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as
specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise
directed by the Architect.
1.
“Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”
by the Door and Hardware Institute.
B.
Install each door hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surface
that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the
substrates involved.
C.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
D.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E.
Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutelene mastic sealant
complying with the requirements specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealers”.
F.
Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations
to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
Space
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 9
3.3
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation
and function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly
or as intended for the application made.
1.
Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy
of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or
occupancy and a make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space
or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of
hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C.
Instruct Owner’s personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and
hardware finishes.
D.
Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the
installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of
door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the project to perform
the following work:
3.4
1.
Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of
doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements.
2.
Consult with and instruct Owners personnel in recommended additions to the
maintenance procedure.
3.
Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or
installation of hardware units.
SCHEDULES
A.
The following hardware sets are intended to establish type and standard of quality when used
together with this section's requirements. Examine Drawings and Specifications and furnish
proper hardware for door openings.
B.
Hardware Set 1:
1.
1 ea. Continuous Geared Hinge, 780 Hager Roton, Heavy Duty, Concealed Leaf, Clear
anodized aluminum finish.
2.
1 ea. Lockset, Schlage, LV9457
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Type: Classroom Security Lock
Lever Design: 93
Accessories:
1)
Escutcheon: L Full Face, Interior and Exterior
2)
Armored Front Strike
Finish: US26D
1 ea. Closer, LCN 4210T
a.
b.
Type: Stop Face
Finish: Plated – US26D
4.
1 ea. Kick Plate, 8” tall – push side mounting, US26D
5.
1 ea. Threshold, Pemko, compatible with door, seals, stops, and floor finishes
a.
b.
ADA compliant
Finish: US26D / Milled Finish Aluminum
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 10
6.
1 ea. Perimeter Seal, National Guard 700 EN
a.
b.
7.
C.
Finish: Mill Finish Aluminum
Coordinate magnetic locking with Security Systems
Hardware Set 2:
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Type: Corridor Lock
Lever Design: 93
Accessories: Escutcheon: L Full Face, Interior and Exterior
Finish: US26D
1 ea. Closer, LCN 4210T
a.
b.
Type: Stop Face
Finish: Plated – US26D
4.
5.
1 ea. Threshold, Pemko, compatible with door, seals, stops, and floor finishes
a.
b.
6.
7.
Type: Neoprene Perimeter seal for parallel arm closer
1 ea. Drip Strip, National Guard 17
a.
8.
ADA compliant
Finish: US26D / Milled Finish Aluminum
1 ea. Perimeter Seal, National Guard 700 EN
a.
b.
D.
Type: Neoprene Perimeter seal for parallel arm closer
1 ea. Drip Strip, National Guard 17
a.
8.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Hardware Set 3:
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Type: Corridor Lock
Lever Design: 93
Accessories: Rose: B Wrought Rose
Finish: US26D
3.
4.
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00 - 11
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 09 22 16
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.
Non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
a.
b.
1.2
Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring,
etc.).
Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM
E413 by an independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled
content is not less than 25 percent.
B.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.
2.2
1.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.
Protective Coating: ASTM A653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise
indicated.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch diameter wire, or
double strand of0.0475-inch diameter wire.
B.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A 641M, Class 1zinc coating, soft temper, 0162-inch diameter.
C.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538
inch and minimum 1/2” inch wide flanges.
1.
D.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings
Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide
flanges, ¾ inch deep.
2.
Steel Studs: ASTM C645.
a.
b.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings
SECTION 09 22 16 - 1
3.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, 7/8 inch and 1-1/2 inch deep.
a.
4.
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main
beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings
Resilient Furring Channels: 1I2-inch deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
a.
E.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System.
USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
B.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645.
1.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gage minimum or heavier as indicated on Drawings.
2.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings or 3-1/2 inches, 6 inches, 2-1/2 inches
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral
bracing.
2.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a.
C.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1.
D.
E.
F.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1)
Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.
2)
Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
3)
Dietrich Metal Framing.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1I2-inch wide
flanges.
1.
2.
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick, galvanized steel.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645.
1.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings
2.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings 1-1/2 inches.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1I2-inch wide
flanges.
1.
SECTION 09 22 16 - 2
2.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum baresteel thickness of0.0312 inch
3.
Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A 641 M, Class 1zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inchdiameter
wire.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), non-perforated.
2.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C841 that apply to
framing installation.
2.
Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C1063
that apply to framing installation.
3.
Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C844 that
apply to framing installation.
4.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to
framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
SECTION 09 22 16 - 3
3.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Install suspension system components in sizes and spacing indicated on Drawings, but not less
than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly
components indicated.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacing that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced installation standards
3.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4.
Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
5.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.5
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
C.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
SECTION 09 22 16 - 4
2.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
c.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1I2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
3.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
4.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a.
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 22 16 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 09 24 00
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
1.2
Plaster and Stucco finishes
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
B.
ASTM C847: Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
C.
ASTM C926: Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
D.
ASTM C933: Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath.
E.
ASTM C1032: Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base.
F.
ASTM C1063: Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior
and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
G.
ICC-ES AC11: Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings.
H.
ESR-1471: ICC Evaluation Service, Inc., ESR-1471.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Installation methods.
C.
Selection Samples: Samples of color exterior plaster shall be submitted for color selection.
When requested by the Architect, a 6 in x 6 in sample panel of exterior cement plaster in the
selected color(s) shall be submitted for approval. Samples of metal lath, metal furring devices,
trim, and plastering accessories shall be submitted for approval.
D.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches
(150 mm) square, represent actual product, color, and patterns.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Experienced in the manufacturing of pre-sanded materials.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Shall provide evidence of qualifications to apply the basecoat.
C.
Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1.
Finish areas designated by Architect.
2.
Construct mock-up as per construction documents.
3.
Show workmanship of finished work.
4.
Proceed with work only after the mock-up has been approved.
SECTION 09 24 00 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
5.
Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
6.
Maintain the mock-up on site and remove at the completion of the project.
D.
Regulatory requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements for finish system.
E.
Designing and Detailing the Basecoat.
F.
G.
1.
Use the manufacturer's installation instructions, published details, and technical
information verifying that all materials meet specification.
2.
Sealants and backer rod are required at dissimilar materials and expansion joints within
the basecoat system to provide a watertight system.
3.
Minimum slope for all projections shall be 1;2 with a maximum length of 12 inches (305
mm) unless other manufacturer approved detailing is shown on the construction
documents.
Substrate Systems:
1.
Deflection of the substrate systems shall not exceed L/360.
2.
Acceptable substrates are water-resistant core exterior grade gypsum sheathing (ASTM
C1396), Dens-Glass Gold sheathing (ASTM C1177), fiberboard ANSI/AHA A 194-85,
exposure 1 (Grade C-D or better) plywood, expanded polystyrene insulation board ASTM
C578, cement board (ASTM C1325), poured concrete, and masonry units.
3.
Painted and otherwise coated surfaces of brick, unit masonry, stucco and concrete shall
be inspected and prepared as approved by manufacturer's technical department before
application. Paint-on surface consolidates or primers shall not be used to bond base coat
to painted surfaces.
4.
Provide approval from manufacturer's technical department, in writing, prior to the
application, of other substrates.
5.
The applicator shall verify that the proposed substrate is acceptable prior to the base coat
installation.
System Joints:
1.
1.5
Expansion joints in the system are required at building expansion joints, at prefabricated
panel joints, where substrates change and where structural movement is anticipated.
Control joints are required at a minimum of every 13 sq. meters (144 sf) of wall surface
area and where specified by the design professional. The maximum uncontrolled length
or width is 18 lf (5.5 lineal meters) and a maximum uncontrolled length to width ratio of 21/2 to 1.
A.
Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Deliver materials in original unopened packages with manufacturer's labels intact.
C.
Protect materials during transportation and installation to avoid physical damage.
D.
Store materials in cool, dry place protected from freezing.
E.
Handle materials and products with appropriate precautions and care per MSDS information
1.6
A.
Do not apply materials in ambient temperatures below 40 degree F (4 degree C). Provide
supplementary heat during installation and drying period when temperatures less than 40 degree
F (4 degree C) prevail.
B.
Do not apply materials to frozen surfaces.
SECTION 09 24 00 - 2
C.
1.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Maintain ambient temperature at or above 40 degree F (4 degree C) during and at least 24 hours
after base coat installation and until dry.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate and schedule installation of the base coat with related work of other sections.
B.
Coordinate and schedule installation of trim, flashing, and joint sealers to prevent water
infiltration behind the system.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Provide a manufacturer's warranty based on the information provided by the applicator or the
distributor following the completion of the system.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's project review requirements and notification procedures to assure
qualification for warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
PLASTERING SYSTEM
the following:
1.
Basis of design: Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc.; Redmond, WA 98052; 800-305-1045
2.
Division
MATERIALS
A.
General: The materials for lath and plasterwork shall conform to the applicable requirements of
ASTM C 841 and ASTM C 842.
B.
Exterior Plaster:
C.
Fiberglass Reinforcing Mesh - Balanced open weave fiberglass reinforcing mesh, treated for
compatibility with other materials of the system. The fabric shall not be less than 4.4 oz (± 10%)
per square yard.
D.
Base coat - PRM (Polymer Reinforced Mortar) Base or Stuc-O-Base is a fiber reinforced, 100%
acrylic polymer modified cement base coat that has good water resistance and vapor
permeability.
E.
Finish Coat functions as the weathering surface. It is a factory mixed Finish supplied by STUCO-FLEX in various colors, finishes and textures.
F.
Plasters: Plasters shall conform to the following requirements:
1.
Thickness of exterior plaster shall be not less than 7/8 in over stud/lath construction or
1/2 in over masonry unless recommended to be thicker by product manufacturer.
2.
Exterior cement plaster over concrete block shall consist of a bonding agent applied to
wall, application of a Portland cement scratch coat, and application of a finish coat.
3.
Cement for Portland cement plaster shall be Type I or Type II Portland cement as
specified in ASTM C 150.
4.
Finish Coat Portland Cement (Stucco), complying with ASTM C 150.
5.
Lime or hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 206 and quicklime shall conform to
ASTM C 5. Lime putty shall weigh no less than 33 lb/cu ft and shall be made of hydrated
lime or quicklime.
SECTION 09 24 00 - 3
2.3
A.
2.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
6.
Bonding agents shall be a non-water-deteriorating, non-oxidizing, non-crystallizing, liquid,
resinous water-emulsion designed for exterior use. Bonding agent shall provide a
permanent bond for gypsum, lime putty, cement or acoustical plaster finishes to gypsum,
cement plaster, concrete, masonry, wood or steel, whether the surfaces are painted or
unpainted, old or new, damp or dry. It shall be free from any tendency to hard or craze
crack. It shall be non-toxic, vermin proof, and non-combustible. Bonding agents shall be
certified to be non-deteriorating as shown by minimum 2 year controlled laboratory test.
Bonding agents shall be Weldcrete by Larson Products Corp., Enco Weld by Enco
Products; or equal.
7.
Gypsum plaster shall conform to ASTM C 28
8.
Cement shall conform to ASTM C 61, or Federal Specification SS-C-161A.
9.
Finish coat sand for exterior cement plaster finish coat shall be No. 30.
ACCESSORIES
Metal and welded wire shapes used as base screeds, casing beads, ventilating screeds, weep
screeds, control joints, etc., shall be of such size and dimension as to provide for the full required
plaster thickness. Accessories shall be fabricated of minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel,
minimum 19-gauge galvanized wire or .050 extruded aluminum.
1.
Corner beads and control joints with short or expanded flanges shall be fabricated from a
minimum 0.050 extruded aluminum.
2.
Drip screed or weep screed and casing beads shall be fabricated from a minimum 0.050
extruded aluminum.
3.
Expansion joint trim shall be extruded aluminum.
MISC. MATERIALS
A.
Nails: nails shall conform to Federal Specifications FF-N-105B(3) Int. Amd. 4.
B.
Staples: Staples shall be USS 14 gauge, flattened, galvanized wire staples.
C.
Unspecified materials: Unspecified materials and fasteners shall meet or exceed the
requirements of SSBC and other reference standards. In case of conflict, the most stringent
requirements shall govern.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Walls:
1.
Substrates:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Acceptable Substrates: exposure 1 or exterior grade plywood sheathing (Grade CD or better); exposure 1 OSB; cement boards conforming with (ASTM C1325);
poured concrete/unit masonry; Dens-Glass Gold sheathing (ASTM C1177); or
gypsum sheathing (ASTM C1396).
Wall sheathings shall be securely fastened per applicable building code
requirements.
Examine surfaces to receive system and verify that substrate and adjacent
materials are dry, clean, and sound. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of fins or
planar irregularities greater than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3m).
Flashings:
SECTION 09 24 00 - 4
a.
b.
c.
3.
Heads, jambs and sills of all openings must be flashed with a minimum 9 inches
(230 mm) strip of secondary moisture barrier prior to window/door, HVAC,
installation.
Windows and openings shall be flashed according to design and building code
requirements.
Individual windows that are ganged to make multiple units require continuous head
flashing and/or the joints between the units must be fully sealed.
Utilities:
a.
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
The system shall be properly terminated (back-wrapped, sealed, flashed) at all
lighting fixtures, electrical outlets, hose bibs, dryer vents, etc.
Roof:
1.
Verify that all roof flashings have been installed in accordance with the guidelines set by
the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA).
2.
Kick-out Flashing:
a.
C.
3.2
Kick-out flashing shall be installed where required prior to the application of the
base coat. The kick-out flashing shall be leak-proof and angled (min 100 degrees)
to allow for proper drainage and water diversion.
Unsatisfactory conditions shall be reported to the architect and/or owner. Do not proceed until all
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
MIXING
A.
General: No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions. Close
containers when not in use. Prepare in a container that is clean and free of foreign substances.
Do not use a container which has contained or been cleaned with a petroleum-based product.
Use a mixer which is clean and free of foreign substances. Clean tools with soap and water
immediately after use.
B.
Base Coat:
3.3
1.
Place 2/3 of the required potable water into the mixer. Typically one bag requires 1.5 to 2
gallons (5.5 l to 7.5 l) of water.
2.
Add the bag(s) of base coat
3.
Mix for 4 to 5 minutes and then let the mixture slake for 3 to 4 minutes.
4.
Re-mix to break the initial set add small amounts of water to adjust the consistency.
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
B.
Apply to approved substrates in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and government
code requirements.
C.
Trim Junction:
1.
When two pieces of trim abut:
a.
b.
c.
Set intersection of trim in a minimum 4 inches (100 mm) bed of trim sealant
approved by the manufacturer.
Allow 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch (3 to 5 mm) gap between the abutting trim pieces. Do
not overlap trim.
Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Working
expansion joints shall be fastened to the structural substrate.
SECTION 09 24 00 - 5
2.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
When two or more pieces of trim intersect:
a.
b.
c.
D.
The vertical trim piece shall be continuous with all horizontal pieces.
Miter all corners at intersections of trim.
Set intersection of trim in a minimum 4 inches (100 mm) bed of trim sealant
approved by the manufacturer.
d.
Allow 3/16 inch (5 mm) gap between the intersecting trim pieces. Do not overlap
the trim.
e.
Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Working
expansion joints shall be fastened to the structural substrate.
Base Coat and Reinforcing Fabric
1.
Apply STUC-O-FLEX PRM (polymer reinforced mortar) or STUC-O-BASE, Base coat Using a stainless steel trowel, apply a minimum 1/16” thickness of Base Coat to the
surface of the substrate.
2.
Install Reinforcing Fabric
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
Immediately place the reinforcing fabric against the wet Base coat and by troweling
from the center to the edges, embed the fabric into the Base coat.
The reinforcing fabric must be continuous, free of wrinkles and be fully embedded
in the Base coat. All corners and edges shall be overlapped at least 2 1/2”.
For construction not detailed with control joints at door, window and other
openings, additional “butterfly” strips of 9” x 12” regular reinforcing mesh will be
embedded within the base coat at a 45 degree angle at each corner during base
coat application.
Allow at least 24 hours drying time. Additional time may be required at low
temperatures or with high humidity conditions.
Where shown on plans, the High Impact Mesh is to be installed as follows: the
Armor Mesh is first embedded into the Base coat. The Base coat is allowed to dry
for 24 hours. Then another coat of Base coat is applied over the first application to
embed the regular reinforcing mesh.
Finish Coat
1.
Thoroughly mix the STUC-O-FLEX factory prepared finish coat. Use a high-speed mixer
with paddle and stir until a uniform consistency is obtained. If necessary, add small
amounts of clean, potable water (not to exceed 12 oz. per pail) to adjust workability.
2.
Use Finish color and texture as it conforms to previously submitted and approved
sample.
3.
Use clean stainless steel trowels to apply Finish coat directly over the Base coat. (Some
finishes may be spray applied -- please consult with manufacturer).
4.
Special texture and grain effects are obtained by troweling. Consistent troweling
techniques by all mechanics on the job should be used to achieve uniformity in
appearance. cleaning
F.
Clean material from adjacent surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
G.
Remove surplus material and debris, including field sample, from site.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect base coat from rain, snow and frost for 48 to 72 hours following application.
B.
Protect all dissimilar materials from the finished base coat.
END OFSECTION
SECTION 09 24 00 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
1.3
SUMMARY
1.
Interior gypsum board wall panels
2.
Interior gypsum board ceiling panels
3.
Interior impact resistant gypsum board panels (wall and ceiling)
4.
Tile backing board
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated including installation instructions
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
3.
Design data test reports.
4.
Installation methods.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one samples representing actual
product, color, and patterns.
1.
Board: Submit sample of each panel product specified, 6 inches square.
2.
Trim: Submit sample of each type of trim specified, 12 inches long.
3.
Texture: Submit sample 12 inches square of textured coated gypsum board.
Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assemblies per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing
and inspecting agency.
1.4
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and in a manner to keep them dry, protected from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other
causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
C.
Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal corner
beads and trim from being bent or damaged.
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 29 00 - 1
1.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced gypsum board
application standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, for environmental
conditions before, during and after application of gypsum board.
B.
Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for
dying of joint treatment material immediately after its application. Avoid drafts during dry, hot
weather to prevent too rapid drying.
C.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
D.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
the following:
1.
Basis of design: American Gypsum; Dallas TX 75219; (866) 228-0844
2.
Georgia-Pacific; Atlanta, GA 30303; (800) 225-6119
3.
United States Gypsum Co.; (800) 950-3839
4.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M / ASTM C 36/C 36M as applicable to type of
gypsum board indicated.
B.
Regular Type:
C.
D.
1.
Thickness: 5/8 inch
2.
Long Edges: Tapered
3.
Acceptable Product: EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard
Type X:
1.
Thickness: 5/8 inch
2.
Long Edges: Tapered
3.
Acceptable Product: FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard
Type C:
1.
Thickness: 5/8 inch or As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on
drawings
2.
Long Edges: Tapered
3.
Acceptable Product: FireBloc Type C Gypsum Wallboard
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 29 00 - 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Moisture and Mold-Resistant - Regular Type: With moisture and mold-resistant core and
surfaces. Complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M / ASTM C 630/C 630M as applicable to type
of gypsum board indicated.
1.
Core: 5/8 inch
2.
Long Edges: Tapered
3.
Performance: Rating of 10 per ASTM D3273
4.
Acceptable Product: M-Bloc with Mold and Moisture Resistance
Moisture and Mold-Resistant - Type X: With moisture and mold-resistant core and surfaces
complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M / ASTM C 630/C 630M as applicable to type of gypsum
board indicated
1.
Core: 5/8 inch
2.
Long Edges: Tapered
3.
4.
Acceptable Product: M-Bloc Type X with Mold and Moisture Resistance
Moisture and Mold-Resistant - Type C: With moisture and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
Complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M / ASTM C 630/C 630M as applicable to type of gypsum
board indicated
1.
Core: 5/8 inch or As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on drawings
2.
Long Edges: Tapered
3.
4.
Acceptable Product: M-Bloc Type C with Mold and Moisture Resistance
Impact-Resistant Wall and Ceiling - Type X: With moisture and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
Complying with ASTM G 21, ASTM D 3273, ASTM C 1396, ASTM C 1629, ASTM E 84 and
ASTM E96 and as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated
1.
Core: 5/8 inch or As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on drawings
2.
Long Edges: Tapered
3.
4.
Acceptable Product: M-Bloc IR Type X Impact Resistant with Mold and Moisture
Resistance
Standard Ceiling Board: Complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M / ASTM C 1395/C 1385M as
applicable to type of gypsum board indicated
1.
Thickness: 5/8 inch
2.
Long Edges: Tapered
3.
Acceptable Product: Interior Ceiling Board
Gypsum Shaft Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M / ASTM C 442/C 442M
1.
Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces
a.
b.
c.
2.
Core: 1 inch thick
Long Edges: Double bevel
Acceptable Product: Shaft Liner
Moisture and Mold-Resistant Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with
moisture and mold-resistant core and surfaces; comply with ASTM D 3273
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 29 00 - 3
K.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
a.
Core: 1 inch thick
b.
Long Edges: Double bevel
c.
d.
Acceptable Product: M-Bloc Shaft Liner
Laminating Base Gypsum Board. Complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M / ASTM C 36/C 36M
as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated
1.
Application: Substrate to which a wide variety of decorative laminates can be applied
2.
Thickness 5/8 inch – type X
3.
Acceptable Product: EagleRoc Laminate Base Gypsum Wallboard
TILE BACKING PANELS
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M / ASTM C 630/C 630M
1.
Core: 5/8 inch Type X
2.
Acceptable Product: AquaBloc Gypsum Wallboard
TRIM ACCESSORIES
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047
1.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet
2.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.5
Cornerbead
Bullnose bead
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound
Expansion (control) joint
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M
B.
Joint Tape:
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper
2.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper
3.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats
1.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound
2.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type or setting-type taping compound
a.
3.
Use drying-type or setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim
accessories
Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type or setting-type, sandable topping compound
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 29 00 - 4
D.
4.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type or setting-type, sandable topping compound
5.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type or setting-type, sandable
topping compound
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1.
2.6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and settingtype sandable compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate
1.
C.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated
1.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick
2.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216 or GA-214.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 29 00 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4
to 3/8 inch wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments,
except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge
trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural
surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
K.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3
A.
B.
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations or as indicated in the drawings:
1.
Regular Type: Vertical or horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3.
Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
4.
Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
5.
Impact Resistant: As indicated on Drawings.
6.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a.
b.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3.
On furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally
(perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate
edge joints of base layer over furring members.
4.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
5.
C.
Multilayer Application:
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 29 00 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly.
2.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3.
On furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either
vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints
offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
4.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
D.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
E.
Curved Surfaces:
3.4
1.
Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,
across curved surface plus 12-inch long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent
to them.
2.
For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.
Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with
screws spaced 12 inches o.c.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install
with 1/4 inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B.
Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type (or type X where required by code) gypsum
wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated
to receive water-resistant panels.
C.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.5
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and if not shown,
according to ASTM C 840 or GA-216 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual
effect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 29 00 - 7
3.6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C
840, GA-216 or GA-214:
3.7
1.
Locations to receive Level 0 finish (no taping, finishing, or accessories required): Nonfire-rated , non-sound-rated, and non-smoke-rated assemblies in ceiling plenums and
concealed areas, and in temporary construction
2.
Locations to receive Level 1 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have tape set in joint
compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are
acceptable): Fire rated, sound rated, and smoke rated assemblies in plenum areas
above ceilings, in attics, and in areas where the assembly would generally be concealed.
3.
Locations to receive Level 2 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have tape
embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint
compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be
covered with a coat of joint compound): Surfaces to receive moisture resistant gypsum
board as a surfacing.
4.
embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all
joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two
separate coats of joint compound): Areas which are to receive heavy or medium-texture
(spray or hand applied) before final painting, or where heavy-grade wall coverings are to
be applied as the final decoration. This level of finish is not recommended where smooth
painted surfaces or light to medium wall coverings are specified.
5.
embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all
flat joints): All flat and eggshell paints, light textures, or wall coverings.
6.
embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all
flat joints. A thin skim coat of joint compound trowel applied, or a material manufactured
especially for this purpose and applied in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth
and free of tool marks and ridges): Gloss or semi-gloss paints, and areas where severe
lighting conditions occur.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
3.
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 29 00 - 8
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
SUMMARY
1.
Ceramic floor and wall tile and base
2.
Stone thresholds
3.
Tile setting materials
1.
Joint sealant
2.
Gypsum board tile backing panels
DEFINITIONS
Modular Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimensions as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint
width indicated
Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1.
Level surfaces: Minimum 0.6
2.
Ramped surfaces: Minimum 0.8
Load Bearing Performance: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide installations rated for
the following load bearing performance level based on testing assemblies according to ASTM C
627 that are representative of those indicated for this Project:
1.
1.4
Moderate: Passes cycle 1 through 10
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for each
type of product specified including all tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating tile patterns, beginning joints in both horizontal
and transverse directions, and locations and widths of control, contraction and expansion joints
in tile surfaces.
C.
Samples for initial selection:
D.
1.
Tile: submit catalog showing full line of available products. Upon request, submit selected
tile samples per paragraph below.
2.
Grout: Submit manufactures color chart consisting of actual sections of grout showing full
range of colors available.
Samples for verification: Of each item listed below, prepare on samples of size and construction
indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
1.
Submit a full size sample of each type of tile and in each color and texture.
2.
Submit a full size sample of each type of trim and accessory in each color and texture.
TILING
SECTION 09 30 00 - 1
3.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Submit 6” long stone threshold
E.
Mock-up: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, 48 by 48 inch in size illustrating
pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
F.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that each product furnished complies
with requirements
G.
Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and
maintenance coatings.
H.
Qualification Data: For installer to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
five completed projects with projects names, address, and photograph.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations in
similar material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile
from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each
contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delay.
C.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for
each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
D.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified ion this
Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:
1.
E.
1.6
Stone thresholds
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review full extent of work.
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with ANSI A137 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B.
Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other causes.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced
standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide to Owner’s a minimum of 3 percent of the amount each product installed including tile
and trim. Units must be full size and match in color and texture. Provide in sealed package with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing the contents and installation
location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS – GENERAL
ANSI Ceramic and Porcelain Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for type,
compositions and other characteristics indicated.
1.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
TILING
SECTION 09 30 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide material complying with ANSI standards
referenced in “Setting Materials” and “Grouting Materials” articles.
C.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns; Where manufacturer’s standard products are indicated for tile,
grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other
appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following
requirements:
1.
Match Designers samples
2.
Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
D.
Factory blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample
submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.
E.
Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.
1.
2.2
A.
Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge –mounted
tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is
suitable for these kinds of installations and has a record of successful in-service
performance.
MATERIALS
Ceramic Wall Tile:
1.
a.
b.
2.3
A.
2.
Tile thickness: 3/16”
3.
Grout joint width: 1/16”±, even and equally distributed
4.
Module Size: 6x6
5.
Finish: Glazed
6.
Edge type: Round Edge
STONE THRESHOLDS
General: Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes to
provide transition between tile surface and adjoining finished floor surfaces.
1.
B.
Fabricate threshold to heights not more than ½” above adjoin finished floor surfaces, with
transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2.
Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for
exterior use and with a minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241.
1.
2.4
Basis of design: Royal Mosa
1)
Global Collections
Provide white, honed marble complying with the Marble Institute of America’s group A
requirements for soundness
SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement Mortar (thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A
B.
Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and –Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3
TILING
SECTION 09 30 00 - 3
1.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to
temperate of up to 140 deg F and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer
for intended use.
C.
Organic Adhesives: ANSI A136.1, Type 1
D.
the following:
1.
Basis of design: Laticrete, (651) 844.4667
a.
2.
2.5
A.
B.
Manufacturer’s recommended products will be reviewed during submittals.
1)
Thin Bed Mortar, If applicable
2)
Medium Bed Mortar, If applicable
3)
Thick Bed Mortar, If applicable
4)
Epoxy, If applicable
5)
Mastic, If applicable
6)
Epoxy Grout, If applicable
7)
Cementitious Grout, If applicable
Tile color schedule:
1.
Royal Mosa, Global Collection, 25250
2.
Royal Mosa, Global Collection, 15210
Grout color schedule:
1.
Color shall be selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard available options.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are from, dry7, clean, free from oil, waxy films, and
curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108
series of tile installation standards for installation indicated.
2.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile have been completed before
installation of tile.
3.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinate, adjust latter in consultation with Architect.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPERATION
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substrates that contain soap, wax, oil
or silicone and are incompatible with tile setting material by using terrazzo or concrete grinder, a
drum sander, or a polishing machine equipment with a heavy duty wire brush.
TILING
SECTION 09 30 00 - 4
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Provide concrete substrate for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars
that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile standards
for installations indicated.
1.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile setting material manufacturer’s
written instruction to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
2.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C.
Blending: for tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals,
verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one
package show the same range on colors as those taken from other packages. If not factory
blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tile and project site before installing.
D.
Field applied Temporary protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile
against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating them with a continuous film of temporary
protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces:
1.
3.3
Petroleum paraffin wax or grout release
INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation
standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and
grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions,
edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile and conceal all gaps or cut mark.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in
both directions in each space or on each wall area unless otherwise indicated in drawings.
Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do
not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
G.
Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1.
H.
For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI Al08.6.
Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed
as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
I.
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates whenever
possible.
Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent non-tile floor finish.
Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove
excess sealer and sealer that have gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
TILING
SECTION 09 30 00 - 5
J.
3.4
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Back Buttering: For wall tile installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by
complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI
A108 series of tile installation standards.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1.
Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2.
Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect
metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
3.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B.
Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer to ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Final Acceptance.
D.
1.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective
cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or
other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
2.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is
completed.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
TILING
SECTION 09 30 00 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 09 51 13
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
1.
Acoustical ceiling panels.
2.
Exposed grid suspension system.
3.
Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and
suspension system required.
B.
Samples for Verification: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch
long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system,
C.
Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings. Show locations of items which are to
be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.
D.
Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements,
including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For
acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory
classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.
E.
If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's
Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be
required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or
NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not
conforming to manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and
replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single
manufacturer.
B.
Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1.
Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with
ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.
a.
b.
1.4
Flame Spread: 25 or less
Smoke Developed: 50 or less
A.
Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a
fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.
SECTION 09 51 13 - 1
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
1.7
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PROJECT/ SITE CONDITIONS
Space Enclosure:
1.
All ceiling products and suspension systems must be installed and maintained in
accordance with Armstrong written installation instructions for that product in effect at the
time of installation and best industry practice. Prior to installation, the ceiling product
must be kept clean and dry, in an environment that is between 32oF (0o C) and 120oF
(49o
C)
and
not
subject
to
Abnormal
Conditions.
Abnormal conditions include exposure to chemical fumes, vibrations, moisture from
conditions such as building leaks or condensation, excessive humidity, or excessive dirt
or dust buildup.
2.
HumiGuard Plus Ceilings: Installation of the products shall be carried out where the
temperature is between 32°F (0° C) and 120°F (49° C). It is not necessary for the area to
be enclosed or for HVAC systems to be functioning. All wet work (plastering, concrete,
etc)
must
be
complete
and
dry.
The ceilings must be maintained to avoid excessive dirt or dust buildup that would
provide a medium for microbial growth on ceiling panels. Microbial protection does not
extend beyond the treated surface as received from the factory, and does not protect
other materials that contact the treated surface such as supported insulation materials.
WARRANTY
Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or
replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited
to:
1.
Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping as a result of defects in materials or factory
workmanship.
2.
Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects
3.
Acoustical Panels with BioBlock Plus or designated as inherently resistive to the growth
of micro-organisms installed with Armstrong suspension systems: Visible sag and will
resist the growth of mold/mildew and gram positive and gram negative odor and stain
causing bacteria.
Warranty Period Humiguard:
1.
Acoustical panels: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.
2.
Grid: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.
3.
Acoustical panels and grid systems with HumiGuard Plus or HumiGuard Max
performance supplied by one source manufacturer is thirty (30) years from date of
substantial completion.
The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.
EXTRA MATERIALS:
Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products
installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.
1.
Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount
installed.
2.
Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension
component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
SECTION 09 51 13 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MATERIALS
the following:
1.
Basis of design: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., ph: (877) 276-7876
2.
Hunter Douglas Architectural Products, Inc., ph: (800) 366-4327
3.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS TYPE, ACT-1
A.
Acceptable Product: Ultima Lay-In and Tegular with AirGuard Coating, 1902 as manufactured by
Armstrong World Industries.
B.
Acoustical Panels Type ACT-1:
2.3
1.
Surface Texture: Fine
2.
Composition: Mineral Fiber
3.
Color: White
4.
Size: 24in X 24in X 3/4in
5.
Edge Profile: Beveled Tegular for interface with Silhouette XL 9/16" Bolt Slot - 1/8"
Reveal.
6.
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product
carton, 0.70.
7.
Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product
carton, 35
8.
Emissions Testing: Section 01350 Protocol, < 13.5 ppb of formaldehyde when used
under typical conditions required by ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality"
9.
Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL)
10.
Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: 0.90.
11.
Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus - Temperature is between 32°F (0° C) and 120°F
(49° C). It is not necessary for the area to be enclosed or for HVAC systems to be
functioning. All wet work (plastering, concrete, etc) must be complete and dry.
12.
Antimicrobial Protection: BioBlock Plus - Resistance against the growth of mold/mildew
and gram positive and gram negative odor and stain causing bacteria.
13.
VOC Removal: AirGuard Coating removes formaldehyde present in indoor air;
performance certified by UL Environment.
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, ACT-1
A.
Acceptable Product: Silhouette XL 9/16" Bolt Slot - 1/8" Reveal as manufactured by Armstrong
World Industries, Inc.
B.
Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized
(galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel) as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees
are double-web steel construction with 9/16 IN type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces
chemically cleansed, capping pre-finished galvanized steel (aluminum or stainless steel) in
SECTION 09 51 13 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching (exception:
extruded aluminum or stainless steel).
1.
Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 HD.
2.
Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted
otherwise.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct
Hung unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-stretched, with a
yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge.
E.
Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures,
that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed
flange of the same width as exposed runner.
F.
Accessories
1.
Shadow Molding
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and
painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by
manufacturer's printed recommendations. (Exception: HumiGuard Max Ceilings)
PREPARATION
A.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply
with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.
B.
Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other sections.
1.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in
advance of time needed for coordination of other work.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in
compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4-0 on center along
the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight.
C.
Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners
where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.
D.
For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and
vertical surfaces.
E.
Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of
main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges
by wall moldings.
3.4
A.
Replace damaged and broken panels.
SECTION 09 51 13 - 4
B.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish
damage.
1.
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Ceiling Touch-Up Paint, (Item #5760, 8oz. bottles) (Item #5761, quart size cans), "global
white" latex paint should be used to hide minor scratches and nicks in the surface and to
cover field tegularized edges that are exposed to view.
Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently
eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 51 13 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 09 65 13
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
1.2
Wall base and accessories
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s published literature for each resilient base and accessory
B.
Certificates: For fire-rated materials and ADA compliance
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each product indicated, product chain showing all available
colors, textures and patterns
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer’s standard sized
samples but not less than 12” long, of each resilient product color, texture and pattern
E.
Accessories: Provide product literature identifying available colors, installation methods, profiles,
dimensions and all other pertinent information for each accessory indicated
1.3
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Store at job site in a dry place at least 48 hours before installation
B.
Install only when room temperature is within range specified by manufacturer. Maintain
temperature until 24 hours after completion
1.4
A.
WARRANTY
Provide standard manufacturer’s warranty
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
RESILIENT WALL BASE: TYPE TP
the following:
1.
Basis of design: Burke Flooring; San Jose, CA 95112; (800) 447-8442
a.
B.
Profiles Series Wall Base
2.
VPI Corporation; Sheboygan, WI 53082; (800) 874-4240
3.
Johnsonite; Chagrin Falls, OH 44023; (800) 889-8916
4.
Material: Co-extruded thermo plastic resilient rubber
1.
Profile: Elusive
2.
Thickness: 5/16 inch
3.
Straight profile: 3”
4.
Length: 50 feet rolls
SECTION 09 65 13 - 1
C.
5.
Substrate adhesives pursuant to manufacturer’s recommendations.
6.
Outside corners: Pre-molded
7.
Inside corners: Pre-molded
8.
Conformance: ASTM F1861-98, Type TP, Group 1 or 2.
Adhesive Physical Properties:
1.
2.2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Use adhesives as specified by manufacturer. Use a flexible non-solvent base acrylic
adhesive or equal on all tile installations unless other types of adhesives are
recommended by manufacturer.
RESILIENT ACCESSORY
A.
Adhesive: Resilient accessories manufacturer’s required adhesive, suitable for each individual
product, substrate, and location
B.
Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as required by resilient accessories manufacturer
C.
Leveling and Underlayment Compound: Latex cementituous type as required by resilient
accessories manufacturer, having a minimum density of 4000 lbs per sq. ft. after 28 days
D.
Glue-down application; transition for resilient floor and carpet, Provide material and color to
match resilient base
2.3
A.
Resilient wall base and Resilient accessories:
1.
Color to be selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard selection of colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Pursuant to manufacturers published instructions and RFCI “Recommended Work Procedures
for Resilient Floor Coverings”.
B.
Lay materials true to line, level, and with tight joints. Cut materials to and around permanent
fixtures, equipment and bases. Roll installation pursuant to manufacturer’s published
instructions.
C.
Adhesively install resilient wall base and accessories as directed by manufacturer.
D.
Firmly adhere resilient base materials to walls and permanent fixtures. Scribe and fit bases
accurately to abutting surfaces.
E.
After installation, remove excessive adhesive pursuant to resilient material manufacturer’s
published instructions.
F.
Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. Verify that substrates are dry and free
of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
G.
Resilient Accessories: Butt to adjacent material and tightly adhere to substrates throughout
entire length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise
be exposed.
3.2
A.
CLEANING
Clean resilient material as directed by product manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 65 13 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 09 66 00
TERRAZZO FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
Epoxy terrazzo with dividers and accessory strips
1.
Vinyl Bases
2.
Door Hardware
3.
Floor Drains
4.
Concrete subfloor
DEFINITIONS
NTMA: National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc
SUBMITTALS
Pre-installation Conference: The General Contractor shall conduct a conference at project site
before Terrazzo Contractor begins installation.
1.
The General Contractor shall
representatives of the Owner.
invite
Terrazzo
Contractor,
the
Architect
and
2.
Review methods and procedures related to terrazzo including, but not limited to, the
following:
a.
B.
C.
Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed
by other trades.
b.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
c.
Review terrazzo mixes and patterns.
d.
Review custom terrazzo mixes, designs and patterns.
e.
Coordination with the work of other installers.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for each
type of product specified including all terrazzo mixes, colors, strip materials, sealers and
accessories.
Shop Drawings: Terrazzo Contractor shall prepare and submit Shop Drawings that include
plans, elevations, sections, component details and attachments to other work. Include terrazzo
installation requirements. Show layout of the following:
1.
Divider strips.
2.
Expansion joint strips.
3.
Accessory strips.
4.
Abrasive strips.
5.
Terrazzo patterns.
TERRAZZO FLOORING
SECTION 09 66 00 - 1
D.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Samples:
1.
Terrazzo Contractor shall prepare and submit a maximum of three samples, sizes 12 by
12 inches for each color and type of terrazzo specified.
E.
Samples for Initial Selection: Terrazzo Contractor shall submit NTMA “Color Palette Brochure”
showing full range of colors and patterns available for each terrazzo type.
F.
Material Certificates:
G.
1.4
1.5
1.
Epoxy Resin: For each type of resin required indicating that materials meet specification
requirements, by manufacturer.
2.
Aggregate: For each type of aggregate required indicating compatibility with terrazzo
mix, signed by aggregate supplier.
Maintenance Data: Terrazzo
recommendations from NTMA.
Contractor
shall
submit
two
copies
of
maintenance
QUALIFICATION DATA: TERRAZZO CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT TWO COPIES OF
QUALIFICATION DATA.
1.
Include list of projects indicating name and location of project, name of Owner, name and
contact information for General Contractor, and name and contact information for
Architect.
2.
Include letter from NTMA with the name of the Project and name of member, stating
current member status.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Acceptable Epoxy Resin Manufacturer: An Associate Member of the NTMA, experienced in
manufacturing epoxy resin in accordance with NTMA standards and with a record of successful
in-service performance as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required materials.
B.
Acceptable Terrazzo Contractor: A Contractor Member of NTMA whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.
Installer shall have completed terrazzo installations within the past 5 years of scale and
complexity similar to the proposed installation.
C.
Terrazzo Standards: Terrazzo Contractor shall furnish materials and install terrazzo according
to NTMA's “Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide” and with written recommendations for
terrazzo type indicated unless more stringent requirements are specified.
D.
Source Limitations for Aggregates: Terrazzo Contractor shall obtain each color, grade, type and
variety of granular materials from sources with resources to provide materials of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties.
1.6
A.
Materials shall be delivered to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers,
labeled with source or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if
any.
B.
Materials shall be stored in their original, undamaged packages and containers, in a location
where they will not be exposed to direct sunlight.
1.
Epoxy components shall be stored in a space where the ambient temperature can be
maintained 60 and 90 deg. F before use.
TERRAZZO FLOORING
SECTION 09 66 00 - 2
1.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
A.
General Contractor shall provide sufficient water, temporary heat and light, and adequate electric
power with suitable outlets connected and distributed for use within 100 feet of any working
space.
B.
General Contractor shall provide temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to protect
adjacent spaces from damage during installation.
C.
1.8
A.
1.
Maintain ambient temperatures in the area to receive terrazzo at not less than 60 deg. F.
2.
Maintain adequate ventilation in the area to receive terrazzo.
Terrazzo Contractor shall protect other adjacent work from water and dust generated by grinding
operations.
WARRANTY
One year from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE
Epoxy Resin:
1.
Test Specimens: Mix resin materials according to manufacturer's recommendation
without aggregate added and cure for 7 days at 75 degrees plus or minus 2 deg. F and
50 percent plus / minus 2 percent relative humidity.
2.
Cured test specimens shall meet or exceed the following requirements:
a.
b.
B.
Hardness: 60 to 85 per ASTM D 2240, Shore D.
Minimum Tensile Strength: 3000 psi per ASTM D 638 for a 2-inch specimen made
using a “C” die per ASTM D 412.
c.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM D 695, Specimen B
cylinder.
d.
Chemical Resistance: No deleterious effects by contaminants listed below after
seven-day immersion at room temperature per ASTM D 1308.
1)
Distilled Water.
2)
Mineral Water.
3)
Isopropanol.
4)
Ethanol.
5)
Soap solution at 1 percent.
6)
Sodium hydroxide at 10 percent solution.
7)
Hydrochloric acid at 10 percent solution.
8)
Hydrochloric acid at 30 percent solution.
9)
Detergent Solution at 0.025.
10) Acetic Acid at 5 percent solution.
Epoxy Resin with Aggregate:
1.
Test Specimens:
a.
b.
c.
Mix epoxy resin according to manufacturer's recommendations and blend one
volume of epoxy resin with 3 volumes of marble aggregate, consisting of:
1)
60 percent No. 1 chip.
2)
40 percent No. 0 chip.
Grind and grout with epoxy resin finished to a nominal 1/4 inch thickness.
Cure specimens 7 days at 75 deg. F plus / minus 2 deg. and 50 percent plus /
minus 2 percent relative humidity.
TERRAZZO FLOORING
SECTION 09 66 00 - 3
2.
Cured epoxy terrazzo specimens shall nominally meet the following requirements:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Flammability: Self- extinguishing, extent of burning 1/4 inch maximum according
to ASTM D 635.
Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion: 0.0025 inch/inch per deg F for
temperature range of minus 12 to plus 140 deg F per ASTM D 696.
Bond Strength of Epoxy Terrazzo: 300 lb. failure according to field test method for
surface soundness and adhesion as described in ACI Committee No. 403 Bulletin.
MATERIALS
Epoxy Resin Matrix: Two-component, high solids product complying with specified performance
requirements.
1.
Color: As required for mix indicated.
B.
Primer: As recommended, manufactured and supplied by epoxy resin manufacturer.
C.
Aggregates: Marble, glass, synthetic chips, or metal – as required for chosen mix selection.
D.
2.3
A.
1.
Comply with NTMA gradation standards.
2.
Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Loss of 40 percent or less when tested according to
ASTM C 131 (LA Abrasion).
3.
Aggregates shall contain no deleterious or foreign matter.
Divider Strips:
1.
Material: Aluminum.
2.
Strip Thickness: 16 gauge.
3.
Type: “L” strip: 3/8 inch by 1/2 inch.
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
Sealer: Terrazzo Contractor shall provide a non-ambering, clear sealer that is chemically
neutral; does not impair terrazzo aesthetics or physical properties; is recommended by terrazzo
matrix manufacturer. Sealers shall comply with the following:
1.
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 (ADA) According to ASTM D 2047.
3.
Water Based Sealer Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10.
B.
Moisture Mitigation: Two-component, high solids, moisture tolerant, high density, low odor,
epoxy-based product produced by epoxy terrazzo resin manufacturer specifically recommended
to reduce alkalinity levels and moisture emission to acceptable levels.
C.
Crack Suppression/Isolation Membrane: As recommended, produced and supplied by approved
terrazzo resin formulator, having minimum 120 percent elongation potential per ASTM D 412
2.4
MIXES
A.
Terrazzo Selection: Terrazzo Contractor shall provide standard terrazzo mix(es) according to
the following:
B.
Mix Color: As selected by Architect from NTMA color plates
1.
C.
Color plate EP1-50 as basis of design. Color shall match owner selected color from the
Marble Line, M105-Ivory Black provided by Nurazzo 1.888.687.2996.
Proportions for Epoxy Terrazzo Topping: Comply with resin supplier’s recommendations.
TERRAZZO FLOORING
SECTION 09 66 00 - 4
D.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Mixing of Terrazzo Topping:
Mix epoxy components with aggregates in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
The General Contractor and Architect shall examine substrates and areas, with Terrazzo
Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the work.
1.
Slab Flatness Tolerance: Subfloor is not to vary more than 1/4 inch from true plane in a
10 foot span.
2.
Cracks: Locate cracks and joints in concrete substrates. Verify location of control joints
and expansion joints in epoxy terrazzo flooring.
a.
B.
If required to prevent cracks in concrete substrates transmitting through epoxy
terrazzo flooring, the Terrazzo Contractor shall make a written recommendation to
install a crack suppression membrane and include specific recommendations on
type and location.
The General Contractor shall retain the services of an independent testing laboratory to verify
that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels
according to epoxy resin manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level
measurement.
2.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application of
resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3
lb of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab area in 24 hours.
3.
If required to prevent moisture vapor transmission in concrete substrates, the Terrazzo
Contractor shall make a written recommendation to install moisture mitigation materials
and include specific recommendations on type and location.
C.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: The General Contractor hall retain the services of an
independent testing laboratory to verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable
range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after
substrates pass testing.
D.
The General Contractor shall be responsible for correcting non-conforming concrete substrates
using materials compatible with epoxy terrazzo flooring system and as approved by the Terrazzo
Contractor.
1.
E.
3.2
Materials used to correct nonconforming conditions must be compatible with the selected
epoxy system and be approved by the manufacturer of epoxy resin materials and
Terrazzo Contractor.
Terrazzo Contractor shall proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, including
levelness tolerances, cracking, excessive moisture vapor transmission, and alkalinity have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General Contractor shall broom clean area to receive terrazzo to remove loose chips and all
foreign matter.
B.
Terrazzo Contractor shall mechanically abrade concrete surface.
TERRAZZO FLOORING
SECTION 09 66 00 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
C.
Terrazzo Contractor shall provide moisture mitigation materials according to instructions and
recommendations of moisture mitigation materials manufacturer. Cost for moisture mitigation
materials and installation shall be [included as an Alternate] [included as a Unit Cost] [an
additional cost to the Owner under an approved Change Order].
D.
Terrazzo Contractor shall provide flexible epoxy crack isolation/suppression membrane: Cost for
materials and installation for installation over not more than five percent of the floor area
receiving epoxy terrazzo shall be included in the Base Bid. Cost for additional materials and
installation for installation [included as an Alternate] [included as a Unit Cost] [an additional cost
to the Owner under an approved Change Order].
3.3
A.
POURED-IN-PLACE TERRAZZO INSTALLATION
Strip Materials: Terrazzo Contractor shall install strip materials as follows:
1.
Divider and Control-Joint Strips:
a.
b.
c.
2.
B.
C.
Accessory Strips: Install as required to provide a complete installation.
Placing Terrazzo:
1.
Prime subfloor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.
Proportion and thoroughly blend the materials.
3.
Place mixture to achieve specified thickness.
Poured in Place Terrazzo Base: Terrazzo Contractor shall provide mix color for terrazzo base to
match approved sample.
1.
D.
Terrazzo Contractor shall place and finish terrazzo base at the same time the terrazzo
floor is being installed.
Finishing: Terrazzo Contractor shall finish the terrazzo topping as follows:
1.
Rough Grinding:
a.
b.
2.
3.
F.
Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond abrasives.
Follow initial grind with 60/80 grit stones or with comparable diamond abrasives.
Grouting:
a.
b.
c.
E.
Locate divider strips in locations indicated.
Install control joint strips back to back in locations indicated.
Install strips in epoxy adhesive without voids below strips.
Clean terrazzo with clean water and rinse. Allow to dry.
Apply epoxy grout per manufacturer's instructions.
Allow grout to cure.
Fine Grinding/Polishing: Grind with 80 grit or with comparable diamond abrasives until all
grout is removed from surface.
Terrazzo Cleaning: Terrazzo Contractor shall clean finished terrazzo as follows:
1.
Remove grinding residue from terrazzo surface.
2.
Wash terrazzo surfaces immediately after final grinding of terrazzo flooring with water
and allow surfaces to dry thoroughly.
Sealing: Terrazzo Contractor shall seal terrazzo according to sealer manufacturer’s written
instructions.
TERRAZZO FLOORING
SECTION 09 66 00 - 6
3.4
A.
3.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
REPAIR
Terrazzo Contractor shall repair terrazzo areas that evidence lack of bond between topping and
underbed according to NTMA’s written recommendations.
PROTECTION
A.
After application of the sealer, the Work shall be ready for final inspection and acceptance by the
Owner or his agent.
B.
The General Contractor shall protect the finished floor after the Terrazzo Contractor has
completed final grinding and applied sealer to terrazzo surfaces.
END OF SECTION
TERRAZZO FLOORING
SECTION 09 66 00 - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 09 91 00
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SECTION INCLUDES
Interior, exterior, and high-performance paint and coatings systems including surface
preparation.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each paint system indicated, including:
1.
Product characteristics.
2.
Surface preparation instructions and recommendations.
3.
Primer requirements and finish specification.
4.
5.
Application methods.
6.
Cautions for storage, handling and installation.
B.
Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range of
manufacturer's color samples available.
C.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, submit 2 sets of paper chip samples,
8”x8” min, that represent actual product, color, and sheen.
D.
Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit special surface preparation procedures,
substrate conditions requiring special attention.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in
material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces. If a color of finish or a surface is not specifically mentioned, Architect
will select from all colors and finishes available.
C.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels unless indicated.
D.
Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
1.4
A.
1.
Finish surfaces for verification of products, colors and sheens.
2.
Finish area designated by Architect.
3.
Provide samples that designate primer and finish coats.
4.
Do not proceed with remaining work until the Architect approves the mock-up.
Delivery: Deliver manufacturer's unopened containers to the work site. Packaging shall bear the
manufacturer's name, label, and the following list of information:
1.
Product name and type (description).
PAINTING
SECTION 09 91 00 - 1
2.
Application and use instructions.
3.
Surface preparation.
4.
VOC content.
5.
Environmental issues.
6.
Batch date.
7.
Color number.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Storage: Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer's
instructions. Protect from freezing.
D.
Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area, to prevent contamination or damage to the
coatings.
1.5
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature ranges
required by paint product manufacturer.
B.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow when relative humidity is outside humidity
ranges, or moisture content of surfaces exceed those required by paint product manufacturer.
C.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 55 degrees F for interiors 50 degrees F for
exterior unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candle measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.6
A.
1.7
WARRANTY
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for paints and coatings.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels
describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
B.
Furnish Owner with an additional one percent of each material and color, but not less than 1 gal
(3.8 l) or 1 case, as appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER
the following:
1.
Basis of design: Sherwin-Williams; Cleveland, OH 44115; (800) 542-5979
2.
Benjamin Moore & Co.; Montvale NJ 07645; (866) 708-9181
3.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Pittsburg, PA 15272; (888) 774-4332
4.
PAINTING
SECTION 09 91 00 - 2
2.2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PAINT MATERIALS - GENERAL
A.
Paints and Coatings:
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings
to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application.
Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such
procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
2.
For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half
shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. Or follow
manufactures product instructions for optimal color conformance.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Coating Application Accessories: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths,
sanding materials, and clean-up materials required, per manufacturer's specifications.
D.
Color: Refer to Finish Schedule for paint colors, and as selected.
2.3
INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS – AS APPLICABLE
A.
CONCRETE - (Walls & Ceilings, Poured Concrete, Precast Concrete, Unglazed Brick, Cement
Board, Tilt-Up, Cast-In-Place)
1.
Latex Systems
a.
B.
MASONRY - (CMU - Concrete, Split, Scored, Smooth, Fluted)
1.
Latex Systems
a.
C.
Semi-Gloss - Low Odor - Low VOC Finish
1)
1st Coat: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 (75-125 sq ft/gal)
2)
2nd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-600 Series
3)
3rd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-600 Series (4
mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)
METAL (Aluminum, Galvanized)
1.
Latex Systems
a.
D.
1)
1st Coat: S-W Loxon Masonry Primer, A24W8300 (8 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry)
2)
3)
3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-600 Series (4
Semi-Gloss - Low Odor/Lower VOC Finish
1)
1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Primer, B66-310 Series (2-4 mils dry)
2)
3)
METAL (Steel, Structural Steel Columns, Joists, Trusses, Beams, Miscellaneous & Ornamental
Iron, Structural Iron, Ferrous Metal)
1.
Latex Systems
a.
Semi-Gloss - Low Odor/Lower VOC Finish
1)
1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Primer, B66-310 Series (2-4 mils dry)
2)
3)
PAINTING
SECTION 09 91 00 - 3
E.
WOOD (Walls, Ceilings, Doors, Trim,)
1.
Latex Systems
a.
2.
Clear Finish
1)
1st Coat: S-W Minwax 250 VOC Oil Stain (Optional) Or S-W Wood Classics
Interior Oil Stain, A49 Series (Optional)
2)
2nd Coat: S-W Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, Gloss or
Satin
3)
3rd Coat: S-W Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, Gloss or
Satin (4 mils wet, 1.0 mil dry per coat)
DRYWALL (Walls, Ceilings, Gypsum Board, Plaster Board, etc.)
1.
Latex Systems
a.
2.4
1)
1st Coat: S-W PrepRite ProBlock Latex. B51 Series (4 mils wet, 1.4 mils
dry)
2)
3)
Stain & Varnish
a.
F.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1)
1st Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W600 Series (4 mils
wet, 1.5 mils dry)
2)
3)
EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A.
METAL - (Aluminum, Galvanized)
1.
Latex Systems
a.
B.
METAL - (Misc. Iron, Ornamental Iron, Structural Iron & Steel, Ferrous Metal)
1.
Latex Systems
a.
C.
Satin Finish, Moisture Resistant Finish
1)
1st Coat: S-W Resilience Latex Satin, K43 Series
2)
2nd Coat: S-W Resilience Latex Satin, K43 Series (4 mils wet, 1.44 mils dry
per coat)
Semi-Gloss Finish
1)
1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (510 mils wet, 2-4 mils dry)
2)
2nd Coat: S-W Metalatex Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B42 Series
3)
3rd Coat: S-W Metalatex Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B42 Series (4 mils wet, 1.5
mils dry per coat)
VINYL SIDING EIFS, SYNTHETIC STUCCO
1.
Latex Systems
a.
Flat Finish
1)
1st Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series
2)
2nd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series (4 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry
per coat)
PAINTING
SECTION 09 91 00 - 4
2.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
A.
B.
Interior Colors:
1.
Benjamin Moore, Classic Colors; Vale Mist 1494
2.
Accent wall: Benjamin Moore; Hazy Lilac 2116-40
Exterior Colors:
1.
Benjamin Moore, Classic Colors; Dunmore Cream HC-29
C.
Doors: Benjamin Moore, Classic Colors; Graphite 1603
D.
Other painted surfaces: Color/Tint shall be selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard
available options.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared; notify Architect of
unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of
another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
B.
Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected and approved by all parties,
otherwise application of coatings will be considered as an acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2
A.
SURFACE PREPARATION
General: Surfaces shall be dry and in sound condition. Remove oil, dust, dirt, loose rust, peeling
paint or other contamination to ensure good adhesion.
1.
Remove mildew before painting by washing with a solution of 1 part liquid household
bleach and 3 parts of warm water. Apply the solution and scrub the mildewed area. Allow
the solution to remain on the surface for 10 minutes. Rinse thoroughly with clean water
and allow the surface to dry 48 hours before painting. Wear protective glasses or
goggles, waterproof gloves, and protective clothing. Quickly wash off any of the mixture
that comes in contact with your skin. Do not add detergents or ammonia to the
bleach/water solution.
2.
Remove items including but not limited to thermostats, electrical outlets, switch covers
and similar items prior to painting. After completing painting operations in each space or
area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B.
Aluminum: Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by cleaning per SSPCSP1, Solvent Cleaning.
C.
Block (Cinder and Concrete): Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. Surface must be
free of laitance, concrete dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose
cement, and hardeners. Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 30 days at 75 degrees F.
The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9, unless the products are designed to be used
in high pH environments. On tilt-up and poured-in-place concrete, commercial detergents and
abrasive blasting may be necessary to prepare the surface. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other
voids with a cement patching compound.
D.
Concrete, SSPC-SP13 or NACE 6: This standard gives requirements for surface preparation of
concrete by mechanical, chemical, or thermal methods prior to the application of bonded
protective coating or lining systems. The requirements of this standard are applicable to all types
of cementitious surfaces including cast-in-place concrete floors and walls, precast slabs,
masonry walls, and shotcrete surfaces. An acceptable prepared concrete surface should be free
of contaminants, laitance, loosely adhering concrete, and dust, and should provide a sound,
uniform substrate suitable for the application of protective coating or lining systems.
PAINTING
SECTION 09 91 00 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
E.
Copper and Stainless Steel: Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by
cleaning per SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
F.
Drywall-Interior: Must be clean and dry. All nail heads must be set and spackled. Joints must be
taped and covered with a joint compound. Spackled nail heads and tape joints must be sanded
smooth and all dust removed prior to painting.
G.
Galvanized Metal: Clean per SSPC-SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner to
remove greases and oils. Apply a test area, priming as required. Allow the coating to dry at least
one week before testing. If adhesion is poor, Brush Blast per SSPC-SP7 is necessary to remove
these treatments.
H.
Plaster: Must be allowed to dry thoroughly for at least 30 days before painting, unless the
products are designed to be used in high pH environments. Room must be ventilated while
drying; in cold, damp weather, rooms must be heated. Damaged areas must be repaired with an
appropriate patching material. Bare plaster must be cured and hard. Textured, soft, porous, or
powdery plaster should be treated with a solution of 1 pint household vinegar to 1 gallon of
water. Repeat until the surface is hard, rinse with clear water and allow to dry.
I.
Steel: Structural, Plate, And Similar Items: Should be cleaned by one or more of the surface
preparations described below. These methods are used throughout the world for describing
methods for cleaning structural steel. Visual standards are available through the Society of
Protective Coatings. A brief description of these standards together with numbers by which they
can be specified follow.
1.
Solvent Cleaning, SSPC-SP1: Solvent cleaning is a method for removing all visible oil,
grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants. Solvent
cleaning does not remove rust or mill scale. Change rags and cleaning solution
frequently so that deposits of oil and grease are not spread over additional areas in the
cleaning process. Be sure to allow adequate ventilation.
2.
Hand Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP2: Hand Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose
rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust,
and paint be removed by this process. Before hand tool cleaning, remove visible oil,
grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1.
3.
Power Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP3: Power Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale,
loose rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill
scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Before power tool cleaning, remove
visible oil, grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPCSP1.
4.
White Metal Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP5 or NACE 1: A White Metal Blast Cleaned
surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt,
dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Before
blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods
specified in SSPC-SP1 or other agreed upon methods.
5.
Commercial Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP6 or NACE 3: A Commercial Blast Cleaned
dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except
for staining. Staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of
surface area and may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discoloration
caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied paint. Before
6.
Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP7 or NACE 4: A Brush-Off Blast Cleaned surface,
when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose
mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and paint may
PAINTING
SECTION 09 91 00 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
remain on the surface. Before blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be
removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP 1 or other agreed upon methods.
7.
Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal, SSPC-SP11: Metallic surfaces that are prepared
according to this specification, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all
visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide corrosion products, and other
foreign matter. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in the lower portions of pits if
the original surface is pitted. Prior to power tool surface preparation, remove visible
deposits of oil or grease by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1, Solvent
Cleaning, or other agreed upon methods.
8.
Near-White Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP10 or NACE 2: A Near White Blast Cleaned
dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except
for staining. Staining shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of each square inch of
surface area and may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discoloration
caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied paint. Before
9.
High- and Ultra-High Pressure Water Jetting for Steel and Other Hard Materials: SSPCSP12 or NACE 5: This standard provides requirements for the use of high- and ultrahigh pressure water jetting to achieve various degrees of surface cleanliness. This
standard is limited in scope to the use of water only without the addition of solid particles
in the stream.
10.
Water Blasting, SSPC-SP12/NACE No. 5: Removal of oil grease dirt, loose rust, loose
mill scale, and loose paint by water at pressures of 2,000 to 2,500 psi at a flow of 4 to 14
gallons per minute.
J.
Vinyl Siding, Architectural Plastics, and Fiberglass: Clean thoroughly by scrubbing with a warm,
soapy water solution. Rinse thoroughly. Do not paint vinyl siding with any color darker than the
original color, unless the product and color are designed for such use. Painting with darker
colors may cause siding to warp.
K.
Wood: Must be clean and dry. Prime and paint as soon as possible. Knots and pitch streaks
must be scraped, sanded, and spot primed before a full priming coat is applied. Patch all nail
holes and imperfections with a wood filler or putty and sand smooth.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Apply all coatings and materials with manufacture specifications in mind. Mix and thin
coatings according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces. Wait at least 30 days before applying to new concrete or
masonry. Or follow manufacturer's procedures to apply appropriate coatings prior to 30 days.
Test new concrete for moisture content.
C.
Apply coatings using methods recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Uniformly apply coatings without runs, drips, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent
sheen.
E.
Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturers recommended dry film
thickness.
F.
Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide,
and uniform appearance.
G.
Inspection: The coated surface must be inspected and approved by the Architect just prior to
each coat.
PAINTING
SECTION 09 91 00 - 7
3.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished coatings from damage until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up damaged coatings after substantial completion, following manufacturer's
recommendation for touch up or repair of damaged coatings. Repair any defects that will hinder
the performance of the coatings.
3.5
A.
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
This section includes surface preparation and field application of paints, stains, varnishes and
other coatings.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
SECTION 09 91 00 - 8
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 10 14 00
SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
1.
Interior signage
2.
Exterior Signage
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
B.
Product Data: Submit product data for specified products. Include material details for each sign
specified.
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations
3.
Installation methods
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components,
including dimensions, anchorage, and accessories.
D.
Samples: Submit supplier's standard color chart for selection purposes and selected colors for
verification purposes.
E.
Closeout Submittals:
F.
1.3
1.
Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products, including precautions
against harmful cleaning materials and methods.
2.
Submit warranty documents specified herein.
Message List: Signage report and floor plan indicating signage location, text and sign type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the ICC/ANSI A117.1.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a
minimum of three years experience.
1.4
A.
Comply with requirements of Division 1.
1.
Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
2.
Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
3.
Store products protected from weather, temperature, and other harmful conditions as
recommended by supplier.
SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 14 00 - 1
4.
1.5
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer’s standard one year limited warranty covering manufacturing defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SIGNAGE-GENERAL
A.
It is the intent of these specifications to establish a sign standard for the Owner including but not
limited to primary and secondary directories, wall-mounted directional signs, primary room
identification, restrooms, conference rooms, work station identification and all code compliant
signage. While the Owner may not obtain all signs and sign types, the signage contractor shall
design and submit approval drawings for all sign types relevant to the project.
B.
Comply with all applicable provisions of the ADAAG and ANSI 117.1 codes that apply to the
State and Local jurisdiction of the project.
C.
If required text and graphics are not indicated in specification or on drawings, obtain Architects
instructions as to text and graphics prior to preparation of shop drawings.
D.
Typography: See drawings. Copy shall be clean and accurate reproduction of typeface specified.
Upper and lower case and all caps as indicated in Sign Type drawings and Signage schedule.
Letter spacing to be set by manufacturer.
E.
Arrows, symbols and pictograms will be provided in style, sizes, colors and spacing as indicated
in drawings for each sign system.
F.
Braille
1.
G.
2.2
A.
Grade 2 Braille
Design:
1.
Text/Graphics Placement: As indicated on contract drawings
2.
Font: Avenir
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR ROOM SIGNAGE
the following:
1.
Basis of design: ASI, Signage Innovation
a.
2.
B.
C.
ADA-Ready, InTouch Photopolymer
Sign Materials:
1.
Face: InTouch Photopolymer, in matte (non-glare) finish, or approved equal
2.
Backing plate: Acrylic, or approved equal
Fabrication Options
1.
Tactile Graphics and Text:
a.
Fabrication process: Provide tactile copy and grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch
minimum from plaque first surface by manufacturer’s photopolymer bonded
process. Sign face of single material, tactile characters and Braille integral to
photopolymer. Adhesive-fixed characters are not acceptable.
SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 14 00 - 2
b.
2.
E.
2.3
A.
Size: Same size
Thickness: As indicated in Contract Documents.
3.
Background Appearance Options: Select from manufacturer’s standard range.
4.
Tactile Lettering and Graphics Color Options: Select from manufacturer’s standard
colors.
5.
Overall panel size: As indicated in Contract Documents.
6.
Shape: As indicated in Contract Documents.
7.
Letter style, color, letter size and layout position: Selected from manufacturer's standard
letter styles and color charts.
8.
Text schedule: Verify correct capitalization.
Installation Method”
1.
Interior Signage: System SA, silicone adhesive or System VT, vinyl tape.
2.
Exterior Signage: Alum stand-off with concealed fasteners, or approved equal.
Fabrication - General
1.
General: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors,
designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
2.
Preassemble signs in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and installation, in a location not exposed to view after final
assembly.
3.
Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners to appear inconspicuous.
4.
Form panels to required size and shape. Comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, finish, color, and details of construction.
5.
Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods to produce message panels with closely
fitting joints. Align edges and surfaces with one another in the relationship indicated.
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
the following:
1.
Basis of design: ASI, Signage Innovation
a.
2.
B.
Provide lettering and graphics precisely formed, uniformly opaque to comply with
relevant ADA regulations and requirements indicated for size, style, spacing,
content, position, and colors. Tactile characters to be raised min. 1/32” from
surface. Computerized translation of sign copy to be responsibility of the
manufacturer.
Mounting Panel Options:
a.
b.
D.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Series LPS Cut Metal Dimensional Letters
Material:
1.
Finish: Satin Aluminum
2.
Font: Selected from manufacturer’s standard style chart.
SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 14 00 - 3
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
3.
Height: As indicated in the Contract Documents or as required by local governing
jurisdiction.
4.
Mounting Method: Flush Mount, or as indicated in Contract Documents.
Fabrication - General
1.
General: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors,
designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
2.
Design, fabricate, and install sign assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints,
and over-stressing of welds and fasteners.
3.
Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to the weather to exclude water
penetration.
4.
Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be
inconspicuous.
5.
Create signage to required sizes and layout. Comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, finish, color, and details of construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install product in accordance with supplier's instructions.
B.
Install product in locations indicated using mounting methods recommended by sign
manufacturer and free from distortion, warp, or defect adversely affecting appearance.
C.
Install product level, plumb, and at heights indicated.
D.
Install product at heights to conform to Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
(ADAAG) and applicable local amendments and regulations.
E.
Install signs within the following tolerances and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations:
1.
3.2
Interior Signs: Within 1/4 inch vertically and horizontally of intended location.
CLEANING, PROTECTION AND REPAIR
A.
Repair scratches and other damage which might have occurred during installation. Replace
components where repairs were made but are still visible to the unaided eye from a distance of
10 feet.
B.
Remove temporary coverings and protection to adjacent work areas. Clean installed products in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove construction
debris from project in accordance with provisions in Division 1.
END OF SECTION
SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 14 00 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 10 26 00
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
1.
Stainless steel corner guards
2.
Stainless steel end wall protector
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data for each type of corner guard specified.
B.
Detail drawings indicating mounting details with the appropriate fasteners for specific project
substrates.
C.
Samples for verification purposes of corner guard, 6" (152mm) long, in full size profiles of each
type and color indicated.
D.
Cleaning and maintenance instructions for door and wall protection systems.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite and store in original packaging in
a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Products must be installed in an interior climate controlled environment.
WARRANTY
Standard Manufacturer’s Limited Lifetime Warranty against material and manufacturing defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURER
Acceptable Manufacturer:
1.
a.
2.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
Corner Guards:
1.
B.
Basis of Design: InPro Corporation; Muskego, WI 53150; (800) 222-5556
3½" x 3½" x 36”, ⅛" radius, Cement-on, 430 Stainless Steel, 16 gauge
End Wall Protection:
1.
Custom – 1” minimum wing width, 3” minimum end wall width
2.
Corner radius - 1/8”
SECTION 10 26 00 - 1
C.
3.
Height – 36”
4.
All edges to be deburred
Materials
1.
D.
E.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Stainless Steel: Corner Guards shall be manufactured from Type 430, 16 gauge
Stainless Steel
Attachments
1.
Adhesive: Field applied heavy duty adhesive
2.
Fasteners: Pre-drilled beveled holes and Phillips head screws.
Finishes
1.
Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin finish
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions in which the end wall protector and corner guards will be installed.
1.
B.
3.2
A.
3.3
Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of end
wall protectors and corner guards.
Wall surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease and loose paint.
PREPARATION
General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris and loose particles.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the end wall protector and corner guards as indicated on the approved detail
drawing for the appropriate substrate and in compliance with the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Install end wall protectors and corner guards, level and plumb at the height
indicated on the drawings.
B.
Installation of stainless steel end wall protectors and corner guards:
3.4
A.
1.
Surface must be dry, clean and properly sealed.
2.
Cement-on: Apply heavy-duty adhesive to the back of the end wall protector in a zigzag
pattern. Position the end wall protectors on the wall and press firmly in place.
3.
Screw-on: Position the end wall protector on the wall, press firmly in place and attach
with the provided fasteners.
4.
Remove the protective plastic covering from the exposed surface of the end wall
protector or corner guard.
CLEANING
At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the IPC cleanup and
maintenance instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 26 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET, BATH, LAUNDRY, AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
1.
Public-use washroom accessories
2.
Staff-use washroom / locker room accessories
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data on all accessories describing size and dimensions, material and finish,
construction details, details of function, anchoring and mounting requirements, including cutout
requirements in other work.
B.
Submit two samples of each component’s color and finish.
C.
Warranty: Submit standard manufacturer’s warranty for each item.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mounting height and dimensions of accessories shall conform to the following:
1.
Americans with Disabilities Act
2.
2010 Florida Building Code, Accessibility requirements
B.
Source Limitation: For products listed together in the same article, obtain products from a single
source and manufacturer.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustments, operation,
cleaning, and services of accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delay.
1.5
A.
WARRANTY
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage and the fail in materials or workmanship with 15 years
from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS - GENERAL
A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type #04, 0.031 inch minimum nominal thickness unless
otherwise indicated
B.
Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings
C.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designated CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036 inch
minimum nominal thickness.
SECTION 10 28 00 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
D.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
F.
Fasteners: Screw, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-andtheft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G.
Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service)
H.
Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear glass mirror, nominal 6.0 m thick
I.
ABS Plasetic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
1.
Basis of design: Bradley Corporation, Menomee Falls, WI 53502; (800) 272-3539
2.
Toilet tissue (roll) dispenser – Surface mounted - Toilet partition and wall installation, only if
necessary
1.
Bradex Series 500; Model 5402; dual roll, ADA compliant
2.
Finish: Satin
Soap Dispenser – Surface mounted
1.
Bradex Series 600; Model 6562; Tank Type Vertical, ADA compliant
2.
Finish: Satin
Grab Bars
1.
Bradex; Series 800; Model 812;1-1/2” O.D. heavy duty stainless steel with concealed
fasteners, ADA compliant
2.
Length: 36” and 24” for A.D.A. toilet room and compartments.
3.
Finish: Stainless Steel
Napkin Disposal – Surface mounted - Toilet partition and wall installation
1.
Bradex; Model 4722-15
2.
Finish: Satin
Towel Dispenser / Waste Receptacle – Surface mounted
1.
Bradex; Model 2027-11
2.
Finish: Satin
ADA Compliant Mirror Unit
1.
Bradex; Model 740-1836-1; ADA compliant; 1/4” tempered glass mirror
2.
Finish: Satin
3.
Size: 18”x36”
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
Baby Changing Station
1.
2.
Basis of design: Bradley Corporation, Menomee Falls, WI 53502; (800) 272-3539
SECTION 10 28 00 - 2
a.
b.
3.
2.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Foundations Diaper Changing Stations; OH 44256; (866) 740-0195
Model 9611; ADA compliant; surface mounted
FABRICATION
A.
Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
B.
Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
C.
Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes preventing electrolysis.
D.
Shop assembles components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
E.
Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation compatible with
installation locations
F.
Hot dip galvanized exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices.
G.
Hang doors and access panes with full length, continuous hinges.
H.
Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion resistant backing plates.
I.
Keying:
2.5
1.
Supply 2 keys for each accessory to Owner.
2.
Supply 2 master keys for all accessories to Owner.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
Galvanizing: ANSI/ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd.
B.
Chrome/Nickel Plating: ANSI/ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin polished finish.
C.
Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the
manufacturer.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in.
B.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
C.
Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C.
Grab bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
ASTM F 446.
SECTION 10 28 00 - 3
3.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operations. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer’s written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 28 00 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 10 44 13
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
1.2
A.
Dry chemical type fire extinguisher cabinets
SUBMITTALS
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection
cabinets.
1.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting
methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, and
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style
2.
Show location of knockouts for hose valves
B.
Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets, manufacturer’s standard published literature
including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work
C.
Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Rated, Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
B.
Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for portable fire extinguishers.
C.
Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories by a single manufacturer.
D.
Conform to UBC 43-6 (ASTM E814-83) for fire resistive wall performance where necessary.
E.
Conform to Americans with Disabilities Act 1990 on maximum cabinet projection of C in corridors
where necessary.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
B.
Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of hose valves
indicated are accommodated.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
1.5
A.
WARRANTY
Provide standard manufacturer’s warranty
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS
Fire-Protection Cabinets recessed cabinets for fire extinguisher.
SECTION 10 44 13 - 1
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Basis of design: J. L. Industries, Inc.; Bloomington, MN 55435; (952) 835-6850
1)
Ambassador Series
2)
Rated cabinets: Fire-FX
Larsen’s Manufacturing Company; Minneapolis, MN 55432; (800) 527-7397
Modern Metal Product; Owatonna MN 55060; (800) 435-5544
Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated on Drawings, provide fire rated cabinets
Fabrication
1.
Door and Trim Construction: Cold rolled steel with powder coat finish. Flush cabinet
doors with 5/8” door stop attached by continuous hinge and equipped with zinc plated
handle and roller catch.
a.
2.
Trim Style and Depth:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Color of frame and door: Powder coated steel black
Recessed –3/8" flat trim
Semi-Recessed – 1 1/4 Square Edge
Surface-mount with a square edge
Tub Construction: Cold rolled steel with powder-coat finish
a.
Color of tub: Powder coated steel black
4.
Door Glazing: Clear Wire Glass
5.
Door Style: Vertical duo
6.
Accessories: Mounting brackets, Identification lettering as required per jurisdiction
a.
Decal: die cut; 3/4” x 18”; vertical; color to match cabinet
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections
before cabinet installation.
B.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets will be
installed.
C.
3.2
A.
3.3
PREPARATION
Prepare recesses for fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim
style.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cabinets at 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet or as approved by authorities
having jurisdiction
B.
Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
C.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
SECTION 10 44 13 - 2
3.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire protection cabinets.
2.
Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral latching
devices operate properly.
C.
On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E.
Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 44 13 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 10 73 16
EXTERIOR CANOPIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
Pre-engineered, pre-finished Suspended extruded aluminum canopies.
REFERENCES
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1.
AAMA 603 - Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented
Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum.
2.
AAMA 605 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
3.
AAMA 607.1 - Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic
Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
4.
AAMA 608.1 - Voluntary Guide Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically
Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, and project specific detail sheets, and specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Layout and erection drawings showing roof framing, deck panels, cross
sections, and trim details, clearly indicating proper assembly.
C.
Samples: Color selection samples consisting of actual coating material or anodizing process on
aluminum extrusions.
D.
Material Certificates:
1.
Epoxy Resin: For each type of resin required indicating that materials meet specification
requirements, by manufacturer.
2.
Aggregate: For each type of aggregate required indicating compatibility with terrazzo
mix, signed by aggregate supplier.
E.
Maintenance Data: Terrazzo
recommendations from NTMA.
F.
Qualifications: Letter certifying manufacturer's required qualifications.
G.
Structural Design Calculations.
H.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
1.4
Contractor
shall
submit
two
copies
of
maintenance
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Overall Standard: Structural engineering design documents stamped by a structural engineer
registered to practice in the State of Florida.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five years’ experience in producing covers/canopies of
the type specified.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Minimum two years’ experience in erecting covers/canopies of the type
specified.
EXTERIOR CANOPIES
SECTION 10 73 16 - 1
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Materials shall be delivered to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers,
labeled with source or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if
any.
WARRANTY
One year from date of substantial completion covering all materials and workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE
A.
Struts, Gutter Beams, Deck, and Trim: Aluminum extrusions.
B.
Structural Framing: Interlocking deck sections secured by screws.
C.
Canopy: Self-draining from deck into perimeter gutter frame through scuppers to discharge point
at ground level or as otherwise shown.
D.
Building Code: FBC 2010 and all supplements.
E.
Design Loads: As indicated in structural drawings
1.
F.
2.2
A.
Comply with Building Code for site location.
Structural Design: Prepare complete structural design calculations for canopy.
MATERIALS
the following:
1.
Basis of design: Perfection Architectural Systems, Inc., 2310 Mercator Drive Orlando, FL
32807, 800.238.7207
2.
B.
Provide all overhead supported canopy components from a single manufacturer.
C.
Aluminum Extrusions: 6063 alloy, T-6 temper.
D.
Components:
1.
Struts: Aluminum tubular extrusion of size shown on shop drawings.
2.
Gutter Beam: Size: As shown on shop drawings.
3.
Deck: Rigid-Roll-Lock extruded aluminum, self-flashing, interlocking sections.
a.
b.
4.
E.
Size and Profile: As shown on shop drawings.
Size and Profile: As required by structural engineering design.
Flashing: Aluminum sheet, thickness as recommended by manufacturer for specific
condition.
Accessories
1.
Fasteners:
a.
b.
Deck Screws: No. 14 by 1 inch (25 mm), self-tapping, Type 18-8 stainless steel
with neoprene washers.
Trim Screws: No. 10 by 1/2 inch (13 mm), self-tapping, Type 18-8 stainless steel.
EXTERIOR CANOPIES
SECTION 10 73 16 - 2
c.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
Shop Assembly: Fabricate with corners mitered and heli-arc welded to the extent that completed
pieces can be shipped on local, state, and federal highways without special permit. Provide
bolted connections for elements required to be shipped unassembled.
FINISHES
Struts:
Clear Anodized: AA-M-10C-22A-31, Architectural Class II, comply with AAMA 607.1.
Deck:
1.
C.
Other Fasteners: Type 18-8 stainless steel, type recommended by manufacturer
for specific condition.
FABRICATION
1.
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Fascia/Gutter:
1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify locations and elevations.
B.
Examine building surfaces to which canopy will connect.
C.
Coordinate with responsible trade to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory surfaces.
D.
Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
ERECTION
A.
Erect protective covers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B.
Set plumb, straight, and true to line, adequately braced to maintain position.
C.
Keep aluminum surfaces from direct contact with ferrous metal or other incompatible materials
by applying one coat of clear acrylic coating.
3.3
CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.
3.4
A.
PROTECTION
Protect finished aluminum surfaces from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
EXTERIOR CANOPIES
SECTION 10 73 16 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 11 18 13
TELLER TRANSACTION AND DEAL DRAWER SECURITY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
This Section includes teller transaction equipment.
REFERENCES
UL 752 – Standard for Bullet Resisting Equipment
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material
descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features,
finishes, operating instructions, and typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location and integration into the project specific construction identifying
sizes, type and spacing of anchor, bracing, and shims, and any required welding details and
joints to adjacent materials.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Within Shop Drawings, provide verification that the unit will fit within the
suggested assembly.
D.
Qualification Data: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten
years’ experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain all teller transaction and deal drawer equipment through one
source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years’ experience in manufacturing
Deliver units in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, bullet -resistant
characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings
and in a window treatment schedule.
WARRANTY
All material and workmanship shall be warranted against defects for a period of (2) two years
from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
the following:
1.
Basis of design: C. R. Laurence; (800) 421-6144
a.
Sliding Deal Tray & Pass-Thru Drawer Cat. No. ST1620
2.
Armortex, Schertz, Texas; (800) 880-8306
3.
SECTION 11 18 13 - 1
B.
Frame:
1.
C.
The side and rear of frame to be manufactured of 12 gage hot rolled steel and the top
surface shall be no less than 16 gage stainless steel, with a # 3 finish. The front flange
assembly shall be 12 gage stainless steel, #3 finish and a dip tray and bin assembly no
less than 22 gage stainless steel with a #3 finish.
Window Ledge
1.
D.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Provide a window ledge not less than 5" deep. The ledge to be full width of the complete
drawer housing.
Bullet Resistant Protection
1.
Provide a bullet resistant barrier in the main frame housing offering UL Level 1
(Protection levels available are through UL 8 & AP.)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Set drawer in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed recommendations. Installation of the
interior frame may be accomplished by bolting or welding as desired.
B.
Ensure top of drawer/tray assembly is flush with counter tops.
C.
Provide coordinating color sealant in all exposed joints.
3.2
PROTECTION
A.
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to see that the unit is properly stored in a dry
location and covered to protect them from damage before and after installation.
B.
Protect finish from damage during final constructions.
3.3
CLEANING
A.
Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of assemblies thoroughly in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Test and fine tune any and all moving mechanical parts prior to building turn over.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 11 18 13 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 12 24 13
ROLLER SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
1.2
This Section includes roller shades with manual and electrical shade operators.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material
descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features,
finishes, operating instructions, and typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor
controllers with building management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as
applicable.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details,
and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to
other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
D.
1.
Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building structure.
2.
Ceiling mounted or penetrating items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets,
speakers, sprinklers, recessed shades, and special moldings at walls, column
penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.
3.
Shade mounting assembly and attachment.
4.
Size and location of access to shade operator, chain locations, motor, and adjustable
components.
5.
Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:48)
Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated.
1.
E.
Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification:
1.
Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide for each type of
roller shade indicated.
2.
For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components, unassembled,
demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shade cloth sample and
aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces.
3.
For the following products:
a.
F.
G.
Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches (76 mm) square, with specified treatments
applied. Mark face of material.
b.
Window Treatment Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated
on Drawings.
Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.
Qualification Data: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten
years’ experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.
ROLLER SHADES
SECTION 12 24 13 - 1
H.
1.3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.
2.
Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics,
finishes, and performance.
3.
Operating hardware.
4.
Motorized shade operator.6/TMS 602
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer
with a minimum of twenty years’ experience in manufacturing products comparable to those
specified in this section.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials
tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
D.
Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1.
E.
Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a
system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.
F.
Shade cloth to “pass” indoor air quality / VOC testing as per ASTM D 5116-97 ASTM D 6670-01,
USEPA-ETV (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental Technology Verification
Protocol).
G.
Shade Cloth: Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi
ATCC9642, ATCC9644, ATCC9645.
H.
Shade Cloth to be constructed of a woven screen material consisting of yarns comprised of
extruded vinyl coated Polyester core yarn as a composite Thermoplastic shade cloth that shall
be sealed at the edges, assuring binding the core yarn to the coating at the cut edge to assure a
sealed edge to substantially minimize raveling. Screen cloths to have inert core yarns: i.e.
Fiberglass yarns shall not be acceptable.
I.
Use only injection-molded Delrin engineered plastics by Dupont for all plastic components of
shade hardware. Styrene based, PVC, or glass reinforced polyester thermo polymer plastics are
not acceptable.
J.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.4
A.
1.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
2.
Do not proceed with remaining work until mock-up is accepted.
Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-testresponse characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on
Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.
ROLLER SHADES
SECTION 12 24 13 - 2
1.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish
work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions
are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth; Manufacturer's standard fit-for-use, including
normal wear & tear, non-depreciating, Limited Lifetime twenty-five year warranty. Warranty to
transfer to owner upon completion of installation.
B.
Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating
eight-year warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ROLLER SHADES
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Obtain shades from single available manufacturer, of uniform texture
and color for each kind required.
B.
the following:
C.
D.
1.
Basis of design: Mecho Shade Systems, Inc (MechoShade), performance and
warranties, or equal.
2.
Shade Band Material: The selection of density and color of sunscreen shadecloth shall be based
on the relationship with the specified glass, in accordance with the specific project requirements
for reducing heat loads and glare.
1.
Fabric Width: As per manufacturer’s standard.
2.
Pattern: As per manufacturer's standard.
3.
Colors: As per manufacturer's standard.
4.
Material Openness Factor: As per manufacturer's recommendation for specified glass
type and applicable conditions.
5.
Bottom Hem: Fabric wrapped and electronically sealed at ends. Sewn hems and open
hem pockets are not acceptable.
Rollers: Extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit
internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material
without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets. Provide for positive
mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable /
replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller
from shade brackets. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes,
staples, and/or rivets.
ROLLER SHADES
SECTION 12 24 13 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
E.
Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded shades to be capable of smooth
operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane
perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset.
F.
Direction of Roll: Reverse or regular roll, as required. Provide for universal, regular and offset
drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all manual shade drive
end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change.
G.
Mounting Brackets: Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick
plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.
1.
Bracket shall be fully integrated with all accessories, including, but not limited to: fascia,
room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded
shades.
2.
Drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch
(9.525 mm) steel pin.
3.
The brake shall be an over-running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during
the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. (22
kg) in the stopped position. color and finish schedule
4.
The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake
system is mounted. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require
externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable. The
entire assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully
independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without
effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.
H.
Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg) minimum breaking
strength. Nickel plated steel chain shall not be accepted.
I.
Roller Shade Pocket for recessed mounting in acoustical tile, or drywall ceilings.
J.
K.
2.2
A.
1.
Provide either extruded aluminum and or formed steel shade pocket, sized to
accommodate roller shades, with exposed extruded removable closure panel to provide
access to shades.
2.
For open return air plenum, provide "Vented Pocket" such that there will be a minimum of
four 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter holes per foot allowing the solar gain to flow above the
ceiling line.
3.
Provide pocket end caps where required.
Fascia:
1.
Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting
brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. Fascia
shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. Fascia shall
fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. Provide bracket / fascia end
caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade brackets. Notching of
Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable.
2.
Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
Manual Operation: Chain locations to be on right hand side of user.
ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless
specifically indicated otherwise. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion.
Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate
unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18
ROLLER SHADES
SECTION 12 24 13 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave
design.
B.
Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller,
and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.
C.
Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting shades and access ories under conditions of normal use.
D.
Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard
baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
E.
Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
MOTORIZED SHADE HARDWARE AND SHADE BRACKETS
A.
Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel, or
heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.
B.
Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any
operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting
position (inside, or outside mount).
C.
Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a
maximum of 8-45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands (4-22.5 degrees) on each
side of the radial line, by a single shade motor (multi-banded shade, subject to manufacturer’s
design criteria).
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM
Shade Motors: Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible
capacitor operating at 110v AC (60hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected,
totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking
disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube.
Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps. Use motors rated at the same
nominal speed for all shades in the same room. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not
exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly.
MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS
Specifications and design of shade motors and motor control system are based on a motor logic
control system that provides all of the following performance capabilities. Motor logic control
systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as
equal systems.
1.
Motor Control System:
a.
b.
c.
Provide power to each shade motor via individual 3 conductor line voltage circuits
connecting each motor to the relay based motor logic controllers.
Control system components shall provide appropriate (spike and brown out) overcurrent protection (+/-10 percent of line voltage) for each of the four individual
motor circuits and shall be rated by UL or ETL as a recognized component of this
system and tested as an integrated system.
Motor control system shall allow each group of four shade motors in any
combination to be controlled by each of four local switch ports, with up to fourteen
possible "sub-group" combinations via local 3 button wall switches and all at once
ROLLER SHADES
SECTION 12 24 13 - 5
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
b.
c.
A.
via a master 3 button switch. System shall allow for overlapping switch
combinations from two or more local switches.
Multiple "sub-groups" from different motor control components shall be capable of
being combined to form "groups" operated by a single 3 button wall switch, from
either the master port or in series from a local switch port.
Each shade motor shall be accessible (for control purposes) from up to four local
switches and one master switch.
Control system shall allow for automatic alignment of shade hem bars in stopped
position at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of opening heights, and up to
three user-defined intermediate stopping positions in addition to all up / all down,
regardless of shade height, for a total of five positions. Control system shall allow
shades to be stopped at any point in the opening height noting that shades may
not be in alignment at these non-defined positions).
Control system shall have two standard operating modes: Normal mode allowing
the shades to be stopped anywhere in the window’s opening height and uniform
mode, allowing the shades to only be stopped at the predefined intermediate stop
positions. Both modes shall allow for all up / all down positioning.
Control system components shall allow for interface with both audiovisual system
components and building fire and life safety system via a dry contact terminal
block.
Control system components shall allow for interface with external analog input
control devices such as solar activated controllers, 24 hour timers, and similar
items; via a dry contact terminal block.
Reconfiguration of switch groups shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line
voltage motor power supply wiring, or the low voltage control wiring.
Reconfiguration of switch groups shall be accomplished within the motor control
device.
Wall Switches:
a.
2.6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Three-button architectural flush mounted switches with metal cover plate and no
exposed fasteners.
Connect local wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V
DC) 4-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-11 type connectors supplied,
installed and certified.
Connect master wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V
DC) 6-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-12 type connectors supplied,
installed and certified.
Roller shades and associated exposed parts:
1.
Selected from manufacture’s standard colors
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of
connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
ROLLER SHADES
SECTION 12 24 13 - 6
3.2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A.
Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
B.
Installer shall train personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems.
3.3
A.
3.4
ADJUSTING
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C.
Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by architect
before time of Substantial Completion.
3.5
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain roller shades.
END OF SECTION
ROLLER SHADES
SECTION 12 24 13 - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 22 00 10
PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Work herein shall conform to all applicable laws, ordinances, and to regulations of the local utility
companies. The general conditions and all requirements of the contract documents shall apply
to all work of this section. Work shall be in accordance with the requirements of:
1.
2010 Florida Building Code (FBC): (This code includes the Florida Building Code,
Accessibility as Chapter 11.) This code includes the 2010 FBC Building, Mechanical,
Plumbing, Fuel Gas Volumes and Energy Conservation Volumes. Further, see the 2010
FBC; Building Chapter 35; FBC, Mechanical Chapter 15; Plumbing Chapter 13 and FBC
Fuel Gas Chapter 8 and FBC, Energy Conservation Chapter 6. (Effective March 15,
2012)
2.
2010 Florida Fire Prevention Code (FFPC): (This code also includes the Florida versions
of NFPA 1 and NFPA 101.) (Effective December 31, 2011)
B.
Cooperate with all other trades and install work as fast as the progress of the job will permit.
C.
Use only mechanics skilled in the work they are to perform and have a competent representative
on the job when any work is being done.
D.
No work shall be done unless the Superintendent of the Contractor is on the job site. Work shall
be properly protected, all rubbish removed promptly, and exposed work shall be carefully
cleaned prior to final acceptance.
E.
The term "provide" shall include labor, materials, and equipment necessary to furnish and install,
complete and operable, the item or system indicated.
F.
In decisions arising from discrepancies, interpretation of Drawings and Specifications,
substitutes, and other pertinent matters, the decision of the Owner's representative's approval
shall be final.
1.2
SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS
A.
Plans show location of fixtures and equipment and are intended to depict the general intent of
the work in scope, layout and quality of workmanship. They are not intended to show in minute
detail every or all accessories intended for the purpose of executing the work, but it is
understood that such details are a part of this work.
B.
Where Drawings and Specifications conflict, it shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to
bring such conflict to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for clarification. In general, the
Architectural Drawings shall take precedence over the Mechanical Drawings with reference to
building construction. All changes from the Drawings necessary to make the work conform with
the building as constructed and to fit the work of other trades or to conform to the rules of
authorities having jurisdiction, shall be made by the Contractor at his own expense.
C.
Keep a record of the locations of concealed work and of any field changes in Contract Drawings
and Specifications for each trade and, upon completion of the job.
1.3
A.
PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS:
The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government fees in
accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, sales taxes and other costs, including utility
connections or extensions, in connection with this work; file all permit applications required by all
governmental departments having jurisdiction.
SECTION 22
00 10 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Obtain all required certificates of inspection for work and deliver them to the Owner before
requesting acceptance and final payment for the work.
C.
The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials,
services, apparatus and drawings required to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules
and regulations.
D.
The Contractor shall inform the Owner of any work or materials which conflict with any of the
applicable codes, standards, laws and regulations before submitting his bid.
1.4
GENERAL
A.
Materials or products specified herein and/or indicated on drawings by trade name,
manufacturer's name and/or catalog number shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will
not be permitted except as described herein and in the Supplementary and General Conditions.
B.
Since manufacturers reserve the right to change their products at any time, contractors shall
verify all dimensions, performance data, etc. for each piece of equipment submitted to assure
compliance with the intent of the drawings and specifications.
C.
All materials shall be new and of quality as specified, and when required, be clearly labeled
and/or stamped as manufactured in the United States.
D.
Where an accepted substitution or deviation requires different quantity or arrangement of
foundations, supports, ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit, and any other equipment or accessories
normal to this equipment, contractor shall furnish said changes and additions and pay all costs
for all changes and additions to his work and the work of others affected by this substitution or
deviation.
E.
Deviations mean the use of any listed approved manufacturer other than those on which the
drawings are based.
1.5
SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A.
The Architect/Engineer's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before
delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not
had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site. Submittals shall be made for all
equipment and systems as indicated in the respective specification section.
B.
All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other
data necessary for the Architect/Engineer to ascertain that the proposed equipment and
materials comply with specification and drawing requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for
approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.
C.
Shop and erection drawing submittals shall conform to the requirements of the General
Conditions except as modified herein.
D.
Submit required and/or requested shop and erection drawings, for review by Architect/Engineer
before ordering or installing any equipment or material. Equipment or material ordered or
installed before Architect/Engineer review may not be accepted and may have to be removed
from the project if deemed unacceptable.
E.
Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's scale drawings, cuts or catalogs, including
descriptive literature which shall clearly indicate the construction, material, physical dimensions,
wiring diagrams and complete operating data clearly marked for each item. Data of general
nature will not be accepted.
F.
Shop drawings on paper larger than 11”x17” shall be submitted in the form of one set of
reproducibles (vellum) and one set of blueprints. The blueprints will be retained by the engineer
and the reproducibles will be returned to the contractor. All drawings are to be submitted no later
than 60 days after the contract has been awarded.
SECTION 22
00 10 - 2
1.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Coordination drawings shall show major elements, components, and systems of
mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components.
Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all
equipment and materials, including clearances for installing, servicing and maintaining
equipment, valve stem movement, and similar requirements. Indicate movement and
positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.
G.
Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one
item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will
not be considered for approval. Submittals shall be submitted for all applicable products and
materials specified in each individual section of these specifications.
H.
Make submittals for the equipment and materials in accordance with the following:
1.
Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION_______".
2.
Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and
paragraph numbers.
3.
The submittals shall include the following:
a.
I.
Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the
manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical
data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.
Provide any additional information specifically requested in the individual
specification section or on the drawings.
b.
Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the
equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each
part.
Shop drawings on paper 11”X17” or smaller in size shall be submitted in tabbed and indexed
three ring binders. The binders shall not exceed 11-5/8” height. Partial submittals are
unacceptable. The index shall indicate the related specification section number.
J.
A Fee will be charged for Engineering review of drawings received after the time allotted as
described in “F” above or for plans that have been rejected two or more times due to
noncompliance or incompleteness. The fee will be determined by the Architect/Engineer and will
accompany the re-submittal in the form of a cashiers check or money order made payable to the
Engineer.
K.
The General Contractor will certify that all shop drawings are in conformance with the plans and
specifications. Deviations from the plans and specifications shall be noted, and the specific area
of the deviation clouded and in contrasting color (green) with a complete explanation for the
reasons for the deviation. Any redesign of the system shall be Certified by a Professional
Engineer currently registered in the State of Florida, and will be accompanied by the fees as
described in “J” above.
L.
Carefully examine all shop drawings and mark-up as necessary before submitting to the
Architect/Engineer for review. The engineer will only consider shop drawings bearing the
contractor’s stamp of approval.
M.
The engineer’s review shall not relieve the contractor from the responsibility for deviations from
drawings and specifications. The engineer’s review shall be construed to apply only to general
arrangement and shall not relieve the contractor from the responsibility for the correctness of
details and dimensions and provision of the correct equipment.
N.
The contractor shall retain copies of all reviewed shop drawings on the job site for reference.
O.
In addition to the requirement of SUBMITTALS, the Owner reserves the right to request the
manufacturer to arrange for the Owner's representative(s) to see typical active systems in
operation, when there has been no prior experience with the manufacturer or the type of
equipment being submitted.
SECTION 22
00 10 - 3
1.6
A.
1.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
EXPERIENCE
The Contractor performing this work shall be a licensed, reputable firm, regularly performing the
type of work incorporated in this project and who also maintains, as part of the firm, a service
department with qualified personnel who regularly perform this type of work. The Contractor
shall, upon request, show evidence of at least two jobs of similar character and size installed
within the preceding two years.
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A.
Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trades to avoid interferences and delays. He
shall assist in working out space requirements to make a satisfactory installation.
B.
If the Contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades, or so as to cause any
interference with the work of other trades, he shall make the necessary changes in his work to
correct the condition without extra charge.
C.
The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns,
setting plans, and shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of
coordinating adjacent work.
1.8
STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A.
All materials stored on site shall be properly protected from injury or deterioration. Materials
shall not be stored in contact with ground or floor.
B.
Do not remove manufacturer's packing materials until ready to install. Materials showing signs
of corrosion, improper handling or storage shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
C.
Provide continuous protection for all equipment already installed.
1.9
CUTTING, PATCHING, EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND LAYOUT
A.
Provide openings and excavation required for the installation of the work.
backfill as required. Finished work shall match the existing adjoining work.
B.
Verify all conditions affecting the work to be performed under this contract.
C.
Carefully verify measurements at the site, determine the exact location of chases and openings
required. Provide sleeves, inserts, and hangers as required. No columns, beams, joists, building
foundations or any other structural building component shall be cut, drilled or disturbed in any
way. Conflicts shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.
D.
All excavation on sites containing existing buildings and existing services shall be done with
hand shovel to avoid damage to existing services. Any damage incurred by the Contractor shall
be repaired by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer at no cost to the
Owner and with no extension of time limitation.
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
Patch work and
REMOVAL OF RUBBISH
Contractor shall keep premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by
his employees or work in accordance with specification “Construction Procedures”. At
completion of work, he shall remove all his tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and rubbish from
building and site. He shall leave premises and his work in a clean orderly condition acceptable
to the Architect/Engineer.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Factory installed starters, controllers, and control equipment mounted in manufactured
mechanical equipment necessary for mechanical equipment operation shall be furnished under
Division 22 Mechanical.
SECTION 22
00 10 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Power wiring for motors and installation of starters shall be under Division 26 Electrical.
C.
Temperature, humidity, pressure and similar controls essential to the operation of mechanical
systems, and wiring and conduit thereof, including interlock wiring, shall be under Division 22 of
Specifications, installed in accordance with requirements of Division 26.
D.
Motors shall be furnished under Division 22 Mechanical of capacity required to operate
equipment specified, but shall not be less than that specified.
E.
Furnish and install all low voltage (120V and under) temperature control wiring for equipment
provided under this division.
F.
Provide conduit when required for control wiring.
1.12
QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION
A.
All equipment provided under this section shall operate under all conditions of load free of
objectionable sound and vibration. Sound and vibration conditions considered objectionable
shall be corrected in an approved manner.
B.
Vibration and sound control shall be by means of approved vibration eliminators or sound
attenuators in a manner as specified and as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.13
A.
1.14
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
Each unit shall be identified by its system number and other appropriate designation by
stenciling in letters of approved size and wording. Equipment requiring identification shall
include: supply and exhaust fans, air conditioning and heating machinery and apparatus, pumps,
piping, control cabinets, and other equipment units as may be directed by the Architect/Engineer.
CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENTS
A.
Upon completion of the work, Contractor shall clean and lubricate fans, motors, and other
running equipment and apparatus which he has installed and make certain such apparatus and
mechanisms are in proper working order and ready to test.
B.
Scratched or damaged painting shall be touched up as necessary to return the painting to "new"
condition and appearance.
C.
All piping and equipment shall be thoroughly blown out under pressure and cleared of all foreign
matter, wasting air, gas or water through temporary connections as long as necessary to
thoroughly clean system before system is placed in operation. Use every precaution to prevent
pipe compound, scale, dirt, welding and other objectionable matter from getting into the piping
system and equipment.
D.
During blow out period, baskets from strainers shall be removed, traps and control valves, etc.,
shall be by-passed.
E.
All cleaning shall be done prior to any sterilization, pressure testing, flow balancing or equipment
adjustment procedures.
F.
During construction protect all piping and equipment from damage and dirt. Cap the open ends
of all piping and equipment.
1.15
DEMOLITION
A.
Demolition shall be as shown on drawings or specified.
B.
Schedule all demolition work with Owner to cause minimum downtime of any building service or
function. No extra cost to the contract will be allowed for overtime work unless specifically
authorized in advance by representative of Owner in writing.
SECTION 22
00 10 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
C.
During demolition and construction protect from damage all existing equipment and services that
are to remain. Repair or replace any damage to existing facilities at no extra cost to the contract.
D.
Remove with care and deliver to a location designated by representative of the Owner all items
designated to remain the property of the Owner.
E.
Drawings are diagrammatic and shown only major obstructions; coordinate with other trades for
removal or relocation of pipes; conduits, hangers, etc. in path of work.
F.
No columns, beams, joists, building foundations or any other structural building component shall
be cut, drilled or disturbed in any way. Conflicts shall immediately be brought to the attention of
the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall not proceed until instructed in writing by the
Architect/Engineer if conflicts between mechanical work and structural elements occur.
1.16
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WORK
A.
Plan installation of new work and connections to existing work to insure minimum interference
with regular operation of existing facilities.
B.
Submit to the Owner for approval, a schedule of necessary temporary shut-downs of existing
services. All shutdowns shall be made at such times as will not interfere with regular operating of
existing facilities and only after written approval of the Owner.
C.
To insure continuous operation, make necessary temporary connections between new and
existing work.
D.
Connect new work to existing work in neat and approved manner.
disturbed to original condition.
1.17
Restore existing work
WATERPROOFING
A.
Where any work pierces waterproofing including waterproof concrete, the method of installation
shall be as approved by the Owner before the work is done.
B.
Provide all necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required to make openings absolutely
watertight. Waterproof flashing materials shall be compatible with base materials.
1.18
A.
1.19
A.
1.20
A.
1.21
A.
TESTS
Contractor shall make all tests required to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed
status and satisfactory operation of all systems to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.
Provide all instruments, labor and services necessary to conduct tests.
INSTRUCTIONS
Fully instruct Owner's personnel in the care and operation of mechanical systems and furnish a
letter to the Architect/Engineer advising the particular person who has received such instruction.
GUARANTEE
Equipment shall be started, tested, adjusted, and placed in satisfactory operating condition.
Furnish a letter addressed to the Architect/Engineer advising that the completed systems have
been installed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, and that they are in proper
operating condition. The Owner shall receive a written guarantee covering all defects in
workmanship and material for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. Any defects
appearing within this year period shall be repaired without additional cost to the Owner.
ACCEPTANCE
Before requesting final inspection:
SECTION 22
00 10 - 6
B.
1.22
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
Complete all work required. If any items are held in abeyance as incomplete for final
inspection, list such items together with explanation for delay.
2.
Submit statement that equipment is properly installed, adjusted, fully lubricated and
operation is satisfactory.
3.
Certify in writing to the Architect/Engineer that the Owner's representative has been
instructed as to the care and operation of the system and that catalog service and
maintenance information has been turned over to the Architect/Engineer.
4.
Submit copy of written guarantee.
5.
Submit copy of other data as may be outlined in these specifications.
Copies of the above data shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer prior to requesting final
inspection.
FACILITY START-UP BROCHURE
At the completion of work, Contractor shall provide startup instruction in accordance with these
specifications in their entirety and shall submit a bound brochure containing the following:
1.
Shop Drawings
2.
Maintenance Manuals
3.
Control Wiring and Piping Diagrams
4.
Operating Instructions
5.
Copy of Guarantee
6.
Certificate of Instruction of Owner's Representative
7.
Certificate of Job Completion
8.
Record Documents
B.
Where projects are of sufficient size to make a single brochure impractical, several brochures
shall be prepared by trade and As-Built Drawings may be submitted as a separate item.
C.
Brochure shall be indexed and divided for reasonable clarity.
D.
Brochure shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer for review and approval. The contractor
shall make modifications to the brochure as deemed necessary for compliance and clarity, by
the Architect/Engineer, and resubmit the final brochure to the Architect/Engineer to be forwarded
to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22
00 10 - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 22 04 50
PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
1.3
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The general conditions and all requirements of the contract documents shall apply to all work of
this Division.
WORK INCLUDED
1.
Scheduling: Schedule work with Owner so as to avoid disruption of normal activities.
2.
Pipes and Pipe Fittings
3.
Piping Specialties
4.
Valves
5.
Hangers and Supports
6.
Insulation
7.
Plumbing Fixtures
8.
Plumbing Equipment
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Standard Building Codes
1.
2012)
2.
B.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes.
C.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
D.
1.
ASTM C177-76: Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of the
Guarded Hot Plate: Thermal Conductivity.
2.
ASTM C335-79: Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulations:
Thermal Conductivity.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
1.
E.
NEMA Standard MGI -12.536.
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.
1.
MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials Design and Manufacture, 1988.
2.
MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application, 1991.
SECTION 22
04 50 - 1
1. 4
A.
1.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SUBMITTALS
Submit (6) copies of the following detailed manufacturer's product data and shop drawings for
each item as follows:
1.
Pipes and Pipe Fittings
2.
Piping Specialties and Valves
3.
Valves
4.
5.
Insulation
6.
Plumbing Fixtures
7.
Plumbing Equipment
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION
A.
Prior to inspection, demonstrate the proper operations of each system to the Owner's
representative.
B.
Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment, maintenance of equipment
and system using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instruction.
1.6
A.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
Prior to final payment, compile manufacturer's written warranties for each major piece of
equipment. In addition, warranty all apparatus furnished to remain in serviceable and
operational condition for a period of at least one year from the date of substantial completion and
acceptance of the work. This written warranty shall provide that any imperfections in material or
function, as a whole or in part, by reason of defective workmanship, defective materials
damaged as result of these defects or their repair, shall be made good to the satisfaction of the
Owner's representative at the contractor's expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
Domestic Water Piping:
1.
Interior above ground shall be type "L" hard drawn temper copper tubing and below
ground type "K" soft annealed temper copper. Pipe and fittings shall meet ASTM B-88,
125 psi.
2.
Exterior below ground shall be polyvinyl chloride, Type 1, Grade 1, Schedule 40, ASTM D
2466-78 with NSF label.
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping:
1.
Above Slab & Exterior: Polyvinyl chloride DWV Schedule 40 pipe (PVC); standard weight;
PVC DWV Schedule 40 pipe fittings, solvent cement joints.
2.
Below Slab: Cast-iron hub-and-spigot soil pipe, cast-iron hub-and-spigot soil pipe fittings,
compression gasket joints.
Soldering Materials: Provide one of the following for each designated service:
1.
Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA; for pressure piping and domestic hot
and cold water piping.
SECTION 22
04 50 - 2
2.2
A.
B.
Pipe Escutcheons: Provide pipe escutcheons with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside
diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of
escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve
extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas,
prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
1.
Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and
condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass
escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
2.
Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
3.
Manufacturer: Chicago Specialty; Producers Specialty; or Sanitary-Dash.
Dielectric Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service
indicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance),
prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.
E.
G.
B&K Industries; Capital Mfg.; Eclipse; Epco; Perfection; or Rockford-
Manufacturer: Thunderline.
Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or
ceilings used as passage for mechanical components such as piping or ductwork.
1.
Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4" Diameter: Use putty or caulking, one-piece
intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets,
and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL listed.
2.
Openings 4" or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test in
accordance with ASTM E-804, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps
capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350oF (121 to 177oC),
UL-listed.
3.
Manufacturer: Electro Products; or Nelson.
Water Hammer Arresters: Provide bellows type water hammer arresters, stainless steel casing
and bellows, pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard
WH-201.
1.
F.
Manufacturer:
Eclipse.
Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber
links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts
and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing
watertight seal and electrical insulation.
1.
D.
MAY, 2013
PIPING SPECIALTIES
1.
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
Manufacturer: Amtrol; Smith; Tyler; or Zurn.
Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
1.
Sheet-metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock
joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following
gages: 3" and smaller, 20 ga.; 4" to 6", 16 ga.; over 6", 14 ga.
2.
Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.
3.
Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs.
4.
Plastic-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.
Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in
exterior walls, of one of the following:
Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Installed between sleeve and pipe.
SECTION 22
04 50 - 3
2.3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
VALVES
A.
General: Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service
indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated. Where not indicated, provide
proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end
connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than
one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
B.
Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
C.
Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn.
Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 6" and smaller, other than plug valves. Provide one
wrench for every 10 plug valves. Provide gear operators for quarter-turn valves 8" and larger.
Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains for overhead valves as indicated.
D.
Gate Valves: Comply with the following standards:
E.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
1.
Cast-Iron Valves: MSS SP-70.
2.
Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80.
3.
Steel Valves: ANSI B16.34.
4.
Manufacturer:
Crane; Fairbanks; Hammond;
Milwaukee; Nibco, Powell; Stockham; or Walworth.
Grinnel;
Jenkins,
Lunkenheimer;
Ball Valves: Comply with the following standards:
1.
Cast-Iron Valves: MSS SP-72.
2.
Steel Valves: ANSI B16.34.
3.
Manufacturer: Conbraco; Crane; Fairbanks; Hammond; Grinnell; Jamesbury; Jenkins;
Metraflex; Milwaukee; Nibco; Powell; Stockman; Walworth; or Watts.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Piping:
1.
Hangers and supports shall comply with the requirements of MSS SP-58.
2.
For support of copper tubing, use a split ring hanger with provision for vertical adjustment
of cast brass, copper plated malleable iron.
INSULATION
Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping: Insulate all domestic hot and cold water piping except
exposed fixture connections with 1/2" Armaflex or approved equal.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
A.
Plumbing fixtures shall be of the size, type, manufacturer, and capacity with all trim as listed on
the fixture schedule on the drawings. Provide carrier where indicated.
B.
Submit shop drawings for approval of all plumbing fixtures furnished.
2.7
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
A.
Plumbing equipment shall be of the size, type, manufacturer, and capacity as listed in the
equipment schedules on the drawings.
B.
Submit shop drawings for approval of all plumbing equipment furnished.
SECTION 22
04 50 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve permanently-leakproof piping system, capable of performing each indicated service
without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and coupling, but with adequate and
accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment.
Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at
connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ASME B31 Code for Pressure
Piping.
B.
Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain)
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and
column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not
otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block
access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead
construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building; limit
clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for
insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside
insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by
locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not
encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.
C.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical
or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures.
D.
Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints in accordance with applicable provisions of CDA "Copper
Tube Handbook".
E.
Plastic Pipe/Tube Joints: Comply with the following:
1.
F.
Making Solvent-Cemented Joints: ASTM D 2235, and ASTM F 402.
Cleaning, Flushing, Inspecting:
1.
General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials,
and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with
clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for
completion of joints, supports and accessory items.
a.
b.
3.2
Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.
Disinfect water mains and water service piping in accordance with AWWA C601.
2.
Test pressure piping in accordance with ASTM B31.
3.
Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and reinstallation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use
chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
4.
Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration thru floors, walls,
partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure
escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with
adjoining surface.
B.
Dielectric Unions: Install dielectric unions at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous
piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.
SECTION 22
04 50 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
C.
Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure
plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until
links have expanded to form watertight seal.
D.
Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound.
manufacturer's installation instructions.
E.
Water Hammer Arresters: Install in upright position, in locations and of sizes in accordance with
PDI Standard WH-201, and elsewhere as indicated.
F.
Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors,
ceilings, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as
detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered
on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in
sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than
piping run. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient
clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated,
and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor
finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during
placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent
concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.
G.
1.
Install sheet-metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended
ceilings.
2.
Install iron-pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations, both above and below grade.
3.
Install steel-pipe or plastic-pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated.
Cleanout
1.
3.3
Adhere to
Provide cleanouts at end and at points in change of direction of all drains, soil and waste
pipes and branches thereof, at foot of each riser, at all offsets in all horizontal runs at
approximately 75 foot intervals both inside and outside building, at other points where
indicated on the plans or where required.
VALVES
A.
Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in
branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible
and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
B.
Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with
stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with
hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane.
C.
Place shut-off valve on each water main service. Place valve near the building where indicated
on the drawings.
3.4
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A.
Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to
be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum
spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together
by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for
smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support
piping from other piping.
B.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and
other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install
hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
SECTION 22
04 50 - 6
C.
A.
3.6
A.
MAY, 2013
Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are
copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.
1.
3.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles.
INSULATION
Piping Insulation:
1.
Do not split insulation. Slide over the tubing before fabrication. Seal successive sections
of insulation with factory approved and recommended mastic. Butt together and hold
until mastic dries...60 seconds.
2.
Split insulation is not acceptable and shall be removed and new insulation installed if it is
observed on the job.
3.
Size insulation for tubing. Do not oversize. Insulation shall be snug.
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
Plumbing Fixtures
1.
Install plumbing fixtures and equipment as indicated on the drawings. Installation must
be in accordance with applicable codes and manufacturer's recommendations.
Coordinate to ensure that fixture carrier is of appropriate type and size to fit plumbing
chase walls provided.
2.
All wall hung fixtures, pipes, etc. shall be tightly secured to and anchored to walls.
Provide additional stiffening members on stud walls as required.
3.
Contractor shall refer to, and locate and install plumbing fixtures as shown on latest
architectural drawings.
4.
After plumbing fixtures are set, the crack between the fixture and the wall shall be
caulked carefully with Tub-Tite as manufactured by American Fluoresite Company, or
approved equal.
5.
Fixtures shall be protected from damage during construction, and shall be thoroughly
cleaned of all tape and adhesives prior to final acceptance.
6.
All porcelain or vitreous china fixtures shall be clean, smooth and bright. All shall be
warranted not to craze, discolor or scale.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22
04 50 - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 23 00 10
HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Work herein shall conform to all applicable laws, ordinances, and to regulations of the local utility
companies. The general conditions and all requirements of the contract documents shall apply
to all work of this section. Work shall be in accordance with the requirements of:
1.
2012)
2.
B.
Cooperate with all other trades and install work as fast as the progress of the job will permit.
C.
Use only mechanics skilled in the work they are to perform and have a competent representative
on the job when any work is being done.
D.
E.
F.
shall be final.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
and Specifications for each trade and, upon completion of the job.
1.3
A.
PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS:
The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government fees in
accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, sales taxes and other costs, including utility
connections or extensions, in connection with this work; file all permit applications required by all
governmental departments having jurisdiction.
HVAC REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23
00 10 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Obtain all required certificates of inspection for work and deliver them to the Owner before
requesting acceptance and final payment for the work.
C.
The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials,
services, apparatus and drawings required to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules
and regulations.
D.
The Contractor shall inform the Owner of any work or materials which conflict with any of the
applicable codes, standards, laws and regulations before submitting his bid.
1.4
GENERAL
A.
Materials or products specified herein and/or indicated on drawings by trade name,
manufacturer's name and/or catalog number shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will
not be permitted except as described herein and in the Supplementary and General Conditions.
B.
Since manufacturers reserve the right to change their products at any time, contractors shall
verify all dimensions, performance data, etc. for each piece of equipment submitted to assure
compliance with the intent of the drawings and specifications.
C.
All materials shall be new and of quality as specified, and when required, be clearly labeled
and/or stamped as manufactured in the United States.
D.
Where an accepted substitution or deviation requires different quantity or arrangement of
foundations, supports, ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit, and any other equipment or accessories
normal to this equipment, contractor shall furnish said changes and additions and pay all costs
for all changes and additions to his work and the work of others affected by this substitution or
deviation.
E.
Deviations mean the use of any listed approved manufacturer other than those on which the
drawings are based.
1.5
SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A.
equipment and systems as indicated in the respective specification section.
B.
C.
Shop and erection drawing submittals shall conform to the requirements of the General
Conditions except as modified herein.
D.
Submit required and/or requested shop and erection drawings, for review by Architect/Engineer
before ordering or installing any equipment or material. Equipment or material ordered or
installed before Architect/Engineer review may not be accepted and may have to be removed
from the project if deemed unacceptable.
E.
Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's scale drawings, cuts or catalogs, including
descriptive literature which shall clearly indicate the construction, material, physical dimensions,
wiring diagrams and complete operating data clearly marked for each item. Data of general
nature will not be accepted.
F.
Shop drawings on paper larger than 11”x17” shall be submitted in the form of one set of
reproducibles (vellum) and one set of blueprints. The blueprints will be retained by the engineer
and the reproducibles will be returned to the contractor. All drawings are to be submitted no later
than 60 days after the contract has been awarded.
HVAC REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23
00 10 - 2
1.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Coordination drawings shall show major elements, components, and systems of
mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components.
Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all
equipment and materials, including clearances for installing, servicing and maintaining
equipment, valve stem movement, and similar requirements. Indicate movement and
positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.
G.
H.
1.
2.
paragraph numbers.
3.
a.
I.
b.
part.
Shop drawings on paper 11”X17” or smaller in size shall be submitted in tabbed and indexed
three ring binders. The binders shall not exceed 11-5/8” height. Partial submittals are
unacceptable. The index shall indicate the related specification section number.
J.
A Fee will be charged for Engineering review of drawings received after the time allotted as
described in “F” above or for plans that have been rejected two or more times due to
noncompliance or incompleteness. The fee will be determined by the Architect/Engineer and will
accompany the re-submittal in the form of a cashiers check or money order made payable to the
Engineer.
K.
The General Contractor will certify that all shop drawings are in conformance with the plans and
specifications. Deviations from the plans and specifications shall be noted, and the specific area
of the deviation clouded and in contrasting color (green) with a complete explanation for the
reasons for the deviation. Any redesign of the system shall be Certified by a Professional
Engineer currently registered in the State of Florida, and will be accompanied by the fees as
described in “J” above.
L.
Carefully examine all shop drawings and mark-up as necessary before submitting to the
Architect/Engineer for review. The engineer will only consider shop drawings bearing the
contractor’s stamp of approval.
M.
The engineer’s review shall not relieve the contractor from the responsibility for deviations from
drawings and specifications. The engineer’s review shall be construed to apply only to general
arrangement and shall not relieve the contractor from the responsibility for the correctness of
details and dimensions and provision of the correct equipment.
N.
The contractor shall retain copies of all reviewed shop drawings on the job site for reference.
O.
HVAC REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23
00 10 - 3
1.6
A.
1.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
EXPERIENCE
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A.
Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trades to avoid interferences and delays. He
shall assist in working out space requirements to make a satisfactory installation.
B.
If the Contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades, or so as to cause any
interference with the work of other trades, he shall make the necessary changes in his work to
correct the condition without extra charge.
C.
The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns,
setting plans, and shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of
coordinating adjacent work.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
1.9
A.
Provide openings and excavation required for the installation of the work.
backfill as required. Finished work shall match the existing adjoining work.
B.
C.
required. Provide sleeves, inserts, and hangers as required. No columns, beams, joists, building
foundations or any other structural building component shall be cut, drilled or disturbed in any
way. Conflicts shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.
D.
All excavation on sites containing existing buildings and existing services shall be done with
hand shovel to avoid damage to existing services. Any damage incurred by the Contractor shall
be repaired by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer at no cost to the
Owner and with no extension of time limitation.
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
Patch work and
REMOVAL OF RUBBISH
his employees or work in accordance with the specification “Construction Procedures”. At
completion of work, he shall remove all his tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and rubbish from
building and site. He shall leave premises and his work in a clean orderly condition acceptable
to the Architect/Engineer.
HVAC REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23
00 10 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Power wiring for motors and installation of starters shall be under Division 26 Electrical.
C.
D.
E.
Furnish and install all low voltage (120V and under) temperature control wiring for equipment
provided under this division.
F.
Provide conduit when required for control wiring.
1.12
A.
B.
1.13
A.
1.14
Each unit shall be identified by its system number and other appropriate designation by
stenciling in letters of approved size and wording. Equipment requiring identification shall
include: supply and exhaust fans, air conditioning and heating machinery and apparatus, pumps,
piping, control cabinets, and other equipment units as may be directed by the Architect/Engineer.
A.
Upon completion of the work, Contractor shall clean and lubricate fans, motors, and other
running equipment and apparatus which he has installed and make certain such apparatus and
mechanisms are in proper working order and ready to test.
B.
Scratched or damaged painting shall be touched up as necessary to return the painting to "new"
condition and appearance.
C.
All piping and equipment shall be thoroughly blown out under pressure and cleared of all foreign
matter, wasting air, gas or water through temporary connections as long as necessary to
thoroughly clean system before system is placed in operation. Use every precaution to prevent
pipe compound, scale, dirt, welding and other objectionable matter from getting into the piping
system and equipment.
D.
During blow out period, baskets from strainers shall be removed, traps and control valves, etc.,
shall be by-passed.
E.
All cleaning shall be done prior to any sterilization, pressure testing, flow balancing or equipment
adjustment procedures.
F.
During construction protect all piping and equipment from damage and dirt. Cap the open ends
of all piping and equipment.
1.15
DEMOLITION
A.
Demolition shall be as shown on drawings or specified.
B.
Schedule all demolition work with Owner to cause minimum downtime of any building service or
function. No extra cost to the contract will be allowed for overtime work unless specifically
authorized in advance by representative of Owner in writing.
HVAC REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23
00 10 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
C.
During demolition and construction protect from damage all existing equipment and services that
are to remain. Repair or replace any damage to existing facilities at no extra cost to the contract.
D.
Remove with care and deliver to a location designated by representative of the Owner all items
designated to remain the property of the Owner.
E.
Drawings are diagrammatic and shown only major obstructions; coordinate with other trades for
removal or relocation of pipes; conduits, hangers, etc. in path of work.
F.
No columns, beams, joists, building foundations or any other structural building component shall
be cut, drilled or disturbed in any way. Conflicts shall immediately be brought to the attention of
the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall not proceed until instructed in writing by the
Architect/Engineer if conflicts between mechanical work and structural elements occur.
1.16
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WORK
A.
Plan installation of new work and connections to existing work to insure minimum interference
with regular operation of existing facilities.
B.
Submit to the Owner for approval, a schedule of necessary temporary shut-downs of existing
services. All shutdowns shall be made at such times as will not interfere with regular operating of
existing facilities and only after written approval of the Owner.
C.
To insure continuous operation, make necessary temporary connections between new and
existing work.
D.
Connect new work to existing work in neat and approved manner.
disturbed to original condition.
1.17
Restore existing work
WATERPROOFING
A.
B.
1.18
A.
1.19
A.
1.20
A.
1.21
A.
TESTS
INSTRUCTIONS
Fully instruct Owner's personnel in the care and operation of mechanical systems and furnish a
letter to the Architect/Engineer advising the particular person who has received such instruction.
GUARANTEE
been installed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, and that they are in proper
ACCEPTANCE
HVAC REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23
00 10 - 6
B.
1.22
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
2.
Submit statement that equipment is properly installed, adjusted, fully lubricated and
operation is satisfactory.
3.
4.
5.
inspection.
FACILITY START-UP BROCHURE
At the completion of work, Contractor shall provide startup instruction in accordance with these
specifications in their entirety and shall submit a bound brochure containing the following:
1.
Shop Drawings
2.
Maintenance Manuals
3.
Control Wiring and Piping Diagrams
4.
Operating Instructions
5.
Copy of Guarantee
6.
Certificate of Instruction of Owner's Representative
7.
Certificate of Job Completion
8.
Record Documents
B.
Where projects are of sufficient size to make a single brochure impractical, several brochures
shall be prepared by trade and As-Built Drawings may be submitted as a separate item.
C.
Brochure shall be indexed and divided for reasonable clarity.
D.
Brochure shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer for review and approval. The contractor
shall make modifications to the brochure as deemed necessary for compliance and clarity, by
the Architect/Engineer, and resubmit the final brochure to the Architect/Engineer to be forwarded
to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
HVAC REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23
00 10 - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 23 00 50
HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
The general conditions and all requirements of the contract documents shall apply to all work of
this Division.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Scheduling: Schedule work with Owner so as to avoid disruption of normal activities.
B.
Sheet Metal Duct Work
C.
Flexible Round Duct Work
D.
Ductwork Accessories
E.
Diffusers
F.
G.
Insulation
H.
Mechanical Equipment
I.
Controls
J.
Test and Balance
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
2010 Florida Building Code (FBC): (This code includes the Florida Building Code, Accessibility
as Chapter 11.) This code includes the 2010 FBC Building, Mechanical, Plumbing, Fuel Gas
Volumes and Energy Conservation Volumes. Further, see the 2010 FBC; Building Chapter 35;
FBC, Mechanical Chapter 15; Plumbing Chapter 13 and FBC Fuel Gas Chapter 8 and FBC,
Energy Conservation Chapter 6. (Effective March 15, 2012)
B.
2010 Florida Fire Prevention Code (FFPC): (This code also includes the Florida versions of
NFPA 1 and NFPA 101.) (Effective December 31, 2011)
C.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes.
D.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
E.
1.
ASTM C177-76: Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of the
Guarded Hot Plate: Thermal Conductivity.
2.
ASTM C335-79: Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulations:
Thermal Conductivity.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
1.
F.
NEMA Standard MGI -12.536.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
1.
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
SECTION
23 00 50 - 1
1.4
A.
1.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SUBMITTALS
Submit (6) copies of the following detailed manufacturer's product data and shop drawings for
each item as follows:
1.
Sheet Metal Duct Work
2.
Flexible Round Duct Work
3.
Duct Work Accessories
4.
Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers
5.
6.
Insulation
7.
Controls
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION
A.
Prior to inspection, demonstrate the proper operations of each system to the Owner's
representative.
B.
Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment, maintenance of equipment
and system using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instruction.
1.6
A.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
Prior to final payment, compile manufacturer's written warranties for each major piece of
equipment. In addition, warranty all apparatus furnished to remain in serviceable and
operational condition for a period of at least one year from the date of substantial completion and
acceptance of the work. This written warranty shall provide that any imperfections in material or
function, as a whole or in part, by reason of defective workmanship, defective materials
damaged as result of these defects or their repair, shall be made good to the satisfaction of the
Owner's representative at the contractor's expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
SHEETMETAL DUCT WORK
Sheet Metal Ductwork: Construct ductwork in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - 2005". Design all low-pressure duct systems using only the SMACNA
2 inches static pressure rating for positive or negative pressure and only the SMACNA seal type
C. Construct interior duct with zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheets conforming to ASTM-525
with 1.25 oz./sq. ft. minimum commercial class zinc coating type G90, and gages using the
manufacturer's standard gage numbers prior to galvanizing.
FLEXIBLE ROUND DUCT WORK
Either spiral-wound spring steel with flameproof vinyl sheathing, or corrugated aluminum,
complying with UL 181. Provide 1 1/2" thick continuous flexible fiberglass sheath with vinyl
vapor barrier jacket. CertainTeed Certaflex or approved equal.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A.
Flexible Connections:
coated.
B.
Balancing Dampers: For small outside air intake and branch duct taps provide single blade,
locking quadrant dampers with shaft extension and mounting flange for insulated ducts, shaft
bushings, blade stops, and quadrant handle.
6 inch long uncompressed, 30 ounce glass fabric, double neoprene
SECTION
23 00 50 - 2
2.4
A.
2.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Sheet Metal Duct Work: Except as otherwise indicated provide hot-dipped galvanized steel
fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of duct work.
INSULATION
A.
Duct System: Concealed HVAC supply, return, and fresh air duct systems grilles, within the
building and not visible shall be insulated with glass fiber duct wrap insulation, factory applied foil
faced vapor barrier, ASTM C518 and ASTM E84 certified testing procedures. Joint tape shall be
3-inch wide minimum foil-reinforced kraft type. Insulation thickness shall be 1 1/2 inches thick
except in attic spaces and above ceiling insulation where it shall be a minimum of 2 inches thick.
B.
Diffusers and Grilles: Diffusers and grilles shall be insulated with glass fiber duct wrap
insulation, factory applied foil faced vapor barrier, ASTM C518 and ASTM E84 certified testing
procedures. Seal the insulation to the diffuser and connecting duct, and at all edges. Joint tape
shall be 3-inch wide minimum foil-reinforced kraft type. Insulation thickness shall be 1-1/2
inches thick except in attic spaces and above ceiling insulation where it shall be a minimum of 2
inches thick.
2.6
A.
2.7
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Air conditioning units Units: Refer to specification Section 23 07 63 – Air Handleing Units for a
description of air handling units.
MOTORS
A.
All motors shall be furnished and installed under Division 23 Mechanical and shall be wired
under Division 26 Electrical.
B.
All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE, ASA, and NEMA
standards. All general purpose motors shall be open drip-proof machines for installation indoors
and/or in protected locations. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors shall be used in all
areas of exposure to weather or other environmental contamination. Motors shall be rated
explosion proof when located in hazardous atmospheres. Type II weather protected motors may
be used in lieu of TEFC motors on roof mounted fan units and similar equipment.
C.
Unless indicated otherwise, motors shall be NEMA Design B with a service factor of 1.15 with
total temperature rise of 90 degrees C. (resistance measured) in 40 degrees C. ambient when
powered from the system voltage feeding the motor. TEFC motors shall have a service factor of
1.00 with total temperature rise of 80 degrees C. in the above conditions. Motors located in
areas exceeding 40 degrees C. ambient shall be factory rated for the ambient temperature of the
motor environment. Single phase motors shall generally be NEMA Design N split phase
induction motors with built-in thermal protectors. Single phase motors connected on loads
requiring high starting torque shall be capacitor-start induction motors. Single phase motors of
1/10 HP or less may be shaded pole induction motors.
D.
If the Contractor proposes to furnish motors varying in horsepower and/or characteristics from
those specified, he shall first inform the Architect/Engineer of the change and shall then
coordinate the change with the various subcontractors and shall pay all additional charges in
connection with the change.
E.
All motors supplied on this project three (3) HP and larger shall have a power factor not less than
85 percent under rated load conditions. Power factor of less than 85 percent shall be corrected
to at least 90 percent under rated load conditions. Power factor corrective devices, installed to
comply with this Code, shall be switched with the utilization equipment.
F.
All motors supplied on this project shall be premium efficiency. All efficiency testing and labeling
shall be performed in accordance with the NEMA Standard MG 1-12.54 and IEEE 112 Test
Standard, Method B. Minimum efficiencies shall conform to the following listing:
SECTION
23 00 50 - 3
Motor HP
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
5
2.9
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Efficiency (%)
81.0
83.0
84.0
85.5
89.5
9.5
CONTROLS
General: The existing HVAC controls system shall monitor temperature and humidity.. Provide
stand-alone controls systems to accomplish the air-conditioning, heating, and dehumidification
control as indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SHEET METAL DUCT WORK
A.
Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Latest printing".
B.
Coordinate with architectural ceiling heights and lighting trades. Reflected ceiling plans shall be
adhered to unless otherwise noted.
C.
Installations shall conform to noise criteria specified elsewhere.
D.
Install work in accordance with construction schedules.
E.
Test duct work for leakage prior to concealing and prior to final testing. Submit these tests for
approvals.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
INSULATION
Ductwork Insulation: Apply ductwork insulation to all steel ductwork for heating and cooling
applications in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's recommendations.
AIR DEVICES
Install air devices, including louvers, diffusers, and grilles, in conformance with the
manufacturers requirements and as indicated on the drawings.
CONTROLS
Install controls in compliance with the drawings and all applicable codes. Installation shall yield
a fully operational system in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
TEST AND BALANCE
A.
Tester's Qualifications: Firm certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing
and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this project.
B.
AABC Compliance: Comply with AABC's Manual MN-1 "AABC National Standards", as
applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and
apparatus.
C.
Job Conditions: Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until work has been
completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed.
D.
Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has
been completed, cleaned, and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until satisfactory
conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester.
SECTION
23 00 50 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
E.
Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance
with procedures outlined in applicable standards.
F.
Test, adjust and balance system during summer season for air-conditioning systems and during
winter season for heating systems, including at least period of operation at outside conditions
within 5ºF (3ºC) wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10ºF
(6ºC) dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does
not permit measuring final temperatures, then take final temperature readings when seasonal
operation does permit.
G.
Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format
recommended by applicable standards.
H.
Patch holes in insulation, ductwork, and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test
purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer.
I.
Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control
levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work.
Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.
J.
Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when
system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which
exceed requirements of contract documents for mechanical work.
K.
Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and
resubmit test results.
END OF SECTION
SECTION
23 00 50 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 23 01 83
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Conform to Division 1 and other sections of this division.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of refrigerant piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of
this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of refrigerant piping
products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than five years.
B.
Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three years of successful installation experience on
projects with refrigerant piping work similar to that required for project.
C.
ANSI Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5
"Refrigeration Piping" and extend applicable lower pressure limits to pressures below 15 psi.
D.
ASHRAE Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE 15
"Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
E.
Comply with the latest approved edition of the "Florida Energy Code for Building Construction".
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with General, Supplementary and Special Conditions.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
refrigerant piping materials and products.
C.
Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed refrigerant piping and
piping products.
D.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for refrigerant piping materials and
products.
1.5
A.
Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps
through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate
dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings,
temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection
to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with ANSI
B31.5 Code for Refrigeration Piping. Base pressure rating on refrigerant piping system
maximum design pressures.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
SECTION 23 01 83 - 1
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
2.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Copper Tube:
1.
All copper tube in compliance with ASTM B-88.
2.
Liquid Lines One and Three-Eighths Inch (1-3/8") and Smaller: Copper tube, ACR Type
L, soft annealed, temper fittings, wrought copper-ally fittings for flared copper tubes;
flared joints.
3.
Liquid Lines One and Five-Eighths Inch (1-5/8") and Larger: Copper tube, ACR Type K,
hard drawn temper; wrought-copper, colder-joint fittings; brazed joints.
4.
Suction Lines, All Sizes: Copper tube, ACR Type L, soft annealed temper fittings;
wrought copper-alloy fittings for flared copper tubes; flared fittings.
5.
Hot gas bypass lines: Copper tube type "L" copper.
Soldering Materials: Silver-lead solder, ASTM B32, Grade 96TS.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory fabricated supports and anchors complying with
MSS SP-58, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information.
Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and
supports to exactly fit around insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide
copper-plated hangers, supports, and attachments for copper-piping systems.
1.
Adjustable steel clevises, for horizontal piping hangers and supports, equal to Grinnell
Fig. 260.
2.
Two-bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports, equal to Grinnell Fig. 261.
3.
Concrete inserts equal to Grinnell Fig. 285, C-clamps equal to Grinnell Fig. 86, and steel
brackets equal to Grinnell Fig. 194 or 195 for building attachments.
4.
Protection shields equal to Grinnell Fig. 167 for insulated piping support in hangers.
REFRIGERANT VALVES
A.
Globe Shutoff Valves:
Forged brass, packed, back seating, winged seal cap, 300oF
temperature rating, 500 psi working pressure. Acceptable manufacturers include Henry Valve
Co., Parker Hannifin Corp. (Refrigeration & Air-Cond. Div.), Sporlan Valve Co.
B.
Check Valves: Forged brass, accessible internal parts, soft synthetic seat, fully guided brass
piston and stainless steel spring, 250oF temperature rating, 500 psi working pressure.
Acceptable manufacturers include Henry Valve Co., Parker Hannifin Corp. (Refrigeration &
Air-Cond. Div.), Sporlan Valve Co.
C.
Two-Way Solenoid Valves: forged brass, designed to conform to ARI 760, normally closed,
Teflon valve seat, NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure, UL-listed, 1/2" conduit adapter, 250oF
temperature rating, 400 psi working pressure. Provide manual operator to open valve. Alco
Controls Div. (Emerson Electric Co.), Automatic Switch Co., and Sporlan Valve Co.
2.5
REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES
A.
Refrigerant Strainers: Brass shell and end connections, brazed joints, monel screen, 100 mesh,
UL-listed, 350 psi working pressure.
B.
Moisture-Liquid Indicators: Forged brass, single port, removable cap, polished optical glass,
solder connections, UL-listed, 200oF temperature rating, 500 psi working pressure.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
SECTION 23 01 83 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
C.
Refrigerant Filter-Driers: Corrosion-resistant steel shell, steel flange ring and spring, wrought
copper fittings, ductile iron cover plate with steel cap screws, replaceable filter-drier core, 500 psi
working pressure.
D.
Refrigerant Discharge Line Mufflers: Provide discharge line mufflers as recommended by
equipment manufacturer for use in service indicated, UL-listed.
E.
Acceptable manufacturers of refrigerant specialties are Alco Controls Div.; Emerson Electric Co.,
Henry Valve Co., Parker-Hannifin Corp. (Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Div.), and Sporlan
Valve Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
INSPECTION
Examine areas and conditions under which refrigerant piping systems materials and products
are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
in manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING
A.
Equipment manufacturer to size refrigerant lines and provide necessary specialties as required.
Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices. Install each run
with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly
and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes by use of reducing
fittings. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
B.
Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain)
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and
column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not
otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block
access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead
construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building.
Where possible, locate piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished
and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall
construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,
except as indicated. Run piping mains 6" or more from fire rated walls to facilitate inspection.
C.
Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces
and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through
electrical spaces. Do not run piping above electrical panels per NEC.
D.
Install refrigerant piping with 1/4" per foot 1% downward slope in direction of oil return to
compressor. Provide oil traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to provide
oil return.
E.
Clean refrigerant piping by swabbing with dry lintless (linen) cloth, followed by refrigerant oil
soaked swab. Remove excess oil by swabbing with cloth soaked in high flash point petroleum
solvent, squeezed dry.
F.
Connect refrigerant piping to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment
manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated.
G.
Where refrigerant piping is indicated to run below grade, sleeve piping with 6" PVC piping with
3/16” minimum wall thickness. Fill voids in sleeve with expandable urethane foam and seal end
watertight with roofing tar.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
SECTION 23 01 83 - 3
3.3
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
Install supports and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Maximum
spacing between pipe supports shall be as follows:
Nominal
Pipe Size
B.
3.4
Maximum Span
Rod Size
(Inches)
(Ft.)
(Inches)
1/2
5
1/4
3/4
5
1/4
1
6
1/4
1-1/2
8
3/8
2
8
3/8
2-1/2
9
3/8
3
10
3/8
4
12
1/2
Additional hangers and/or bracket support shall be provided at each valve, fitting, change of
direction and dead ends of pipe longer than 2'-0”.
INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT VALVES
A.
Install refrigerant valves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove accessible
internal parts before soldering or brazing; replace after joints are completed.
B.
Install solenoid valves in refrigerant piping as indicated with stem pointing upwards. Wiring of
solenoid valves is specified in applicable Division 16 sections, and is included as work of this
Section.
3.5
A.
3.6
INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES
Install refrigerant specialties in accessible locations for service. Install refrigerant discharge line
mufflers in horizontal or downflow portions of hot gas lines, immediately after compressor; not in
riser.
A.
Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5,
"Refrigeration Piping". Perform initial test with dry nitrogen, using soap solution to test all joints.
Perform final test with 27" vacuum, and then 200 psi using halide torch. System must be entirely
leak-free.
B.
Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to
demonstrate compliance.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
SECTION 23 01 83 - 4
3.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING OF SYSTEM
A.
Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation.
B.
Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35oF is indicated on
vacuum dehydration indicator. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots
in piping. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of five hours after closing valve between
vacuum pump and system. At completion of dehydration procedure, break vacuum with
refrigerant gas and allow pressure to build up to 2 psi.
C.
Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide full operating
charge.
3.8
A.
CLEANING AND INSPECTING
Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for
application of specified coatings Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints,
supports and accessory items. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME
B31.
END OF SECTION
REFRIGERANT PIPING
SECTION 23 01 83 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 23 06 71
CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Conform to Division 1 and other sections of this division.
B.
Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this Section.
1.2
1.3
RELATED WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS/SECTIONS
Section 23 00 10
Mechanical Requirements
Section 23 00 50
Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 23 01 83
Refrigerant Piping
Section 23 07 63
Air Handling Units
Division 26
Electrical
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with General, Supplementary and Special Conditions.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of
selected model clearly indicated, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), dimensions,
required clearances and methods of assembly of components, furnished specialties and
accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.
C.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for power and control wiring required for
final installation of condensing units and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring
that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each condensing
unit, control, and accessory; including "trouble shooting" maintenance guide; plus servicing, and
preventative maintenance procedures and schedule. Include this data and product data in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of condensing units, of
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than five (5) years.
B.
Codes and Standards:
C.
1.
Capacity ratings for condensing units shall be in accordance with ARI Standard 360
"Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment".
2.
Refrigeration system of condensing units shall be constructed in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
3.
Condensing units shall be listed by UL or ETL and have UL label affixed.
Compliance with the latest approved edition of the "Florida Energy Code for Building
Construction."
CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 23 06 71 - 1
1.5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
A.
Handle condensing units and components carefully to prevent damage. Follow manufacturer's
written instructions for rigging. Replace damaged condensing units or components.
B.
Store condensing units and components in clean dry place off the ground. Protect from weather,
water, and physical damage.
1.6
SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY
A.
Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to
replace/repair, within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate or defective
materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to
perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting and
maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Warranty is full parts and labor
warranty for first year, parts only the remaining years. A manufacturer's representative shall
perform start-up and check-out of all systems.
B.
Warranty Period:
compressor parts.
Five (5) years non-prorated from date of substantial completion for
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS (2 TO 15 TONS)
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
air-cooled condensing units which may be incorporated in the work are limited to the following:
1.
Carrier
2.
McQuay
3.
York
4.
Trane
B.
General: Factory-assembled and tested air-cooled condensing units, consisting of casing,
compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. Capacities and
electrical characteristics are scheduled on the Drawings.
C.
Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for
components and controls and complete with removable panels for required access to
compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors and drives. Additional features include:
D.
E.
1.
Steel, galvanized or zinc-coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished with
manufacturer's standard paint coating;
2.
Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units;
3.
Hinged and gasketed control panel door.
Compressor: Scroll or reciprocating, semi-hermetic or hermetic type compressor, 1,750 RPM,
designed for air-cooled condensing, complete with crankcase sight glass, crankcase heater and
back seating service access valves on suction and discharge ports. Capacity shall be controlled
through cylinder unloading or multi-compressor staging. Additional features include:
1.
Crankcase heater in well within crankcase;
2.
Capacity steps as scheduled or greater number.
Circuits: Provide independent refrigerant circuits for multiple compressor units to provide
effective humidity control.
CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 23 06 71 - 2
F.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Controls: Operating and safety controls shall include high and low pressure cutouts, oil pressure
cutout, compressor winding thermostat cutout, three-leg compressor overload protection and
condenser fan motors with thermal and overload cutouts. Control transformer if required shall be
208/230 volts primary, 24 volt secondary. Provide magnetic contactors for compressor and
condenser fan motors. Additional features include:
1.
Reset relay circuit for manual resetting of cutouts from remote thermostat location.
2.
Automatic recycling pumpdown and timing device to prevent excessive compressor
cycling.
G.
Condensing Section: Condenser coil shall be seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to
heavy-duty, configurated aluminum fins, with separate and independent refrigeration circuit for
each compressor. Units shall include liquid accumulator and subcooling circuit, and back
seating liquid line service access valve. Condenser coils shall be factory-tested at 450 psig,
vacuum dehydrate, and filled with a holding charge of nitrogen.
H.
Condenser fans and drives: Propeller-type condenser fans for vertical air discharge; either direct
drive or belt drive. Additional features include:
1.
Permanent lubricated ball bearing condenser fan motors.
2.
Separate motor for each condenser fan.
3.
Each fan assembly shall be dynamically and statically balanced.
I.
Low ambient control: Factory-installed low ambient damper assembly, fan speed control, or fan
cycling control.
J.
Provide condensers with independent refrigerant circuits for each compressor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Verify housekeeping pads are satisfactorily formed.
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Do not proceed with work until
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
B.
Support:
1.
C.
Air-Cooled Condensing Units: Connect refrigerant piping to unit; maintain required access to
unit.
1.
3.3
A.
Install ground-mounted units on four inch (4") thick reinforced concrete pad, four inches
(4") larger on each side than condensing unit. Concrete is specified in Division 3.
Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.
Install furnished field-mounted accessories.
Testing:
1.
Charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks and replace lost
refrigerant and oil.
CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 23 06 71 - 3
3.4
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
DEMONSTRATION
Start-up condensing units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls
and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
END OF SECTION
CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 23 06 71 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 23 07 63
AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Extent of air handling unit work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of
this section.
B.
Types of air handling units required for project include the following:
1.3
A.
1.4
1.5
A.
1.6
FACTORY FABRICATED AIR HANDLING UNIT.
Refer to other Division-23 sections for piping; ductwork; and testing, adjusting and balancing of
air handling units; not work of this section.
RELATED WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS/SECTIONS
Section 23 00 10
Mechanical Requirements
Section 23 05 50
Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 23 01 83
Refrigerant Piping
Section 23 06 71
Condensing Units
Division 26
Electrical
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for air handling units showing dimensions,
capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation
instructions.
1.
Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions,
construction details, and field connection details.
2.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions,
filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data,
product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with
requirements of Division 1.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A.
Handle air handling units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and
scoring. Do not install damaged air handling units or components; replace with new.
B.
Store air handling units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes,
water, construction debris, and physical damage.
C.
Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading air handling units,
and moving them to final location.
AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 23
07 63 - 1
1.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of kitchen hoods, of
types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 3 years.
B.
C.
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
1.
D.
E.
Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA):
1.
99-83 Standards Handbook
2.
300-67 Test Code for Sound Rating
3.
301-76 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):
1.
F.
G.
68-78 Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for Fans
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.
C423-77 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation
Room Method
2.
D3359-83 Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
3.
E84-04* Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
4.
E90-04* Airborne-Sound
Measurement
5.
E413-73* Sound Transmission Class, Classification for Determination
6.
G23-81 Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus
Transmission
Loss
of
Building
Partitions,
Laboratory
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association, Inc. (AFBMA):
1.
H.
430-78 Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units. Directory of Certified Applied Air
Conditioning Products
9-1978 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.
90A-2002 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A.
Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on drawings.
B.
Performance: Conform to ARI 430. See schedules on drawings.
C.
Acoustics: Sound power levels (dB) for the unit shall not exceed the values indicated in the
schedule. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment to meet these levels if
required.
2.2
A.
UNIT CONSTRUCTION
Fabricate unit with 16 gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners. All
panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type
gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.
AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 23
07 63 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch (50-mm) nominal thick; thermal
broke double wall assembly, injected with closed cell non-hydroscopic foam insulation for
an R-value of not less than R-13. Fiberglass insulation is not acceptable. The outer
panel shall be constructed of painted G60 galvanized steel. The inner liner shall be
constructed of G90 mill galvanized steel. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at
125% of design static pressure, maximum 5 inches of positive or negative static
pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel height. The casing
leakage rate shall not exceed 0.5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5” static pressure
(.0025 m /s per square meter of cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure). Module to
module assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter, insulated,
internal splice joint sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimize
on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.
2.
The entire unit shall have a 6-inch full perimeter base rail for structural rigidity and
condensate trapping.
B.
Hinged Access Doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long
stainless steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size (4.5” minimum) handle assembly. Door shall
swing outward. Doors swinging outward on positive pressure sections shall have a secondary
latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access. Provide full height hinged access
doors in the following sections: Mixing box, filter section, manual section (if required), coil
section. Fan section, and discharge plenum section. Filter section shall have doors on both
sides of the unit. Removable non-hinged access panels shall not be a substitute for the hinged
access doors specified above.
C.
Construct drain pans from Type 304 stainless steel with cross break and double sloping pitch to
drain connection. Provide drain pans under cooling coil section. Drain connection centerline
shall be a minimum of 3” above the base rail to aid in proper condensate trapping. Drain
connections that protrude from the base rail are not acceptable. There must be a full 2”
thickness of insulation under drain pan, non-compressed. Drain pan connection shall be
extended to unit exterior casing. Construct drain pan connection from same materials as drain
pan.
2.3
SUPPLY FAN
A.
Provide SWSI Airfoil blade plenum type fans. FC fans are not acceptable. Fan assemblies
including fan, motor and sheaves shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three
planes and at all bearing supports. Manufacturer must ensure maximum fan RPM is below the
first critical speed.
B.
Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller bearings with extended copper
lubrication lines to access side of unit. Grease fittings shall be attached to the fan base assembly
near access door.
C.
Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a hot dipped galvanized steel base. Factory
mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of unit if removal is required. Provide
access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door. Fan and motor assembly
shall be mounted on minimum 2" deflection spring vibration type isolators inside cabinetry.
Seismic snubbers shall be provided.
2.4
BEARINGS AND DRIVES
A.
Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards, L-50 life at
200,000 hours – all DWDI fans, heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball
bearings.
B.
Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.
AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 23
07 63 - 3
C.
2.5
A.
2.6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and
keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves selected so required RPM is obtained with
sheaves set at mid-position and rated based on motor horsepower. Minimum of 2 belts shall be
provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above. Standard drive service factor shall be 1.1
S.F. (for 1/4 HP – 7.5 HP) 1.3 S.F. (for 10HP and larger), calculated based on fan brake
horsepower.
ELECTRICAL
Fan motors shall be 1800 rpm, open drip-proof ODP, Class F insulation.
characteristics shall be as shown in schedule.
Electrical
COOLING AND HEATING COIL SECTIONS
A.
Provide hinged access to coils for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends
fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil connections that extend a minimum of 5”
beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain and vent connections shall be provided exterior
to unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior
and gasket sleeve between outer wall and liner where each pipe extends through the unit casing
to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. Provide factory packaged coil
connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of
unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit.
B.
Coils:
1.
Certification - Acceptable water coils are to be certified in accordance with ARI Standard
410 and bear the ARI label. Coils exceeding the scope of the manufacturer’s certification
and/or the range of ARI’s standard rating conditions will be considered provided the
manufacturer is a current member of the ARI Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils
certification programs and that the coils have been rated in accordance with ARI
Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.
2.
Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary
surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for
tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with
fluid flow requirements.
3.
Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075” aluminum plate type construction. Fins
shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for
maximum heat transfer. Spiral fins are not acceptable. Tubes shall be mechanically
expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond
over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall
not be visible between fins.
4.
Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch (16mm) OD seamless copper, 0.020" nominal tube wall
thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to
minimize the effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall
thickness of .025”. Hairpin tube U-bend returns are not acceptable.
5.
Coil connections shall be N.P.T. threaded red brass (non-ferrous) with connection size to
be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and
drain fittings constructed of red brass (non-ferrous) shall be furnished on the connections,
exterior to the air handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure
proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure
complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
6.
Coil casings shall be a formed channel frame of 304 stainless steel.
AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 23
07 63 - 4
2.7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PARTICULATE FILTERS
A.
Filter section with non-corrosive, non-ferrous, filter racks and guides with hinged and latching
access doors on both sides of the unit, for side loading and removal of filters.
B.
Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II.
C.
Cartridge type arrangement with holding frames suitable for 2” prefilter and 4” final filter media,
primary surface media filters with 30-35 percent, extended surface cartridge media filters with
60-65 percent dust spot efficiency. Cartridge filter media is 2” deep for prefilter, 4” deep for final
filter. Filter section designed for side loading of filters.
D.
Manufacturer shall supply magnehelic gauge to read pressure drop across the filter bank for
scheduling filter replacement. Design shall be recessed into the cabinet to minimize chances for
damage during shipment and installation.
2.8
ADDITIONAL SECTIONS
A.
Mixing box section shall be provided with factory mounted low leak airfoil blade outside air
dampers of galvanized steel in a galvanized frame. Dampers shall be hollow core airfoil blades,
fully gasketed and have continuous vinyl seals between damper blades. Dampers shall have
stainless steel jamb seals along end of dampers.
B.
Manual section shall be provided by the air handling unit manufacturer as an integral section of
the unit for field installation of special components as required. Section length shall be
determined by component supplier.
2.9
A.
2.10
A.
DAMPERS
Damper Leakage: Leakage rate shall be less than two tenths of one percent leakage at 2 inches
static pressure differential. Leakage rate tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.
MANUFACTURERS
The following manufacturers are approved for use. No substitutions will be permitted.
1.
Carrier
2.
McQuay
3.
York
4.
Trane
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation and Maintenance instructions.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are
in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide one set of fan belts and filters for each unit.
END OF SECTION
AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 23
07 63 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 05 00
BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
Furnish and install all electrical wiring, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance with
the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, cable, panelboards, etc., and
arrangement for specified items in general are shown on drawings.
C.
All ampacities herein specified or indicated on the drawings are based on copper conductors,
with the conduit and raceways accordingly sized. Aluminum conductors are not permitted.
1.2
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
A.
References to the National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Florida
Building Code, and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) are a minimum installation
requirement standard. Design drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those
instances where requirements are greater than those specified in NEC.
B.
The rules and regulations of the Federal, State, local, civil authorities and utility companies in
force at the time of execution of the contract shall become a part of this specification. In addition,
the following codes and standards shall apply:
1.
2010 Florida Building Code (FBC) (Effective March 15, 2012).
2.
3.
National Electrical Code, 2008
C.
D.
E.
shall be final.
1.3
A.
B.
SECTION
26 05 00 - 1
C.
1.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
and Specifications for each trade and, upon completion of the job, supply "As-Built" Drawings
and Specifications showing in pencil on sepia reproducibles, any deviations from the original
Drawings, indicating in the Specifications each manufacturer's name underlined or inserted
whose product was used on the job. These Drawings shall indicate dimensions of buried utility
lines from building walls. One set of sepia reproducibles of the original tracings will be furnished
upon request for this purpose.
STANDARDS
A.
All material and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
where such standards have been established. Equipment and material which are not covered
by UL Standards will be accepted provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or
otherwise determined to meet safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
Equipment of a class which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists,
labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with
national industrial standards, such as NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include
certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.
B.
Definitions:
1.
Listed: Equipment is "listed" if of a kind mentioned in a list which:
a.
b.
2.
Labeled: Equipment is labeled if:
a.
b.
c.
3.
b.
c.
1.5
It embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally
recognized testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
The laboratory makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment.
The labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to
determine safe use in a specified manner.
Certified: Equipment is "certified" if:
a.
4.
Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection
of production of such equipment.
States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been
tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.
Equipment has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory
to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified
manner.
Production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
It bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.
Nationally recognized Testing Laboratory: A testing laboratory which is approved, in
accordance with OSHA regulations, by the Secretary of Labor.
QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of
the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and
shall have manufactured the item for at least five years, unless otherwise noted elsewhere in the
specifications or on the drawings.
B.
Product Qualification:
1.
Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation on three installations of
similar size and type, as this project, for approximately three years.
2.
The Owner reserves the right to require the contractor to submit a list of installations
where the products have been in operation before approval of said products.
SECTION
26 05 00 - 2
C.
1.6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained
by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours of
receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.
MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A.
Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts should be available.
Items not meeting this requirement, but which otherwise meet technical specifications, and
merits of which can be established through reliable test reports or physical examination of
representative samples, will be considered.
B.
When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the
product of a single manufacturer.
C.
Equipment Assemblies and Components:
D.
1.7
1.
All components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer,
however, the assembled unit shall be the responsibility of a single manufacturer and
warranted as such.
2.
Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others,
shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.
3.
Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the
intended service.
4.
Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
All factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.
EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Equipment voltage ratings shall be in accordance with the requirements indicated on the
drawings or as specified.
B.
Prior to bid, written approval shall be obtained by the Contractor for any equipment that differs
from those specified on the drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall be prepared to
submit samples of the equipment when requested at no cost to the Architect/Engineer.
C.
1.8
A.
1.
The Contractor shall furnish drawings showing all installation details, shop drawings,
technical data and other pertinent information as required to determine that the
equipment is equivalent in quality and function to the equipment specified.
2.
Approval by the Architect/Engineer of the equal equipment does not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing the equipment at no additional
cost to the Owner.
3.
Any other items required for the satisfactory installation of the equal equipment shall be
furnished and installed at no additional cost to the Owner. This includes but shall not be
limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits,
wire, feeders, controls, panels and correlation with other work, subject to the jurisdiction
and approval of the Architect/Engineer.
Catalogue numbers, where given, are intended to give a basis for design, quality and function.
Any other incidental equipment needed for a complete and functional installation shall be
provided at no additional cost.
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Equipment and material shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical
damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain.
SECTION
26 05 00 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
During installation, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, etc., shall be
protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before
testing, operating and painting.
C.
Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, placed in first class
operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.
D.
Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet
vinyl or equal.
E.
Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint
and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.
1.9
WORK PERFORMANCE
A.
Arrange, phase and perform work to assure electrical service for other buildings at all times.
B.
New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully. Disturbed or
damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions.
C.
Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences.
D.
Obtain and pay for all required installation inspections and deliver certificates approving
installations to the Owner unless directed otherwise.
1.10
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A.
Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings. Where
architectural features govern location of work, refer to architectural drawings.
B.
Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the National Electrical Code for all voltages
specified.
C.
Inaccessible Equipment:
D.
E.
F.
1.
Where the Owner/Architect/Engineer determines that the Contractor has installed
equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall
be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Owner.
2.
"Conveniently accessibility" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use
of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors,
pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, and duct work.
Equipment and Material:
1.
New equipment and material shall be installed, unless otherwise specified.
2.
Equipment and material shall be designed to assure satisfactory operation and operating
life for environmental conditions where being installed.
NEC and other code
requirements shall apply to the installation in areas requiring special protection such as
explosion-proof, watertight and weatherproof construction.
Utility Services:
1.
Determine utility connection requirements and include in the base bid all costs to the
Owner for utility service.
2.
Include all costs for temporary service, temporary routing of service or any other
requirements of a temporary nature associated with the utility service.
Continuity of Service:
1.
No service shall be interrupted or changed without permission from the Architect and the
Owner. Written permission shall be obtained before any work is started.
SECTION
26 05 00 - 4
G.
1.11
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2.
When interruption of services is required, all persons concerned shall be notified and a
prearranged time agreed upon.
3.
Provide any required temporary power or communications circuits or extensions
necessary to accommodate the phasing of construction in order to keep the existing
buildings in operation during construction.
Concrete Work:
1.
Provide all cast-in-place concrete shown on the documents unless noted otherwise.
Concrete work shall conform to all applicable Division 2 and 3 specification sections.
2.
Provide all anchor bolts, metal shapes and templates required to be cast in concrete or
used to form concrete for support of electrical equipment.
A.
In addition to the requirements of the National Electrical Code, install an identification nameplate
which will clearly indicate information required for use and maintenance of items such as
switchboard, panelboards, cabinets, safety switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, motor
starters, communications systems cabinets, control devices and other significant equipment.
B.
Nameplates shall be laminated white phenolic resin with a black core with engraved lettering, a
minimum of 3/16-inch high. Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard
catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions. Hand
written marker is not acceptable.
1.12
SUBMITTALS
A.
equipment and systems as indicated in the respective specification section. Submit all materials
and systems as per all the specific specification sections.
B.
C.
D.
1.
2.
paragraph numbers.
3.
a.
b.
Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for fire alarm, sound system, TV
system and other communication systems and equipment assemblies. All terminal
points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.
SECTION
26 05 00 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
c.
E.
part.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1.
Maintenance manuals shall be complete and shall be furnished in a loose leaf binder or
in the manufacturer's standard binder. Information shall be sufficient to enable a qualified
technician to perform normal first line maintenance and repair. A parts list shall be
included which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.
2.
Operation manuals shall be clear and concise and shall describe, in detail, the
information required to properly operate the equipment specified. The manuals shall
include complete catalog cuts and as-built wiring diagrams.
3.
Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted for approval prior to final closeout.
F.
G.
Submit shop drawings for all low voltage systems, including the sound masking, paging, and
panic alarm systems.
1.13
A.
Provide openings and excavation required for the installation of the electrical work. Patch work
and backfill as required. Finished work shall match the existing adjoining work.
B.
C.
required. Provide sleeves, inserts, and hangers as required. No columns, beams, joists,
building foundations nor any other structural building component shall be cut, drilled or disturbed
in any way. Conflicts shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.
D.
All excavation on sites containing existing buildings and existing services, shall be done with
hand shovel to avoid damage to existing services. Where hand shovel is not practical extreme
caution shall be taken when performing excavation. The contractor will be responsible for
locating any existing utilities and adjusting manhole locations and conduit routing as necessary.
Any damage incurred by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor in a manner
approved by the Architect/Engineer at no cost to the Owner and with no extension of time
limitation.
1.14
A.
1.15
A.
EXPERIENCE
SECTION
26 05 00 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Power wiring for motors and installation of starters not provided integral with equipment shall be
C.
D.
E.
All low voltage (120V and under) temperature control wiring for Division 15 equipment shall be
provided under by Division 15.
F.
Division 15 shall provide conduit when required for control wiring, installed in accordance with
Division 16 requirements.
1.16
A.
1.17
A.
1.18
MOTORS
All motors shall be furnished and installed under Division 15 Mechanical and shall be wired
REMOVAL OF RUBBISH
his employees or work. At completion of work, he shall remove all his tools, scaffolding, surplus
materials, and rubbish from building and site. He shall leave premises and his work in a clean
orderly condition acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
A.
B.
1.19
A.
Upon completion of the work, Contractor shall clean and re-lamp all light fixtures, clean and
identify all equipment, adjust and test all equipment and apparatus which he has installed and
make certain such apparatus and mechanisms are in proper working order and ready to test.
B.
During construction protect all conduit and equipment from damage and dirt. Cap the open ends
of all conduit and equipment.
1.20
A.
B.
C.
1.21
WATERPROOFING
A.
B.
SECTION
26 05 00 - 7
1.22
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
TESTS
A.
B.
All conductors for major feeders and services (400 amps and up) shall be megged to test
insulation and connection integrity prior to permanent energization.
1.23
A.
1.24
A.
1.25
A.
B.
1.26
A.
1.27
A.
INSTRUCTIONS
Fully instruct Owner's personnel in the care and operation of electrical systems, including all
communications, sound and fire alarm systems and furnish a letter to the Architect/Engineer
advising the particular person(s) who have received such instruction.
GUARANTEE
been installed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications and that they are in proper
ACCEPTANCE
1.
2.
Submit statement that equipment is properly installed, adjusted, tested and operation is
satisfactory.
3.
4.
5.
inspection.
SINGULAR NUMBER
Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular
number (such as "the switch"), such reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such
devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.
MULTI-WIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS
All multi-wire branch circuits shall comply with Article 210.4 of the 2008 National Electrical Code.
Provide all required handle ties where applicable multi-wire branch circuits are indicated on the
drawings.
END OF SECTION
SECTION
26 05 00 - 8
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 05 19
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part of each
Division-23 and -26 section making reference to electrical wires and cables specified herein.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this section include the following:
C.
1.3
1.
Copper conductors.
2.
Fixture wires.
3.
Flexible cords and cables.
4.
Wirenut connectors.
Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for project are as follows:
1.
For motor-branch circuits.
2.
For power distribution circuits
3.
For lighting circuits
4.
For appliance and equipment circuits
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable products of
types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience with
projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling work similar to that required for this project.
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction, installation and
color coding of electrical wires and cables.
D.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std 83, "Thermoplastic-Insulated
Wires and Cables", and Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors".
E.
UL Compliance: Provide wiring/cabling and connector products which are UL-listed and labeled.
F.
NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with NEMA/ICEA Std Pub/ No.'s WC 5, "ThermoplasticInsulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy", and WC30, "Color Coding of Wires and Cables", pertaining to electrical power type wires and cables.
G.
IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Stds 82, "Test Procedures for
Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors", and Std 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice
for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to wiring systems.
H.
ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2, 3, 8, and D-753.
Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20oC (68oF).
WIRES AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19 -
1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Wire and Cable:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Connectors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
American Wire and Cable Co.
Anaconda-Ericsson Inc; Wire and Cable Div.
Belden Div; Cooper Industries
AMP, Inc.
Appleton Electric Co.
Burndy Corporation
Thomas and Betts Corp.
WIRES, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS
A.
General: Provide electrical wires, cables, and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials,
as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by
manufacturer, for a complete installation, and for application indicated. Except as otherwise
indicated, provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20oC (68oF).
B.
Building Wires: Provide factory-fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials for
applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection as
determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA
standards. Select from the following UL types, those wires with construction features which fulfill
project requirements:
1.
Type THHN, THWN, THHW, XHHW, THHN/THWN: Unless otherwise indicated, all
conductors for dry locations requiring a conductor temperature rating 75oC (167oF) or
less. Insulation shall be flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant, thermoplastic.
Conductor shall be annealed copper.
2.
Type THWN, THHW, XHHW, THHN/THWN: Unless otherwise indicated, all conductors
for wet or dry locations requiring a conductor temperature rating of 75oC (167oF) or less.
Insulation shall be flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic. Conductor
shall be annealed copper.
3.
Type THHN, THHW, XHHW: Unless otherwise indicated, all conductors for dry locations
requiring a conductor temperature rating of 90oC (194oF) or less. Insulation shall be
flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic. Conductor shall be annealed
copper.
4.
Type XHHW-2: Unless otherwise indicated, all conductors for wet locations requiring a
conductor temperature rating of 90oC (194oF) or less. Insulation shall be flame retardant,
moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic. Conductor shall be annealed copper.
5.
Conductors for use at 600 volts or below shall be 600 volt rated. Wire No. 12 and smaller
may be solid or stranded and wire No. 10 and larger shall be stranded only. Stranded
conductors shall terminate in crimp type lugs.
6.
Motor circuit branch wiring and associated control wiring: Provide type THHN insulation
in dry and damp locations. Provide type THHW insulation in wet locations. All motor
wiring to be stranded copper.
WIRES AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19 -
2
7.
Wiring in fluorescent fixture channels:
rating, type THHN or TFFN insulation.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Provide conductors with a 90°C temperature
C.
Cables: Provide UL-type factory-fabricated cables of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials and
jacketing/sheathing as indicated for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper
selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, NEC and NEMA
standards.
D.
Connectors:
1.
General: Provide UL-type factory-fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings,
materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Where not
indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's
installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. Select from the following, those
types, classes, kinds, and styles of connectors to fulfill project requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
I.
j.
k.
Type: Pressure.
Class: Insulated.
Kind: Copper (for Cu to Cu connection).
Style: Butt connection.
Style: Elbow connection.
Style: Combined "T" and straight connection.
Style: "T" connection.
Style: Split-bolt parallel connection.
Style: Tap connection.
Style: Pigtail connection.
Style: Wirenut connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES
A.
General: Install electrical cables, wires, and wiring connectors as indicated, in compliance with
applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, Ul, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in
accordance with recognized industry practices.
B.
Coordinate wire/cable installation work including electrical raceway and equipment installation
work, as necessary to properly interface installation of wires/cables with other work.
C.
Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one conductor is being installed in the same
raceway.
D.
Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate
conductor or insulation.
E.
Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave or wire/cable grips which
will not damage cables or raceway. Any cable damaged during installation shall be completely
replaced.
F.
Keep conductor splices to minimum. No joints shall be made in conductor except at outlet boxes
or splice boxes. Newly installed conductors shall not be spliced unless specifically noted on the
drawings. Splices shall not be permitted underground.
G.
Install splices and tapes which possess equivalent-or-better mechanical strength and insulation
ratings than conductors being spliced.
H.
Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.
WIRES AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19 -
3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
I.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements
are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in
UL Std 486A and B.
J.
At least eight inches (8") of slack wire shall be left in every outlet box whether it be in use, or left
for future use.
K.
Color code wiring as follows:
1.
120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire: phase A-black, phase B-red, phase C-blue, neutral-white;
ground conductor-green.
2.
277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire: phase A-brown, phase B-orange, phase C-yellow, neutralgray; ground conductor-green.
L.
Wire and cable boxes and reels shall bear the date of manufacture and must not bear dates by
more than one year preceding contract date.
M.
Minimum conductor sizes, except as specifically identified on the drawings, shall be as follows:
3.2
A.
1.
No. 12 - Branch circuits of any kind, except as specified otherwise below.
2.
No. 14 - Signal systems, fire alarm system, unless specifically noted otherwise.
3.
No. 10 - Exit light circuits, emergency circuits, security lighting, and exterior light circuits.
Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.
END OF SECTION
WIRES AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19 -
4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section apply to work of this section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of grounding specified in this section include the following:
1.
C.
1.3
Solid grounding
Applications of grounding work in this section including the following:
1.
Underground metal water piping
2.
Metal building frames
3.
Grounding electrodes
4.
Grounding rods
5.
Service equipment
6.
Enclosures
7.
Equipment
8.
Communications systems
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors, terminals and
fittings, of types and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded
cable, copper braid and bus, ground rods and plate electrodes, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with
electrical grounding work similar to that required for project.
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to materials and installation of
electrical grounding systems, associated equipment and wiring. Provide grounding products
which are UL-listed and labeled.
D.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 and 869
pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding.
E.
IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 142 and 241
pertaining to electrical grounding.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding systems and and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of grounding systems and accessories including, but
not limited to, ground wiring, copper braid and bus, ground rods, and plate electrodes.
GROUNDING
SECTION 26 05 26
-1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
grounding products which may be incorporated in the work include, but not limited to, the
following:
1.
Burndy Corp.
2.
Crouse-Hinds Co.
3.
Electrical Components Div.; Gould Inc.
4.
GROUNDING SYSTEMS
Materials and Components:
1.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated;
with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors,
terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding
jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for complete
installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is
Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products
complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications
indicated.
B.
Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding
connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC.
C.
Ground Rods: Solid copper or copper clad, minimum 3/4" dia. x 10'. Provide longer rods if
necessary for required resistivity.
D.
Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable
insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories
manufacturers for type services indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
INSPECTION
Installer must examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding connections are to
be made and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
A.
General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable
portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized
industry practices, to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended
functions.
B.
Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding
system work with other work.
C.
Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure
electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.
D.
All ground connections to water service entrance shall be installed to be exposed and visible for
inspection at all times. Insulation shall not be installed over ground connections.
GROUNDING
SECTION 26 05 26
-2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
E.
A water pipe, by itself, is not an adequate grounding electrode and must be supplemented by
dual grounding electrodes, a minimum of 8 feet apart, and effectively bonded together. The
supplemental ground shall be per Code with the "Footing type electrode" installed as required by
current National Electrical Code. Provide a new service entrance grounding electrode system
including bonding to metallic cold water pipe, structural steel and building re-bar, if available.
F.
All ground connections shall be made on surfaces which have been cleaned of all paint, dirt, oil,
etc., so that connections are bare metal to bare metal contact. All ground connections shall be
tight and shall be made with U.L. listed grounding devices, fittings, bushings, etc.
G.
Duplex receptacles of any amperage shall be grounding type and shall have a separate
grounding contact. A separate jumper shall be installed between the grounding terminal on the
device and the metallic box. The Contractor may provide U.L. listed self-grounding receptacles
in lieu of providing the separate jumper.
H.
Single and duplex receptacles shall have all grounded metal mechanically bonded together.
Pressure bonding only is not acceptable.
I.
All receptacles in kitchens and shops will be installed with the grounding contacts up.
J.
In all cases where flexible metallic conduit, nonmetallic rigid conduit or liquid tight flexible conduit
is used, a green wire ground conductor shall be used to provide ground continuity between the
equipment of device and the conduit raceway system.
K.
Provide a separate green wire ground conductor for each branch circuit originating from each
panelboard. This ground shall be used to ground the device or load fed, and shall be bonded to
components of the raceway system, such as junction boxes, starter or disconnect switch
enclosures, equipment cases, etc. The green wire ground conductor shall terminate in the
panelboard at the green wire ground bus. Ground conductors for branch circuits shall be of size
indicated in NEC, except minimum size ground conductor shall be No. 12 AWG.
1.
Provide a separate isolated ground conductor for all circuits from the isolated ground
panelboards, plus an additional separate equipment ground conductor.
L.
Each branch feeder originating at the switchboard(s) shall have a green wire ground conductor
originating at the ground bus in the switchboard and terminating at the green wire ground bus in
the panelboard. This green wire ground conductor shall be of size indicated in NEC except in no
instance smaller than No. 8 AWG.
M.
The green wire ground conductor is in addition to the neutral conductor and in no case shall the
neutral conductor serve as the grounding means.
N.
Multiple conductors in a single lug not permitted. Each grounding conductor shall terminate in its
own terminal lug.
O.
Grounding connections shall be tested and certified by the installer. The service entrance
ground and each building ground shall have a maximum of 5 ohms resistance to ground.
Supplemental grounding shall be provided if necessary.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING
SECTION 26 05 26
-3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 05 29
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
This section is a Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is a part of
each Division-26 section making reference to electrical supporting devices specified herein.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or
specified in other Division-16 sections.
B.
Types of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified in this section include the following:
C.
1.3
1.
Clevis hangers
2.
C-clamps
3.
I-beam clamps
4.
One-hole conduit straps
5.
Round steel rods
6.
Lead expansion anchors
7.
Toggle bolts
8.
Wall and floor seals
Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are
specified as part of that equipment assembly in other Division-16 sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting devices, of types, sizes,
and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 3 years.
B.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation
of electrical supporting devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
General: Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's standard materials,
design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for
complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of supporting device
meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option.
B.
Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials indicated; and having the
following construction features:
1.
Clevis Hangers: For supporting 2" rigid metal con duit; galvanized steel; with 1/2" dia.
hole for round steel rod; approximately 54 pounds per 100 units.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
SECTION 26 05 29
-1
C.
D.
E.
2.
Reducing Couplings: Steel rod reducing coupling, 1/2" x 5/8"; black steel; approximately
16 pounds per 100 units.
3.
C-Clamps: Black malleable iron; 1/2" rod size; approximately 70 pounds per 100 units.
4.
I-Beam Clamps: Black steel, 1-1/4" x 3/16" stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2";
approximately 52 pounds per 100 units.
5.
One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel;
approximately 7 pounds per 100 units.
6.
Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2" rod size; galvanized steel; approximately 4 pounds per 100
units.
7.
Round Steel Rod: Black steel; 1/2" dia.; approximately 67 pounds per 100 feet.
8.
Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; black steel; approximately
200 pounds per 100 units.
Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated, with the following
construction features:
1.
Lead Expansion Anchors: 1/2", approximately 38 pounds per 100 units.
2.
Toggle Bolts: Springhead; 3/16" x 4", approximately 5 pounds per 100 units.
anchors which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Abbeon Cal Inc.
2.
Ackerman Johnson Fastening Systems, Inc.
3.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
4.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
5.
Joslyn Mfg. and Supply Co.
6.
McGraw Edison Co.
7.
Rawlplug Co., Inc.
8.
Star Expansion Co.
9.
Expansion Bolt Co.
Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes, and materials indicated, with the
following construction features:
1.
F.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types
and sizes indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or buting passing through
concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body,
neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap
screws.
U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment,
12-gage hot-dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" dia. holes, 8"
o.c. on top surface, with standard finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match Uchannel.
1.
Fixture hangers
2.
Channel hangers
3.
Thinwall conduit clamps
4.
Rigid conduit clamps
SUPPORTING DEVICES
SECTION 26 05 29
-2
G.
H.
I.
5.
Conduit hangers
6.
U-bolts
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
channel systems which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
Greenfield Mfg. Co.; Inc.
2.
Midland-Ross Corp.
3.
OZ/Gedney Div.; General Signal Corp.
4.
Power-Strut Div.; Van Huffel Tube Corp.
5.
Unistrut Div.; GTE Products Corp.
Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
1.
Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock
joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the
following gage metal: 3" and smaller, 20-gage; 4" to 6", 16-gage; over 6", 14-gage.
2.
Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.
3.
Iron Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs.
4.
Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plas tic pipe; remove burrs.
Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeves for piping which penetrates foundation walls below grade, or
exterior walls. Calk between sleeve and pipe with non-toxic, UL-classified calking material to
ensure watertight seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply
with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA and NEC for installation of supporting
devices.
B.
Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to
interface installation of supporting devices with other work. Coordinate support locations with
other structural and mechanical trades. Supports shall not be attached to mechanical or
electrical piping, conduit, ductwork, ceiling grid system or any other non-structural member.
C.
Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together
on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with spacings indicated and in
compliance with NEC requirements.
END OF SECTION
SUPPORTING DEVICES
SECTION 26 05 29
-3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 05 30
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Division-23 and -26 section making reference to electrical connections for equipment specified
herein.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical
connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to
equipment.
B.
Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following:
1.
From electrical source to motor starters.
2.
From motor starters to motors.
3.
To lighting fixtures.
4.
To grounds including earthing connections.
5.
To equipment of communication, CCTV and alarm systems.
C.
Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in
Division-23 and other Division-26 sections, and are work of this section.
D.
Motor starters and controllers, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in
applicable Division-26 sections, and are work of this section.
E.
Refer to Division-23 specification sections and drawings for motor starters and controllers
furnished integrally with equipment; not work of this section. Connections to this equipment is
work of this section.
F.
Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors and other electrical units
of equipment are specified in applicable Division-26 sections, and are work of this section.
G.
Raceways and wires/cables required for connecting motors and other electrical units of
equipment are specified in applicable Division-26 sections, and are work of this section.
H.
Refer to other Division-26 and Division-23 sections for low voltage control system wiring; not
work of this section.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors and terminals,
of types and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical insulating
tape, soldering fluxes, and cable ties, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
B.
projects utilizing electrical connections for equipment similar to that required for this project.
SECTION 26 05 30
-1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to type products used and
installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction boxes, motor
starters, and disconnect switches.
D.
IEEE Compliance: Comply with Std 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power
Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to connections and terminations.
E.
ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA and ANSI/EIA
standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical connections for equipment.
F.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with
Copper Conductors", including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque
values indicated. Provide electrical connection products and materials which are UL-listed and
labeled.
G.
ETL Compliance: Provide electrical connection products and materials which are ETL-listed and
labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
AMP Incorporated
2.
Appleton Electric Co.
3.
Arrow-Hart Div., Crouse-Hinds Co.
4.
Burndy Corporation
5.
General Electric Co.
6.
Gould, Inc.
7.
Harvey Hubbell Inc.
8.
Square D Company
9.
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials,
including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical
insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable
ties, solderless wirenuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and
terminations of types indicated.
B.
Metal Conduit, Tubing, and Fittings:
1.
General: Provide metal conduit, tubing, and fit tings of types, grades, sizes, and weights
(wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Where types and grades are not
indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements
and comply with NEC requirements for raceways. Provide products complying with
Division-16 basic electrical materials and methods section "Raceways", and in
accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing, and fittings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Rigid steel conduit.
Rigid metal conduit fittings.
Electrical metallic tubing.
Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.
SECTION 26 05 30
-2
C.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
e.
Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings.
f.
Flexible metal conduit.
g.
Flexible metal conduit fittings.
Wires, Cables, and Connectors:
1.
General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with Division-16 basic
electrical materials and methods section "Wires and Cables".
2.
Wires/Cables:
Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for
electrical connections which match, including sizes and ratings, of wires/cables which are
supplying electrical power. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than
98% at 20oC (68oF).
3.
Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and
match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals and are recommended by
equipment manufacturer for intended applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
INSPECTION
Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed
and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do
not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A.
Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written
instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements
of UL, NEC, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B.
Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation, as
necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other
work.
C.
Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors
of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed
equipment.
D.
Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of
Division 15 sections:
1.
Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on chiller, fans, air handling
units, pumps, duct heaters, water heaters, air compressor, air dryer, and unit control
panels. Include starters, disconnects, time clocks, receptacles and required electrical
devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. Make
all final electrical connections.
E.
Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and operational facilities,
unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by Owner, or
Architect/Engineer. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing facilities. When
necessary, schedule momentary outages for replacing existing wiring systems with new wiring
systems. When that "cutting-over" has been successfully accomplished, remove, relocate, or
abandon existing wiring as indicated.
F.
Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity
rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. No new conductors
shall be spliced unless specifically noted on the drawings.
SECTION 26 05 30
-3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
G.
Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation
properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated.
Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid
"ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire.
H.
Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing,
and maintenance.
I.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish
tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque
wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing
requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values
contained in UL's 486A.
J.
Provide flexible conduit for motor connections, and other electrical equipment connections,
where subject to movement and vibration.
K.
Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and other electrical equipment where
subject to movement and vibration, and also where connections are subjected to one or more of
the following conditions:
3.3
A.
1.
Exterior location.
2.
Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
3.
Corrosive atmosphere.
4.
Water spray.
5.
Dripping oil, grease, or water, including kitchen areas.
Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized
with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct
malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 30
-4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
Division-26 section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein.
1.2
A.
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Types of raceways specified in
this section include the following:
1.
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
2.
Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
3.
Rigid metal conduit.
4.
Flexible metal conduit.
5.
Rigid non-metallic conduit.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sizes
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
B.
Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
projects with electrical raceway work similar to that required for this project.
C.
1.4
A.
1.
NEMA Compliance:
Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards
Publications pertaining to raceways.
2.
UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL safety
standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and
components which have been UL-listed and labeled.
3.
NEC Compliance:
Comply with applicable requirements of NEC pertaining to
construction and installation of raceway systems.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and
installation instructions, for each type of raceway system required. Include data substantiating
that materials comply with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
General: Provide metal conduit, tubing, and fittings of types, grades, sizes, and weights (wall
thicknesses) for each service indicated.
RACEWAYS
SECTION
26 05 33 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: Provide rigid steel, zinc-coated, threaded type conforming to FS WW-C581, ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
C.
Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: Cast malleable iron, galvanized or cadmium plated, conforming to
FS W-F-408, ANSI C80.4.
1.
Use compression type fittings for raintight connections.
2.
Use compression type fittings for other miscellaneous connections.
D.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): FS WW-C-563, ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
E.
EMT Fittings: FS W-F-408, ANSI C80.4. Die cast or malleable iron.
1.
Use compression fittings for raintight connections.
2.
Use compression type for concrete type connections.
3.
Use compression type fittings for miscellaneous connections.
4.
Set screw fitting may be used only where conduits and associated fittings are concealed
from view.
F.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit; construct of single
strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel; galvanized inside and outside;
coat with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Shall be Sealtite or equal.
G.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G. Provide
cadmium plated, malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket
sealing rings, with insulated, or non-insulated throat.
H.
Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-566 and UL 1. Formed from continuous length of spiral
wound, interlocked zinc-coated strip steel.
I.
Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of
threadless hinged clamp type.
2.2
1.
Straight Terminal Connectors: One piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted
machine screw for securing conduit, and male threaded end provided with locknut.
2.
45o or 90o Terminal Angle Connectors: Two-piece body construction with removable
upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing
conduit, and male threaded end provided with locknut.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A.
General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts, and fittings of types, sizes, and weights for each
service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection
determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements which comply with provisions of NEC for
raceways.
B.
Electrical Plastic Conduit:
1.
C.
2.3
A.
Heavy Wall Conduit: Schedule 40, 90 C, UL-rated, construct of polyvinyl chloride and
conforming to NEMA TC-2, for direct burial, or normal above ground use, UL-listed and in
conformity with NEC Article 347, ANSI C33.91.
PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3, mate and match to conduit or tubing type and
material.
MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide conduit bodies of one of the following:
1.
RACEWAYS
Appleton Electric; Div of Emerson Electric Co.
SECTION
26 05 33 - 2
2.
Arrow-Hart Div; Crouse-Hinds Co.
3.
Bell Electric Div; Square D Co.
4.
Gould, Inc.
5.
Killark Electric Mfg. Co.
6.
O-Z/Gedney Div; General Signal Co.
7.
Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co., or equivalent.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
INSPECTION
Examine areas and conditions under which raceways are to be installed, and substrate which
will support raceways. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion
of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
manner acceptable to Installer.
INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS
A.
General: Install raceways as indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and in compliance with NEC, and NECA's "Standards of Installation". Install units
plumb and level, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B.
Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, boxes, and panel work, as necessary to
interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other work.
3.3
A.
B.
INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS
General: Install concealed conduits in new construction work, either in walls, slabs, or above
hung ceilings. Run conduits concealed in existing work where practical or specifically indicated
on the drawings.
1.
Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways for conductors to
form continuous electrical conductor. Connect to electrical boxes, fittings, and cabinets
to provide electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly.
2.
Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound
before assembling.
3.
Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split
couplings, and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their
particular application. Install expansion fittings in raceways every 200' of linear run or
wherever structural expansion joints are crossed.
Conduit Installation: Follow minimum requirements in all areas as follows:
1.
Use rigid steel galvanized conduit where exposed in the central plant, where exposed to
weather or subject to saturation with liquids, and where exposed to potential mechanical
damage. Also use rigid steel galvanized conduit for all risers from underground, except
as allowed for conduits used for communications systems. All rigid elbows and rigid
risers to cabinets shall be applied with bitumastic paint where below grade.
2.
Use steel EMT above hung ceilings in offices, corridors, toilets, and other areas with
hung ceilings. EMT may be used in mechanical and electrical rooms, except for the
central plant and other areas requiring rigid steel galvanized conduit as in (1.) above.
3.
Use PVC heavy wall direct buried rated (Schedule 40) when raceways run below grade,
under floors on grade or in concrete. All bends and elbows greater than 45 degrees shall
RACEWAYS
SECTION
26 05 33 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
be galvanized rigid steel conduit. All risers from underground to cabinets and boxes when
conduit is to be exposed shall be rigid steel conduit.
4.
Underground telecommunications conduits for voice/data, fire alarm, intercom, and TV
may be all direct buried rated Schedule 40 PVC.
5.
Conduit in walls to recessed panels and boxes shall be in accordance with NEC. PVC up
to first point of termination with 4'-0" maximum in wall and EMT above 4'-0".
6.
Use flexible conduit in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to lighting fixtures, and
final 24" of connection to motors, control items or any equipment subject to movement or
vibration, and in cells of precast concrete panels. Flexible conduit shall not exceed 6 feet
long.
7.
Use liquid-tight flexible conduit where subjected to one or more of the following
conditions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Exterior location.
Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
Mechanical rooms.
Corrosive atmosphere.
Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water, or grease, including kitchen
equipment connections.
8.
Use hot-dipped galvanized conduit where conduit is routed outdoors or in any way
exposed to weather.
9.
Surface mounted raceways in finished areas are not permitted.
10.
Electrical contractor will be responsible for the following for all underground conduits:
a.
b.
c.
11.
Trenching and Excavation
Backfill
Compaction
MC cable, or a RELOC type is not permitted without prior approval of the Engineer and
Owner.
C.
Cut conduits straight, properly ream, and cut threads for heavy wall conduit deep and clean.
D.
Field bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary internal
diameter.
E.
Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2" unless noted otherwise. Homeruns shall be a minimum 3/4".
F.
Fasten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures by two (2) locknuts, and terminate with
bushings. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.
G.
Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts, or ventilating duct openings.
H.
Keep conduits a minimum distance of 6" from parallel runs of flues, hot water pipes or other
sources of heat. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam
piping.
I.
Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where required, use 3piece union or split coupling.
J.
Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within
raceways.
K.
Install conduits so as not to damage or run through structural members. Avoid horizontal or
cross runs in building partitions or side walls.
L.
Exposed Conduits in Unfinished Areas:
RACEWAYS
SECTION
26 05 33 - 4
M.
N.
O.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1.
Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit systems neatly, parallel
with, or at right angles to walls of building.
2.
Install exposed conduit work as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or ventilation
ducts or outlets.
3.
Support all conduits by use of hangers, clamps, or clips. Support conduits on each side
of bends and on spacing not to exceed following: up to 1": 6'-0"; 1-1/4" and over: 8'-0".
All conduits shall be adequately supported to prevent any noticeable deflection, vibration
or rattle.
4.
Run conduits for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors for supporting conduit
on waterproof wall in waterproof cement.
Conduit Fittings:
1.
Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp edge for digging
into metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening.
2.
Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1- 1/4" are to have flared bottom and
ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation.
3.
Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1-1/4" and larger. Bushings are to
have flared bottom and ribbed sides. Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded
into bushing.
4.
All bushings of standard or insulated type to have screw type grounding terminal.
5.
Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings,
and plugs to be specifically designed for their particular application.
Concealed Conduits:
1.
Metallic raceways installed underground or in floors below grade, or outside are to have
conduit threads painted with corrosion inhibiting compound before couplings are
assembled. Draw up coupling and conduit sufficiently tight to ensure watertightness.
2.
Conduit in concrete slabs: Separate conduits by not less than diameter of largest conduit
to ensure proper concrete bond. Conduits must have a minimum of three-quarter inch
(3/4") concrete cover.
3.
Embedded conduit diameter is not to exceed one-third (1/3) of slab thickness. Conduit
shall not be run in slabs less than 3 inches thick.
Painting of Conduit & Boxes:
1.
Security System: All new junction boxes above ceiling shall be painted yellow.
2.
208Y/120 volt Power: All new junction boxes above ceiling shall be painted brown.
3.
480Y/277 volt Power: All new junction boxes above ceiling shall be painted orange.
P.
Provide a continuous yellow marker tape with metallic tracer 6 inches above all new
underground conduit.
Q.
Underground Duct Banks and Underground Conduits: All underground conduits shall be
installed per the National Electrical Code, in accordance with standard industry practices and in
accordance with other sections of these specifications. Conduits in duct banks shall be neatly
and securely installed in straight lines with manufactured elbows used for all turns and bends.
Provide all required trenching, excavation, backfill, compaction, supports, manholes, etc. for a
complete installation. Trenching, excavation, backfill and compaction shall be performed in
accordance with applicable Division 2 and Division 3 sections of these specifications.
RACEWAYS
SECTION
26 05 33 - 5
1.
R.
A.
3.5
A.
Coordinate routing of site raceways with all site piping including new chilled water piping
and fire protection piping, plus existing sanitary, storm, and other site utilities. Hand dig
in congested areas.
Low Voltage Control:
1.
3.4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Mechanical contractor (Division 15) to provide and install all necessary wire and raceway
(EMT conduit) for low voltage control such as thermostats, timers etc., unless specifically
shown otherwise on the drawings. Raceways shall be installed in accordance with
Division 16 sections. Final wire connections shall be by mechanical contractor.
INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS
General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures, and raceways for conductors to form
continuous electrical conductor, and connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to
provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly.
1.
Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with corrosion inhibiting
compound before assembling.
2.
Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion joints are crossed.
3.
Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings, supplied by raceway
manufacturer. No field bends of raceway sections will be permitted.
4.
Properly support and anchor raceways for their en tire length by structural materials.
Raceways are not to span any space unsupported. Supporting conduits from ceiling grid,
other conduits, ductwork or other non-structural members will not be permitted.
5.
Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull or devices boxes
are required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc. shall not be permitted for use with
surface raceway installations.
6.
Provide watertight seals in all conduits which cross from one temperature to another
temperature extreme, such as coolers and freezers.
7.
All fire wall and smoke wall penetrations shall be sealed using a UL Listed fire stopping
method. Method shall be submitted and approved by the Architect/Engineer.
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS RACEWAY
Communications systems raceways shall be provided for each voice/data, security and fire
alarm outlet or device indicated on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
RACEWAYS
SECTION
26 05 33 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 05 35
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
This section is a Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is a part of
each Division-26 section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following:
1.3
1.
Outlet boxes
2.
Junction boxes
3.
Pull boxes
4.
Floor boxes
5.
Bushings
6.
Locknuts
7.
Knockout closures
8.
Manholes and handholes
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and fittings, of types,
sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 3 years.
B.
projects utilizing electrical boxes and fittings similar to those required for this project.
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical
wiring boxes and fittings.
D.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements UL 50, UL 514-Series, and UL 886
pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are ULlisted and labeled.
E.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds/Pub No.'s OS1, OS2,
and Pub 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers, and box supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FABRICATED MATERIALS
Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes,
cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at
respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes, and with cable and conduitsize knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with
SECTION 26 05 35
-1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box
covers, and for equipment type grounding.
B.
C.
1.
Recessed outlet boxes shall be a minimum 4” square by 2-1/2” deep with reducer ring for
a standard outlet coverplate. Where surface mounted devices are necessary provide 21/2” x 4” x 2-1/2” deep box to fit a standard coverplate. Shallow boxes shall not be
permitted for communications outlet boxes.
2.
Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation,
including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension
rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are
compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual
wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code-compliance option.
Device Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel non-gangable device boxes, of
shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for
installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting
holes, and with cable-size knockout openings in bottom and ends, and with threaded screw
holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide cable clamps and corrosion-resistant screws
for fastening cable clamps, and for equipment type grounding.
1.
Recessed outlet boxes shall be a minimum 4” square by 2-1/2” deep with reducer ring for
a standard outlet coverplate. Where surface mounted devices are necessary provide 21/2” x 4” x 2-1/2” deep box to fit a standard coverplate. Shallow boxes shall not be
permitted for communications outlet boxes.
2.
Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required for each
installation, including mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports,
plaster ears, and plaster board expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with
device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring
situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code-compliance option.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering outlet
boxes which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Appleton Electric;
2.
Bell Electric;
3.
Eagle Electric Mfg. Co.; Inc.
4.
Midland-Ross Corp.
5.
OZ/Gedney; General Signal Co.
6.
Pass and Seymour, Inc.
7.
RACO Div.; Harvey Hubbell Inc.
8.
Thomas & Betts Co.
D.
Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal raintight outlet wiring boxes, of
types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening
electrical conduit, cast-metal face plates with spring hinged watertight caps suitably configured
for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant plugs and fasteners.
E.
raintight outlet boxes which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
Appleton Electric;
2.
Crouse-Hinds Co.
3.
Bell Electric;
SECTION 26 05 35
-2
4.
Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
5.
6.
RACO Div.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
F.
Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes;
with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and
installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, and
washers.
G.
junction and pull boxes which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
H.
1.
Appleton Electric; Emerson Electric Co.
2.
Arrow-Hart Div.; Crouse-Hinds Co.
3.
Electric; Square D Company
4.
5.
Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering floor
boxes which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
3.
Midland-Ross Corp.
4.
Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co.
I.
Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant box knockout closures,
conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connections, of types and sizes, to
suit respective installation requirements and applications.
J.
bushings, knockout closures, locknuts, and connectors which may be incorporated in the work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
K.
1.
2.
Appleton Electric Co.; Emerson Electric Co.
3.
Bell Electric; Square D Co.
4.
Midland-Ross Corp.
5.
OZ/Gedney Co.; General Signal Co.
Manholes and Handholes:
Manholes and handholes for exterior use shall be pre-cast
concrete with steel traffic rated covers, as manufactured by Brooks or equal. Pre-manufactured
composite type boxes (Quazite or approved equal) may be considered for use. Manholes and
handholes shall be the size necessary for the number of conduits and conductors indicated on
the drawings which will enter the enclosure, plus the necessary capacity for the spare conduits
and the associated estimated conductor fill. Provide manholes with the appropriate drainage
and knockouts for conduits and other necessary access. Traffic covers shall be engraved with
the appropriate identification, such as "ELECTRIC" or “COMMUNICATIONS”. Provide plastic
protective grommet on all conduit ends for all communications systems conduit inside manholes.
Fire alarm conduits shall be marked.
SECTION 26 05 35
-3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
A.
General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
B.
Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring devices, and
raceway installation work.
C.
Provide weathertight boxes and fittings for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or
moisture. Provide weatherproof boxes for all exterior outlet boxes for power and systems,
including fire alarm and intercom system boxes.
D.
Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.
E.
Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical
wiring.
F.
Avoid installing boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 24" (600 mm) separation.
G.
Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. All outlet boxes
shall be provided with bracket support behind the box for additional structural support. Mounting
boxes directly to the metal framing on one side only is not acceptable. Boxes shall be
additionally supported on the back side.
H.
Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which attached,
or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
I.
Outlet boxes shall be structurally supported to the metal studs using a back bracket or other
additional means of support. Side mounted attachment only to the metal studs is not
acceptable.
J.
Each circuit in pull box shall be marked with a tag guide denoting panels which they connect to.
K.
Manholes and handholes shall be installed for all underground conduit installations. The
minimum number of manholes and handholes shall be as indicated on the drawings. The
contractor shall provide any additional handholes or manholes necessary for ease of installation,
code compliance or due to voluntary or required re-routing of the underground conduits at no
additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 35
-4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 05 53
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section apply to work specified in this
section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of electrical identification work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical identification work specified in this section include the following:
1.3
1.
Electrical power, control, and communication conductors.
2.
Operational instructions and warnings.
3.
Equipment/system identification signs.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical identification products of
types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
3 years.
B.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and
markers for wiring and equipment.
C.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std 969, "Marking and Labeling
Systems", pertaining to electrical identification systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
electrical identification products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
Brady, W.H. Co.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories
and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an
application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application.
ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS
General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in
sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and
wording indicated, white face and black core plies (letter color) except as otherwise indicated,
punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of
substrate.
1.
Thickness: 1/8", except as otherwise indicated.
SECTION 26 05 53
-1
2.4
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
2.
Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or permanent rivets.
permanent adhesive will not be acceptable.
Contact-type
3.
Fire alarm pull station signs shall be permanently fastened. Adhesive backing is not
acceptable.
LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
General:
Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical
identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide
numbers, lettering, and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by
manufacturer or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical
systems and equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
General Installation Requirements:
1.
Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and requirements of NEC.
2.
Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install
identification after completion of painting.
3.
Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for
identification of electrical work.
OPERATIONAL IDENTIFICATION AND WARNINGS
General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance
of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and
equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel,
install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on
switches, outlets and other controls, devices and doors of electrical enclosures. Where detailed
instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages
adequate for intended purposes.
EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
General: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in
building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/
control/signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or
signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering, on 11/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), black lettering in white field. Provide text
matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide
signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work:
1.
Switchboard, panelboards, electrical cabinets, disconnect switches and enclosures
2.
Access panel/doors to electrical facilities
3.
Transformers
4.
Intercom system master station
5.
TV Head End Equipment
6.
Fire alarm control panel and terminal cabinets
7.
Each device in main switchboard and motor control center.
SECTION 26 05 53
-2
8.
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Communications systems terminal cabinets; sound, CCTV, clock, telephone, etc.
Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best
convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot
penetrate substrate.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 53
-3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 22 00
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
B.
Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this
section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Extent of dry type transformer work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
This section includes dry-type distribution transformers with primary and secondary voltages of
600V and less and capacity ratings through 500 kVA.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on transformers including, but not limited to, voltages,
number of phases, frequencies, temperature rating, sound levels, KVA ratings, K rating and
short-circuit and continuous current ratings. Provide dimensions and weights of all transformers
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Provide complete operation and maintenance manuals for the transformers. The manuals shall
contain complete operation and maintenance procedures and parts lists.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of transformers, of
types, sizes and capacities required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
B.
projects utilizing transformers similar to that required for this project. Installer shall be a licensed
electrician with experience installing at least ten transformers of equal size and scope.
1.6
CODES AND STANDARDS:
A.
Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority
having jurisdiction, and that portion of the NEC which pertains to installation and construction of
dry type transformers.
B.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL pertaining to installation and
construction of dry type transformers. Provide dry type transformers which are UL-listed and
labeled.
C.
NEMA Compliance:
transformers.
1.7
A.
Comply with applicable portions of NEMA pertaining to dry type
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Deliver dry type transformers and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or
skids to facilitate handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings
for dry type transformers which protect equipment from damage. Inspect equipment to ensure
that no damage has occurred during shipment.
SECTION 26 22 00
-1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
Store dry type transformers in original packaging and protect from weather and construction
traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade
and enclose with watertight wrapping.
C.
Handle dry type transformers carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and
components. Remove packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the
use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment contained
therein. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment
with new.
1.8
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A.
Schedule delivery of dry type transformers which permits ready building ingress for large
equipment components to their designated installation spaces.
Coordinate delivery of
equipment with the installation of other building components.
B.
Provide the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.
C.
Coordinate with other electrical work including raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and
cabling/wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of switchboards with other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dry type transformers of one
of the following manufacturers:
1.
Square D Co.
2.
3.
Siemens-Allis/ITE, Inc.
4.
Cutler Hammer
RATINGS INFORMATION
A.
Transformer insulation shall be a UL recognized 150°C temperature class system. Provide
higher rating where indicated on the drawings. Neither the primary nor the secondary
temperature shall exceed 150°C at any point in the coils while carrying their full rating of nonsinusoidal load. Neutrals shall be rated to carry 200% of the rated secondary current, unless
specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. The maximum temperature hot spot temperatures
shall not exceed the 30°C hot spot rating for the indicated K factors, defined as the sum of
fundamental and harmonic per ANSI/IEEE C57.110-1986. K factor of 13 where specifically
noted otherwise on the drawings. Manufacturers rating K factors by average temperature rise
alone shall not be acceptable.
B.
Transformers do not require a special K rating except where specifically noted on the drawings.
Standard transformers shall have the same construction as specified herein except they are not
required to have a 200% neutral or K rating.
2.3
TRANSFORMER CONSTRUCTION
A.
Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound copper construction and shall be
impregnated with nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish.
B.
Transformers 15kVA and larger shall have a minimum of 6-2.5% full capacity primary taps for
480V primaries. Exact voltages and taps to be as designated on the plans or the transformer
schedule.
SECTION 26 22 00
-2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
C.
All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. The core flux density
shall be well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating caused by harmonic voltage
distortion. Manufacturers shall submit verification of induction levels well below the usual level
for standard transformers.
D.
Transformers shall be common core construction. Transformers utilizing more than one core, or
Scott-T connections, shall not be acceptable.
E.
The transformer secondary neutral terminal shall be sized for 200% of the secondary phase
current. (K rated transformers only)
F.
The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel
construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing a continuous process consisting of
degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of a polymer
polyester powder coating and baking cycle to provide uniform coating of all edges and surfaces.
The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49.
G.
The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50°C rise above 40°C
ambient.
H.
Transformers shall be supplied with a quality, full width electrostatic shield resulting in a
maximum effective coupling capacitance between primary and secondary of 33 picofarads. With
transformers connected under normal, loaded operating conditions, the attenuation of line noise
and transients shall equal or exceed the following limits:
I.
1.
Common Mode: 0 to 1.5Hz - 120db; 1.5 to 10kHz - 90db; 10 to 100kHz - 65db; 100kHz
to 40db.
2.
Traverse Mode: 1.5 to 10kHz - 52db; 10 to 100kHz - 30db
3.
Electrostatic shield required only where K rating transformers are noted.
Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the following:
1.
2.4
15 to 50kVA - 45db; 51 to 150kVA - 50db; 151 to 300kVA - 55db; 301 to 500kVA 60db.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide wall mounting brackets for units where wall mounting is indicated.
B.
Provide ceiling mounting brackets for units ceiling mounting is indicated.
2.5
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A.
All insulation materials are to be in accordance with NEMA ST20 standards for 220°C UL
component recognized insulation system. Transformers are to be manufactured and tested in
accordance with ANSI Standard C57.12.91 and NEMA ST20.
B.
Transformers of 500kVA or smaller shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION:
Examine areas and conditions under which dry type transformers and components are to be
installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the
work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Installer.
SECTION 26 22 00
-3
3.2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
INSTALLATION OF DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS:
A.
Transformers shall be installed securely and level. All code required clearances shall be
provided and access for cleaning and adjustment shall be provided.
B.
Provide neoprene isolation pads between the transformer enclosure and the concrete pad.
C.
Concrete equipment mounting pad shall be provided.
3.3
A.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's torque
tightening specifications.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A.
Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
B.
Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
3.5
A.
GROUNDING:
Provide equipment grounding connections for dry type transformers as indicated or required by
the National Electrical Code. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in
UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 22 00
-4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of panelboard, load-center and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes is
indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of panelboards and enclosures in this section include the following:
C.
1.3
1.
Service-entrance panelboards
2.
Power-distribution panelboards
3.
Lighting and appliance panelboards
Refer to other Division-26 sections for cable/wire, connectors, and electrical raceway work
required in conjunction with panelboards and enclosures; not work of this section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of panelboards and enclosures, of
types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
B.
Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
projects utilizing panelboards similar to that required for this project.
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets, and
cutout boxes. Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to installation of wiring and equipment
in hazardous locations.
D.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Std No. 67 "Electric Panelboards:, and
Stds No.'s 50, 869, 486A, 486B, and 1053 pertaining to panelboards, accessories and
enclosures. Provide units which are UL-listed and labeled.
E.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds Pub/No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum), Pub/ No. PB 1, "Panelboards", and Pub/No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for
Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less".
F.
Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with FS W-P-115, "Power Distribution Panel",
pertaining to panelboards and accessories.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards. Data must include a complete panel
layout indicating the circuit breakers and corresponding circuit numbers. Include ratings of each
circuit breaker including short circuit capability. Indicate all options to be supplied with the
panelboard. Indicate overall panelboard bus rating and main type and rating. Show complete
dimensional information. Any deviation from dimensions shown on the drawings shall be
specifically pointed out in the submittal. Indicate the panelboard short circuit capacity rating and
specify if this is fully rated or a series rating. Series ratings shall be completely documented with
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
-1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
test results proving series rating capabilities included in the submittal. Clearly indicate the panel
name for each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panelboard products of one of
the following (for each type and rating of panelboard and enclosure):
1.
Square D Company
2.
General Electric Company
3.
ITE/Seimens
4.
Cutler Hammer
All circuit breakers shall be the bolt-on type.
PANELBOARDS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary
components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard
materials; design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with
proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types,
sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL, and established industry standards for
those applications indicated.
B.
Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards
as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and
with arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved
for copper conductors. Select unit with feeder connecting at top of panel. Equip with copper bus
bars with not less than 98% conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on
neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide bolt-on type moldedcase main and branch circuit-breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate
when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload
on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated copper
grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select flush or surface mounted type
enclosures, required on the drawings, fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which
mate properly with panelboards. Distribution panels shall be a power distribution type panel,
such as Square D I-Line, GE Spectra Series, or equal.
C.
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance
panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and
arrangements shown; with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for
copper conductors; construct unit for connecting feeders at top of panel; equip with copper bus
bars, full-sized neutral bar, with bolt-in type heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-pole or
multi-pole circuit-breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Provide suitable lugs
on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide bare copper uninsulated grounding
bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as
panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. Loadcenters are not acceptable.
1.
D.
Provide isolated ground type panel where indicated on the drawings.
Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and
NEMA types as indicated, code-gage, minimum 16-gage thickness. Construct with multiple
knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with wire gutters and without multiple knockouts.
Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps, doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard
enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges. Equip with interior circuit-directory
frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
-2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for flush recessed or surface mounting, as indicated on the
drawings. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards,
which mate properly with panelboards to be enclosed.
E.
Panelboard Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not
necessarily limited to, cartridge and plug time-delay type fuses, circuit-breakers, ground-fault
protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications
indicated. All panelboards shall be provided with a separate copper ground bus bar.
F.
Panelboard Ratings: All branch circuit panelboards shall be fully rated or series rated for the
short circuit current indicated or the specific rating specified on the panel schedule, whichever is
greater. Service entrance and distribution panelboards shall be fully rated for the short circuit
current indicated or the specific rating specified on the panel schedule, whichever is greater.
Series ratings will not be acceptable for service entrance or distribution panels. When series
ratings are claimed, complete manufacturers data shall be submitted for verification of the series
ratings claimed.
G.
Breakers for existing panelboards shall be manufactured by the existing panel manufacturer.
Breakers shall have the same or higher fault current rating. Provide all required existing
panelboard manufacturer supplied mounting hardware and filler plates.
1.
H.
Provide filler plates for any existing openings in any existing panelboards.
breaker or buss spaces shall be closed with a filler plate.
All open
Surge Suppression: Where shown on the drawings, panels shall be provided with a surge
suppressor mounted external to the panelboard. Integral or internally mounted SPD devices will
not be accepted.
1.
In all cases, all required UL Listings shall be maintained for both the panelboards and the
surge suppressors.
2.
In all cases, all warranties shall be maintained for both the panelboards and the surge
suppressors.
3.
In all cases, all National Electrical Code requirements shall be maintained for both the
panelboards and the surge suppressors.
4.
In all cases, all surge suppressors shall meet the requirements of Specification Section
16680. Entire panel submittal will be subject to rejection based upon this requirement.
5.
In all cases above, the panelboards shall meet the requirements of this specification
section and shall be furnished by an approved panelboard manufacturer listed in this
section.
6.
In all cases above, the panelboards and the surge suppression devices shall be
submitted for approval as a package at the same time. One will not be approved without
the other.
7.
Provide a three pole, 30 amp circuit breaker to serve the surge suppressor. Utilize #10
awg conductors for phase, neutral and ground.
8.
See Specification Section 16680 for more requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSPECTION
Installer must examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are to be
installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
-3
3.2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS
A.
General: Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standard of
Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that products
comply with requirements.
B.
Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work.
C.
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B.
D.
Anchor enclosures firmly and securely to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently and mechanically secure and plumb.
E.
Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures.
F.
Provide typewritten circuit directory card in panel door upon completion of installation work.
G.
Where panels are mounted flush in the wall, a minimum of three (3) spare 3/4" conduit shall be
installed stubbed out a minimum of eight (8) inches above ceiling.
3.3
A.
3.4
GROUNDING
Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated. Tighten connections to
comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B to assure permanent and
effective grounds.
A.
Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening
torque specifications.
B.
Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
C.
Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits for short-circuits.
D.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest
to demonstrate compliance.
E.
Prior to final acceptance completely fill out the circuit directories accurately depicting the
equipment connected to each circuit. Circuit directories shall be typewritten.
END OF SECTION
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
-4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 26 16
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Division-26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, apply to work of this section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of circuit and motor disconnect switches in this section include the following:
C.
1.3
1.
Equipment disconnects.
2.
Appliance disconnects.
3.
Motor-circuit disconnects.
Wires/cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings required in connection with circuit and
motor disconnect work are specified in other Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of circuit and motor disconnect
switches of types and capacities required whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 3 years.
B.
projects utilizing circuit and motor disconnect work similar to that required for this project.
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to construction and installation of
electrical circuit and motor disconnect devices.
D.
UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches".
Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches which have been UL-listed and labeled.
E.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds Pub No. KS 1,
"Enclosed Switches" and 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)".
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on circuit and motor disconnect switches.
B.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit power and control wiring diagrams for circuit and motor disconnects
including connections to power and control panels, and feeders.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
circuit and motor disconnects which may be incorporated in the work include the following:
1.
2.
Square D Company
SECTION
26 26 16 - 1
3.
2.2
A.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
ITE/Seimens
FABRICATED SWITCHES
Heavy-Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed
safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; fusible or non-fusible type
as indicated, amperes as indicated, 60 Hz, 3-blades, 4-poles, solid neutral; and incorporating
quick-make, quick-break type switches; construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF
position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of enclosure base
and whose operating position is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in OFF position;
construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch
contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Provide NEMA Type 3R enclosures,
where applicable. Provide grounding kit. Provide 240 volt rated switches for 208Y/120 volt
systems and 600 volt rated switches for 277Y/480 volt systems.
1.
Fuses: Provide fuses for safety switches, sized as recommended by the manufacturer of
the equipment to be protected, of classes, types, and ratings needed to fulfill electrical
requirements for service indicated. Provide R-clips for all fuse holders.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and
in accordance with recognized industry practices.
B.
Coordinate circuit and motor disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and
cable work, as necessary for proper interface.
C.
Install disconnect switches for use with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers
within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide a nameplate indicating the equipment served and protected.
3.2
A.
3.3
GROUNDING
Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective
ground, for electrical disconnect switches where indicated.
A.
Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuitry and
demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units at project site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove
and replace with new units and retest.
B.
Painting: repair all scratches to factory painted and primed finish with factory supplied touch-up
paint.
END OF SECTION
SECTION
26 26 16 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Division-26 section making reference to wiring devices specified herein.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are
defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems which are intended to carry but
not utilize electric energy.
B.
Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:
1.3
1.
Receptacles, including isolated ground type where applicable.
2.
Ground-fault circuit interrupters
3.
Switches
4.
Wallplates
5.
Occupancy sensors
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
projects utilizing wiring devices similar to those required for this project.
B.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and wiring of electrical wiring
devices.
C.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 20, 486A, 498, and 943 pertaining
to installation of wiring devices. Provide wiring devices which are UL-listed and labeled.
D.
IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Std 241, "Recommended
Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings", pertaining to electrical wiring
systems.
E.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA Stds Pub/No. WD 1, "GeneralPurpose Wiring Devices", WD 2, "Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps", and WD 5,
"Specific,-Purpose Wiring Devices".
F.
FS Compliance: Comply FS W-C-596 (Series) and FS W-S-896 (Series) pertaining to electrical
power connectors and toggle switches.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wiring devices of one of the
following (for each type and rating of wiring device):
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
-1
2.2
1.
Hubbell
2.
Arrow-Hart Div.
3.
Eagle Electric Co.
4.
Leviton
5.
Pass - Seymour
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES
A.
General: Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for
applications indicated and which comply with NEMA Stds Pub/No. WD 1. Provide white color
devices and brushed satin finish stainless steel coverplates, except as otherwise indicated; all
color selections to be verified by Contractor with Architect/Engineer prior to ordering.
B.
Receptacles:
C.
1.
Heavy-Duty Duplex: Provide specification grade duplex receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire,
grounding, 20-amperes, 125-volts, with metal plaster ears, design for side and back
wiring with spring loaded, screw activated pressure plate, with NEMA configuration 5-20R
unless otherwise indicated. Hubbell or equal.
2.
Ground-Fault Interrupters: Provide "feed-thru" type ground-fault circuit interrupters, with
heavy-duty duplex receptacles, capable of protecting connecting downstream receptacles
on single circuit, and of being installed in a 2-3/4" deep outlet box without adapter,
grounding type UL-rated Class A, Group 1, rated 20 amperes, 120-volts, 60 Hz; with
solid-state ground-fault sensing and indication; with 5 milliamperes ground-fault trip level;
equip with NEMA configuration 5-20R. Device must have a positive trip identification and
reset. Provide white color device.
3.
Special Receptacles: Special configuration receptacles shall be standard NEMA plug
configuration as specified on the drawings or as required. Provide heavy duty,
specification grade receptacles, with black nylon face and brushed satin stainless steel
cover plate.
4.
Receptacles for computers, all receptacles adjacent to data outlets, shall gray in color.
Switches:
1.
Snap: Provide specification grade, general-duty flush single-pole, quiet type toggle
switches, 20-amperes, 120-277 volts AC, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism,
equip with plaster ears, switch handle, and side-wired screw terminals.
2.
2-way: Provide specification grade, general-duty flush double-pole AC quiet switches,
20-amperes, 120-277 volts AC, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip
with plaster ears, switch handles, side-wired screw terminals, with break-off tab features,
which allows wiring with separate or common feed.
3.
Three-way: Provide specification grade, general-duty flush 3-way AC quiet type
switches, 20-amperes, 120-277 volts AC, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism,
equip with plaster ears, lock type switch handles, sidewired screw terminals, with breakoff tab features, which allows wiring with separate or common feed.
4.
Four-way: Provide specification grade, general-duty flush 4-way AC quiet switches, 20amperes, 120-277 volts AC, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with
plaster ears, switch handles, side-wired screw terminals, with break-off tab features,
which allows wiring with separate or common feed.
5.
Touch Snap: Provide soft-touch snap switches, cap able of effortless-fingertip operation;
single-pole AC quiet, with lighted rocker switch hangles; sidewired screw terminals for
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
-2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
connecting copper-clad aluminum wire, 20-amperes, 120-277 volts rating. Equip with
plaster ears.
6.
Switches to be white color with satin finish stainless steel coverplate.
D.
Combination Devices: Provide specification grade, general-duty 3-way quiet switch, 20amperes, 120-277 volts AC, with toggle switch handle, and 3-wire grounding receptacle, 20
amperes, 120-volts, equip with plaster ears, and with break-off tab feature which allows wiring
with separate or common feed, with NEMA configuration 5-20R.
E.
Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Provide branch lighting solid-state AC dimmer controls for
incandescent fixtures; wattage as indicated.
F.
Time Switches, Time Clocks: Unless otherwise specifically noted on the drawings provide
electro-mechanical 24 hour dial type time switch with day omitting capability and 24 hour reserve
timing motor. Provide with a positive manual on-off switch, voltage as required or specified on
the drawings, minimum 40 amps per pole, minimum double pole, double throw. Provide
additional poles as required or specified on the drawings. Time switches shall be Tork or equal
by Intermatic or Paragon.
2.3
A.
WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES
Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, and
with ganging and cutouts as required. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to
which attached. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads
colored to match finish of plates. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction
features:
1.
Material and Finish: 0.04" thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel.
B.
Floor Service Outlets: Provide flush type floor service receptacle outlets and fittings of types and
ratings indicated. Construct of die cast aluminum, satin finish and of the size necessary for the
slab thickness provided. Provide one or two gang box as indicated on the drawings with 20ampere, 125-volt, duplex receptacle, NEMA configuration 5-20R for power, unless indicated
otherwise. Provide data or telephone outlets as indicated with a 3/4" diameter bushed hole for
data and a standard telephone outlet for telephone. Boxes shall be sized as required for the
number of outlets and number of conductors to enter and leave the box. Provide brass cover
plate with snap cover which shall be a protective cover which will prevent breakage of the
installed wiring devices. Provide brass tile or carpet flange as required. See device legend on
drawings for more floor box requirements.
C.
Outdoor receptacles that are in locations without protection from the weather shall be provide
with a UL listed and approved “in-use” weatherproof cover.
2.4
A.
TELEPHONE OUTLETS
See Section 16650.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES
A.
Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
B.
Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring work, as necessary to
interface installation of wiring devices with other work.
C.
Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess building
materials, dirt, and debris.
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
-3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
D.
Install galvanized steel wallplates on any exposed surface mounted devices.
E.
Install wallplates after painting work is completed.
F.
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand
tool.
G.
Contractor to provide ground fault protective type receptacles for any location within 2'-0" of
sinks or other source of water. Feed through protection from one ground fault protected
receptacle on a circuit is not acceptable.
H.
Mounting height of boxes for devices as shown on legend, unless otherwise noted on the plan.
Refer to architectural drawings to avoid interferences with millwork. Where two or more devices
are shown at the same location, use gang box and one face plate. Verify all device locations
with Owner prior to rough-in. Exact device locations may be adjusted by the Owner to avoid
interferences or for general convenience at no additional cost to the Owner.
I.
Floor boxes shall be installed flush with the slab and shall strictly follow manufacturer's
installation instructions. Boxes shall be installed at right angles to the building lines and multiple
boxes shall be in-line straight and even. Boxes observed to be installed crooked shall be
removed and reinstalled.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES
Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious
use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have
been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
GROUNDING
Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated.
Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486 A to assure
permanent and effective grounds.
TESTING
Prior to circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity, for short-circuits and for grounding. Ensure
proper polarity of connections is maintained. Prior to energization, test wiring devices to
demonstrate compliance with requirements.
WARRANTY
All wiring devices, including dimmers and any dimming system, shall have a minimum one year
parts and labor warranty.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
-4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 41 13
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division-26 Electrical Methods and Materials Section applies to work specified
in this section.
1.2
SCOPE
A.
Scope of Work: Provide labor and materials for the installation of a complete building lightning
protection system with a UL Master Label. Provide a completely new system with all new
components as necessary. All down conductors shall be concealed from view. Provide fully
engineering drawings signed and sealed by a Florida registered professional engineer.
B.
Types of lightning protection system material and components specified in this section include
the following:
1.3
1.
Air terminals.
2.
Bonding plates.
3.
Conductors.
4.
Connectors.
5.
Grounding rods.
6.
Rod clamps.
7.
Splicers.
8.
Wire.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers:
Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lightning protection system
components, of types, sizes, and ratings required, and who are Class I manufacturer-members
of Lightning Protection Institute, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than three (3) years.
B.
projects utilizing lightning protection systems similar to that required for this project, and who are
Class III, installer-members of Lightning Protection Institute.
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to lightning protection, grounding,
grounding electrodes, and down conductor clearances.
D.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with requirements of NFPA No. 780 - 2008, "Lightning Protection
Code", as applicable to lightning protection systems for building projects.
E.
UL Compliance: Comply with Master Label provisions of UL 96A, "Installation Requirements for
Lightning Protection Components". Provide components which are UL 96 listed and labeled.
F.
LPI Compliance: Comply with requirements of Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) Standards
175, 176, and 177, pertaining to lightning system material, components, installation and testing
procedures.
SECTION
26 41 13 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
G.
UL Certification: Provide Owner with UL Master Label for overall system which is suitable for
fastening to building for display purposes. Comply with UL 96A, "Master Labeled Lightning
Protection Systems".
H.
OSHA Compliance: The lightning protection system shall comply with all current OSHA
requirements, inlcuding the use of blunt, roof mounted air terminals.
I.
General: Provide lightning protection system material and components, of types, sizes, ratings,
for Class of service indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design, and
construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete
installation. Where type components or materials are not otherwise indicated, comply with
NFPA 780 and LPI standards.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
components.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of lightning protection system equipment and
components including, but not limited to, conductor routing, connections, and grounding.
1.
C.
Submit manufacturer's data on lightning protection systems and associated
Shop drawings shall be submitted that are fully engineered and detailed on 24” x 36”
format and signed and sealed by the Florida registered professional engineer.
UL Certification: Provide Owner with UL Master Label for overall system which is suitable for
fastening to building for display purposes. Comply with UL 96A, "Master Labeled Lightning
Protection Systems".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lightning protection
components of one of the following:
1.
Conductors, Air Terminals and Ground Rods:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co., Inc.
Lightning Master Corp., Inc.
Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
General: Provide lightning protection system material and components, of types, sizes, ratings,
for Class I service utilizing copper materials, which comply with manufacturer's standard
materials, design, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as
required for complete installation. Where type components or materials are not otherwise
indicated, comply with NFPA 780 and UL standards.
B.
In addition to conformance to NFPA-780 and UL 96, the component material requirements are
as follows:
1.
Conductors: Electrical grade stranded copper.
necessary to compatible with the existing system.
2.
Air terminals: Solid copper, not less than 3/8-inch diameter, with sharp or blunt
nickel-plated points, 18 inches minimum.
3.
Ground rods: Copperclad steel, not less than 1/2-inch diameter by 8 feet long.
4.
Ground plates: Solid copper, not less than 1/16-inch thick.
5.
Tubing: Stiff copper or brass.
Aluminum shall be permitted where
SECTION
26 41 13 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
C.
Anchors and fasteners: Bolt types which are most suitable for the specific anchor and fastener
installations.
D.
Bond all metal structures, roof drains, mechanical equipment and any other metallic equipment
required to be bonded to the system per NFPA-780.
E.
Provide fasteners and bonding connectors rated for use with the materials to be bonded. (i.e
copper and aluminum).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A.
Install lightning protection system to protect the associated structure, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with applicable requirements of
NEC and NFPA 780 to ensure that lightning protection systems comply with requirements.
B.
Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring and roofing work, as necessary to
interface installation of lightning protection system with other work.
C.
Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections avoiding sharp
bends and narrow loops.
D.
All conductors shall be concealed from direct view from the ground. Down conductors shall be
concealed. Coordinate location and routing of all down conductors with the architectural and
structural drawings and report any conflicts prior to pouring of the concrete floor slab.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
Provide equipment grounding and bonding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent
and effective grounds and bonds, for lightning protection connection to all air terminals, devices,
equipment and structural components as necessary. All grounding and bonding shall be in
compliance with the National Electrical Code - 2008, Section 250 - Grounding and NFPA-780.
TESTING
Upon completion of installation of lightning protection system, test resistance-to-ground (earthing
connection) with resistance tester. Where tests indicate resistance-to-ground is over 5 ohms,
take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms or less, by driving additional, properly
spaced, ground rods, and treating soil in proximity to ground rods with common salt, copper
sulfate or magnesium sulfate. Then retest to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION
SECTION
26 41 13 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 43 13
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage (600Volts and below)
power equipment
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.3
1.
Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" transient voltage surge suppressors.
2.
Division 26 Section "Panelboards"
3.
Division 26 Section "Switchboards"
SUBMITTALS
A.
Must have ten day prior approval to submit on project.
B.
Request for submittals must be in writing and attached with independent documentation of the
following items.
C.
Drawings: Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer which
show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection notes, wire size and wiring
diagram.
1.
SPD’s with dimensions that exceed the available space to mount the device within the
required maximum lead lengths will be rejected and not accepted. Verify maximum lead
lengths can be met prior to bid.
D.
Equipment Manual: The manufacturer shall furnish an installation manual with installation notes,
start-up and operating instructions for the specified system. Installation instructions shall clearly
state whether the system requires an external overcurrent device to maintain the system’s UL
1449 listing. SPD requiring external overcurrent devices are not acceptable.
E.
Verification that all SPD are UL 1449 3rd Edition listed and rated with a 20kA (In) nominal
discharge rating for compliance to UL96A Lightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780.
Also provide UL 1449 3rd Edition VPR showing the following maximum VPR (clamping voltage)
as follows:
1.
120Vsystem 600V (L-N)
2.
rd
F.
SPD manufacturer shall provide UL 3 Edition documentation as part of submittal.
G.
Manufacturer’s Warranty Statement, showing a 10 year replacment warranty for modules or unit
are damaged by transient voltages
1.4
A.
STANDARDS
Underwriters Laboratories 1449 - (UL 1449 3
devices – 2009)
rd
edition safety standard for surge protection
SECTION 26 43 13
-1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B.
NEC article 285. National Electrical Code 2008 SPD shall be labeled with a minimum 200kAIC
rating.
C.
NFPA 780 Standard for the installation of lightning protection systems
D.
UL96A - Lightning Protection System Master Label
E.
IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering Inc.) C62.41.1 and C62.41.2 – 2002,
IEEE C62.45 – 2002, IEEE C62.33 & C62.35
F.
All manufacturers must comply with above listed standards and any additions current revisions
of industry standards. All products that do not comply with current industry standards will not be
accepted.
1.5
A.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from a
single manufacturer.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Placing into Service: Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, panel boards,
control terminals, or data terminals to their sources until the surge protective devices are
installed and connected.
B.
Service Conditions: Rate surge protective devices for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1.7
1.
Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not less than 115 percent
2.
Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C).
3.
Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, non-condensing.
4.
Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6000 m) above sea level.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances for
maintenance.
B.
Coordinate surge protective devices with Division 16 Section "Panelboards" and “Switchboards”.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B.
Manufacturer shall provide a product warranty for a period of not less than ten (10) years from
date of installation. Warranty shall cover unlimited replacement of SPD modules during the
warranty period. Those firms responding to this specification shall provide proof that they have
been regularly engaged in the design, manufacturing and testing of SPD for not less than five (5)
years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PQ Protection
B.
APT
SECTION 26 43 13
-2
C.
2.2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Surge Suppression, Inc.
SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
Panel Amperage
| ³3,000Amps
Service Entrance | 400kA/Modular
| 2500-1600Amps
| 300kA/modular
| 1200-400Amps
| 200kA/modular
A.
Provide service entrance rated, UL Type 1 SPD’s as shown and indicated on contract drawings.
B.
Minimum surge current ratings per phase shown above, three phase, wye systems per phase
rating shall equal L-N and L-G modes added together. No other methods are acceptable for per
phase surge current rating calculations.
C.
SPD’s shall be a multi-stage parallel connected device.
D.
SPD’s UL 1449 3rd Edition VPR (clamping voltage) shall be a maximum rating of:
1.
2.
E.
SPD’s shall mount external to the panel; internally mounted SPD’s are not acceptable.
F.
SPD voltages shall be verified by location on drawings, one-line diagrams and equipment
schedules.
G.
SPD shall be modular design with field replaceable modules per phase and per mode.
H.
SPD shall have redundant status indicators on the front of the enclosure and shall monitor and
indicate whether suppression capabilities have been compromised.
I.
SPD shall contain protective components that utilize multiple thermally protected metal oxide
varistors (MOV) per mode.
J.
SPD’s relying upon external and/or supplementary installed safety overcurrent protection do not
meet the intent of this specification.
K.
SPD’s that are limited to being connected to breaker whether or not an integral disconnect
switch is supplied do not meet the intent of this specification.
L.
SPD’s shall have an UL “In” rating (nominal discharge) of 20kA.
M.
SPD shall have dry contacts for remote monitoring capabilities.
N.
Service Entrance SPD’s shall have audible alarms and surge counters.
O.
SPD’s shall have a metal, NEMA 4 rated enclosure.
P.
SPD shall be designed and equipped with integral disconnecting means.
Q.
Protection modes: The SPD shall provide Line to Neutral (L-N) (Wye), Line to Ground (L-G)
(Wye or Delta), Line to Line (L-L) (Delta) and Neutral to Ground (N-G) (Wye) protection.
2.3
DISTRIBUTION, BRANCH PANEL AND/OR AUXILLARY PANELS
Panel Amperage
|
1200-800A
|
600A
|
400-100A
Distribution
|
200kA
|
200kA
|
200kA
Branch Panels
|
|
100kA
|
100kA
SECTION 26 43 13
-3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
A.
Provide UL Type 2 SPD’s as shown and indicated on contract drawings. Any panel indicated to
be 600 amp or larger, and any panel that is the service disconnect panel for the building shall be
considered a “Distribution” type.
B.
SPD’s minimum surge current ratings per phase shown above, three phase, wye systems per
phase rating shall equal L-N and L-G modes added together. No other methods are acceptable
for per phase surge current rating calculations.
C.
SPD’s shall be a multi-stage parallel connected device.
D.
SPD’s shall mount external to the panel; internally mounted SPD’s are not acceptable.
E.
SPD voltages shall be verified by location on drawings, one-line diagrams and equipment
schedules.
F.
SPD shall be a compact, non-modular design
G.
SPD shall have per phase status indicators on the front of the enclosure and shall monitor and
indicate whether suppression capabilities have been compromised.
H.
SPD shall contain protective components that utilize multiple thermally protected metal oxide
varistors (MOV) per mode.
I.
SPD’s relying upon external and/or supplementary installed safety overcurrent protection do not
meet the intent of this specification.
J.
SPD’s shall have an UL “In” rating (nominal discharge) of 20kA.
K.
SPD shall have dry contacts for remote monitoring capabilities.
L.
SPD’s shall have a metal, NEMA 4 rated enclosure
M.
Protection modes: The SPD shall provide Line to Neutral (L-N) (Wye), Line to Ground (L-G)
(Wye or Delta), Line to Line (L-L) (Delta) and Neutral to Ground (N-G) (Wye) protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Review all installation information in manufacturer’s installation manual prior to installing SPD’s.
B.
Verify all voltages before connecting to avoid injury and damage to equipment.
C.
The SPD’s shall be installed external to switchboard, distribution and panelboard.
D.
Internally mounted SPD’s will not be accepted.
E.
The service entrance/switchboard/switchgear SPD’s shall be installed with the shortest lead
length possible and shall avoid any unnecessary or sharp bends. SPD’s shall be connected to
breakers with a 30 amp, 3 pole breaker for connection means.
F.
The distribution, panelboard and auxiliary SPD’s shall be installed with the shortest lead length
possible from the panel it is protecting and shall avoid any unnecessary or sharp bends. SPD’s
shall be connected to breakers with a 30 amp, 3 pole breaker for connection means.
G.
Ground resistance shall be 5 Ohms or less.
H.
Refer to manufacturer’s installation manual for further installation details.
3.2
A
INSTALLATION
1.
After installing surge protective devices, but before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with manufacturers’ installation instruction requirements
and recommendations.
SECTION 26 43 13
-4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B
MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICE
1.
Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect equipment installation.
Report results in writing
2.
Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer’s installation
requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 43 13
-5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of interior lighting fixture work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of interior lighting fixtures in this section include the following:
C.
1.3
1.
Fluorescent
2.
L.E.D.
Applications of interior lighting fixtures required for project including the following:
1.
General lighting
2.
Supplementary lighting
3.
Emergency lighting
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of interior lighting fixtures of types and
ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years.
B.
interior lighting fixture work similar to that required for project.
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of interior
building lighting fixtures.
D.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std Pub Nos. LE 1 and LE 2
pertaining to lighting equipment.
E.
ANSI/IES Compliance: Comply with ANSI 132.1 pertaining to interior lighting fixtures.
F.
ANSI/UL Compliance: Comply with ANSI/UL standards pertaining to interior lighting fixtures for
hazardous locations.
G.
UL Compliance: Provide interior lighting fixtures which have been UL-listed and labeled.
H.
CBM Labels:
Provide fluorescent-lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast
Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
ballasts.
Submit manufacturer's data on interior building lighting fixtures, lamps and
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each
fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order, with proposed fixture and accessories
clearly indicated on each sheet. If requested by the Engineer, samples shall be submitted to
SECTION 26 51 00
-1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
determine compliance and equivalence, at no cost to the owner or architect/engineer. If
requested by the Engineer, point-by-point footcandle calculations shall be submitted to
determine compliance and equivalence. Criteria for calculations (max/min, reflectances, dirt
depreciation, etc., shall be obtained from the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
Manufacturers/Catalog Numbers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fixtures
manufactured by manufacturers as indicated on the fixture schedule. Catalog numbers given on
the fixture schedule are intended to provide the general description of the required fixture and its
quality. Additional accessories, mounting hardware, options, etc., not specifically described by
the catalog number but required for a properly operating and installed fixture or as described by
additional notation on the drawings or in the specifications, shall be provided.
INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types, and ratings indicated; complete with, but not
necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters and wiring.
B.
Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts: Provide energy saving high frequency electronic fluorescent-lamp
ballasts, capable of operating 32 watt, octic, T-8 lamp types; with high power factor, programmed
rapid-start, and low-noise features; Type 1; Class P; sound-rated A, and with internal thermal
protection. All flourescent fixture ballasts shall be of the same manufacturer and type. Ballasts
shall also meet the following requirements:
1.
Operate lamps at 20 KHZ or higher with no detectable flicker.
2.
Ballast manufacturer shall have been producing electronic ballasts in the U.S. for more
than five years with a low failure rate.
3.
Ballasts shall be approved and listed by UL.
4.
Ballasts shall comply with all applicable state and federal efficiency standards.
5.
Ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits governing electromagnetic and radio
frequency interference and shall not interfere with operation of other normal electrical
equipment.
6.
Ballasts shall meet all applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding harmonic distortion
and surge protection, but shall have total harmonic distortion not exceeding 20%.
7.
Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure and shall yield normal published expected
lamp life.
8.
Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.7.
9.
Ballasts shall operate at an input frequency of 60 HZ and an input voltage of that
indicated on the drawings for the fixture voltage.
10.
Ballasts shall have a power factor above 0.95.
11.
Ballasts shall be manufactured by Phillips, or Advance or approved equal as approved by
Owner
C.
Fusing all fluorescent ballasts shall be fused. Fuses may be deleted if the ballast is supplied
with automatically resetting thermal overloads internal to the ballast.
D.
Lamps: Provide lamps of the wattage and types specified on the drawings. Coordinate lamp
type with ballast for a complete operational, energy saving lighting system which will operate for
the expected lamp and ballast life. Lamps shall be as manufactured by General Electric,
Phillips, or Osram/Sylvania.
SECTION 26 51 00
-2
1.
E.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Fluorescent lamps shall be rapid start, T-8, medium bi-pin, 32 watt, 3500°K, 85 CRI,
3,000 lumens, 20,000 average rated hours.
Ballast/Lamp Assembly Warranty: Provide a minimum five year ballast guarantee, along with a
two year lamp guarantee. This warranty shall be provided as an assembly with the ballast and
lamp manufacturer agreeing to provide the required warranty with the associated ballast or lamp.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
Install interior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of
Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting
fixtures fulfill requirements.
B.
Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of interior
lighting fixtures with other work.
C.
Fasten fixtures securely to building structural support; and ensure that pendant fixtures are
plumb and level. Provide all required mounting hardware and steel channel to supplement
structural support where necessary. Fixtures shall not be supported from ductwork, piping,
conduits, ceiling grid or any other non-structural building member.
D.
Coordinate fixture installation with mechanical duct work, diffusers, return grilles, communication
systems devices, etc., to avoid any interferences.
3.2
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.
3.3
A.
Upon completion of installation of interior lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been
energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
B.
At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior lighting fixtures which are
observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by
Architect/Engineer.
C.
Refer to Division-1 sections for the replacement/restoration of lamps in interior lighting fixtures,
where used for temporary lighting prior to time of Substantial Completion.
D.
Fixture Warranty: Provide a minimum one year guarantee/warranty for all parts and labor.
Lamp and ballast shall be a separate warranty.
3.4
A.
GROUNDING
Provide tight equipment grounding connections for each interior lighting fixture installation.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 51 00
-3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of exterior lighting fixture work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of exterior lighting fixtures in this section include the following:
1.
C.
Applications of exterior lighting fixtures required for project including the following:
1.
1.3
LED
Outdoor supplementary lighting
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of exterior lighting fixtures of types and
ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years.
B.
exterior lighting fixture work similar to that required for project.
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of exterior
building lighting fixtures.
D.
UL Compliance: Provide exterior lighting fixtures which are UL-listed and labeled.
E.
CBM Labels: Provide ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association
standards and carry the CBM label.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and
verification of indicated parameters.
B.
Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.
C.
Details of installation and construction.
D.
Luminaire materials.
E.
Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated
lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
1.
Submit complete point-by-point photometric calculations utilizing the LLF and LDD factors
provided by the engineer.
2.
Testing Agency Certified Data:
independent testing agency.
Photometric data shall be certified by a qualified
SECTION 26 56 00
-1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
3.
Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's
laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
4.
Submit all lamp, ballast (if applicable), and driver (if applicable) information complete
F.
Lighting contactors.
G.
Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data.
H.
Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data.
I.
Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.
J.
Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for
components involved.
K.
Anchor bolts for poles.
L.
Manufactured poles and pole foundations. Provide complete lighting pole and pole base shop
drawings for each pole type and location, where the location conditions differ. Provide pole and
pole base wind load rating calculations signed and sealed by a Florida registered professional
engineer.
1.
Provide geotechnical soil testing or other tests if necessary or required by the engineer of
record for the poles and pole bases.
M.
Wiring Diagrams: For control and switching wiring.
N.
Samples: The Engineer shall be provided with a sample of each fixture for review upon request.
Each Sample shall include lamps and ballasts. Lamps and ballasts may be requested
separately. The samples shall be retrieved by the contractor upon completion of review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Manufacturers/Catalog Numbers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fixtures
manufactured by manufacturers as indicated on the fixture schedule. Catalog numbers given on
the fixture schedule are intended to provide the general description of the required fixture and its
quality. Additional accessories, mounting hardware, options, etc., not specifically described by
the catalog number but required for a properly operating and installed fixture or as described by
additional notation on the drawings or in the specifications, shall be provided.
1.
2.2
Point-by-point calculations will be required to be submitted. Engineer will provide the
design criteria and maintenance factors.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types, and ratings indicated; complete with, but not
necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters and wiring.
The level of quality, general material, and manufacturing of the fixtures shall be as per the basis
of design fixture, lamp and ballast and driver selection.
B.
LED lamps shall be rated for a minimum 60,000 hours, using nationally recognized testing and
certification procedures. Provide lamps and drivers suitable for use in the outdoor environment.
D.
Induction lamps shall be rated for a minimum 100,000 hours, using nationally recognized testing
and certification procedures. Provide lamps and other components suitable for use in the
outdoor environment.
C.
Poles (where applicable): Site lighting poles shall be installed straight and plumb, and shall be
as scheduled on the drawings. The pole and base shall be rated for the prevailing wind load as
required by the Florida Building Code for the EPA of the light fixtures and bracket arm, for the
SECTION 26 56 00
-2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
current version in affect at the time the project bids. Structural design for wind load ratings of the
pole and base shall be performed by a Florida registered professional engineer and signed and
sealed proof of compliance shall be submitted with the lighting shop drawings.
D.
Ballast/Lamp Warranty: Provide a minimum five year lamp and ballast/driver guarantee. This
warranty shall be provided as an assembly with the ballast and lamp manufacturer agreeing to
provide the required warranty with the associated ballast or lamp.
E.
Fixture and Pole Warranty:
Provide a minimum five year light fixture and light pole
guarantee, including bollards. This warranty shall be provided as an assembly with the ballast
and lamp, or separately from the ballast & lamp.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
Install exterior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of
Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting
fixtures fulfill requirements.
B.
Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of exterior
lighting fixtures with other work.
C.
Fasten fixtures securely to required structural supports; and check to ensure that solid pendant
fixtures are plumb.
3.2
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Clean exterior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.
3.3
A.
Upon completion of installation of exterior lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry, apply
electrical energy to lighting fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
B.
At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in exterior lighting fixtures which are
observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Engineer.
C.
Refer to Division-1 sections for the replacement/restoration of lamps in exterior lighting fixtures,
where used for temporary lighting prior to time of Substantial Completion.
3.4
A.
3.4
A.
GROUNDING
Provide tight equipment grounding connections for each exterior lighting fixture installation.
GROUNDING
Provide tight equipment grounding connections for each exterior lighting fixture installation.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 56 00
-3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 31 31 16
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
1.
1.2
Soil treatment with termiticide
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label for
termiticide products
B.
Product certificates: Include the EPA-Registered Label.
C.
Soil Treatment Application Report Including the following:
D.
1.3
1.
Date and time of application
2.
Moisture content of soil before application
3.
Termiticide brand name and manufacturer
4.
Quantity of undiluted termiticide used
5.
Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application
6.
Areas of application
7.
Water source for application
Warranties: Sample of special warranties
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is
located.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered
Label.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or
frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPARegistered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations.
Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.
1.5
A.
WARRANTY
Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and
Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment,
will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is
discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite
infestation.
1.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
TERMITE CONTROL
SECTION 31 31 16 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
TERMITE CONTROL PRODUCTS
Soil Treatment Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.
Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide
concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
B.
BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor.
Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75.
FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Prevail.
Syngenta; Demon TC.
Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than
three years against infestation of subterranean termites.
Wood Treatment with Borate: Provide an EPA-registered borate complying with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Nisus Corp.; Bora-Care, Jecta.
NovaGuard Technologies, Inc.; Armor-Guard, Shell-Guard.
U.S. Borax Inc.; Tim-Bor.
Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than
three years against infestation of subterranean termites.
C.
Metal Mesh Barrier System: Stainless-steel mesh, 0.025-by-0.018-inch, made from 0.08-inchdiameter, Type 316 stainless-steel wire.
D.
Dilute with water to concentration level recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if approved for intended application
by local authorities having jurisdiction. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to
plants or animals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION GENERAL
A.
Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
B.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with
earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions
affecting performance oftermite control.
C.
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
SOIL TREATMENT PREPARATION:
Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment
effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously
compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing
compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.
TERMITE CONTROL
SECTION 31 31 16 - 2
1.
B.
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.
1.
Slabs-on-Grade: Underground-supported slab construction, including footings, building
slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete
footings and slabs are placed.
2.
Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation;
along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit
penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers; and along the entire outside
perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.
3.
Masonry: Treat voids.
4.
Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
5.
At crawlspaces; treat soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas
including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases.
C.
Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
D.
Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground
supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label
instructions.
E.
Post warning signs in areas of application.
F.
Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
WOOD TREATMENT APPLICATION:
Provide quantity of borate solution required for application at the label volume and rate for the
maximum specified concentration of borate, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label,
so that wood framing, sheathing, siding, and structural members subject to infestation receive
treatment.
METAL MESH BARRIER:
Place metal mesh barrier where indicated to provide a continuous barrier to entry of
subterranean termites. Install mesh under the perimeter of concrete slab edges and joints after
vapor barrier and reinforcing steel are in place. Fit mesh tightly around pipe or other
penetrations.
END OF SECTION
TERMITE CONTROL
END OF SECTION - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 32 11 00
PAVEMENT SUBGRADE
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SCOPE:
A.
Stabilized subgrade, compacted, for concrete pavement.
B.
Furnish and install stabilizing materials and compact to required densities.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit information on stabilizing material.
B.
Submit data on proposed method of stabilizing subgrade to LBR of 60; provide laboratory
tests verifying.
1.03
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A.
ASTM D1557 (AASHTO T-180) Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil
Aggregate Mixtures using 110lb. Rammer and 18 inch drop.
B.
ASTM D1556 Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method.
C.
State of Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction 1991 FDOT Spec.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials and workmanship shall comply with the applicable sections of the FDOT
specifications. All references to method of measurement and payment do not apply.
B.
Materials will be sampled and tested as directed by the Owner.
1.05
APPLICATIONS
A.
Provide stabilized and compacted subgrade under Portland cement concrete pavement.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Subgrade shall be top layer of the fill embankment or the top of existing grade under the
concrete pavement. Subgrade shall be compacted to the depth indicated on the drawings
and stabilized to a LBR of 100. Limerock fines or other approved material shall be added to
the stabilized subgrade, as required, to obtain the LBR of 100.
PAVEMENT SUBGRADE
SECTION 32 11 00 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
COMPACTED SUBGRADE
A.
Subgrades to be finished to the correct elevations, slopes, lines and grades to accommodate
the final pavement surfaces.
B.
Compact to the depths indicated on the drawings and to 100% maximum density. Densities
per ASTM D1557.
C.
Stabilized Subgrade: Stabilize with added material as required to achieve a LBR of 100 and
compact to the depths indicated on the drawings. Submit information on stabilizing material
to be used and on proposed mix to obtain the LBR. Densities shall be per ASTM D1557.
END OF SECTION
PAVEMENT SUBGRADE
SECTION 32 11 00 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 32 13 13
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
GENERAL
PART 1
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
1. Formwork, bracing, and anchorage.
2. Concrete reinforcement and accessories.
3. Cast-in-place concrete; ready mixed concrete; concrete placement, finishing and curing.
4. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, material, equipment,
supervision, plant and transportation for the construction of the concrete pavement to the lines
and grades as shown on the Drawings.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. FDOT Index 206, 300 and 305
B. FDOT Spec. No. 120
C. FDOT Spec. No. 204
D. FDOT Spec. No. 234
E. FDOT Spec. No. 334
F. FDOT Spec. No. 346
G. FDOT Spec. No. 350
H. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
I.
ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and Placing Concrete.
J.
ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting
K. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
L. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
M. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
N. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete.
O. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.
P. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
Q. ASTM C78 - Flexural Strength of concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third Point Loading).
R. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
SECTION 32 13 13 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
S. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
T. ASTM C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
U. ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
V. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
P. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
Q. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
R. ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction.
S. ASTM D1850 Concrete Joint Sealer Cold Application Type.
T. AASHTO M 148 - Membrane Curing Compound, Type 1-D.
U. AASHTO M 182-60 - Burlap Cloth Made From Jute of Kenaf.
V. FS TT-C-800 - Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and Existing Surfaces.
W. (CRD): CRD-C 13-79 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
X. CRD-C 300-77 Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
Y. CRD-C 13-79 Air Entraining Agents.
Z. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.) SS-S-1401B Sealing compound, Hot Applied, for
Concrete and Asphalt Pavements.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. All materials specified shall be certified by the producer or manufacturer that the furnished
material meets the specific requirements of the specifications. Submit product data on all
products, including joint material, dowels, joint sealants, curing compound, reinforcement, etc.
B. Submit design mix for all classes of concrete.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with Florida Department of Transportation Specification as
indicated on the drawings and
B. ACI 301, ACI 304, ACI 305, ACI 315, ACI 347, ACI 318, ASTM C78 and ASTM C94 and all
other applicable referenced documents (1.2).
C. Applicable portions of the concrete section of these specifications shall apply.
1.05
TESTS
A. Testing and analysis of concrete shall be coordinated and paid for by the contractor from
allowance provided in contract.
SECTION 32 13 13 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B. Submit proposed mix design of the concrete for review and approval prior to commencement
of work.
C. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump tests in accordance with FDOT
specifications and ACI 301.
D. Tests of cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with requirements
stated herein.
E. At least three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 or less cu. yds of each class of
concrete placed each day.
F. One Slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS
A. Conform to ACI 301 and ACI 347. Forms to be steel or wood Of size and strength to resist
movement and to maintain alignment.
2.02
REINFORCING STEEL
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 yield grade billet steel.
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ANSI/ASTM A185; Flat sheets; uncoated finish.
2.03
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 Portland, grey color.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04
C0NCRETE CLASS
A. Concrete pavement to be 4000 psi compressive strength minimum and 650 psi
flexural strength minimum at 28 days or per FDOT Spec. 346 and 350
whichever is greater.
2.05
ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260.
B. No admixtures containing calcium chloride allowed. Admixtures must be approved by Owner
in advance and conform to ASTM C494.
2.06
ACCESSORIES
A. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture or
impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.
SECTION 32 13 13 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
B. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751 or 1752.
C. Joint Sealer: Sealing material shall be made specifically for sealing joints in concrete
pavement; material shall conform to ASTM D-1850 or Federal Specification SS-S-1401B.
2.07
CURING MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309 or AASHTO M-148, Type 1-D or CRD-C300
B. Absorptive Materials: Burlap per AASHTO M182; Burlap to have a weight of at least 14
ounces per square yard when dry.
C. Impervious Material: Impervious sheeting per ASTM C-171.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A. Work to be in conformance with ACI 301, ACI 304, ACI 305, ACI 315, ACI 318, ACI 347, and
ASTM C94 and C78.
3.02
FORMWORK ERECTION
A. Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork.
B. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms; remove loose dirt.
C. Align form joints.
D. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces receive special finishes or applied
coatings which may be affected by agent.
E. Coordinate work of other trades in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, sleeves,
bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
F. Setting Forms: The forms shall be accurately set to line and grade and such that they rest
firmly, throughout their entire length, upon the compacted subgrade surface. Forms shall be
joined neatly and tightly and braced to resist the pressure of the concrete of the finished
operations. The alignment and grade of all forms shall be approved before and immediately
prior to the placing of concrete.
3.03
REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with ACI 301, ACI 315, ACI 318 and ANSI/ASTM A185.
B. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
3.04
C. Locate reinforcing splices as noted on the drawings and/or as required by ACI 318 and ACI
315.
SUBGRADE CONDITION
A. Subgrade Condition:
SECTION 32 13 13 - 4
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1. The finished subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compact condition and any areas
which are disturbed prior to placing of the concrete shall be restored at the Contractor’s
expense. The subgrade shall be moist at the time the concrete is placed. Water shall be
uniformly applied ahead of the pouring operations as directed by the Engineer.
2. The subgrade shall be accurately trimmed to the required elevation, slope and cross
section with a 1/4 inch tolerance. High areas shall be trimmed to proper elevation. Low
areas may be filled with suitable material and compacted to the specified density.
3.05
PLACING CONCRETE
A. Notify the Construction Project Supervisor or his Designee 24 hours prior to commencement
of concreting operations.
B. Concrete shall not be dropped freely over three feet; use pipe troughs or chutes. Placement of
concrete shall be such as to avoid segregation or separation of aggregates.
C. Concrete shall be deposited nearly as possible in its final position. Large quantities shall not
be deposited at one point and then run and worked along the area to be paved. Concrete
shall not be moved nor positioned by the use of vibrators.
D. The concrete shall be distributed on the subgrade to such depth that, when it is consolidated
and finished, the thickness required by the Drawings will be obtained at all points and the
surface will at no point be below the grade specified for the finished surface. The concrete
shall be deposited on the subgrade in a manner which will require as little rehandling as
possible. Placing of the concrete shall be continuous between transverse expansion and
contraction joints, without the use of intermediate bulkheads.
E. Reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and shall be maintained at this
location during the placing and finishing operations.
F. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of all forms or edges of
existing pavement by means of vibrators. Vibrators shall not be permitted to come in contact
with the subgrade or a side form. Vibration at any one location shall not continue so long as to
produce pudding or the accumulation of excessive grout on the surface. In no case shall the
vibrator be operated longer than 15 seconds in any one location.
3.06
PAVEMENT JOINTS
A. Saw cut control joints at an optimum time after finishing. Cut pavement as indicated on the
joint details. Contractor shall submit joint pattern and spacing for approval.
B. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of
pavement to within 1/4 inch finished pavement surface.
C. Cleaning and Sealing Joints: Joints in concrete which are to be sealed, shall be filled with joint
sealing material before the concrete is opened for use and as soon after completion of sawing
and curing as is feasible. Just prior to sealing, each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
foreign material (including any membrane curing compound) and the joint faces shall be clean
and surface-dry when the sealer is applied.
SECTION 32 13 13 - 5
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
1. The sealing material shall be applied to each joint to conform to the details shown on the
Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. The pouring shall
be done in such a manner that the material will not be spilled on the exposed surfaces of
the concrete. Any excess material on the surface of the concrete shall be removed
immediately and the surface cleaned.
2. All cracks occurring prior to acceptance shall be cleaned out and sealed as specified
above, except that the cracks and fractures shall be completely filled with joint sealer and
any excess filler material cut down level with the pavement surface.
3.07
TOLERANCES
A. Deviation of 1/4" max. with 16' straight-edge laid in any direction.
3.08
REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Do not remove forms, shores and bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry
its own weight, construction loads, and design loads which are liable to be imposed upon it.
Verify strength of concrete by compressive test results.
3.09
FINISHING
A. Pavement texture and finish shall match the existing concrete pavement and curbing.
B. All Concrete: Fill all voids, honeycombs and other intrusions. Clean all voids, honeycomb, and
holes of loose concrete and debris. Fill solid with neat cement paste, 1 part cement and 1-1/2
part fine, clean sand; wet areas before filling. Remove projections, fins, irregularities and form
tie ends.
C. Concrete surfaces exposed to view; Remove blemishes; Rub to uniform texture.
D. Provide smooth rubbed finishes on vertical faces of formed concrete exposed to view as
follows:
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: On exposed, poured-in-place concrete vertical surfaces. Fill and
repair blemishes, rub finish to uniform color and texture. Use mortar mix of 1 part
Portland cement and 2 parts well graded sand passing No. 30 sieve with water added to
give the consistency of thick paint. Thoroughly wet surface and allow approaching surface
dryness. Apply vigorously with burlap, cork or wood; scrape off excess grout without
pulling mortar from voids, rub surface with burlap pads having the dry sand-cement
mixture on the pads.
E. Immediately after the placement, the concrete shall be struck off, consolidated and finished,
to produce a finished product conforming to the cross section, width and surface required by
the Drawings and Specifications.
F. Final Finish: As soon as the water sheen has disappeared and just before the concrete
becomes non-plastic, a light broom finish shall be given to the surface.
3.10
CURING
SECTION 32 13 13 - 6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
A. After the finishing operations have been completed and as soon as the concrete has
hardened sufficiently that marring of the surface will not occur, the entire surface and the
edges of the newly placed concrete shall be covered and cured with membrane curling
compound.
B. Begin curing concrete immediately after finishing. Concrete shall be protected against
moisture loss and rapid temperature change for at least 9 days. Use one of the following
procedures:
1. Ponding or continuous sprinkling.
2. Application of absorptive mats or fabric or impervious sheets kept continuously wet.
3. Continuous application of steam (not exceeding 150 degrees F) or mist spray.
4. Application of liquid membrane-forming compounds conforming to ASTM C309 or
AASHTO M-148 or CRD-C300 or other approved methods and materials.
5. Immediately after curing, thoroughly clean pavement of any marks, spots, stains, mortar
or other debris.
C. Curing compound shall be uniformly applied to the surface to be cured, in a single coat,
continuous film, at the rate of one gallon to not more than 200 square feet by a mechanical
sprayer.
D. Curing compound shall not be applied during periods of rainfall. Curing compound shall not be
applied to the inside faces of joints to be sealed. Should the film become damaged from any
cause within the required period, the damaged portions shall be repaired immediately with
additional compound. Upon removal of side forms the sides of the slabs exposed shall be
immediately be coated to provide a curing treatment equal to that provided for the surface.
- END OF SECTION -
SECTION 32 13 13 - 7
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 32 13 14
CONCRETE WALKS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Bidding Requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division One Apply to all work hereunder.
1.02
SCOPE:
A. Provide concrete walks, accessories and related work as indicated on Drawings and specified
herein.
PART 2
2.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
A. Concrete paving shall be one-course construction, four inches (4") in thickness and thickened
at the edges as indicated on the Drawings. Paving shall be reinforced with wire fabric and/or
steel reinforcing as indicated on Drawings.
B. Control joint and expansion joint pattern shall conform to that which is shown on Drawings
and as follows:
1. Control joints: shall be hand-tooled, saw-cut, or premolded strip (1/8” to ¼”) minimum
three-fourth inches (3/4") deep as shown on Drawings.
2. Expansion joint:
a. Curbs - shall be placed at a maximum of fifty feet (50') on center in straight runs and
at intersections of walks and abutting buildings, columns or other fixed vertical
surfaces and as specifically shown on Drawings.
b. Sidewalks – shall be placed as shown on drawings.
C. Finish Grades:
1. All surfaces shall be sloped to provide positive drainage.
2. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform slopes between finish grades indicated
on Drawings and/or existing grades.
3. All transitions shall be rounded.
4. Slope finish surfaces away from building walls.
5. New and existing surfaces shall match elevation without abrupt changes of level except at
curbs and steps specifically indicated.
D. Concrete Finish:
1. Walks shall receive the following sequence of finishing operations:
a. Screed and float concrete to true proper level with maximum one-eighth inch (1/8")
per six inch (6") tolerance
CONCRETE W ALKS
SECTION 32 13 14 - 1
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
b. Work concrete with wood float followed by light steel troweling.
c.
Hand tool joints and slab edges with one-fourth inch (1/4") radius.
d. Provide light to medium broom finish.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE W ALKS
SECTION 32 13 14 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
SECTION 32 31 13
CHAIN LINK FENCING, GATES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
The section includes the following:
1.
Chain-link fence
2.
Gates
3.
Accessories
1.
1.2
Electronic Access Control Items
A.
1.3
Delegated Design: Design chain-link fences and gates, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link
fences and gates.
1.
Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.
2.
Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
3.
Accessories
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Show accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational clearances.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit full catalog of components and options with factory-applied
color finishes. Upon request, submit selected tile samples per paragraph below.
D.
Samples for Verification: Prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1.
Polymer-Coated Components: In 6-inch lengths for components and on full-sized units
for accessories.
E.
Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence and gate, from manufacturer.
F.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with CLFMI CLF 2445, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Source limitations: Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fittings, and
fastenings from a single manufacturer.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on
Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field
measurements.
SECTION 32 31 13 - 1
1.6
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
WARRANTY
A.
Provide Manufacturer’s standard limited warranty that its Polyolefin Coated Chain Link Fence is
free from color coating flaking and peeling and other defects in material or workmanship for a
period of 15 years from the date of purchase. See Manufacturers Warranty for full details.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
B.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Automatic Operator: Provide standard manufacturer’s warranty
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
the following:
B.
Chain link fencing and gates
1.
Basis of design: Master Halco, Inc.; Orange, CA 92868; (800) 229-5615
a.
C.
2.2
Permafused® II - Polyolefin Coated Chain Link Fence
Substitutions allowed only if approved by the architect prior to bid, in accordance with Division
01-General Requirements Product Substitution Procedures
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Fabric
1.
Polyolefin elastomer coating, 10 mil thickness, thermally fused to zinc-coated steel core
wire: Per ASTM F668 Class 2b. Minimum Core wire tensile strength of 75,000 psi
2.
Size: Helically wound and woven to height as indicated on drawings with diamond mesh,
10 gauge, with a core wire diameter of .0135 inch and a minimum breaking strength of
1000 lbf.
3.
Selvage of fabric shall be knuckled at top and at bottom.
Steel fence framing
1.
Steel pipe - Type I: ASTM F 1083, standard weight schedule 40; minimum yield strength
of 30,000 psi; sizes as indicated. Hot-dipped galvanized with minimum average 1.8 oz/ft²
(550 g/m²) of coated surface area.
2.
Polyolefin Coated finish: In accordance with ASTM F1043, apply supplemental color
coating of minimum 10 mils of thermally fused polyolefin in color to match fabric.
3.
End and Corner Post: 2.875 OD 9.11 lbs/ft
4.
Line Post: 2.375 OD 3.65 lbs/ft
5.
Rail and Braces: 1.660 OD 2.27 lbs/ft
Polyolefin coated accessories
1.
Chain link fence accessories: ASTM F 626 Provide items required to complete fence
system. Galvanize each ferrous metal item and finish to match framing. Fittings should
match Master Halco specifications.
2.
Post caps: Formed steel, cast malleable iron, or weather tight closure cap for tubular
posts. Provide one cap for each post. Cap to have provision for barbed wire when
SECTION 32 31 13 - 2
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
necessary. “C” shaped line post without top rail or barbed wire supporting arms do not
require post caps. (Where top rail is used, provide tops to permit passage of top rail.)
D.
3.
Top rail and rail ends: Pressed steel per ASTM F626, for connection of rail and brace to
terminal posts.
4.
Top rail sleeves: 7” expansion sleeve with a minimum .137” wire diameter and 1.80”
length spring, allowing for expansion and contraction of top rail.
5.
Wire ties: 9 gauge] galvanized steel wire for attachment of fabric to line posts. Double
wrap 13 gauge for rails and braces. Hog ring ties of 12-1/2 gauge for attachment of
fabric to tension wire.
6.
Brace and tension (stretcher bar) bands: Pressed steel, minimum 300 degree profile
curvature for secure fence post attachment. At square post provide tension bar clips.
7.
Tension (stretcher) bars: One piece lengths equal to 2 inches less than full height of
fabric with a minimum cross-section of 3/16” x 3/4”. Provide tension (stretcher) bars
where chain link fabric meets terminal posts.
8.
Tension wire: Thermally fused polyolefin applied to zinc coated steel wire: Per ASTM F
1664 Class 2 b, 6 gauge, diameter core wire with tensile strength of 75,000 psi
9.
Truss rods & tightener: Steel rods with minimum diameter of 5/16”. Capable of
withstanding a tension of minimum 2,000 lbs.
10.
Nuts and bolts are galvanized but not polyolefin coated. Cans of touch up paint are
available to color coat nuts and bolts if desired.
Setting Materials
1.
2.3
Concrete: Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi
A.
Color of fabric coating: Midnight Black
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations.
B.
Ensure property lines and legal boundaries of work are clearly established.
3.2
CHAIN LINK FENCE FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F 567 and manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Locate terminal post at each fence termination and change in horizontal or vertical direction of
30° or more.
C.
Space line posts uniformly, 10’ maximum
D.
For areas used to enclose animal and installed over earth, bury mesh 24” into earth. Provide
mesh coating as necessary.
E.
Concrete set terminal and gate posts: Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes
shall have diameter 4 times greater than outside dimension of post, and depths approximately
6” deeper than post bottom. Excavate deeper as required for adequate support in soft and
loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads. Set post bottom 36” below surface when in
firm, undisturbed soil. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour. Trowel finish around
post. Slope to direct water away from posts.
SECTION 32 31 13 - 3
PROJECT NO. BG12-15
MAY, 2013
F.
Drive Anchor posts: With protective cap, drive post 36” into ground. Slightly below ground level
install drive anchor shoe fitting. Install 2 diagonal drive anchors and tighten in the shoe.
G.
Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintain in position during placement and
finishing operations.
H.
Bracing: Install horizontal pipe brace at mid-height for fences 6’ and over, on each side of
terminal posts. Firmly attach with fittings. Install diagonal truss rods at these points. Adjust
truss rod, ensuring posts remain plumb.
I.
Tension wire: Provide tension wire at bottom of fabric [and at top, if top rail is not specified].
Install tension
wire before stretching fabric and attach to each post with ties. Secure
tension wire to fabric with 12-1/2 gauge hog rings 24” O.C.
J.
Top rail: Install lengths, 21’.
expansion/contraction.
K.
Center Rails (for fabric height 12’ and over). Install mid rails between posts with fittings and
accessories.
L.
Bottom Rails: Install bottom rails between posts with fittings and accessories.
3.3
Connect joints with sleeves for rigid connections for
CHAIN LINK FABRIC INSTALLATION
A.
Fabric: Install fabric on security side and attach so that fabric remains in tension after pulling
force is released. Leave approximately 2” between finish grade and bottom selvage. Attach
fabric with wire ties to line posts at 15” on center and to rails, braces, and tension wire at 24” on
center.
B.
Tension (stretcher) bars: Pull fabric taut; thread tension bar through fabric and attach to terminal
posts with bands or clips spaced maximum of 15” on center.
3.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Tie wires: Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons and clothing.
B.
Fasteners: Install nuts on side of fence opposite fabric side for added security.
C.
Barbed wire: Uniformly space parallel rows of barbed wire on security side of fence. Pull wire
taut and attach in clips or slots of each extension.
D.
Slats: Install slats in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Clean up debris and unused material, and remove from the site.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 32 31 13 - 4
Specifications
Division 1- Division 32
Pinellas Park, Florida
IFB # 13-013B
SECTION 5: CONTRACT
AGREEMENT TO FURNISH IFB 13-013B PINELLAS PARK TRANSIT CENTER
THIS AGREEMENT is made on ___________, by and between the Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority
( PSTA ), an independent special district with its principal place of business located at 3201 Scherer Drive, St.
Petersburg, Florida, and ______________ ( Contractor ), a _____________________________ with its
principal place of business located at _________________________(collectively, the Parties ).
WHEREAS, PSTA issued Invitation for Bid No. IFB 13-013B for Pinellas Park Transit Center on June 17,
2013; and
WHEREAS, Contractor submitted a bid in response to the IFB on July 16, 2013; and
WHEREAS, PSTA s Board of Directors awarded the IFB to Contractor at its Board of Directors Meeting
on _______________________, and the parties wish to set forth the terms and conditions of their agreement
for a total amount not to exceed $XXX,XXX (the contract total).
NOW THEREFORE, the parties in consideration of the mutual covenants and conditions set forth herein
contained, the adequacy of which is acknowledged by the Parties, agree as follows:
1.
RECITALS. The above recitals are true and correct and incorporated herein by reference.
2.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall mean and refer to this Agreement, the IFB and
all exhibits attached thereto including all duly executed and issued addenda (attached hereto as Exhibit
A), and Contractor s Response to the IFB (attached hereto as Exhibit B). All of the foregoing are
incorporated herein by reference and are made a part of this Agreement. In interpreting this Agreement
and resolving any ambiguities or conflicts between this Agreement and the Exhibits, this Agreement takes
precedence over the Exhibits and any inconsistency between exhibits will be resolved in the following
order:
Exhibit A
Exhibit B
IFB
Contractor s Response
3.
SCOPE OF SERVICES. Contractor, at the direction of PSTA, shall perform the paving and construction of
the Pinellas Park Transit Center all in accordance with and as described more fully in the plans and
specifications, tasks, and scope of work set forth in Section 4 of Exhibit A (the Project ). It is the sole
responsibility of Contractor to read the specifications and understand them. The Parties acknowledge and
agree that the scope of work set forth in this Section and provided in Section 4 of Exhibit A is a general
guide of PSTA s minimum requirements and is not intended to be a complete and/or comprehensive list
of all requirements necessary to meet the requirements of the Project. The Parties further acknowledge
that additional construction services may be required by PSTA and PSTA specifically reserves the right to
make written requests for additional construction services from Contractor.
4.
EFFECTIVE DATE AND TERM OF AGREEMENT. This Agreement shall become effective and commence on
the date of award by PSTA s Board of Director s ( Effective Date ) and shall remain in effect until the
completion of the Project, unless terminated earlier pursuant to this Agreement.
-363-
IFB # 13-013B
5.
TERMS OF PERFORMANCE.
5.01 Time for Completion. Contractor shall commence work on the Project immediately upon receipt of a
written Notice to Proceed/Purchase Order and shall complete the Project, and all tasks associated
therewith within one hundred eighty days (180) from the Effective Date (the Contract Time ). Within
thirty (30) days after PSTA issues the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall submit to PSTA a project schedule
for approval in accordance with the requirements of Exhibit A.
5.02 Representatives. Prior to the start of any work on the Project, Contractor shall designate a primary
and alternate representative, who will have management responsibility for the Project and who have
authority to act on technical matters and resolve problems with the Project and the Contract Documents,
to PSTA in writing. Such designation shall include the contact information (including phone numbers) of
Contractor s representative. PSTA will advise Contractor in writing of the personnel who will represent
PSTA in the administration of the Contract Documents. Such writing from PSTA will include the specific
duties of each individual and each representative s limits of authority.
5.03 Non-exclusive Contract. PSTA specifically reserves the right to contract with other entities for the
services described in the Contract Documents or for similar services if it deems, in its sole discretion, such
action to be in PSTA s best interest.
5.04 Status Reports: Contractor shall submit monthly written status reports to PSTA outlining the status of
the Project to date throughout the term of this Agreement. Each status report shall be a concise narrative
description of activities to date and planned activities until the next status report. A final report, one (1)
original and two copies, shall be submitted by Contractor upon completion of the Project.
5.05 Reviews: Until the completion of the Project and the final payment therefore by PSTA, Contractor
shall allow representatives of PSTA to visit the offices and other places of Contractor s work periodically
without prior notice to monitor Contractor s work completed or progress on the Project. The Parties agree
that if either party deems it advisable to hold either a conference or any inspection of work in progress, all
parties will be notified and may participate.
5.06 Contractor Responsibility: Contractor shall provide services of first quality, and the workmanship
must be in accordance with customary standards of the various trades and industries involved in the
Project. The Project and the services associated therewith shall be high-quality in all respects. No
advantage will be taken by Contractor in the omission of any part or detail of the Project. Contractor
hereby assumes responsibility for all materials, equipment, and processes used in the Project, whether the
same is manufactured by Contractor or purchased readymade from a source outside Contractor s
company.
5.07 Compliance with Laws. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with all federal, state,
county, and local laws, rules and/or regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities including those set
forth in this Agreement and that, in any manner, could bear on the provision of the Project and
Contractor s services under the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to all rules and regulations
related to safety and compliance there with. PSTA and PSTA s Project Manager will communicate directly
with the Contractor s project superintendent and shall have no authority to direct, oversee, or instruct the
Contractor s employees, subcontractors, or materialmen, or any other individuals performing work on the
Project. Omission of any applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, standards or orders by PSTA in the
Contract Documents shall be construed as an oversight and shall not relieve Contractor of its obligations to
comply with such laws fully and completely. Upon request, Contractor shall furnish to PSTA certificates of
-364-
IFB # 13-013B
compliance with all such laws, orders and regulations. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all
necessary permits and licenses required for performance of the Scope of Work and completion of the
Project.
6. COMPENSATION. In consideration of Contractor s faithful performance of the Contract Documents, PSTA
agrees to pay Contractor _______________ in accordance with the amounts bid and set forth in Exhibit B.
However, all payments to Contractor individually and in the aggregate shall not exceed
______________________ ($______________) ( Contract Total ). Payment shall be made only for work
which is actually performed and approved by PSTA. Contractor shall submit pay applications to PSTA in
accordance with the Statement of Work contained in Exhibit A, but no later than the fifteenth (15) day of
the month immediately following the month in which the work or services were completed. PSTA will
make payment within in accordance with the Florida Prompt Payment Act after approval of Contractor s
invoice.
6.01 Invoices. All invoices shall be submitted in accordance with the Florida Prompt Payment Act with all
details prescribed by PSTA, and delivered to the following address:
Attention: Finance Department/Accounts Payable
3201 Scherer Drive
St. Petersburg, Florida 33716
6.02 Disputed Invoices. In the event of a disputed invoice, only that portion so contested will be withheld
from payment and the undisputed portion will be paid.
6.03 Final Payment. PSTA shall make final payment to Contractor within forty-five (45) days after the
Project is fully and finally accepted by PSTA in accordance with the Contract Documents and receipt of:
Contractor s application for final payment, a properly executed and notarized affidavit, waiver, and release
of all claims from the Contractor and any subcontractor in a form acceptable to PSTA in its sole discretion
and which may be conditioned only upon receipt of final payment; a duly executed copy of the surety s
consent to final payment; and such other documentation that may be requested or required by PSTA. The
items required in the preceding sentence are conditions precedent to final payment. Final payment shall
not be due and payable unless and until these items are received and accepted by PSTA. Contractor s
acceptance of final payment shall constitute a full waiver of any and all claims by Contractor against PSTA
arising out of this Agreement or otherwise relating to the Project, except those identified in writing by
Contractor as unsettled in the final application for payment. Neither the acceptance of the Project, or any
part thereof, nor any payment or final payment by PSTA shall be deemed to be a waiver of any of PSTA s
rights or claims under the Contract Documents.
6.04 Disputes with Subcontractor Payments. Any disputes that arise regarding the satisfactory completion
of work by a subcontractor or subcontractor may be brought to the attention of PSTA, who will make a
determination. Any delay or postponement of payment from the above-referenced time frame may occur
only for good cause following written approval from PSTA. This clause applies to both DBE and non-DBE
subcontractors.
6.05 Failure to Abide by DBE Requirements. Failure by Contractor to carry out the requirements of PSTA s
DBE Program, and/or timely return of retainage, without just cause, is a material breach of this Agreement,
which may result in PSTA withholding payment from Contractor until all delinquent payments have been
-365-
IFB # 13-013B
made (no interest will be paid for the period that payment was withheld), termination of this Agreement,
or other such remedy as PSTA deems appropriate.
7. MODIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents, including the scope, specification,
and details of the Project may only be modified by written agreement of the Parties.
7.01 Written Change Orders within the Project. Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract
Documents, PSTA s Project Manager may at any time, by written order, make changes within the scope of
the work to be performed by Contractor under the Contract Documents. However, no such written order
shall serve to increase the Contract Total, the Contract Time, or give Contractor any claim for any
compensation in addition to the Contract Total. If any such change would cause an increase in the Contract
Total or Contract Time whether or not requested by PSTA or initiated by Contractor, such change shall only
be authorized if approved by PSTA s Board of Directors at a duly noticed public meeting. In the event any
change would result in an increase in the Contract Total or Contract Time, Contractor shall notify PSTA
within seven (7) days in writing. The written notice shall state in all capital, bold letters that the change
order would result in an increase in the Contract Total and/or Contract Time and shall include a statement
outlining the reasons for the change, a complete description of the change, and detailed description of
products to be purchased and any back-up detail and documentation supporting the request. Such notice
must be submitted and approved by PSTA s Board of Directors at a duly noticed public meeting prior to
performing any work contemplated by the change order. If Contractor proceeds with additional work prior
to such approval, Contractor shall not receive any additional compensation for such work. Failure to agree
to any adjustment shall be a dispute within the meaning of Section 12. Disputes, Breaches, Defaults, or
other Litigation.
7.02 No Stoppage of Work. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this clause shall excuse Contractor
from proceeding with the Agreement as changed except for those changes which would increase the
Contract Total.
7.03 No Increase in Costs. No services for which an additional cost or fee will be charged by Contractor
shall be furnished without the prior express written authorization of PSTA.
8. WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS.
8.01 Patent, Trademark, Copyright, and Trade Secret. Contractor warrants that the Project, and all goods
and services associated therewith do not infringe on any patent, trademark, copyright or trade secret of
any third parties and agrees to defend, indemnify and hold PSTA, its officers, agents, employees, trustees
and its successors and assigns, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, loss, damage or expense,
including, without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of any infringement or
claims of infringement of any patent, trade name, trademark, copyright or trade secret by reason of the
sale or use of any goods or services purchased under this Agreement. PSTA shall promptly notify
Contractor of any such claim. PSTA makes no warranty that the production, sale or use of goods or
services under this Agreement will not give rise to any such claim and PSTA shall not be liable to Contractor
for any such claim brought against Contractor.
8.02 Covenants against Gratuities. Contractor warrants that he or she has not offered or given gratuities in
the form of entertainment, gifts, or otherwise to any official or employee of PSTA with a view toward
securing favorable treatment in the awarding, amending, or evaluating performance under this
Agreement.
-366-
IFB # 13-013B
9. ASSIGNABILITY AND SUBCONTRACTING. The terms and provisions of the Contract Documents shall be
binding upon PSTA and Contractor their respective partners, successors, heirs, executors, administrators,
assigns and legal representatives.
9.01 Written Approval Required. The rights and obligations of Contractor may not be transferred, assigned,
sublet, mortgaged, pledged or otherwise disposed of or encumbered in any way without PSTA s prior
written consent. Contractor may subcontract a portion of its obligations to other firms or parties but only
after having first obtained the written approval of the subcontractor by PSTA.
9.02 Responsibility for Subcontractors. If Contractor's assignee or subcontractor fails to perform in
accordance with the terms of its assignment or subcontract, Contractor shall complete or pay to have
completed the work which the assignee or Subcontractor failed to complete at no additional cost to PSTA.
In the event of any noncompliance by any of the subcontractors, Contractor shall be directly and wholly
responsible for the noncompliance and shall bear all attributable costs.
9.03 Assignment by PSTA. PSTA may assign its rights and obligations under the Contract Documents to any
successor to the rights and functions of PSTA or to any governmental agency to the extent required by
applicable laws or governmental regulations or to the extent PSTA deems necessary or advisable under the
circumstances.
9.04 Provision for Other Governmental Entities: Unless otherwise stipulated by Contractor and PSTA in
writing, Contractor agrees to make available to all government agencies, entities, departments,
authorities, political subdivisions, counties, local school boards, special districts, transit authorities,
municipalities, or other governmental agencies or authorities, the bid prices submitted on the same terms
and conditions herein, should any said governmental entity desire to buy under this Agreement.
10. DELAY IN PERFORMANCE/FORCE MAJEURE.
10.01 Time of the Essence. The timely receipt of services and deliveries to PSTA is essential. If the Project
and all deliverables are not received on time, PSTA may cancel the unfilled portion of this Agreement for
cause, purchase substitute requirements elsewhere, and recover from Contractor any increased costs and
damages thereby incurred by PSTA.
10.02 Force Majeure. Contractor shall be entitled to a reasonable extension of time from PSTA for the
delays resulting from damage to Contractor s and/or PSTA's property caused by fire, lightning,
earthquakes, tornadoes, and other extreme weather conditions, power failures, riots, acts of war, strikes
or lockouts beyond the control of Contractor and its subcontractors ( Force Majeure ). Any delay other
than one mentioned above shall constitute a breach of Contractor s obligations under the Contract
Documents.
10.03 Unavoidable Delay. If delivery of the Project, and all deliverables thereunder, is unavoidably
delayed, PSTA may extend the time for completion for a determined number of days of excusable delay. A
delay is unavoidable only if the delay was not reasonably expected to occur in connection with or during
Contractor s performance; was not caused directly or substantially by negligent errors, omissions, or
mistakes of Contractor, its subcontractors, or its suppliers or their agents; was substantial; and, in fact,
caused Contractor to miss delivery dates and could not adequately have been guarded against by
contractual or legal means.
10.04 No Damages for Delay. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for damages on account of
hindrances or delays in the work from any cause whatsoever, including any delays or hindrances caused by
-367-
IFB # 13-013B
PSTA. This paragraph shall include, but not be limited to, any actions which result in delays in scheduling,
substantial changes in scope of the Project or substantial increases in the costs of performing the work
under the Contract Documents.
10.05 Notification. Contractor will notify PSTA as soon as Contractor has, or should have, knowledge that
an event has occurred which will delay completion of the Project. Within five (5) working days, Contractor
will confirm such notice in writing, furnishing as much detail as is available and including any request for
extension of time. Contractor shall supply, as soon as such data is available, any reasonable proofs that are
required by PSTA to make a decision on any request for extension. PSTA will examine the request and any
documents supplied by Contractor and will determine if Contractor is entitled to an extension and the
duration of such extension. PSTA will notify Contractor of its decision in writing. It is expressly understood
and agreed that Contractor will not be entitled to any extension and the granting of such extension is in
the sole discretion of PSTA. It is further expressly understood that Contractor shall not be entitled to any
damages or compensation, and will not be reimbursed for any losses, on account of delays resulting from
any cause.
11. TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT. This Agreement may be terminated with or without cause in accordance
with the provisions below.
11.01 Without Cause. If PSTA determines that it is in its best interest to do so, PSTA may terminate this
Agreement without cause upon thirty (30) days written notice to Contractor. If PSTA terminates this
Agreement pursuant to this subsection, Contractor shall promptly submit to PSTA its costs to be paid on
work performed up to the time of termination. If Contractor has any property belonging to PSTA in its
possession, Contractor shall account for the same and dispose of it as directed by PSTA.
11.02 With Cause. PSTA may terminate this Agreement with cause at any time immediately upon written
notice to Contractor, if: (1) Contractor fails to fulfill or abide by any of the terms or conditions specified in
the Contract Documents; (2) Contractor fails to perform in the manner called for in the Contract
Documents; or (3) Contractor does not provide services in accordance with the requirements of the
specifications in the Contract Documents. In its sole discretion, PSTA may allow Contractor an
appropriately short period of time in which to cure a defect in performance or non-performance. In such
case, PSTA s written notice of termination to Contractor shall state the time period in which cure is
permitted and other appropriate conditions, if applicable. Contractor may terminate this Agreement for
cause if PSTA fails to fulfill or abide by any duties or conditions specified in the Contract Documents,
provided that Contractor must first provide notice of the alleged breach to PSTA and give PSTA thirty (30)
days written notice to cure the alleged breach. If PSTA cures the alleged breach or is making a good faith
effort to cure said breach during the thirty (30) day cure period, Contractor may not terminate this
Agreement.
11.03 Reprocurement. Should this Agreement be terminated by PSTA for cause under this Section,
Contractor shall be liable for all expenses incurred by PSTA in reprocuring elsewhere the same or similar
items or services offered by Contractor.
11.04 Force Majeure. If it is later determined by PSTA that Contractor s failure to perform was a result of a
Force Majeure, PSTA may allow Contractor to continue performance under a new time for performance or
treat the termination as if terminated without cause under Section 11(a) of this Agreement.
11.05 Appropriation. In the event PSTA, in its sole discretion, determines that sufficient budgeted funds
are not available to appropriate for payments due to Contractor under this Agreement, PSTA shall notify
-368-
IFB # 13-013B
Contractor of such occurrence and this Agreement shall terminate on the last day of the current fiscal
period without any penalty or expense to PSTA.
11.06 Waiver of Remedies for any Breach. In the event that PSTA elects to waive its remedies for any
breach by Contractor of any covenant, term or condition of this Agreement, such waiver by PSTA shall only
be valid if set forth in writing and shall not limit PSTA's remedies for any succeeding breach of that or of
any other term, covenant, or condition of this Agreement.
12. DISPUTES, BREACHES, DEFAULTS, OR OTHER LITIGATION.
12.01 Disputes. Disputes raised by Contractor, which are not resolved amicably by the Parties, shall be
decided in writing by PSTA s Project Manager. If Contractor disagrees with the decision of PSTA s Project
Manager, within ten (10) days from the date of PSTA s Project Manager s decision, Contractor shall furnish
a written appeal to PSTA s Chief Executive Officer. In connection with any such appeal, Contractor shall be
afforded an opportunity to be heard and to offer evidence in support of its position. The decision of PSTA s
Chief Executive Officer shall be binding upon Contractor and Contractor shall abide by the decision.
12.02 Performance during Dispute. Unless otherwise directed by PSTA, Contractor shall continue
performance under this Agreement while matters in dispute are being resolved.
12.03 Claims for Damages: Should either party suffer injury or damage to person or property because of
any act or omission of the party or of any of its employees, agents or others for whose acts it is legally
liable, a claim for damages therefore shall be made in writing to such other party within ten (10) days after
the first observance of such injury or damage.
12.04 Rights and Remedies: The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights
and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations,
rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. No action or failure to act by PSTA or
Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under this Agreement, nor
shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder,
except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
12.05 Attorneys Fees. In the event of legal action or other proceeding arising under this Agreement, PSTA
shall be entitled to recover from Contractor all its reasonable attorneys fees and cost incurred by PSTA in
the prosecution or defense of such action, or in any post-judgment or collection proceedings and whether
incurred before suit, at the trial level or at the appellate level. This shall include any bankruptcy
proceedings filed by or against Contractor. PSTA also shall be entitled to recover any reasonable
attorneys fees and costs incurred in litigating the entitlement to attorneys fees and costs, as well as in
determining the amount of attorneys fees and costs due to PSTA. The reasonable costs to which PSTA will
be entitled include costs that are taxable under any applicable statute, rule, or guideline, as well as costs of
investigation, copying costs, electronic discovery costs, mailing and delivery charges, costs of conducting
legal research, consultant and expert witness fees, travel expenses, court reporter fees and mediator fees,
regardless of whether such costs are taxable under any applicable statue, rule or guideline.
-369-
IFB # 13-013B
13. INDEMNIFICATION.
13.01 Indemnification. The parties recognize that Contractor is an independent contractor. Contractor
agrees to assume liability for and indemnify, hold harmless, and defend PSTA, its board members, officers,
employees, agents and attorneys of, from, and against all liability and expense, including reasonable
attorneys fees, in connection with any and all claims, demands, damages, actions, causes of action, and
suits in equity of whatever kind or nature, including claims for personal injury, property damage, equitable
relief, or loss of use, arising out of the execution, performance, nonperformance, or enforcement of this
Agreement, whether or not due to or caused by the negligence of PSTA, its board members, officers,
employees, agents, and/or attorneys excluding only the sole negligence of PSTA, its officers, employees,
agents, and attorneys. This includes claims made by the employees of Contractor against PSTA, and
Contractor hereby waives its entitlement, if any, to immunity under Section 440.11, Florida Statutes.
Contractor s liability hereunder shall include all attorneys fees and costs incurred by PSTA in the
enforcement of this indemnification provision. Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the
contrary, this indemnification provision shall not be construed as a waiver of any immunity from or
limitation of liability to which PSTA is entitled to pursuant to the doctrine of sovereign immunity or Section
768.28, Florida Statutes. The obligations contained in this provision shall survive termination of this
Agreement, however terminated, and shall not be limited by the amount of any insurance required to be
obtained or maintained under this Agreement.
13.02 Control of Defense. Subject to the limitations set forth is this provision, Contractor shall assume
control of the defense of any claim asserted by a third party against PSTA arising from or in any way
related to this Agreement and, in connection with such defenses, shall appoint lead counsel, in each case
at Contractor s expense. Contractor shall have the right, at its option, to participate in the defense of any
third party claim, without relieving Contractor of any of its obligations hereunder. If Contractor assumes
control of the defense of any third party claim in accordance with this paragraph, Contractor shall obtain
the prior written consent of PSTA before entering into any settlement of such claim. Notwithstanding
anything to the contrary in this provision, Contractor shall not assume or maintain control of the defense
of any third party claim, but shall pay the fees of counsel retained by PSTA and all expenses including
experts fees, if (i) an adverse determination with respect to the third party claim would, in the good faith
judgment of PSTA, be detrimental in any material respect of PSTA s reputation; (ii) the third party claim
seeks an injunction or equitable relief against PSTA; or (iii) Contractor has failed or is failing to prosecute or
defend vigorously the third party claim. Each party shall cooperate, and cause its agents to cooperate, in
the defense or prosecution of any third party claim and shall furnish or cause to be furnished such records
and information, and attend such conferences, discovery proceedings, hearings, trials, or appeals, as may
be reasonably requested in connection therewith.
14. INSURANCE.
14.01 General Requirements. Before beginning work (including pre-staging personnel and material), the
Contractor shall obtain insurance at his expense. Delays in commencement due to failure to provide
satisfactory evidence of insurance shall not extend deadlines. Any penalties and failure to perform
assessments shall be imposed as if the work commenced as scheduled. In the event the Contractor has
Subcontractors perform any portion of the work in this contract, either the Contractor shall name those
Subcontractors as additional insurers or each Subcontractors shall be required to have the same
insurance requirements as the Contractor. Insurance must be maintained throughout the entire term of
this Agreement and until the Project is fully accepted by PSTA. Failure to do so may result in suspension of
all work until insurance has been reinstated or replaced. Delays in completing work resulting from failure
of the Contractor to maintain insurance shall not extend deadlines. Any penalties and failure to perform
assessments shall be imposed as if the work had not been suspended. Coverage shall be provided by a
-370-
IFB # 13-013B
company (ies) authorized to do business in the State of Florida. The company (ies) must maintain a
minimum rating of A- as assigned by AM Best. If the Contractor has been approved by the State
Department of Labor, as an authorized self-insurer for Workers Compensation, PSTA shall recognize and
honor such status. The Contractor may be required to submit a Letter of Authorization issued by the
Department of Labor and a Certificate of Insurance, providing details on the contractor s Excess Insurance
Program. If the Contractor participates in a self-insurance fund, updated financial statements may be
required upon request. The Contractor shall provide to PSTA s Purchasing Division satisfactory evidence
of the required insurance by, either:


A Certificate of Insurance with an insurance endorsement.
A Certified copy of the actual insurance policy.
PSTA, at its sole option, has the right to request a certified copy of policies required by this contract.
Certificate of Insurance and policies must specify they are not subject to cancel, non-renewal, material
change, or reduce coverage unless at least 30 days written notice is given to PSTA. The acceptance and
approval of the Contractor s Insurance shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from liability or
obligation assumed under this contract or imposed by law. PSTA, its employees and officers, will be
included as Additional Insured on all policies, except Workers Compensation.
14.02 Project Specific Requirements. The following policies and minimum coverage s shall be maintained
throughout the entire term of this agreement:
14.02.1 Commercial General Liability with, at minimum with, at minimum Premises Operations,
Products and Completed Operations, Blanket Contractual Liability, Personal Injury Liability. Expanded
Definition of Property Damage and minimum limits of $2,000,000 Combined Single Limit (CSL). An
Occurrence Form policy is preferred. If coverage is a Claims Made policy, provisions should include
coverage for claims filed on or after the effective date of this contract. In addition, the period for
which claims may be reported should extend for a minimum of twelve (12) months following the
expiration of the contract.
14.02.2 Vehicle Liability: Recognizing that the work governed by the Contract Documents requires
the use of vehicles, Contractor shall maintain at a minimum, vehicle liability coverage for Owned,
Non-owned, and Hired Vehicles with minimum limits at $2,000,000 Combined Single Limit (CSL).
14.02.3 Workers Compensation with limits sufficient to meet Chapter 440, Florida Statutes and
Employers Liability Insurance with limits no less than:
 $100,000,000 Bodily Injury by Accident
 $1,000,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, policy limits
 $1,000,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, each employee
14.02.4 Builders Risk Insurance and Installation Floater Insurance providing coverage on an All Risk
Loss form and Installation Floater Insurance providing coverage for their machinery, equipment and
material, governed by the contract, while being transported, installed and tested on PSTA s property,
which coverage shall include:
fire, lighting, windstorm, hail, explosion,
collapse,
strikes, riots, vehicles, vandalism, malicious mischief, civil commotion, aircraft, flood, theft, and
smoke. The policy limits shall be no less than one million U.S. Dollars ($1,000,000.00) and coverage
shall be provided on a completed value basis (Builders Risk Insurance) and include the amount of the
machinery or equipment being installed (Installation Floater Insurance). Property is located on the
construction premises, which is intended to become a permanent part of the building, shall be
-371-
IFB # 13-013B
included as property covered. This policy shall be endorsed permitting PSTA to occupy the building
prior to the completion without impacting coverage.
14.02.5 Engineering Errors & Omissions Liability Insurance: Recognizing that the work governed by
the Contract Documents involves the furnishing of engineering services, Contractor shall maintain
Engineers Errors and Omissions Liability Insurance which will respond to the damages resulting from
any claim arising out of the performance of professional services or any error or omission of
Contractor arising out of work governed by this Agreement. This insurance shall be maintained in
force for a period of two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Project. The
minimum limits of liability shall be: $1,000,000 per Occurrence/$1,000,000 per Aggregate for the
Project.
14.02.6 Technology/IT Errors & Omissions Liability Insurance: Recognizing that the work governed by
the Contract Documents may involve the furnishing of technology and IT services, Contractor shall
maintain IT Errors and Omissions Liability Insurance for Communications, Network & Data Breaches;
which will respond to the damages resulting from any claim arising out of the performance of
professional services or any error or omission of Contractor arising out of work governed by this
Agreement. This insurance shall be maintained in force for a period of two (2) years after the date of
Substantial Completion of the Project. The minimum limits of liability shall be: $1,000,000 per
Occurrence/$1,000,000 per Aggregate for the Project.
14.02.7 Environmental-Pollution Liability Insurance: Recognizing the work governed by this contract
involves vulnerability to losses related to environmental exposures Contractor shall maintain
Pollution Liability Insurance to respond to bodily injury, property damage and environmental
damage caused by a pollution incident. If the coverage is provided on a claims made basis, an
extended claims reporting period of four (4) years will be required. The minimum limits of liability
shall be: $2,000,000 per Occurrence/$2,000,000 Aggregate or $2,000,000 Claims Made
Coverage/$2,000,000 Aggregate for the Project.
15. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS.
15.01 Venue and Jurisdiction. The Contract Documents shall be governed by, construed and interpreted in
accordance with the laws of the State of Florida. Contractor and PSTA consent to jurisdiction over them
and agree that venue for any state action shall lie solely in the Sixth Judicial Circuit in and for Pinellas
County, Florida, and for any federal actions shall lie solely in the U.S. District Court, Middle District of
Florida - Tampa Division.
15.02 Entire Agreement. The Contract Documents, including all exhibits, constitute the entire agreement
between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all previous written or oral
negotiations, agreements, bids and/or understandings. There are no representations or warranties unless
set forth in the Contract Documents.
15.03 Notices. All notices required or made pursuant to this Agreement shall be made in writing and sent
by certified U.S. mail, return receipt requested, addressed to the following:
To PSTA:
Attn: Brad Miller, CEO
3201 Scherer Drive
To Contractor:
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
-372-
IFB # 13-013B
With required copy to:
Alan S. Zimmet, Esq.
Bryant Miller Olive
One Tampa City Center, Suite 2700
Tampa, Florida 33602
Either party may change its above noted address by giving written notice to the other party in accordance
with the requirements of this Section 15.03.
15.04 Severability. If any one or more of the provisions of the Contract Documents shall be held to be
invalid, illegal, or unenforceable in any respect by a court of competent jurisdiction, the validity, legality,
and enforceability of the remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby
and the Contract Documents shall be treated as though that portion had never been a part thereof.
15.05 Modification. The Contract Documents may not be amended or altered without prior written
approval by PSTA. Contractor shall be liable for all costs resulting from and/or for satisfactorily correcting
any specification change not properly ordered by written modification to the Contract Documents and
signed by PSTA.
15.06 Headings and Section References. The headings and section references in this Agreement are
inserted only for the purpose of convenience and shall not be construed to expand or limit the provisions
contained in such sections.
15.07 Authorization. Both parties to this Agreement represent and warrant that they are authorized to
enter into this Agreement without the consent and joinder of any other party and that the parties
executing this Agreement have full power and authority to bind their respective parties to the terms
hereof.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be duly executed on the date first
above written.
CONTRACTOR:
By:
PSTA:
By:
Brad Miller, CEO
Print Name:
Print Title:
WITNESS:
Approved as to form:
By:
By:
Alan S. Zimmet, General Counsel
Print Name:
-373-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENTS
-374-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 1
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA
(Required with bid submittal if addenda issued)
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda to the Documents.
(Give number and date of each)
Addendum Number __________ Dated __________
Failure to acknowledge receipt of all addenda may cause the bid to be considered non-responsive to this
Invitation for Bid, which will require rejection of the bid.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
____________________________________________
Authorized Individual s Name (Print)
_____________________________________________________
Authorized Signature
____________________________________________
Date
_____________________________________________________
Title
-375-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 2
CONTRACTOR S REFERENCES
(Required with bid submittal)
The following information is required in order that your bid may be reviewed and properly evaluated.
Contractor s Name:
Address:
City:
State:
Zip Code
Telephone:
Fax:
Print Name:
Title:
Signature (Written):
How Long at Present Location:
Total Number of Employees:
Full Time:
Part Time:
All references will be contacted by a PSTA Designee via email, or phone call to obtain answers to questions, as
applicable before an evaluation decision is made. Please provide local commercial and/or governmental references
that you have previously performed similar contract services for. All fields below must be completed:
Reference #1:
Company:
Reference #2
Company:
Address:
Address:
Phone/Fax #:
Phone/Fax #:
Contact:
Contact:
E-Mail:
E-Mail:
Reference #3:
Company:
Reference #4:
Company:
Address:
Address:
Phone/Fax #:
Phone/Fax #
Contact:
Contact:
E-Mail:
E-Mail:
-376-
IFB # 13-013B
CONTRACTOR S REFERENCES CONTINUED
Reference #5:
Company:
Reference #6:
Company:
Address:
Address:
Phone/Fax #:
Phone/Fax #:
Contact:
Contact:
E-Mail:
E-Mail:
Reference #7:
Company:
Reference #8:
Company:
Address:
Address:
Phone/Fax #:
Phone/Fax #
Contact:
Contact:
E-Mail:
E-Mail:
-377-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 3
BIDDER INFORMATION FORM
The following information is mandatory. Failure to complete this section may jeopardize your eligibility to be
awarded the contract.
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE YOUR INFORMATION.
Company Name:
________________________________________________________________
Company Street Address:
________________________________________________________________
Company Mailing Address: ________________________________________________________________
Company Contact Person:
________________________________________________________________
Company Telephone & Fax #:_______________________________________________________________
Contractor Federal I.D. #:
________________________________________________________________
Company Contact Email:
________________________________________________________________
Age of the Firm (years):
________________________________________________________________
Annual Gross Receipts ($):
________________________________________________________________
Is your firm certified by the State of Florida as a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise? _____________________
Number of calendar days required for completion: ________________________________________________
I hereby agree to abide by all conditions of this bid and certify that I am authorized to sign this bid for the
Bidder.
____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________
Date
_____________________________________________________
Title
-378-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 4
BID FORM
TO: Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority
3201 Scherer Drive
The undersigned hereby agrees to furnish the services as listed below in accordance with the
specifications on file with the Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority, 3201 Scherer Drive, FL 33716, which
have been carefully examined and attached hereto.
DESCRIPTION
EXTENDED PRICE
PRICE
YEAR ONE
PINELLAS PARK TRANSIT CENTER, BID NUMBER IFB
NO. 13-013B
labor and materials for all site/civil work as indicated
on the drawings and specifications. The site/civil
work shall include all utilities up to 5 0 from the
facility.
$
PINELLAS PARK TRANSIT CENTER, BID NUMBER IFB
NO. 13-013B
labor and materials for the facility construction as
site/civil work shall include all utilities from the 5 0
end point as described above serving the building
systems.
$
ALLOWANCE
Add to your bid a $25,000.00 allowance.
$
TOTAL NOT-TO-EXCEED LUMP SUM BID
25,000.00
$
OVERHEAD AND PROFIT AS APPLIED TO CHANGE ORDERS AND ALLOWANCES
Overhead and profit rate combined to be used in increases and decreases in the contract amount as provided by Change
Order, and included in allowances, shall be
% of direct cost.
-379-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 5
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
Bidder certifies that this document is not a sham or collusive bid, or made in the interest of or on behalf of any
collusive bid, or made in the interest of or on behalf of any person not herein named; and he/she further
states that said Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder for this work to put in
a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from proposing; and that said Bidder has not in any
matter sought by collusion to secure to self-advantage over any other Bidder or Bidders.
Bidder certifies that its bid is made without previous understanding, agreement, or connections with any
person, firm, or corporation making a bid for the same items and is in all respects fair, without outside control,
collusion, fraud, or otherwise illegal action.
As the person authorized to sign this statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above
requirements.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
Date
Title
State of __________County of
.
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this___ day of______________, 20___, by
__________________________________________.
Name of Person Acknowledging
_____________________________________
{NOTARY SEAL}
Signature of Notary Public
_____________________________________
Name of Notary Typed, Printed, or Stamped
Personally known ________ OR Produced Identification ________
Type of Identification Produced ________________________________________________________________
-380-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 6
CERTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION AND
OTHER RESPONSIBILITY MATTERS
(Required for prime contracts greater than $100,000)
The undersigned, an authorized official of the Bidder stated below, certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief,
that it and its principals:
1. Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from
covered transactions by any federal department or agency;
2. Have not within a three-year period preceding this bid been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against
them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or
performing a public (federal, state or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of federal or
state antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of
records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property;
3. Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (federal, state, or
local) with commission of any of these offenses enumerated in paragraph (2) of this certification; and
4. Have not within a three-year period preceding this bid had one or more public transactions (federal, state, or
local) terminated for cause or default.
(If the undersigned is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such official shall attach an
explanation to this bid).
THE UNDERSIGNED CERTIFIES OR AFFIRMS THE TRUTHFULNESS AND ACCURACY OF THE CONTENTS OF THE
STATEMENTS SUBMITTED ON OR WITH THIS CERTIFICATION AND UNDERSTANDS THAT THE PROVISIONS OF 31
U.S.C. SECTIONS 3801 ET SEQ. ARE APPLICABLE THERETO.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________
Date
_____________________________________________________
Title
_____
The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this___ day of_________,20___, by _________________________.
_____________________________________
{NOTARY SEAL}
_____________________________________
-381-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 7
CERTIFICATION OF LOWER-TIER PARTICIPANTS (SUBCONTRACTORS) REGARDING DEBARMENT,
SUSPENSION, AND OTHER INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION
(Required for subcontracts greater than $25,000)
The Undersigned Lower Tier Participant (Subcontractor to the Primary Contractor), certifies, by
submission of this bid, that neither it nor its principals are presently debarred, suspended, proposed for
debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by any
Federal department or agency. If the above named Lower Tier Participant (Subcontractor) is unable to
certify to any of the statements in this certification, such participant shall attach an explanation to this
bid.
The Undersigned Lower-Tier Participant (Subcontractor), certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy
of the contents of the statements submitted on or with this certification and understands that the
provisions of 31. U.S.C. Sections 3801 et seq. are applicable thereto.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________
Date
_____________________________________________________
Title
_____
_____________________________________
{NOTARY SEAL}
_____________________________________
NOTICE TO BIDDER: THIS CERTIFICATION SHALL BE COMPLETED BY ALL SUBCONTRACTORS WHICH WILL
HAVE A FINANCIAL INTEREST IN THIS PROJECT WHICH EXCEEDS $25,000 OR SUBCONTRACTORS WHICH
WILL HAVE A CRITICAL INFLUENCE ON OR A SUBSTANTIVE CONTROL OVER THE PROJECT.
-382-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 8
DBE PARTICIPATION FORM
PSTA has not set a specific goal for this project. PSTA has set an annual DBE goal of 8.15%.
Bidder/Proposer must check the appropriate box, provide the information requested, sign and submit this form
with its bid/proposal. Failure to complete and submit this form may result in rejection of the bid/proposal as
non-responsive.
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bidder/Proposer does not meet the DBE goal for this contract. Bidder/Proposer certifies that it has made
good faith efforts in accordance with the Invitation for Bid/Request for Proposal to meet the DBE goal, but,
despite those efforts, has been unable to meet the goal. The Good Faith Efforts Documentation Form is
attached.
OR
Bidder/Proposer will meet the DBE goal for this contract. Bidder/Proposer is certified according to
requirements of DOT 49 CFR Part 26 as a DBE eligible for participation on DOT-assisted contracts, and will
be performing _______ percent of the contract work. DBE Certification is attached.
OR
Bidder/Proposer will meet the DBE goal for this contract. If awarded this contract, Bidder/Proposer will
subcontract with the DBE(s) listed below which will be performing a total of _____ percent of the total
dollar amount of contract work. Each DBE listed below is certified according to requirements of DOT 49
CFR Part 26 for participation on DOT-assisted contracts.
Subcontractor or
Supplier
Description of Work or Specialty
Gender/
Ethnicity
Dollar
Amount
Total
Dollars
DBE (s)
Please attach a copy of each Subcontractor or supplier FDOT DBE Certification.
$
Percent of
Contract
Amount
Total % of
Contract
Amount
%
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________
Date
_____________________________________________________
Title
-383-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 9
DBE GOOD FAITH EFFORTS DOCUMENTATION FORM
(Required if DBE goal is not met)
PSTA ANNUAL DBE GOAL: 8.15%
If Bidder has indicated on the DBE Participation Form that it does not meet the DBE goal, Bidder must submit this
form with its DBE Participation Form as documentation of its good faith efforts to meet the goal. Failure to
submit this form with its Bidder may render this bid non-responsive. PSTA may require that Bidder provide
additional substantiation of good faith efforts.
Date:
Name:
Area of Expertise:
Company Name:
Response:
Date:
Name:
Area of Expertise:
Company Name:
Response:
Date:
Name:
Area of Expertise:
Company Name:
Response:
Date:
Name:
Area of Expertise:
Company Name:
Response:
-384-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 10
VENDOR DBE PAYMENT REPORT
(Not to be submitted with bid; Required with each invoice submittal if selected)
3201 Scherer Drive
For Official Office Use Only
1) Invoice No.
2) Report No.
3) Reporting Period
From:
To:
Instructions: All prime contractors are required to complete and submit this report as specified in the contract, or as requested by the Contracts Specialist, until final payment of the contract. Note: Failure to comply with PSTA's
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise provisions may result in contract termination, or the suspension or debarment of the contractor from doing business with PSTA in the future in accordance with the procedures set
forth in PSTA s Procurement Regulations. This report must be submitted with each invoice.
4) PSTA Contract Number
5) Type of Contract (X)
( ) Construction
( ) Professional
7) Date of Contract Award
6) Contractor's Business Name, Address and Telephone Number
( ) Service
( ) Supply
8) Schedule Date of Completion
9) Original Contract Amount
10) Current Contract Amount, Including Modifications ($ and date)
(State amount & date of most recent modification)
11) Total Amount Received To Date
12) Total Amount Owed
$
$
$
$
13) Committed DBE percentage
14) DBE Instruction for Calculation
of Percentage: Dollar amount
paid to DBE divided by dollar
amount received by Contractor
from PSTA.
______%
Amount of this Invoice
$
16) Name of Subcontractor
17) DBE Ethnicity
and Gender
(include Gender)
_____ /_____ /_____
18) Description of Work 19) Amount & Date of Payment(s)
Made During Current Invoice
Period
20) Subcontract
Dollars
21) Amount Paid to
Date (Dollars)
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
15) Actual DBE Participation % to Date
_______%
22) % Paid to Date
23) Amount of This Invoice
Allocated to Subcontractor
/
/
/
/
Company Official's Signature & Title
Date Signed
/
/
-385-
Name & Title of Individual Completing Report
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 11
E-VERIFY AFFIDAVIT
Contract #:
IFB # 13-013B
Financial Project # (s):
Project Description:
To be determined
Park Place Transit Center
Vendor/Proposer acknowledges and agrees to utilize the U.S. Department of Homeland Security s E-Verify
System to verify the employment of:
a) All persons employed by Vendor/Proposer to perform employment duties within Florida during the
term of the contract; and
b) All persons (including/subvendor's) assigned by Vendor/Proposer to perform work pursuant to the
contract with the Department. Vendor/Proposer acknowledges and agrees that use of the U.S.
Department of Homeland Security s E-Verify System during the term of the contract is a condition of
the contract with the Department.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________
Date
_____________________________________________________
Title
-386-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 12
CONTRACTOR S STATEMENT ON SUB-CONTRACTORS
(To be completed for all, DBE and non-DBE, sub-contractors)
1.
There are NO sub-contractors associated with this bid.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
Date
_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
Title
OR
2.
Listed below are sub-contractors associated with this bid. Additional sheets are attached as
Disadvantage Business Enterprise Certifications are also attached as appropriate.
required.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Sub-contractor Company Name
____________________________________________________________________________________
Address
____________________________________________________________________________________
Contact Person
____________________________________________________________________________________
Telephone #
____________________________________________________________________________________
E-mail Address for Contact Person
_______________________________________
Age of Firm
_______________________________________________
Gross Annual Receipts
____________________________________________________________________________________
Sub-contractor Company Name
____________________________________________________________________________________
Address
____________________________________________________________________________________
Contact Person
____________________________________________________________________________________
Telephone #
____________________________________________________________________________________
E-mail Address for Contact Person
___________________________________
__________________________________________
Age of Firm
Gross Annual Receipts
-387-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 13
SUB-CONTRACTOR S REFERENCES
(To be completed by prime and subcontractors; required with bid submittal)
The following information is required in order that your bid may be reviewed and properly evaluated.
Contractor s Name:
Address:
City:
State:
Zip Code
Telephone:
Fax:
Print Name:
Title:
Signature (Written):
How Long at Present Location:
Total Number of Employees:
Full Time:
Part Time:
All references will be contacted by a PSTA Designee via email, or phone call to obtain answers to questions, as
applicable before an evaluation decision is made. Please provide local commercial and/or governmental references
that you have previously performed similar contract services for. All fields below must be completed:
Reference #1:
Company:
Reference #2
Company:
Address:
Address:
Phone/Fax #:
Phone/Fax #:
Contact:
Contact:
E-Mail:
E-Mail:
Reference #3:
Company:
Reference #4:
Company:
Address:
Address:
Phone/Fax #:
Phone/Fax #
Contact:
Contact:
E-Mail:
E-Mail:
-388-
IFB # 13-013B
SUB-CONTRACTOR S REFERENCES CONTINUED
Reference #5:
Company:
Reference #6:
Company:
Address:
Address:
Phone/Fax #:
Phone/Fax #:
Contact:
Contact:
E-Mail:
E-Mail:
Reference #7:
Company:
Reference #8:
Company:
Address:
Address:
Phone/Fax #:
Phone/Fax #
Contact:
Contact:
E-Mail:
E-Mail:
-389-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 14
DRUG FREE WORKPLACE PROGRAM
Equal preference shall be given to vendors submitting a certification with their offer certifying they have a drug-free
workplace in accordance with Section 287.087, Florida Statutes.
IDENTICAL OFFER - Whenever two or more offers which are equal with respect to quality, price, and service are received, an
offer received from a business certifying it has implemented a Drug-Free Workplace policy shall be given preference.
Established procedures for processing tie offers will be followed if none of the tied vendors have a program in place. In
order to have a Drug-Free Workplace Program, a business shall:
1.
Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacturer, distribution, dispensing possession, or
use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the Workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against
employees for violations of such prohibition.
2.
Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drugfree workplace, any available counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that
may be imposed upon employees for violations.
3.
Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under the offer a copy
of the statement specified in subsection (1).
4.
In the statement in subsection (1), notify employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or
contractual services that are under the offer, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify
the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of Chapter 893, or of any
controlled substance law of the US or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days
after such conviction.
5.
Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program
if available in the employee's community, by employees who are convicted.
Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section.
As the person authorized to sign this statement, I certify and state under oath that this firm complies fully with the above
requirements.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
Date
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
Title
_____
_____________________________________
{NOTARY SEAL}
_____________________________________
-390-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 15
OFFER & AWARD
OFFER:
By execution below, Contractor hereby offers to furnish equipment and services as indicated herein.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name
____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________
Date
_____________________________________________________
Title
PSTA use only below this line.
AWARD:
By execution below, PSTA accepts offer as indicated above.
Director of Finance Signature
Date of Award
Chief Executive Officer Signature
Date of Award
-391-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 16
REQUEST FOR WAIVER OF INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
(Only required if the Bidder does not meet the insurance requirements. Submit during question and answer period.)
It is requested that the insurance requirements, as specified in PSTA's Schedule of Insurance Requirements, be
waived or modified on the following contract. Please attach copies of relevant Certificates of Insurance for
waiver decision. This form should be submitted during the question and answer period.
Company Name:
_______________________________________________________________
Contract for:
_______________________________________________________________
Company Address:
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
Telephone:
_______________________________________________________________
Scope of Work:
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
Reason for Waiver:
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
Policies Waiver
will apply to:
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
Authorized Signature: _______________________________________________________________
PSTA use only below this line.
Approved ___________
Not Approved ___________
Risk Management
_______________________________________________________________
Date:
_______________________________
PSTA Administrator appeal:
Approved: __________
Date:
Not Approved: _________
_______________________________
-392-
IFB # 13-013B
ATTACHMENT 17
STATEMENT OF NO BID
(Not required with bid submittal)
Note: If you do not intend to submit a bid on this requirement, please return this form immediately to the
address below:
Purchasing Division
3201 Scherer Drive
St. Petersburg, FL. 33716
We, the undersigned, have declined to submit on your IFB # __________ for the following reasons:
_______ Specifications are too "tight", i.e., geared toward one brand or manufacturer only (explain below)
_______ Insufficient time to respond to the IFB
_______ We do not offer this product or service
_______ Our schedule would not permit us to perform
_______ Unable to meet bond requirements
_______ Unable to meet specifications
_______ Specifications unclear (explain below)
_______ Unable to meet insurance requirements
_______ Remove us from your "Contractors List" altogether
_______ Other (specify below)
Remarks:
We understand that if the "no bid" letter is not executed and returned, our name may be deleted from
the Contractors List for the Pinellas Suncoast Transit Authority.
Company Name
Date
Title
-393-

Invitation for Bid IFB # 13-013B Pinellas Park Transit Center

Transcription

Similar documents

Pinellas County Sheriff`s Office

Lost pet? - Belleair Bluffs

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

Froggy Drawing handout2 - Mid Mon Valley Transit Authority

Visit the FAHRO Website! - Florida Association of Housing and

ANCIENT ORDER OF HIBERNIANS

Fastfrate Roadfrate SS.indd

Pegasus final w industries

Pegasus Summary offset copy

March - Pinellas County Government Home Page